Andover Controls

1999 PeripheralProducts Catalog TABLE OF CONTENTS Temperature Andover Wall Mount Temperature Sensors Andover Sensor Plus Temperature Sensor Andover Smart Sensor Temperature Sensor Andover Stainless Steel Temperature Sensor Andover Infinity EMX 170 Programmable Interface Module Andover Duct & Immersion Temperature Sensors Andover Duct Averaging Temperature Sensors MAMAC Systems TE-205 Duct Averaging Sensor Andover Bead & Ruggedized Bead Temperature Sensor Power Supplies 1 3 5 7 8 10 13 14 15 Humidity General Eastern Microline Relative Humidity Sensors General Eastern Easycal Plus General Eastern EHRH Transmitter General Eastern HUMISCAN Veris HX & HV Series Relative Humidity Sensors MAMAC Systems HU-224/225 & HU-226 RH Sensors 17 21 22 24 26 32 CO/CO2 Veris GX Series CO Sensor Veris CX Series CO2 Sensors 33 35 Power Monitoring Veris Current Status Switches Veris Motor Control Switches Veris Analog Current Sensors Veris Power Transducers Veris Current Transformers Veris Enspector Energy & Environmental Auditing Controls Veris Potential Transformers 37 47 57 65 77 87 88 91 92 93 94 99 102 Relays IDEC RH & SH Series Relays Core Components Relays 107 109 Transformers Core Components Isolation Transformers Core Components Control Transformers MAMAC Systems PS-200 127 Tank Probes Andover Infinity RS-485 Tank Probes 129 Access Cards and Readers HID Wiegand-Effect Readers HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards HID Proximity Readers HID Proximity Cards Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Cards Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Readers Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Cards Dorado Magnetic Stripe Card Readers Dorado Magnetic Stripe Cards & Encoding Systems Essex Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypads Andover EMX34/CK34 Cardkey Interface Board 131 136 142 149 154 165 169 173 177 181 183 185 Damper Actuators Belimo Spring Return Air Damper Actuators Belimo Non-Spring Return Air Damper Actuators Siemens Spring Return Air Damper Actuators Siemens Non-Spring Return Air Damper Actuators Siemens Electric Damper Actuators Siemens Pneumatic Damper Actuators 187 195 206 207 210 213 Valves & Actuators 79 85 Pressure MAMAC Systems High Pressure Transducers MAMAC Systems Low Pressure Transducers MAMAC Systems Duct Static Pressure Probes MAMAC Systems Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters MAMAC Systems Electro-Pneumatic Transducers Modus Low Air Differential Pressure Transmitters Modus Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters Modus Pressure Indication Devices I 117 118 Siemens Powermite 599 MZ Series Siemens Powermite 599 MT Series Siemens Flowrite 599 Series Valve Bodies Siemens Flowrite 599 Series Pneumatic Valve Actuators Siemens Flowrite 599 Series Electronic Valve Actuators Siemens Flowrite Series Valve Actuators Siemens Powermite 656 Series Siemens Powertop 658 Series Siemens MTE/MVE/MXE Zone Valves 219 221 224 226 227 228 231 232 233 Temperature Controls Siemens Pneumatic Thermostats & Hygrostats Siemens Electric Thermostats & Hygrostats Siemens Controllers & Transmitters Siemens Switches & Relays Siemens Auxiliary Equipment 235 242 245 253 262 Terms & Conditions 265 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 II TABLE OF CONTENTS Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 TEMPERATURE 1 Wall Mount Temperature Sensor Model TTS-S Description Andover Controls Wall Mount Temperature Sensor provides accurate, reliable measurement of interior room temperature for use in an Andover Controls building automation system. The active sensing element is a highly stable, precision thermistor, accurate to within + 0.36°F (+ 0.2°C). The sensor has an operating range of 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C) (non-condensing). The thermistor is encapsulated with a low mass, high-conductivity thermal compound for good heat transfer characteristics. It is housed in an attractive, well-ventilated plastic enclosure. The unique two-piece design permits changeout of the thermistor material, which is located in the cover, without rewiring or removal of the baseplate. The cover is securely attached to the backplate via two allen screws. The sensor may be mounted directly on dry wall, cement or on any electrical outlet box with no adapters required. The sensor is for interior use only, and is not suitable for use where condensation may occur. Specifications General: Sensing Element: ................................................................................................................................................................ Type III Thermistor, 10,000 ohms @ 77°F (25°C) Wiring Connections: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2P Terminal Block Wire Specifications: ........................................................................................................................................................... 18, 20, 22 or 24 gauge, 2 conductor, unshielded Max. Distance to Sensor: ................................................................................................................................................... 490 ft. (24 gauge wire) with less than .1°F error 850 ft. (22 gauge wire) with less than .1°F error 1,200 ft. (20 gauge wire) with less than .1°F error 2.000 ft. (18 gauge wire) with less than .1°F error Performance: Range: ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C)(non-condensing) Accuracy: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ + 0.36°F (+ 0.2°C) Stability: .......................................................................................................................... Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy specification for minimum of 5 years Mechanical: Dimensions: ........................................................................................................................................................... 4.50” H x 3.50” W x 1.06” D (11.4 cm x 8.9 cm x 2.7 cm) Color: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Off-white Ordering Information Item Part # Wall Mount Sensor, ACC Logo ......................................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-1 Wall Mount Sensor, ACC Logo (10 Pack) ....................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-10 Wall Mount Sensor, ACC Logo (25 Pack) ....................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-25 Avail. Wall Mount Sensor, No Logo ....................................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-B-1 Wall Mount Sensor, No Logo (10 Pack) ..................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-B-10 Mid-Summer 1999 Wall Mount Sensor, No Logo (25 Pack) ..................................................................................................................................... TTS-S-B-25 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 2 TEMPERATURE Dimensional Drawing 1.05 (27) 3.50 (89) 4.50 (114) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................... (24 gauge wire) with less than 0..................................................................................................9 cm x 2..... No Slider (10 Pack) ........... The sensor may be mounted directly on dry wall........................................................................................................................................................ Slider (10 Pack) ............... an override pushbutton................................................................................................................................... No Logo.................................1°F error 2.................................... ACC Logo............................................................... it is equipped with a setpoint adjustment slider control........................................ Sensor Plus................................36°F (+ 0............................. Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy specification for minimum of 5 years Mechanical: Dimensions: ...................... No Logo...................... precision thermistor.... 20................50” W x 1...................................................................1°F error 1.....................................000 ohms......................................... No Logo..................................................................................... TTS-SE-B-10 Sensor Plus..................................................................................... No Slider ............ ACC Logo............................. 6 conductor................................................................................ The sensor is for interior use only......... 4........ 01-0100-435 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .... 10.................................................1°F error 850 ft............................ ACC Logo....................................................... Off-white Slider Range: ......... TTS-SE-B-1 Sensor Plus................. accurate to within +0............................................................................................... high-conductivity thermal compound for good heat transfer characteristics........... 490 ft........................ TTS-SE-1 Sensor Plus..............000 ft (18 gauge wire) with less than 0.........................................TEMPERATURE 3 Sensor Plus Temperature Sensor Model TTS-SE Description Andover Controls Sensor Plus provides accurate....................................................................... ACC Logo................. 18........................................... TTS-SE-NS-1 Sensor Plus. Slider (25 Pack) ..............................000 ohms @ 77°F (25°C) Wire Specification: .....................200 ft (20 gauge wire) with less than 0............................................. Slider ......................... TTS-SE-BNS-1 Mid-Summer Sensor Plus.................... Slider ..................................................... TTS-SE-BNS-25 1999 Sensor Plus....................... 0-5VDC @7 mA Ordering Information Item Part # Sensor Plus..................... or on any electrical outlet box with no adapters required.......... No Slider (10 Pack) ...............7 cm) Color: .... (2) 4P Terminal Blocks Max.............. and programmable LED indicator......................................... No Logo........................................................ reliable measurement of interior room temperature for use in an Andover Controls building automation system................................. Type III Thermistor............................................... The thermistor is encapsulated with a low mass...... unshielded wire An additional single pair twisted shielded is required for Lap-Top Service Tool connection Wiring Connections: ................................................................. The active sensing element is a highly stable.. TTS-SE-25 Sensor Plus.......... The sensor has an operating range of 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C) (non-condensing).... 200 to 2........................................................................................................4 cm x 8...... TTS-SE-NS-10 Sensor Plus............1°F error Performance: Range: ........................................................................................ In addition......................................................................................................... Slider (25 Pack) ................................... (22 gauge wire) with less than 0. TTS-SE-B-25 Avail.................. No Logo........ TTS-SE-BNS-10 Sensor Plus..... Slider (10 Pack) ............................................................................. No Logo................ The Sensor Plus utilizes an attractive..06” D (11.................... well-ventilated plastic enclosure......................................................... +-20% LED: ....................................................................... ACC Logo...................................... + 0........................................................................................................... 22 or 24 gauge...... Models include a connection for the Andover Controls’ Infinity Lap-Top Service Tool.......................................... 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C) (non-condensing) Accuracy: ................. cement..............................................................2°C) Stability: .. No Slider (25 Pack) .......................................................................... No Slider ... The housing is securely attached to the backplate via two allen screws.............................................................. and is not suitable for use where condensation may occur..................................................................................................................................................................... TTS-SE-10 Sensor Plus...............................................................................50” H x 3............................................................................................ No Slider (25 Pack) ......... Distance to Sensor: ....................................................................................... ACC Logo. TTS-SE-NS-25 Laptop Service Tool Cable ...................................................................................36°F... Specifications General: Sensing Element: ............................ 50 (89) 4.05 (27) 3.50 (114) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.50 (114) Avail.50 (89) 4. Mid-Summer 1999 1.05 (27) 3.4 TEMPERATURE Dimensional Drawings 1. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . .... (22 gauge wire) with less than 0.... Distance to Sensor: ..........................................TEMPERATURE 5 Smart Sensor Temperature Sensor Model TTS-SD Description Andover Controls Smart Sensor combines an attractive display with a room temperature sensor to provide users with a cost effective way to view or modify VAV box operation......................................................................TTS-SD-LCD-1 Smart Sensor.................................... 3 conductor.................................... 30-3001-709 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................... The active sensing element is a highly stable.........06” D (11...... Heat............................................................................................. %.................................... Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy specification for minimum of 5 years Mechanical: Dimensions: ................................................................................. arming or disarming a security system................................. signaling an alarm condition. 4....................... Specifications General: Sensing Element: ............................................................................. and enforcing password security....... One Smart Sensor is powered directly from Andover Controls’ TCX 866 Ordering Information Item Part # Smart Sensor............................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................................... + 0.............. The standard Smart Sensor provides a two character LED display and a 6 button programmable keypad that enables operators and occupants to change setpoints..................... CFM........ and SP.................................................... °.........200 ft.............................................. 20.................... monitor occupancy status and turn equipment on and off........................................... adjusting the amount of override time.............................. TTS-SD-LED-1 Smart Sensor.......... TTS-SD-INFBUF Laptop Service Tool Cable ........................................................67°C) error Performance: Range: ........................................... (20 gauge wire) with less than 0.............. Fan.................... 22 or 24 gauge..............18°F (-17.................... The function keys can be custom programmed to perform a wide variety of functions............................... 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C)(non-condensing) Accuracy: .......................................................7 cm) Color: ............ including switching a specific zone to occupied mode................................................................................... accurate to within ± 0........... Off-white Power: ..................................................... Both versions of the Smart Sensor provide a connection for the Andover Controls Infinity Lap-Top Service Tool......................... Programming the display and function keys is done with Andover Controls' Plain English® programming language......67°C) error 1........................................ Smart Sensor............... Setpoint................ Cool.......................18°F (-17...........................50” W x 1...................... ACC Logo w/LED Display.. precision thermistor..................................................................67°C) error 790 ft........ 4P Connector + 2P Connector Max........................................................ TTS-SD-LCD-B-1 Mid-Summer 1999 Buffer Board for Smart Sensor LED and LCD .................................................... It is designed for use with the Andover Controls TCX 866 VAV controller and can also accomplish many local control and monitoring tasks................................................. No Logo w/LCD Display................ (18 gauge wire) with less than 0....................................18°F (-17....... 300 ft....................................2°C).................................9 cm x 2.......... The Smart Sensor comes in a well-ventilated plastic enclosure.................... OA.................................50” H x 3................................. 18.................................................................................67°C) error 500 ft........... TTS-SD-LED-B-1 Avail...18°F (-17..2°C) @ 25 feet of 22 gauge wire Stability: ......... 3/32” Tip ................................................................................. An enhanced version of the Smart Sensor is also available with a 4-digit custom LCD that provides the following icons: PM...36°F (+ 0...................36°F (+0..... (24 gauge wire) with less than 0. unshielded wire An additional single pair twisted shielded is required for Lap-Top Service Tool Connection Wiring Connections: . 01-0100-435 Screwdriver for use with Smart Sensor.................4 cm x 8.... No Logo w/LED Display ................................................ ACC Logo w/LCD Display ........................................... Flathead........................................................... The sensor has an operating range of 32°F to 105°F (0°C to 40°C) (non-condensing)...........................................................000 ohms @ 77°F (25°C) Wire Specifications: ............................................... Type III Thermistor........................... 10................................................ 50 (114) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.6 TEMPERATURE Dimensional Diagram 1.50 (89) 4. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .05 (27) 3. ............................................ The high thermal mass of the plate provides an extremely stable temperature reading.................................................................................36°F (+ 0.......................2°C)........1°F error Performance: Range: ......................... Crimp-type butt splices or solder connections recommended........................ The sensor is ideal for manufacturing areas and processing plants where conventional wall sensors are subject to damage............................... (22 gauge wire) with less than ....................................... Ruggedized Wiring Connections: .........................000 ohms @ 77°F............................................. 18............... Wallplate Sensor .....................2°C) Stability: .......... 850 ft. Specifications General: Sensing Element: ...................... -30°F to 122°F (-34°C to 50°C) Accuracy: ......................... Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy specification for minimum of 5 years Mechanical: Dimensions: ............................................. 20 or 22 gauge...................................... 22 gauge wire leads provided............ + 0................................................................................................. The sensor may be mounted directly on a wall or directly over a standard single-gang utility box with the screws provided.............................................. reliable measurement of indoor temperatures for use in an Andover Controls building automation system............ 8ft....................... 01-0100-295 St/Stl....... 4 1/2” H x 2 3/4” W Housing: ................................................................................................ The sensor consists of a precision thermistor bonded to a stainless steel plate...................... 2 conductor................ The sensor is intended for interior use only........................ 01-0100-296 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............. unshielded Max................ (18 gauge wire) with less than ....... Distance to Sensor: .............................................................................................................. The sensor is available with tamper-proof screws..................... The sensor accurately monitors temperatures within a range of -30°F to 122°F (-34°C to 50°C) with an accuracy of + 0........................TEMPERATURE 7 Stainless Steel Room Temperature Sensor Description Andover Controls Stainless Steel Room Temperature Sensor provides rugged....... 10........ insulated with foil-backed foam to reduce the effect of wall temperature.................... insulated with foil-backed foam Ordering Information Item Part # St/Stl............................. The low temperature range of the sensor permits installation in freezers and cold storage lockers................. Wallplate Sensor w/ Security Screws ....................... An 8 foot lead is included for wiring terminations..................................................................................... Wire Size (sensor to controller): .......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................................... Type III Thermistor................... hospitals......................................................................................................................................................................1°F error 2000 ft.................................................................................. schools and other areas prone to vandalism................36°F (+ 0. 403 Stainless Steel wall plate.............................................................. providing additional security for prisons............................... ...... change setpoints and times................................................. Bus Length: .............................. Industrial Version The industrial version comes in a NEMA 4X.............. 1 5/8” H x 6 1/8” W x 11/2”D (41... Programming the display and function keys of the EMX 170 is done using Andover Controls’ powerful Plain English® programming language............ off-white and gray faceplate Enclosure Type: Standard Wall Unit: ........................................................... Screw terminals Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......4 mm x 73........................... A custom legend kit is available for the keys.................................................................................................................... . airflow balancing.................................................................................................... One EMX 170 maximum is powered directly from the Infinet controller Mechanical: Operating Environment: .......................................... monitor occupancy counts................................................................................................. setpoint changes....... well-ventilated plastic enclosure and includes a thermistor sensor........................................... Specifications Electrical: Power: ....................................................................... via the EMX 170 Buffer Board...................................... is secured with tamper-resistant screws........................ The enclosure................................................................. The six function keys can be programmed to perform a wide variety of operations................... For the sensor: 6-conductor.............5 mm) Buffer Board: ........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...... or perform virtually any building automation or security function within the Andover Infinity System.................... 24 gauge Connections: Infinet: ..................... which is styled to match the other Infinity room sensors.. Through expansion serial port of the local Infinet controller............................... air balance VAV boxes........................ overall shield For the Infinet Lap-Top Service Port: single twisted shielded pair....... 10 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions: Standard Wall Unit: .......................................................................... Standard library programs include scheduling...... arm or disarm high security areas............................... 40°F to 100°F (4..... The keys can be programmed to switch the space to occupied mode............................................................... Wall Mount Unit The standard wall mount unit comes in an attractive.................. 180 feet maximum from the EMX 170 to the Infinet controller Bus Media: .... The EMX 170 provides a connection for the Andover Infinity Lap-Top Service Tool..........................4°C to 37.... arm or disarm a security system............................8 TEMPERATURE Infinity EMX 170 Programmable Interface Module Description Andover Controls Infinity EMX 170 Programmable Interface Module combines a true interactive display with a room temperature sensor to provide users with a cost effective way to view or modify facility operation......1 mm) Color: Standard Wall Unit: ..................... turn equipment on and off..... and PID tuning constants adjustment.... Off-white (custom colors available) Industrial Version: ................. setpoint adjustment............... NEMA 4X.............. A blank overlay is provided with each unit for custom labeling of the function keys........................... tenant override............................................................. the local Infinet controller connected to the EMX 170............................ The keys are membrane-type with tactile feedback......................................................................... adjust the temperature setpoint................................................. and executed by.................................................... override time............................................................5 mm x 38...................................... Typical uses include equipment on/off control.. and even modify control programs throughout the entire system..8°C)..................9 mm x 82................................ The 8-character LCD display and six programmable function keys enable operators and occupants to change setpoints....................................... Two of the wiring terminals are reversed for a thermistor (not included).................................................................................. By plugging into the EMX 170 on the Infinet bus................... a service technician can view data....................................... 24-gauge..................................................... ¼ DIN package............... Black trim ring............................. including password security......... Wall-mounted Industrial Version: ................................. 3 ½” H x 3 ½” W x 3 ¼” D (88........................0 mm x 33............ 4 1/2” H x 2 7/8” W x 1 5/16” D (114...........................9 mm x 88......... The Plain English® programs are stored in............ Screw terminals Buffer Board: ................................................... The keys on the standard wall mount unit are hidden from view by a flip-down cover on the front of the sensor.3 mm) Industrial Version: .2 mm x 155.................. ¼ DIN Communications: Communications Interface: ............. and password protection.......................... or even request a car from the building’s garage.................... adjust the amount of override time.......... ............................. Wall Unit......................................47°C) from 90°F to 100°F Stability: .................... w/out Buffer Board................................................................................85°F (+0........................................ (125 char/symbols) ....................75°F (+0........................................................................................ Blank Overlay.............................................. FCC........................................................... TCX 853 or TCX 855)............... 6 square push buttons with tactile feedback sealed within a membrane.................................................................... +0.................. Wall Unit................................7°F (+0........ programmable using Andover Controls Plain English® Function Keys: Standard Wall Unit: ............................................................................................. Standard ............................................................................... or over a single gang utility box........... Blank Overlay......................................................... Wall Unit.........................01-0100-472-A Installation The EMX 170 Buffer Board. The EMX 170 standard wall unit may be mounted directly on a wall............................... shielded cable to be wired a maximum of 180 feet from the Buffer Board to the programmable interface unit................................ Type III thermistor............................................................................................................................. programmable using Andover Controls Plain English® Agency Listings: Listings: ..................36°F (+0....................................................................................................................4°C to 37.................................................................. the EMX 170 is also available for ordering with a “no Buffer Board” option.......................................... completely encapsulating the thermistor Display: Standard Wall Unit: ........................................................ LCX 810........................... 01-0008-766 Std.... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................... High resistivity epoxy.... 01-0008-094 EMX 170 Button Overlay............................... 01-1000-636-01 Stick-on Label Set for EMX 170 Industrial Ver..........................................................000 ohms @ 77°F Range: .. Blank Cover .... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................ ¼” character height.................................................... Screw terminals are provided for a six-conductor........8°C) Thermistor Accuracy: .2°C) Total Accuracy.................................................................................................. UL/CUL 916.......................... End-To-End: ............. Blank Overlay...................................................4°C) from 40°F to 70°F +0...................................... 01-3002-185 Input Interface Module . A two-conductor Infinet cable may also be run to connect the LSX 280 Lap-Top Service Tool Jack.. Blank Overlay............................................42°C) from 70°F to 90°F +0.......................... Wall Unit..... TCX 850................................................. 6 momentary rectangular push buttons...................................................................................................................................................... 10............w/out Buffer Board .................... 01-0008-767 Std............. 8-character liquid crystal display ½” character height............................................................... Blank Cover ...... Screw terminals and the LSX 280 Lap-Top Service Tool Jack are located at the rear of the device for easy installation and wiring..................................... 01-0008-096 Industrial Ver............................................................. +0............................................................... 01-0008-765 Std................................................................... Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy spec for minimum of 5 years Thermal Epoxy: ................................................... programmable using Andover Controls Plain English® Industrial Version: ........... included with the EMX 170................................................................................................. programmable using Andover Controls Plain English® Industrial Version: ......... attaches to the expansion port of the local Infinet controller (SCX 920..................TEMPERATURE 9 Specifications Continued Sensing Element (included with the Standard Wall Unit only): Type: ..................................... Blank ................................ 01-1000-636 EMX 170 Button Overlay.......................... Because the LCX Lighting Controller family and the TCX 860 and TCX 870 have the buffer board built-in....................... The EMX industrial version is designed for flush panel mounting (¼ DIN)................................................................ 8-character liquid crystal display......... ACC Logo .... Screw terminals and a two-piece enclosure ensure easy installation and wiring. ACC Logo . with one EMX 170 Programmable Interface Module maximum per each controller........... 01-0008-764 Industrial Version............ CE Ordering Information Item Part # Std................. 40°F to 100°F (4.............................. w/out Buffer Board........................... .........................16 cm)................................................................................................................................. ½” NPSM Female Thread Immersion Sensor: Thermowell Material: ....... The tube is filled with thermal epoxy.......................... and TT-ST Description Andover Controls Duct and Immersion Sensors provide accurate...................... (22 gauge wire).......................................................... plenum-rated plastic enclosure designed so that the sensor can be replaced without having to remove the housing................................. Both the duct and immersion sensors have a wide operating range of 30°F to 230°F (-34°C to 110°C).... (18 gauge wire) Temps Above 160°F: .........................................10 TEMPERATURE Duct and Immersion Temperature Sensors Models TT-D.......... They are available with either a 1/2” or 3/4” threaded NPT connection...................................................75” (400mm).................................................................. but includes a strap for pipes 2” to 6” in diameter..................................................... The sensor’s housing is a two-piece...................................................... 1550 ft......... 9” and 15............................................................................................................................................................. 6” (15...................... and replace with a new sensor............................. It uses the same housing as both the duct and immersion sensors.....6 cm) shank diameter (½” NPT) Overall Length: ................. Immersion Sensor Brass of Type 304 stainless steel thermowells are available in 4” and 6” immersion lengths............. Also available is a Duct-to-Immersion Conversion kit that allows you to easily convert all of part of your duct sensor inventory for immersion applications.. Plenum-rated (UL-94-5V Flame Retardant Rating) Wiring Connections: ........... TT-I...........................................................................1°F error) Temps Below 75°F: ............................................................ 4.......................... Appropriate for 2” to 6” diameter pipes Probe Material: ....... (18 gauge wire) Duct Sensor: Probe Diameter: ........................ pipe and tank temperature applications The sensor’s design completely seals the sensing element................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Sensing Element: ....... 22 gauge........................ 9” and 15............................................................................... Strap-On Sensor The strap-on sensor is designed for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or hot water measurement................................................................................................................... an optional adapter is available....... type 316 Electrical Piping Connection: ............................................................................................................... 2 conductor. 6”................................... (22 gauge wire).................5°C) over full range Stability: ....36°F from 32°F to 158°F (+ 0.................................................... High resistivity epoxy filling probe’s length Housing: ..................................................... Distance to Sensor: (with less than ............................................................. Duct Sensor Four lengths of duct sensor are available: 4”............... Simply take off the cover.... Type III Thermistor.... 6”............................... 310 ft........................................................................................................................................ within a stainless steel tube.................................... Stainless Steel................................................................... 10... withdraw the existing sensing element............................................... making it immune to moisture and condensation............................................... 4”..................................................................... An optional O-Ring/Gasket kit is available if the sensor is being mounted outside or in a high moisture environment..........000 ohms @ 77°F Range: .................... Aluminum Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................ Wire nuts Wire Size: ............ a precision 10K thermistor.............................................90°F (+0.................... ¾” (1..... Two piece Polylac.......................... 4” (10........................................................... Grade PA765..............................................................................................2°C from 0° to 70°C)................................................................................................................. unshielded Max....................................75” (400 mm) Probe Material: .................... -30° to 230°F (-34................................ reliable measurement of air temperature and fluid as part of an Andover Controls building automation system.........................................................................................+ ................ 3900 ft......................................... 2...... To utilize existing Andover Controls 1/2” or 3/4” NPT thermowells with the immersion sensor.. 125 ft................ + 0...................... Thermistor will not deviate from accuracy specification for minimum of 5 years Thermal Epoxy: ..........................................................................................43 cm) Strap-On Sensor: Strap Length: ............................................ 0..................................................................... Brass or Type 304 Stainless Steel Thermowell Piping Connection: .........................................................5” (11.....25” (.................................................................9 cm) shank diameter (¾” NPT)......................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... ½” or ¾” Male NPT Thermowell Dimensions: Diameter: .................635 cm) Probe Lengths: .......................4° to 110°C) Accuracy: ......................................................................... 5/8” (1...................................................................... making them suitable for all types of duct......24 cm) Insertion Length: ............................................................. ....................................................................................5” (6................35 cm)............ .................................75” Probe ................................. 4” Probe (4 Pack) .......................................................................... TT-I-6-12 Immersion Sensor................................................. TT-ST Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................................................................................................... 15.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4” Probe ............................................................................................... 4” Probe (16 Pack) ............................................................................................................................ TT-D-9-1 Duct Temperature Sensor. TT-D-4-4 Duct Temperature Sensor..........................................................................................75-16 Immersion Temperature Sensors (Order Well Separately) Immersion Sensor........ TT-I-4-4 Immersion Sensor..................................................................................................... 4” (4 Pack) ........................................................................................................................................................75” Probe (12 Pack) .................. 4” (16 Pack) .. TT-I-4-1 Immersion Sensor................ 4” (12 Pack) ............................................................................... 6” Probe ...................................................................75” Probe (16 Pack) ................................................................... 9” Probe (4 Pack) ........................................................................................... TT-I-6-1 Immersion Sensor........ 4” Probe (12 Pack) ....... TT-D-15.................75-12 Duct Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................... 6” (4 Pack) ................................................. TT-I-6-16 Strap On Sensor Strap On Sensor ................. 9” Probe ................................................... TT-D-6-1 Duct Temperature Sensor............................................................................... 6” (12 Pack) ..................... 15................. TT-D-15.................................................................................................................................................................................................................TEMPERATURE 11 Ordering Information Item Part # Duct Temperature Sensors Duct Temperature Sensor.......................75” Probe (4 Pack) .......... 9” Probe (12 Pack) ........................... TT-D-15............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..... TT-I-4-16 Immersion Sensor.................................. 6” Probe (12 Pack) ............................................................................................................75-1 Duct Temperature Sensor.......................................................................... TT-D-9-4 Duct Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ TT-I-4-12 Immersion Sensor.............................................. TT-D-6-16 Duct Temperature Sensor....................... TT-D-4-1 Duct Temperature Sensor.............. 4” .................................................... 15. 9” Probe (16 Pack) .............................................................................................. 6” Probe (16 Pack) ................... TT-D-9-16 Duct Temperature Sensor.............................................................. 6” (16 Pack) ........................ TT-D-6-4 Duct Temperature Sensor..............................................................75-4 Duct Temperature Sensor..................................................................................................................................................... 6” .................................... TT-D-4-16 Duct Temperature Sensor.................... TT-D-4-12 Duct Temperature Sensor................... TT-D-6-12 Duct Temperature Sensor..................................................... TT-D-15...................................................... TT-D-9-12 Duct Temperature Sensor......................................................... 15....................... TT-I-6-4 Immersion Sensor................................................ 6” Probe (4 Pack) .................................................................................................................................................................................. ................ W-Adaptor-3/4-B 4” Replacement Sensor Probe ............................................ W-B-6-3/4-1 6” Well Brass....................................................................................................................... 1/2” NPT (4 Pack) .......................... 3/4” NPT (16 Pack) ............................................................................................................................................ 1/2” NPT (16 Pack) ...................................................... 1/2” NPT (12 Pack) .......................................... W-B-4-3/4-4 4” Well Brass................ 3/4” NPT (12 Pack) ................................ 1/2” NPT (4 Pack) ...................................... 3/4” NPT (16 Pack) .............. 1/2” NPT (4 Pack) .. 3/4” NPT (4 Pack) ...................... 1/2” NPT ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... TT-RPLC-9 15........................................................................................ W-B-6-3/4-4 6” Well Brass....................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................ W-S-4-3/4-4 4” Well Stainless Steel.................................. W-S-4-1/2-1 4” Well Stainless Steel.......................................................... W-S-6-3/4-1 6” Well Stainless Steel................................ W-B-6-1/2-1 6” Well Brass... TT-RPLC-4 6” Replacement Sensor Probe ...............................................................12 TEMPERATURE Ordering Information Continued Item Part # Brass Thermowells 4” Well Brass................. W-S-4-3/4-12 4” Well Stainless Steel............................................. TT-CONVRSN-KIT 3/4” Stainless Steel Well Adapter Kit .............................................................................. W-S-4-3/4-1 4” Well Stainless Steel......................... W-B-6-1/2-4 6” Well Brass...................................................... 1/2” NPT (12 Pack) .. 3/4” NPT (12 Pack) ............................... W-B-4-1/2-4 4” Well Brass........... W-S-4-3/4-16 6” Well Stainless Steel............................................................................................................ W-B-4-3/4-16 6” Well Brass............................................................................................................................................................. 1/2” NPT ............. W-S-4-1/2-4 4” Well Stainless Steel............................................................ W-S-6-3/4-16 Accessories Duct-to-Immersion Conversion Kit .......... W-S-6-1/2-12 6” Well Stainless Steel.................................................................................... W-B-6-3/4-12 6” Well Brass................................................ TT-RPLC-15.................................................................................... W-B-6-3/4-16 Stainless Steel Thermowells 4” Well Stainless Steel........................................ W-S-6-3/4-4 6” Well Stainless Steel....................................... 1/2” NPT (4 Pack) .................................... 3/4” NPT .............................................................. W-B-4-3/4-12 4” Well Brass............................................................................. W-S-4-1/2-12 4” Well Stainless Steel............................... 1/2” NPT (16 Pack) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... W-S-6-3/4-12 6” Well Stainless Steel.................... 3/4” NPT (4 Pack) ................................................. 1/2” NPT (12 Pack) ..............................................................................................................................................................75” Replacement Sensor Probe ... W-B-6-1/2-12 6” Well Brass....................................................................................................................................................................... 1/2” NPT (16 Pack) ............................................. W-B-4-3/4-1 4” Well Brass............................................................................................................................................. 3/4” NPT (12 Pack) ............................................................................................................................................................................................... W-B-4-1/2-12 4” Well Brass...................................................................................................... 1/2” NPT (12 Pack) ................................75 O-Ring/Gasket Kit ........ 3/4” NPT (4 Pack) ............................................................................................. W-S-6-1/2-16 4” Well Stainless Steel................................................................................................................................................................... W-B-6-1/2-16 4” Well Brass........... 3/4” NPT (16 Pack) ................................................... 3/4” NPT ................................................................................................................. W-S-6-1/2-1 6” Well Stainless Steel................................................. TT-O-RING-KIT Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................................................... W-S-4-1/2-16 6” Well Stainless Steel.................. 3/4” NPT (12 Pack) ............................................................................................................................................. 1/2” NPT .............................................................................................................................................................................. TT-RPLC-6 9” Replacement Sensor Probe ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1/2” NPT (16 Pack) ............................ 3/4” NPT (16 Pack) .............. W-S-6-1/2-4 6” Well Stainless Steel......................................... W-B-4-1/2-1 4” Well Brass.................................................... W-B-4-1/2-16 6” Well Brass........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3/4” NPT .............................. 1/2” NPT ...... 3/4” NPT (4 Pack) ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... W-Adaptor-3/4SS 3/4” Brass Well Adapter Kit ......................................................... 3/4” NPT ..... .. averaging any temperature change across all four or nine sensors............................................................................ + 0. and 24ft........................................... 18.......................................................................................................................................................... sensors) Wiring Connections: .................................................................... with a total of four or nine thermistor sensing elements encapsulated at equal distances along the length of the assembly............................................... Each probe comes with 6” wire leads and a single-gang utility box for wiring terminations.......................... Distance to Sensor: Temps Below 75°F: ............................................................... 1550 ft.... 2 conductor................ 20 and 24 ft.......................... -30°F to 230°F (-34.............................. 125 ft......................... 10..........................................................1°F error Performance: Range: ............................. flexible plenum-rated cable........................................ Type III Thermistor.... 4 Elements ...... 9 Elements ...................................................................................................... 01-6013-039 16’........................................ sensors) 9 (16ft............................................ making it suitable for all types of duct temperature measurement............................................ 4 Elements ........ 20 or 22 gauge................. 16.TEMPERATURE 13 Duct Averaging Temperature Sensor Description Andover Controls Duct Averaging Temperature Sensor affords easy installation while at the same time providing accurate................................................. and 20ft....................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .....................4°C to 110°C)...........1°F error 3900 ft................. The response time of any temperature change will be less than 20 seconds.............................................................................. 01-6013-035 20’............. (22 gauge wire) with less than 0........................................................................................................................ Maximum of 20 seconds Mechanical: Probe Lengths: ..1°F error 310 ft................. Ordering Information Item Part # 12’...........................2°C) Response Time: ..................................................................... 4 (12ft....................... Wire Size: .................................................. Four lengths of probe are available: 12.................................................. 9 Elements .......................................................................1°F error Temps Above 160°F: ........................................................................................................... unshielded Max.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Sensing Element: .................. 16............ (18 gauge wire) with less than 0....................................................................... Use crimp-type butt splices or solder connections....................... The complete array acts as a single sensor.....................................000 ohms @ 77°F Number of Elements: ...... (18 gauge wire) with less than 0....... 01-6013-036 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. (22 gauge wire) with less than 0...............4°C to 110°C) Accuracy: ................................ Each sensor is composed of a long....... 01-6013-040 24’.......................................................................... 20 and 24 feet............ The flexible cable assembly allows for easy installation in any size duct...................................................................................................36°F (+ 0......... 6” lead furnished with sensor............... reliable measurement of temperatures for use in an Andover Controls building automation system................ The sensor has a wide operating range of -30°F to 230°F (-34...... 12........................................ ........... long term stability......................... and 24 ft..............................................................................................................................14 TEMPERATURE Duct Averaging Temperature Sensor Model TE-205 Description MAMAC Systems TE-205 Duct Averaging Temperature Sensor is available with a 10K ohm thermistor.................................................................................................................................. sensors) Wiring Connections: .................... The TE-205 is available in a bendable aluminium 3/8 inch OD extra long probe for averaging duct air temperature........................................ offering high accuracy........................................................................................... 12 gauge maximum Performance: Range: ................................................ 10............................................................ 6.................................................... ................................................................... +0................................................................................................... sensors)........ and 12 ft............................. Sensor w/9 Elements..........................................................................2°C) Response Time: ............................ Ordering Information Item Part # 6ft...................................................................... 4 (6 ft........ Sensor w/4 Elements................. All models carry the Andover Controls logo... The complete assembly acts as a single sensor and any temperature change is averaged across the sensors........................................................................ Specifications General: Sensing Element: .............................................................................. 4 element versions are available in 6 foot and 12 foot probe lengths while 9 sensor element versions are available in 16 foot and 24 foot probe lengths. -30°F to 230°F (-34....................................... 16.............................................................................................................. 3 Minutes Mechanical: Probe Lengths: ....................................................................... Sensor w/9 Elements............................................................................................................... Screw terminal block Wire Size: .........................000 ohms @77°F (25°C) Number of Elements: ............................................................................4°C to 110°C) Accuracy: ...................................................................... 9 (16 ft.................................................................................. 12. ZATE-205-D7J91 24ft..................... low hysteresis......................................................................... and 24 ft..................................................................................... ZATE-205-D7F1 12ft................................................ fast response times and a wide operating range............. Type 7 Thermistor...................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...... ZATE-205-D7G1 16ft.............................................. The probe incorporates 4 or 9 sensor elements encapsulated at equal distances across the length of the probe............... Sensor w/4 Elements.................................................36°F (+0.................... ZATE-205-D7H91 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................... .......................................... -30° to 230°F (-34....................................................... high-conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics...................................17” in diameter............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......... Type III Thermistor.......................... Use the full 8ft.................................................................... The sensor operating range is -30°F to 230°F (-34................................TEMPERATURE 15 Bead & Ruggedized Bead Temperature Sensor Description Andover Controls Bead and Ruggedized Bead Temperature Sensor provides accurate.............. zip cord furnished with the sensor to prevent condensation..................................................... The sensor operating range is 35°F to 140°F (1...................................................17” diameter............4°C to 110°C)........................................4° to 110°C) Accuracy: ................................90°F (+ 0..............7°C to 60°C)........................ miniature cylinder ................ .......................... 1550 ft................................ precision thermistor....................... An 8 foot length of zip cord is supplied with each sensor..............2°C from 0° to 50°C) + ................................... The thermistor is encapsulated with a low mass............................................... 18.....................................5” long........................... Crimp-type butt splices or solder connections are recommended...36°F from 32°F to 122°F (+ 0.... making them suitable for a variety of situations and installations........................ which is small enough to be installed in most thermostat applications...........7° to 60°C) Ruggedized Bead Sensor: ..........................................4°C) over 5 years Mechanical: Dimensions: ....................................... (22 gauge wire) with less than 0........................... (18 gauge wire) with less than 0............ Bead Sensor The Bead Sensor is for use in indoor installations where moisture or condensation will not be encountered.......................................... with attached 8 ft........................................................... 01-2085-001 Ruggedized Bead Temp Sensor....................... unshielded Max............................................................. Wire Size: . Specifications General: Sensing Element: ............................................. ...... (18 gauge wire) with less than 0.............................................. zip cord Ordering Information Item Part # Bead Temp Sensor ..........1°F error 3900 ft................................................ ............................... The active sensing element is a highly stable............................................................................................... Both the bead and ruggedized bead sensors have a wide operating range of -30°F to 230°F (-34..............1°F error Temps Above 160°F: ............................. and is immune to moisture or condensation...................... accurate to within +36°F........ 125 ft....................5°C) over full range Stability: ..... 10........ 01-2085-001-R Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................. 35° to 140°F (1............................................................................. It is enclosed in a rugged.............................1°F error 310 ft.............................................. 20 or 22 gauge..............................4°C to 110°C)...... 2 conductor............ reliable measurement of temperature for use in an Andover Controls building automation system... 24°F (-4................................................................... Do not use wire nut connections....... and where temperatures will not fall below 35°F.000 ohms @ 77°F Wiring Connections: ....... +0......................................................................1°F error Performance: Range: Bead Sensor: . (22 gauge wire) with less than 0.................. Ruggedized Bead Sensor The Ruggedized Bead Sensor is suitable for temperature extremes....................... Distance to Sensor: Temps Below 75°F: .................. 16 TEMPERATURE Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ........................... (See page 20 for more details on the EasyCal Plus..................... duct mount. 0-10 Volts (0% to 100% RH linear) Power: Supply Voltage: .................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................. Duct Mount The rugged duct mount version includes a 6-inch (15...................... 0-5 Volts........... The Microline RH Sensors provide durable...................... The prewired base.......................... 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing) -20°F to 140°F (-29°C to 60°C) Storage Range: .................................................................................... 3%.............. 4-20 mA............................. 0% to 99% RH (non-condensing) -40°F to 170°F (-40°C to 77°C) Electronics: ..... Specifications General: Sensing Element: ....................................................................3mm to ....................................... easy.. and 5% — and three different mounting configurations — wall mount................................................... the RH sensors are available in three different accuracy levels — 2%..................... A built-in phone jack offers easy connection of the EasyCal Plus humidity calibration tool............. Screw terminals.... and outside air..................... Resistive change of bulk polymer sensor Output Signal: ........................................................ the duct mount offers a prewired base with electronics in the cover/probe and a built-in phone jack for connecting the EasyCal Plus humidity calibration tool................................................................ Because every system has different requirements and cost constraints....................................... The sensor output signal is field-selectable from 0-5 or 0-10 volt to 4-20 mA current in the RH-only version......................................................6mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..............) Wall Mount The wall mount version features an elegant ABS plastic housing which separates the sensing element from the heat-generating electronics....... Also available in three different mounting configurations are combination temperature/humidity sensors with a 10K thermistor...............02A Operating Range: RH Sensor: ..... The humidity sensing element is a precision bulk polymer resistance sensor................10 VDC) /.......... The sensor exhibits excellent long-term stability with minimal hysteresis........................................ (1........................................................................1cm x 11.................................................................. The wall mount version works with handy box hole patterns...................................................... 12 to 36 VDC Maximum Load (ohms): ................... accurate measurement of relative humidity for use in Andover Controls building automation systems............................. Like the wall mount unit.. highly immune to surface contamination and adverse environments........................................5” (10.............2 cm) stainless steel sensing probe mounting on a 4” x 4....................... The sensing element is protected with a ventilated solar shield........... -85°F to 158°F (-65°C to 70°C) Wiring Connections: . 16-22 AWG.................... Every sensor has a built-in phone jack to connect the EasyCal Plus handheld humidity calibration tool for quick........ It is factory calibrated at ten different humidity points — compare this to most other units which are calibrated at three points or less....... The combination RH and temperature units are available in voltage or current outputs............. and uninterrupted single point calibration...............................4cm) ABS plastic handy box.............. (Supply Voltage ............................................... simplifies installation — just wire into the screw terminals and snap in the cover......... with electronics in the cover......................... Outside Air The outside air unit is housed in an ABS plastic enclosure................................HUMIDITY 17 Relative Humidity Sensors Microline Series Description Andover Controls has private labeled the General Eastern Microline Series of RH Sensors.. ..........9”H x 3.....1”W x 1. ABS Plastic Color: ..................................................................... 01-6013-059 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor............11% per °C) Sensitivity: ................................................................................................................................................. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-3-I-D) .......... 0...................................................................................5cm x 7.... ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-5-V-S) ..... ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-5-I-D) .......................... ACC Logo (Model MRH-5-S) .. 01-6013-063 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor....................................................4cm x 6........... 0-5V/0-10V Output............... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA............ 01-6013-066 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor....................................................................4cm x 6........................................................ +3% nominal Mechanical: Wall Mount Unit: Housing: .....................................................................................5% RH Hysteresis: ....2cm................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................. ACC Logo (Model MRH-2-S) .. ACC Logo (Model MRH-3-D) ....................18 HUMIDITY Specifications Continued Performance: Accuracy......... linearity and repeatability Accuracy.............................3cm) Outside Air Unit: Housing: ....................................................... 20 to 95% RH including hysteresis.. Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA..5” diameter (15...............................5”W x 2............................................................................. ACC Logo (Model MRH-3-S) .............. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-2-I-D) ........................ 4-20mA Output.............................................................14cm x 11......5”W x 2........... ABS Plastic Color: .... 4-20mA Output.....................................0cm) Ordering Information Item Part # Room RH 2% Accuracy..35”D (17.......................................... ABS Plastic Color: ............ 01-6013-108 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor...........................................................06% per °F (0........ 6............ ACC Logo (Model MRH-2-I-OA) ................................................................................................................................................................... 01-6013-106 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.............................. Grey Dimensions.................................... 4. 6”..........................................5cm x 11......... 01-6013-064 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.............................................................................. Housing: ........................ 0-5V/0-10V Output................ Overall: .......... 20 to 95% RH including hysteresis..................................................................................................... ACC Logo (Model MRH-5-D) ............ ACC Logo (Model MRH-5-V-OA) ......... ACC Logo (Model MRH-3-OA) ....... 4-20mA Output............. Housing: ........................................... typical Sensor Interchangeability: ..................................................................................................................... 01-6013-103 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.................................................................... 2% Models: .............................................................. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-2-V-S) ..... ACC Logo (Model MRH-3-I-OA) ........... 01-6013-068 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.............................................................. 4-20mA RH Output.................. 01-6013-117 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....... ACC Logo (Model MRH-2-OA) ....... ACC Logo (Model MRH-2-V-OA) .................................................... 01-6013-060 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor............................. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-3-I-S) ................................... 4-20mA Output.......................................... 01-6013-057 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor..............................................................................................................0”D (12............... ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-2-I-S) ..............................................................................9cm x 2.......................................................0cm) Dimensions........................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Output.............. 01-6013-067 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor..... 01-6013-062 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor..0”H x 4............................................................................... Less than 0.................................................. 01-6013-109 3% Accuracy... ACC Logo (Model MRH-5-OA) .................................................................. 01-6013-116 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor..............0cm) Dimensions.............. Less than 1% drift per year......... ACC Logo (Model MRH-2-D) ........................................................... 4-20mA Output............................................................................ Off-White Dimensions: .... 0-5V/0-10V Output...5”W x 2..... 0................................................................................. linearity and repeatability Temperature Effect: ................................................................................0”H x 4...........35”D (10......75”H x 4...... 1..............1% RH Repeatability: ...... Less than 1% RH Long Term Stability: ............... 4-20mA RH Output....................................................... 4.... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA.......................... 01-6013-110 5% Accuracy...................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output.......................................... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA............................................................... 01-6013-112 Outside Air RH 2% Accuracy............ 0-5V/0-10V Output............................................................. 01-6013-114 3% Accuracy..................2cm x 11...................................................... 4-20mA Output............ 01-6013-105 5% Accuracy...................................... 3% Models: .......... Cloud Grey......................................................... Stainless Steel Probe Dimensions.......... ACC Logo (Model MRH-5-I-OA) ........................ 01-6013-104 3% Accuracy....... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA............................................................................. 0...................... 01-6013-107 Duct RH 2% Accuracy........................... 0-5V/0-10V Output....................................................................54cm) Duct Mount Unit: Housing: .................................. 0-5V/0-10V Output.............................................................................................................................. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-3-V-D) ................................ Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA.... ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-3-V-S) ....... Probe: ................................................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output.. +5% at 77°F (25°C).................................. 01-6013-113 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor...................................................................................................... 01-6013-111 5% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.................. 4....................................................................... 01-6013-065 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-5-V-D) ................. 5% Models: ..................................... linearity and repeatability Accuracy............... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA............. 01-6013-058 3% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.......................................... +2% at 77°F (25°C).......................................................... ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-2-V-D) .......................... ACC Logo (Model MRH-3-V-OA) ............... 0-5V/0-10V Output.......... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA.................................................... Field Selectable Output 0-5V/0-10V or 4-20mA.. ACC Logo (Model MRHT1-5-I-S) .................................. 01-6013-061 2% Accuracy w/10K Thermistor.....................35”D (10.................................... +3% at 77°F (25°C)... 01-6013-115 5% Accuracy........................................................ 20 to 95% RH including hysteresis.........................4cm x 6.. HUMIDITY 19 Applications/Wiring Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .20 HUMIDITY Dimensions Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ........................................................................................................................... eliminating the need for additional reference devices..... +2%RH Single Point Calibration Range: ................................................................................................................................................................. 3...................................................................................... -85 to 158°F (-65 to 70°C) Performance: Single Point Calibration Accuracy: ....................................................................................................................................................... continuous use for 40 hours................................................................. The Easycal Plus displays values for both the transmitter and the environment................................................................................................................ Resistive change of bulk polymer sensor Operating Range: RH Sensor: ............................ one-point offset adjustment of the transmitter without interrupting operation............................................... on-site......................................................................... 0 to 99% RH (non-condensing) -20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C) Storate Temperature: .................................. if necessary... 0 to 99% RH (non-condensing) -40 to 170°F (-40 to 77°C) Electronics: ................. 9 VDC alkaline battery.............................................................................................................................................................................................. +2%RH (20 to 95% RH) Temperature Effect: ...............................06% per °F (0.................11% per °C) Long Term Stability: ................................................................................................................. Auto power-off Ordering Information Item Part # EasyCal Plus Handheld Calibrator/RH Indicator (For use with General Eastern Microline RH Sensors) ...........................................................................................HUMIDITY 21 Easycal Plus Handheld Calibrator/RH Indicator Description General Eastern’s battery powered Easycal Plus Handheld Calibrator/RH Indicator makes it easy to perform quick............................................................................................................................................... 0......................................... No tools or disassembly are required —just plug the Easycal Plus into the phone jack connector located on the General Eastern Microline RH Sensors.................. typical Mechanical: Probe Dimensions: Diameter .. 01-6013-069 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................................................... Specifications General: Sensing Element: ...............................................................0” Power Supply: ................................................ perform a one-point offset adjustment in about 60 seconds................................................................. Less than 0.............................................. 20 to 90% RH Reference Probe Accuracy: ............................................................................................................................................. A user can check the transmitter’s operation and................................................................................................... Less than 1% drift per year.................................5” Length: ........................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................. ......................... animal rooms....................22 HUMIDITY Waterproof Relative Humidity Sensor EHRH Transmitter NEW! Description General Eastern’s EHRH transmitter is designed for the monitoring of relative humidity and temperature in applications where washdowns or saturation frequently occurs........................................................................................................................2°C) @ 77°F (25°C) Accuracy-RTD: .................. 30 to 95% RH including hysteresis...........................................................5” W x ................................ Deutsch 4-position waterproof connector (front-wiring)..... 10............................................................................................................................................ Less than 1% drift per year.......................................................7 cm H x 6......................................................................... the EHRH employs a bulk polymer resistive sensor and a hysteresis of less than 1%.......... yet breathable membrane filter which permits the sensor to withstand 100% saturation..........000 ft/min Long Term Stability: ....Temperature: ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Less than 1% Operating Range: .................................................................................................................5% RH Hysteresis: .......................................................... 2-wire..................02A (Note: Minimum supply voltage of 15 VDC is required for 10 volt output units) Wiring Connections: ......... loop-powered for 0-100% RH linear Output SIgnal .............................. 2-wire..................................................................................................... 0........................................ Thermistor............................................................................ 4-20 mA.............. Offering an accuracy of +2% RH..................................................66” D (12......................10 VDC)/............................................................................................................ 12 to 36 VDC Maximum Load (ohms): ..........3°C) @ 77°F (25°C) Temperature Effect: .......................... Less than 0.................... which makes it accurate over its entire operating range............................ 4-20 mA............................................................................ The EHRH is ideally suited for high humidity applications such as pharmaceuticals..........................................................................................................................5°F (+0.. Specifications General: Sensing Element: Humidity: ........................................... 2-wire measurement Temperture .....11% per °C) Sensitivity: ...................................................................................................................... supermarket produce sections........ Flying leads (back-wiring) Performance: Accuracy-Humidity: .......................... 0% to 100% RH.. and food processing plants....................................................................................................w/Signal Conditioning: ...................... All of the electronics in the EHRH are contained in an epoxy-hardened enclosure............................................................................................................... -4 to 129°F (-20 to 54°C) Maximum Air Velocity: . typical Mechanical: Dimensions: ............................................................................................... 10k ohm at 25°C. +2%RH @ 77°F (25°C).................... Resistive change of bulk polymer sensor Temperature ..............................68 cm D) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............RH Only: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... The EHRH features a completely waterproof design that offers reliable operation in saturated environments...................00385 alpha) Output Signal ............................................ hospitals and laboratories................... linearity and repeatability Accuracy-Thermistor: .............. loop-powered for the following ranges: -20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C) 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C) 32 to 132°F (0 to 57°C) 50 to 130°F (10 to 54°C) -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)Power: Supply Voltage: ...... A stainless steel protective cover is also available.........0” H x 2..... +0............................. swimming pools..... (Supply Voltage . 100 ohm platinum RTD (..............................Direct Connection: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... It also incorporates circuitry for continuous temperature compensation...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................... 0.............................................................................................. The EHRH sensor is protected by a water-tight.........35 cm W x 1...................06% per °F (0................ 5..................................................................... +2°F (+1..1% RH Repeatability: .............. .................................................................... 10K Therm........ Flying Leads ............. 0-10V Output...... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs.. 01-6013-092 2% RH.............. Waterproof Connector .................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....... 32°F to 132°F................................. Waterproof Connector ................... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs... 01-6013-076 2% RH........ -40°F to 140°F............ 01-6013-081 2% RH................ 0°F to 150°F... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs....... 4-20mA Output.. Waterproof Connector .... Flying Leads ...... 4-20mA Output... 01-6013-087 2% RH. Flying Leads .............. 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs........... Flying Leads ....... 0°F to 100°F.................. Waterproof Connector ......................... 0-5V Output. 01-6013-078 2% RH............................ 01-6013-083 2% RH........................................... 01-6013-091 2% RH...................... -20°F to 140°F. 01-6013-077 2% RH..... 01-6013-093 Stainless Steel 300 Series for EHTH and EHRHT ............ 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs...... 01-6013-079 2% RH............................... 0°F to 100°F.................. 01-6013-089 2% RH....................... Flying Leads .......... Flying Leads .................. 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs......... 01-6013-082 2% RH... 10K Therm.... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs................... Waterproof Connector . Flying Leads .................................................. 0-10V Output..... Flying Leads .............................. Waterproof Connector ........ 0-5V Output. 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs................................ 01-6013-075 2% RH........................... 50°F to 130°F.......................... 50°F to 130°F........... 01-6013-074 2% RH................................................ Flying Leads ...................... Waterproof Connector ...................................... Waterproof Connector ..... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs................................. 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs............... 01-6013-086 2% RH.................. 01-6013-094 Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs............................................ 01-6013-084 2% RH................................. 10K Therm....................................... Waterproof Connector ................. -40°F to 140°F.... Flying Leads........................................... Custom Temp Range (Must Specify)....................................... -20°F to 140°F....................................................... 01-6013-085 2% RH......... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs.......... 10K Therm...... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs................................. 01-6013-090 2% RH..... 01-6013-080 2% RH......................... 100 ohm RTD w/4-20mA RH & Temp Outputs............... 32°F to 132°F...................................... 0°F to 150°F........... Custom Temp Range (Must Specify)......... 01-6013-088 2% RH......HUMIDITY 23 Ordering Information Item Part # 2% RH....... 10K Therm.......... 10K Therm............................................................ Waterproof Connector .............................. ... and the choice of duct/remote or wall-mounted configurations..................................................8”D (13........................... Less than 15 sec...................................................................... and no uncertainty between dew and frost points..................... greater resistance to contamination.................................................. The HUMISCAN housing features a small size (5............................................................................................ mixing ratio............................... +0..................................................................................................... NEMA-4X (IP-65) Mounting: ... -40°F to 176°F (-40°C to 80°C) Data Logging: ........................................................................................................97cm x 13............................................................................................................ 5..............20°C) Long Term Stability: ................ Aluminum Enclosure Rating: ................................................................... 0% to 100% RH (non-condensing)........5”L x 5.................................................................97cm x 7. 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing)............ including faster response times..................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................................................................................... Hermetically Sealed Thermistor Outputs: Analog: ............................. +32°F to 150°F (0°C to 70°C) Mechanical: Dimensions: ................... and 10 meters Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....... 0-10 Volt Digital: .. 3........................................ The HUMISCAN’s built-in microprocessor calculates dew point temperature................................................................................................................................................. 5...... 250VAC/30VDC@5A................................................................................................................................... The electronics are housed in a rugged.................................................................. automotive... 115/230 VAC/VDC +10%/50/60Hz Storage Temperature: .......... Specifications General: Sensing Element: Relative Humidity: ......................... 24 VAC/VDC +20% Optional: ......... This approach provides distinct advantages for industrial applications................................................................................24 HUMIDITY Humidity/Dewpoint Sensor HUMISCAN NEW! Description General Eastern’s HUMISCAN® for Humidity/Dew Point Measurement is ideal for industrial applications such as clean rooms.................................... aluminum. Capacitive Temperature: .............................................................................................. The HUMISCAN uses proven technology to measure relative humidity and temperature.......................5”W x 2.................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-5 Volt................................36°F (0.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Duct/Remote Configurations (Includes Duct Mount Hardware) Remote Cable Lengths: ..........................................8”D).................... process control........................................................................................................................................................................... Less than 1% RH Operating Range: Relative Humidity: .................................................................. Form C.......... All of these measurements are available as user-selectable and scaleable analog outputs and can be simultaneously viewed on the unit’s digital display....................................................................................... absolute humidity...5”H x 5................................................................................. Hysteresis: .................................................. The design of the HUMISCAN provides reliable dewpoint measurements without the need for a chilled mirror.... Wall.............................. HVAC............................................. 32°F to 150°F (0°C to 70°C) Measurement Range-Temperature: ....................................................................................5 to 90% RH..................................................................................... TTL: Alarm Trigger Power Inputs: Standard: ................................................................................................... SPDT..........................................................................5”W x 2............................... pharmaceuticals................................................5% drift per year typical Temperature Effect: ............................................................................................................................................................................... +2% at 90 to 100% RH Temperature: ......................................................... NEMA-4X/IP-65 rated enclosure for maximum protection in harsh or condensing environments............................................................1cm) Enclosure Material: ............................ Temperature Compensated Response Time: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... and wet bulb temperature. +1% @ 77°F (25°C) at 0.................................................................................................... 32°F to 150°F (0°C to 70°C) Electronics: ............................... Maximum of 700 points of humidity and temperature (selectable interval) Performance: Accuracy: Relative Humidity: ................ 3 Simultaneous Channels: 4-20mA......................................... 1 Channel: RS-232 or RS-485 /422 Digital Current Loop (Optional) Relay: ..................................................................... and hospitals/laboratories........................................ Less than 0....... ....... 24VAC/DC..... Duct.... 01-6013-095 HUMISCAN®......HUMIDITY 25 Ordering Information Item Part # HUMISCAN®.. 5m Cable Length. 5m Cable Length. 50/60Hz. 01-6013-098 HUMISCAN®. No Display... 5m Cable Length........... 01-6013-101 HUMISCAN®.... w/Display....... Plastic Open Frame Filter ...... Plastic Open Frame Filter ..... 01-6013-099 HUMISCAN®.... 01-6013-097 HUMISCAN®................. Plastic Open Frame Filter .............. No Display......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... 3m Cable Length.... 5m Cable Length....... Plastic Open Frame Filter .. 50/60Hz.... 24VAC/DC........ 100-230VAC.... 24VAC/DC. RS232... Space. Space........ 100-230VAC.. 50/60Hz.......... RS232.. 24VAC/DC... RS232. Plastic Open Frame Filter . 100-230VAC... 3m Cable Length.. 3m Cable Length. 01-6013-100 HUMISCAN®... Space.............. Duct........... Space....... 100-230VAC. RS232... Plastic Open Frame Filter ..... Plastic Open Frame Filter . RS232....... 3m Cable Length.. Duct.......... 01-6013-096 HUMISCAN®.... No Display. RS232... w/Display..... No Display...... RS232........ 01-6013-102 Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. w/Display......... w/Display...... 50/60Hz.. RS232... Duct. Plastic Open Frame Filter . .......................04% RH/°C over 0 to 60°C (32° to 140°F) Analog Output: ............................................................. non-polarity sensitive...................................................................... Digital.............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...............45°F) Range Specified on Sensor Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... 0 to 100% RH Temperature Coefficient: .................................. 4-20 mA or 0-5 V/0-10V output.......................................................................S........................... +5% @ 0 to 90% RH Stability: ..................................................... +5% @ 0 to 90% RH Stability: ..........................................45°F) Range specified on sensor Duct RH H2 Sensor: .................................................................... for two years Operating Humidity Range: ................................................. 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC*.......................................................... 4-20 mA version..... resolution/accuracy +0................................. 3% and 5% accuracy levels and 4 different mounting configurations — wall................................... 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC*......................I................................... The sensors are available in 2%............................ 0-5V/0-10V versions............ observe polarity Scaling: ..... non-polarity sensitive.......................... recessed...... 0-5V/0-10V versions.... 30 mA max.. 0 to 100% RH Temperature Coefficient: .......... resolution/accuracy +0..... uses a digitally profiled thin-film capacitance technology for superior accuracy over a wide range and exceptional resistance to contaminants........................................................... 3-wire.. +2% or +3% (specify) @ 0 to 90% RH.................... the H2 Sensor.... 4-20 mA version............. An optional LCD display is offered for the wall mount versions...............................................................................T.................................... 15 mA max.............................................................................................................. +0............................... The sensors feature a fully interchangeable element that allows for quick and easy replacement of the digital sensor — without calibration............... Four-point calibration...............I............................................................................. 4-20 mA version.................................................................25°C (+0........... 4-20 mA or 0-5 V/0-10V output............ The humidity sensing element.............................. Power to the sensor can vary from 12-30VDC............................... resolution/accuracy +0........... +2% or +3% (specify) @ 0 to 90% RH........................ 2-wire................. Optional Temperature Output: ......................... Digitally profiled thin-film capacitive (32 bit mathematics) Patent Pending Accuracy: HXW/HXL/HXR: ................................................................................................................. Specifications Room RH: H2 Sensor: .........................................................25°C (+0..................... Digital..................................S.............................. for two years Operating Humidity Range: ................................................25°C (+0.................................................. +1% @ 20°C (68°F) annually........................................... Digital.... Optional Temperature Output: HXW/HVW: .............................................. N...... +0........................................................ +1% @ 20°C (68°F) annually........ 4-20 mA version.......................................... traceable HVD: ................ 0-5V/0-10V versions..............................................................................04% RH/°C over 0 to 60°C (32° to 140°F) Analog Output: ...I.................. All designs are available with an optional 10K thermistor or temperature transmitter...... 3-wire... 4-20 mA or 0-5 V/0-10V output................................................................... traceable HVW: .............................................. 15 mA max..26 HUMIDITY Relative Humidity Sensors Models HX & HV Series Description The Veris Alta Labs HX & HV Series of relative humidity sensors are cost effective devices for energy management and HVAC control applications......................45°F) Jumper Selectable Range HXL/HXR: ............................................................ duct and outside air........... 2-wire.................................................. N................... Digitally profiled thin-film capacitive (32 bit mathematics) Patent Pending Accuracy: HXD: .................... The units are factory calibrated at four points using N....................... Non polarity two wire 4-20 mA and 3-wire 0-10 VDC versions are available............................................................................ observe polarity Scaling: ............................................................... loop powered 12-30 VDC only................. reference standards......................................................... loop powered 12-30 VDC only................................................ 0-100% RH Input Power: ..........T.................... 0-5V/0-10V versions..................................................................... 0-100% RH Input Power: ...................................S....... Four-point calibration....................... 30 mA max...................................T.... ........................................ W/ 10 K Thermistor.................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ................................................................. 0-5V/0-10V Output .................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ........ Recessed Wall Mount.................... Wall Mount........................................... observe polarity Scaling: ...... ZVHXR2RH/RTDVDC 2% Accuracy....................................................................... W/ Temp Transmitter.......................... Wall Mount.................................. Wall Mount W/ LCD.................................... 4-20 mA version.. 5% Accuracy................ Wall Mount W/ LCD................................... ZVHXW2RH/TVDC 3% Accuracy........... ZVHXR2RH/TVDC Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................................................................... Wall Mount................................................................ 4-20mA Output ............................................................................ W/ Temp Transmitter. W/10 K Thermistor. Wall Mount..... ZVHVW5RH420 5% Accuracy................................. Digital...... ZVHXW2RH420 2% Accuracy.................. W/ 10 K Thermistor................................ Wall Mount........ W/10 K Thermistor.. ZVHXW2RHVDC 2% Accuracy................ Wall Mount................................................ 4-20mA Output ....... ZVHXR2RHVDC 2% Accuracy............. ZVHXL3RH/TVDC 2% Accuracy.. W/ 10 K Thermistor........... ZVHVW5RH/RTD420 5% Accuracy...... W/ 10 K Thermistor.......................................T....... 4-20mA Output .................................. Wall Mount W/ LCD....................................... ZVHXL3RH/T420 3% Accuracy.................................... W/ Temp Transmitter.... Wall Mount W/ LCD................ Wall Mount W/ LCD................................... Recessed Wall Mount...................... ZVHXL3RH/RTD420 3% Accuracy............................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................. +1% @ 20°C (68°F) annually................................................. ZVHVW5RH/T420 5% Accuracy...... 4-20mA Output .......................... ZVHXW3RH/RTD420 3% Accuracy.. 4-20mA Output ......................... Wall Mount............... 4-20mA Output ............... Recessed Wall Mount. Wall Mount W/ LCD............... W/ 10 K Thermistor........................... 4-20mA Output ....... 4-20mA Output ............... 3-wire........... W/ Temp Transmitter...................... Wall Mount W/ LCD.......... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............................ ZVHXL2RH420 2% Accuracy..... 0-5/0-10V Output ................................................................... traceable Stability: .................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ......................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output...... 0-100% RH Input Power: . 4-20mA Output ......................... W/ Temp Transmitter.. 0-5V/0-10V Output ................ Recessed Wall Mount.......................... +0....... 2% Accuracy............................................................. ZVHVW5RH/TVDC 2% Accuracy............................... 30 mA max... 4-20mA Output............................ ZVHXW3RH420 3% Accuracy......................... Wall Mount........................................................... W/10 K Thermistor....... 0-5V/0-10V Output............................... Wall Mount................................ Recessed Wall Mount............................... ZVHXL2RH/T420 2% Accuracy..................... 3% Accuracy. loop powered 12-30 VDC only..................................................................................................................... W/ Temp Transmitter... Wall Mount................................................ Optional Temperature Output: ................................. W/10 K Thermistor............................ 0-5V/0-10V Output..HUMIDITY 27 Specifications Continued Outside Air RH H2 Sensor: ... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............... ZVHXL2RH/RTD420 2% Accuracy........................................................................................... ZVHXR2RH/RTD420 2% Accuracy................. Four-point calibration......................... ZVHVW5RHVDC 5% Accuracy....... Wall Mount............... 4-20mA Output ........ +2% or +3% (specify) @ 0 to 90% RH.S.. W/Temp Transmitter.......... Wall Mount.. Wall Mount W/ LCD..... ZVHVW5RH/RTDVDC 5% Accuracy... ZVHXW3RHVDC 3% Accuracy.................................... 3% Accuracy............................................................ W/ 10 K Thermistor.............................................................. 4-20mA Output .............................. 2-wire............................................... N.... 0-5V/0-10V Output ........... 4-20mA Output ............... 4-20mA Output .. 4-20mA Output.................................................................................................................................................. ZVHXR2RH420 2% Accuracy... 0-5V/0-10V Output .................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ..... ZVHXR2RH/T420 2% Accuracy.............................03% RH/°C over 0 to 60°C (32° to 140°F) Analog Output: ......................................... ZVHXW2RH/RTDVDC 2% Accuracy........................................ Wall Mount........ Recessed Wall Mount............. 0-5V/0-10V Output .............. ZVHXW2RH/RTD420 2% Accuracy............. ZVHXL3RHVDC 3% Accuracy......... ZVHXW2RH/T420 2% Accuracy.................. 15 mA max.................................................................... Wall Mount..................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ................... W/ Temp Transmitter........................................................ W/ 10 K Thermistor................................... 0-5V/0-10V versions.... for two years Operating Humidity Range: .... W/Temp Transmitter.................................................................................................................................................................... non-polarity sensitive 0-5V/0-10V versions... ZVHXW3RH/TVDC 5% Accuracy................................................................................ 4-20 mA version................................ ZVHXW3RH/RTDVDC 3% Accuracy............... 0 to 100% RH Temperature Coefficient: ........ 0-5V/0-10V Output ................................ Wall Mount W/ LCD................ Wall Mount........... Wall Mount...................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ......... W/Temp Transmitter.. 0-5V/0-10V Output ...... ZVHXL2RHVDC 2% Accuracy........ 12-30 VDC or 24 VAC*. 4-20mAOutput .............................. ZVHXL2RH/TVDC 3% Accuracy............................................................... Digitally profiled thin-film capacitive (32 bit mathematics) Patent Pending Accuracy: ................................................... 4-20 mA or 0-5 V/0-10V output....................................... Wall Mount..................................................... Wall Mount................... Wall Mount W/ LCD................... ZVHXL3RH/RTDVC 3% Accuracy................ Wall Mount W/ LCD..................... W/Temp Transmitter.................................25°C (+0............................................................................ resolution/accuracy +0..................................... Wall Mount W/ LCD.....................................45°F) Range Specified on Sensor Ordering Information Item Part # Room RH 2% Accuracy. 4-20mA Output ............... W/10 K Thermistor................ ZVHXL2RH/RTDVC 2% Accuracy......................................I..... ZVHXL3RH420 3% Accuracy......... ZVHXW3RH/T420 3% Accuracy.. W/Temp Transmitter.................................... ........ 4-20mA Output . 3% Wall ........................................................ 4-20mA Output ................. ZVHXD2RH/TVDC 3% Accuracy......................................... ZVHVD5RH/TVDC Outside Air RH 2% Accuracy............................................................ Duct Mount........................................................... ZVHXR3RHVDC 3% Accuracy.......................................................... Recessed Wall Mount........... ZVHXO3RH/RTD420 3% Accuracy......... ZVHXO3RH/RTDVDC 3% Accuracy..................... W/ Temp Transmitter............. W/ 10 K Thermistor..... W/ 10K Thermistor............................... 4-20mA Output .............. 4-20mA Output ..ZVDB-100 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor..................................... ZVHXR3RH/RTDVDC 3% Accuracy................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output .... ZVRD1 Duct RH 2% Accuracy....................................... 5% Duct ......... ZVHSW-2 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor...................... ZVHXO2RH/TVDC 3% Accuracy............................. Duct Mount..................... ZVHXD2RH420 2% Accuracy.......................................................................................................................................................... Duct Mount.......... ZVHXD2RHVDC 2% Accuracy.............. W/10K Thermistor.. W/ Temp Transmitter............. Recessed Wall Mount................. W/ Temp Transmitter.................. W/ 10 K Thermistor.......... ZVHSD-5 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............. W/ Temp Transmitter....................... ZVHXD2RH/RTDVDC 2% Accuracy................................................. Recessed Wall Mount....... Duct Mount.. 0-5V/0-10V Output ................................ Outside Air...................................................................... Outside Air......................... ZVHVD5RH/RTD420 5% Accuracy......................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............................ ZVHXD3RH/TVDC 5% Accuracy........... ZVHXO2RH/T420 2% Accuracy......... ZVHXR3RH/TVDC Remote LCD Digital Display ...... 0-5V/0-10V Output ................................... W/ 10 K Thermistor................... 4-20mA Output ........................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output .......................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ................... 0-5V/0-10V Output .... Duct Mount... ZVHVD5RHVDC 5% Accuracy................................................. ZVHSW-5 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor.......... W/ Temp Transmitter........................... Outside Air............................ ZVHXO2RH/RTDVDC 2% Accuracy................... ZVHXO2RH/RTD420 2% Accuracy................................. ZVHSD-3 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor.......... 2% Duct .... 0-5V/0-10V Output .... 0-5V/0-10V Output ..................... 5% Wall ........................................................................................................................................ 2% Accuracy........................... ZVHXO3RH/T420 3% Accuracy.......... Duct Mount................................................................................................................ Duct Mount.............. Duct Mount................................................................ 4-20mA Output .... 4-20mA Output ..................................................................................... Duct Mount.......................... ZVHSW-3 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor......... 0-5V/0-10V Output .................................................... ZVHXD3RH/RTD420 3% Accuracy............................................... ZVHXO3RH420 3% Accuracy.. Duct Mount. Outside Air................................. ZVHXO3RH/TVDC RH Accessories Veris Alta Labs 1 3/8" Diameter Cobalt Steel Hole Saw (35MM) For HXR Recessed Sensor ......................................................... W/10 K Thermistor............ 0-5V/0-10V Output ..................... Recessed Wall Mount......... 4-20mA Output .................................... 4-20mA Output ........................ ZVHVD5RH/RTDVDC 5% Accuracy.....HUMIDITY 28 Ordering Information Continued Item Part # Room RH Continued 3% Accuracy........................................ Outside Air................................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ..................................... ZVHXD3RH/RTDVDC 3% Accuracy........................................ 4-20mA Output .......... W/ Temp Transmitter.......... W/ 10 K Thermistor........................... ZVHVD5RH/T420 5% Accuracy............................................. W/ 10 K Thermistor.......................................................................... ZVHXR3RH/RTD420 3% Accuracy................. Outside Air........ 4-20mA Output .................... Duct Mount................................................. ZVHXO2RHVDC 2% Accuracy............................................ 3% Duct ....... Outside Air....................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ......... W/ Temp Transmitter............................................................................................................................ Duct Mount...... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............ W/ Temp Transmitter... Outside Air........... W/ Temp Transmitter.. 3% Accuracy............................................................. 2% Wall .. Outside Air.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................. W/ 10 K Thermistor............. Outside Air....................... ZVHXO2RH420 2% Accuracy... Recessed Wall Mount........................ W/ Temp Transmitter................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ... ZVHXD3RH420 3% Accuracy........... W/ Temp Transmitter......... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............................. W/10 K Thermistor 4-20mA Output .......................... 4-20mA Output .................... Duct Mount.. Duct Mount.................. W/ 10 K Thermistor............................................................................................................................................ ZVHXO3RHVDC 3% Accuracy............................................................... Duct Mount... Recessed Wall Mount. ZVHXD3RHVDC 3% Accuracy. ZVHXD2RH/T420 2% Accuracy................... ZVHXR3RH/T420 3% Accuracy........ Duct Mount................................. W/ 10 K Thermistor..................... W/ Temp Transmitter............ 0-5V/0-10V Output ............ 4-20mA Output .............. Duct Mount...... 0-5V/0-10V Output ......... ZVHVD5RH420 5% Accuracy.............. ZVHXD3RH/T420 3% Accuracy........................................................ Outside Air............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ....................... ZVHSD-2 Veris Alta Labs Replacement RH Sensor............................................. 4-20mA Output ...... ZVHXR3RH420 3% Accuracy.............. 4-20mA Output ....................... 0-5V/0-10V Output . ZVHXD2RH/RTD420 2% Accuracy............... Duct Mount.............................. Outside Air.................................................................................. HUMIDITY 29 Applications/Wiring Diagrams Wall Mount (0-5V/-10V Versions) Wall Mount (4-20mA Versions) LCD Wall Mount (0-5V/-10V Versions) LCD Wall Mount (4-20mA Versions) Recessed Digital RH/RH/T (0-5V/-10V Versions) Recessed Digital RH/RH/T (4-20mA Versions) Recessed Digital RH w/RTD (0-5V/-10V Versions) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . 30 HUMIDITY Applications/Wiring Diagrams Continued Duct (0-5V/-10V Versions) Duct (4-20mA Versions) Outside Air (0-5V/-10V Versions) Outside Air (4-20mA Versions) Dimensional Drawings Wall Mount Wall Mount w/Plate Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . HUMIDITY 31 Dimensional Drawings Continued LCD Wall Mount LCD Wall Mount w/Plate Recessed Wall Mount Outside Air HV Series Duct Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ..................................... 3K ohms max.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ZAHU-226-2-MA7 2% Duct RH w/10K Thermistor.......................... Backed on enamel ..............................................................................................20 mA max.................................... 18 Ga C................................................................................................................................0 mW/°C R/T Characteristics: ................................................................................................................................................................... 0-100% RH Hysteresis: ...................................... +1% Supply Voltage: ...... EMC Standards EN50082-1 (1992)......... Unpluggable screw terminal block Wire Size: ......ZAHU-225-3-VDC 2% Duct RH.............................................................................................PMS2GR88B or off-white Conformance: ............... SN01-01 Conformance: ...................................................................................45 kg) Wall Mount: ............................................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ....... @ 40 VDC (mA output units)...........................ZAHU-224-3-VDC 3% Duct RH w/10K Thermistor...........................ZAHU-225-2-VDC 3% Wall RH.................................................................... ZAHU-224-3-MA 3% Duct RH........................................................................................ 0-5V/0-10V Output ............................................................................ 4-20mA Output ........................................................................... The HU-226 comes with a 10K Thermistor................................ EN55014 (1993)/EN60730-1 (1992) * Includes non-linearity and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # 2% Wall RH................................................ 0-5V/0-10V Output .. +0........................................ VDC Units .............................. fog or extremely high humidity over a prolonged period of time........................................................ 1............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ......... Specifications Accuracy*: ................................................. 4-20mA Output ...................................................................................................................... mA Units ......... 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Termination: .............. 0..............................................................................................................32 HUMIDITY Relative Humidity Sensors Models HU-224/225 & HU-226 Description The MAMAC Systems HU-224/225 and HU-226 are extremely fast........................................................................................... ZAHU-226-2-VDC7 3% Duct RH......................... ZAHU-225-3-MA 3% Wall RH...... ZAHU-224-2-MA 2% Duct RH............................................................................ EMC Standards EN50082-1 (1992)................................................................................................................ZAHU-224-2-VDC 2% Duct RH w/10K Thermistor..... 4-20mA Output .......................................................................................... The polymer capacitance sensor is not affected by harsh contaminants............................................................................................................. Each unit is individually calibrated in an environmental test chamber to meet or exceed NIST traceable +2% or +3% accuracies..................................................................... 0-5V/0-10V Output ............................................... stable and accurate humidity transducers designed for harsh environments..................25 kg) 10K Thermistor Option Interchangeability: ................................................................................................................................ If dust or other contaminants accumulate on the sensor...0 lbs................................................................................ a rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65) steel enclosure with external mounting bracket is also available...................................................................2°C Heat Dissipation: ............................................................................................... ZAHU-225-2-MA 2% Wall RH................. 12 Ga max................................................................... Enclosure: ..............................10 mA max...............................................................................ZAHU-226-3-MA7 3% Duct RH w/10K Thermistor.......................................................................................................................... -30 to 130°F (-35 to 55°C) Environmental: ............... 3... For the HU-224/225 an aesthetically appealing ABS enclosure which may be flush mounted or fits a standard 2” x 4” handy box is available and for duct humidity applications...................................................................... 4-20mA Output .................................. (VDC output units) Weight: Duct Mount: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... +2%/+3% RH Range: .................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ............................................................................................... Load Impedance: ....................................................................................................................................................................... The HU-224/225 and HU-226 are temperature compensated for -30F to 130°F operation with negligible error...........................................R............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Steel NEMA 4 (IP-65) or ABS Plastic Finish: .............................................................. ZAHU-226-3-VDC7 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... 1K ohms min.......................................................... See TI........................... EN55014 Compensated Temp Range: .............................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ......... 0-5V/0-10V Output ....... (....................................................................................................................................................... (.................................................................. condensation............................................................................................ 12-40 VDC................. 0-5V/0-10V Output ........................................................ 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) Supply Current: ................................................................................................................................................................................5 lbs. the probe can be washed in industrial grade isopropyl alcohol and put back in service without any calibration shift....................................... ..................................................................... User-Selectable 0-5/0-10 VDC Output w/Duct Pickup Tube .... contactor) High Limit Set-point: ........................................................... 4-20mA Output w/Duct Pickup Tube ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ resets below 100 ppm LED Indicators: ................. The GX series utilizes metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) sensing technology along with microprocessor-based electronics for stable performance and long-life.... 0.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................. User-Selectable 0-5/0-10 VDC Output ..........................................................................................3” (125mm x 65mm x 60mm)...... or 200 ppm F....................................... ZVGX-CO-4-20-D CO Sensor.... Digitally profiled Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) Sensor Life: .................... replaceable Supply Power: ............................... 1 lb........................ white powder coat over steel Ordering Information Item Part # CO Sensor.............................................. ..................................................................................O................................................................................... ........ Relay Set-point: .... 5..... allowing for quick and easy replacement — without the need for recalibration....................................................................................................................................................................................... High-limit alarm = Flashing Red LED Operating Environment: ................................................................................................................................................ 35 ppm Relay Output: ............0” x 2..... N............... 5000 sq.......................................................... 5-year expected sensor element life............................................................... Call for ventilation = Red LED.................................... (Use with N........................................................................................................ 100 ppm for 30 minutes High Limit Alarm: .............................................. 4-20mA Output ............................................. ZVGX-CO-4-20 CO Sensor........................................................................................................................ ZVGX-CO-0-5-10 CO Sensor.........2A @ 12 VDC....................... 4-20mA or user selectable 0-10 V/0-5 V (Specify mA or output) Output Scaling: ................................................................................................S.............. The unit is housed in a rugged metal enclosure for tamper resistance............................................. It is ideal for use in parking garages and other automobile exhaust ventilation applications..........5” x 2........................ ZVGX-CO-0-5-10-D Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............C...............1A @ 24 VDC Detection Range: ...................................................................... Form A (SPST) 5A @ 120/240AC..... 12-30 VAC/DC.................................................................... Its factory calibrated/factory programmed sensor module is fully interchangeable..................................................................................... User selectable 100 ppm F...... 0 to 200 ppm Analog Output: .........................................................................................................................CO/CO2 CO Sensor Model GX 33 NEW! Description The Veris Alta Labs GX series carbon monoxide sensor provides ventilation control for energy savings and OSHA compliance..................... 0.................. It features a 35 ppm fail-safe alarm relay capable of switching 5-amps inductive.................................................................................... The GX series can be used for direct fan control or interfaced to a DDC system via 4-20mA or user selectable 0-5/0-10 VDC output......................................... typical Physical: ............... Specifications General: Sensor: ............................... Audible............................................ 85dB........ ft................. -10°F to 125°F+ 10 to 90% RH non-condensing Coverage: ........................................................ and an audible alarm (85dB) that sounds if the CO level rises above 100 ppm for 30 minutes (per UL 2034)................................................................... Normal = Green LED.......................................................................................................S..................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .34 CO/CO2 Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ...........................I.............................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................... ZVCXD-SR CO2 Wall Mount Sensor w/LED Display ................ ZVCXW-SR CO2 Duct Mount Sensor ................................................................................................... ZVC100 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..................................................................................................................................D................................................................................ 0-2000 ppm Accuracy: .................................................... 100 mA maximum Material: ............................................................CO/CO2 CO2 Sensor Model CX 35 NEW! Description The Veris Alta Labs CX series of carbon dioxide sensors are designed for use in HVAC control applications......................................................................................................... +20 ppm Response Time: .......).......................................................................... people are the major source of CO2............................................................ Ideal ventilation is typically around 1000 ppm........................................................................................................... energy can be saved and tenant comfort improved............... The CX series utilizes non-dispersive infrared sensing (N................................................R....................................... < one minute Operating Temperature Range: ............................. Each unit offers field selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output and an optional relay output to trigger HVAC equipment and predetermined levels (e......... one/two position damper)..................... ZVCXD CO2 Duct Mount Sensor w/Setpoint Relay ....... 0-10 VDC or 4-20mA (field selectable) Input Voltage: . Versions are available for wall or duct applications.....................................................................................................................................................................................R........................................................... Typical outdoor levels of CO2 range from between 350 to 400 ppm.................................. By controlling fresh air to occupant need as determined by CO2 requirements..............) and digital electronics for stable performance.....................I...................... diffusion sampling Measurement Range: ............................................................................ Non-dispersive infrared (N...................................... ABS high impact plastic Ordering Information Item Part # CO2 Wall Mount Sensor .........................R....................I........................................................................................ technology........................................ The CX series ensures that adequate ventilation will be provided........................... 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) Analog Output: ..................... ZVCXL CO2 Wall Mount Sensor w/LED Display and Setpoint Relay ......................... A CO2 calibration kit is also available.............. ZVCXW CO2 Wall Mount Sensor w/Setpoint Relay .................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Sensor Type: ....................................................................................................................................................................................... With the use of N.......................................................................................................................................................................................D................................................D.................................................... +5% or 75 ppm (whichever is greater) Repeatability: .......................................................................................................................................... Inside buildings........... ZVCXL-SR CO2 Calibration Kit ............................. the units offer repeatability to +20 ppm over a range of 0-2000 ppm................................................................... 20 to 30 VAC/DC Sensor Current Draw: ................................................................................................................................................................ while maximizing energy savings by ventilating at the optimum level...........................................................................................................................................................................................g........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .36 CO/CO2 Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ............... 2............................................................................................................................................................ 2................................................................................................................................. Adjustable LED: ............................................ 1-135A 908/909: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ZVH-908 Veris Hawkeye 909 Split Core ( 0................... ZVH-709 Veris Hawkeye 908 Split Core (1....... Solid State.......90”W Amperage Range: 701/706/708/709: ............. and power and status LEDs for easy set-up..... ZVH-708 Veris Hawkeye 709 Solid Core ( 0.............................................................90”L x 0.......................................................................................................... 600VAC rms Trip Set-Point: ......................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ...... belt loss or slippage............................................................................................. Specifications General: Sensor Power: .....1A @ 30VDC 709/909: ........................................................................................................................................................................................575”W x 1........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ZVH-909 Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ................................................ Adj............................................................. 0...................................................................5 to 135A (ZVH-908)..........................................................1A @ 30VDC) ...................................................................0A @ 30VAC/DC) ....................................................................................................................................... N.................................................................................................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Veris Hawkeye 701 Solid Core (1............................................................... ZVH-701 Veris Hawkeye 706 Solid Core (0......................................................................................65W x 1................ 0.75” diameter 908/909: ..... Available in solid and split-core models............. and other mechanical failures...........5-135A Output Type: .............05”H 908/909: ............................................................................................04”H Sensor Hole Size: 701/706/708/709: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................C.............................................................2A @ 120VAC/DC Trip Point: ................................................................................................................. 2................................................... Power (Excluding 701) Certifications: .............................. pumps.......1A @ 30VAC/DC 706: .............................................. ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................................................................................................................................................................................... Trip...........................................................................................2A @ 120VAC/DC) ............. Positive fan or pump status is monitored by sensing changes in current flow resulting from motor failure............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........O....................................... motors and electrical loads for proper operation..............................................0A @ 30VAC/DC) .... 0................... Solid State (706) Output Rating: 701/708/908: ..................................................................................90”L x 2...........93”L x 2........................... to +1% of range Temperature Range: ........ UL/CUL................................................................................................................................................................................................................. these current switches have an adjustable set-point of 1 to 135A (ZVH-708) and 2....................................................................... They are more reliable than differential pressure switches as no fitting or tapping is required.............0A @ 30VAC/DC) .............. 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: 701/706/708/709: ................ 1............POWER MONITORING 37 Current Status Switches Models Hawkeye 708/908 Description The Veris Hawkeye 708/908 Series of current status switches monitor fans............................................................................................................................................ CSA certified............... ZVH-706 Veris Hawkeye 708 Solid Core (1............................................................................................................................. N...............2A @ 120VAC/DC) .............. 0...................................................... Induced Isolation: .................. 38 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ..........O............................................................................... The Model 717 offers the added features of adjustable 0....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Both units feature self-induced power for fast installation and an adjustable set-point from 2 to 135A......................................................... Status In-Rush Delay: ................................... ............................................................................C.......... Adj..................... 2A @ 120VAC continuous........................................................00”H Sensor Hole Size: ...... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: .......... 0..POWER MONITORING 39 Current Status Switches Models Hawkeye 715/717 Description The Veris Hawkeye 715/717 Series current status switch protects motors from overload conditions by switching most contactors directly.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (surge) LED: 715: ......................................... Adj................................................................ ZVH-715 Motor Protection/Load Switching (Overcurrent).............................................................................125”L x 2........................................................................ 600VAC rms Trip Set-Point: .......................... 2A @ 120VAC ............................................................... 2-135A........................... The 715 sensor trips when threshold is exceed thus helping to extend motor and tool life................................................................................... N..................................... 2A @ 120VAC ............................ transducer and output into a single unit.....15”W x 1.................... Specifications General: Isolation: .................................. The Hawkeye 715/717 Series combine a CT (current transformer).................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................ In-rush Delay.................................................... It is ideal for grinders.........................................................................................................................75” diameter Amperage Range: ....................... 715 & 717 Ordering Information Item Part # Motor Protection/Load Switching (Undercurrent)................................................................ 8A @ 120 for 2 sec.......... Setpoint................................................................................................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ................................... and machine tools.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. conveyors...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Setpoint..................................................................................................................... 717 Timed Lock Out: .......................................................... N................... 717 Set Point Adj:...Triac 717: ................ Status & Power 717: .................................. 2-135A..................... Adj..................... to +1% of range Temperature Range: .................................................................. 2 to 135A Output Type: 715: .......................................................... ZVH-717 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................................1 to 8 second in-rush ignore and a 180 second lock-out reset (Fixed).......................................................................................Triac Output Rating: .......................................... 3........................................................................................................................................................ 40 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2....................................................................................................................5-200A Output Type: ....................90”L x 2..................................................... Solid State Output Rating: ........................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ......................................................................................................................................................................................34”L x 1................................................................................................................................... and a mini solid core model that fits in tight enclosures.............................................................. 0.............................................................................................. The series offers a split core model for fast retrofit installation................................................................................................................................................................ ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............................................................................1A @ 30VAC/DC............................... N.......75” diameter Switch Turn-on Threshold: .. pumps and process motors....5 to 200A..................................................... Induced Isolation: ...........................90”W 800: ......................................................................................... 1...................................................................................................................................................................................5 to 200A..........................................................................................................................0A @ 30VAC/DC.............................. 1....................................................................................... 0...............................................................575”W x 1................................................................................0 A @30VAC/DC) .................POWER MONITORING 41 Current Status Switches Models Hawkeye 800/900 Description The Veris Hawkeye 800/900 Series of “Go/No” current switches provide on/off status for direct-drive fans.................................... ZVH-800-L Split Core................................................................................................................04”H 800: ......................5-200A 800: ............... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Solid Core....................................................... UL/CUL.................................1A @ 30VAC/DC and 1............................................................. ZVH-800 Solid Core.........................................................................1 A @30VAC/DC ............................................................................................................................................. 1...................................................................................................................................... 0.......................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ................................ 1.......... 0..............................................................................................5A (typical) Amperage Range: 900: ......... ZV800-BRKT Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ................................................................................................................................ 0.................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: 900: ........... ZVH-900 H 800 Mounting Bracket ......... 0........................................... 2............................. Versions are available with output ratings of 0...........................................................5A @30VAC/DC ....................87”H Sensor Hole Size: 900: ...O..................... They are more reliable for status than relays across auxiliary contacts........... 0...............5 to 200A............................... Specifications General: Sensor Power: ................................0A @ 30VAC/DC Certifications: ............................................................................. 0.................................................................................90”L x ...... 600VAC rms Temperature Range: ...........80”W x .............................................................................................................................. 1...................................................................................... 42 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . .......................... N............. ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................... 2.........................................................................................................................................................90”L x 2......................................................................................... Specifications General: Sensor Power: ......................................................................................................... Solid State Output Rating: ........................................................................................ 3........................................................................ Self-calibrating Temperature Range: ........... 3.............................................................................................................................90”H Amperage Range: .......................................................... The 904 senses changes in current flow resulting from motor failure.................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: ........ belt loss or slippage and other mechanical failures........................... 0....... 5 to 34Hz (on/off status) Trip Set-Point: .................................... Self-Calibrating.....90”L x ..... Self Calibrating LED: .......................................................................................... The split core design of the 904 is ideal for retrofits as there is no need to remove the conductor.......................................................................................1A @ 30 VAC/DC .......................04”H Sensor Hole Size: ...........................................................O.....................................................................................................................................................................................575”W x 1........................................................................................................................................................................ It automatically compensates for effects of frequency and amperage changes associated with VFDs........................................................................................5-135A Output Type: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Status Certifications: .................................... ZVH-904 Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ...........................................5-135A.............. UL/CUL.................................................................................POWER MONITORING 43 Current Status Switches Model Hawkeye 904 Description The Veris Hawkeye 904 is a microprocessor based current switch that selfcalibrates to changing loads and automatically monitors for positive fan or pump status........................................................ 600VAC rms Frequency Range: ............................................................... it self-grips on wire thus eliminating drilling in “hot” enclosures......................... In addition....................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Microprocessor Based......................................................................................... Induced Isolation: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34 to 75Hz (belt loss indication)..................................................................................................... 1........................................... Status LED.......................................................................................................................................................................................1A @ 30VAC/DC Calibration: ........................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ...................................................................................... 0...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .44 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ........................POWER MONITORING 45 Current Status Switches Model 5000 Series Description The Veris Hawkeye 5000 Series consists of 2 or 4-point remote status panels............................................................................................................ZVH-5804C Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................... reed relay.................................................080”H Model 5004: Number of points accepted: .......................................................................................................... 24VAC/DC Supply Current: ......................................................................................................ZVH-5802C 4-zone Kit: (2) H-5800 Mini Sensors & (1) H-5004 Remote Panel .... 200mA @ 30VAC/DC. N.................................. Dimensions: ...............................................................................................875”H Sensor Hole Size: ....................................................................................................... 2-zone ...................................... The technician can quickly adjust up to four sensors at one location and eliminate “run-around time................................................................................................................. 25mA max......” Trouble-shooting time can also be reduced as status is displayed at your panel and not hidden away in “hot” starter boxes..................... ZVH-5004 Mini Sensor for ZVH-5002 & ZVH-5004 Remote Panels ..............................................75”W x 1.... ..................................................................... The 2-zone controller is ideal for common supply and return fans while the 4-zone controller works great in all multi-point fan/pump room applications....................................................................... UL/CUL.. 50mA @ 120VAC Certifications: ..................................... 4................................................................................................... 1 to 4 sensors Supply Voltage: .. ZVH-5800 2-zone Kit: (2) H-5800 Mini Sensors & (1) H-5002 Remote Panel .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Specifications General: 5800 Mini-Sensor: Amperage Ratings: ................................................................................................... 0................................................... 50mA max............................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 24VAC/DC Supply Current: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................70” Dia.................. Output Rating (both): ................................. .................................................................................................85”W x 0..........................................................080”H Temperature Range: ........................ 4-zone ............................................................... thus allowing for complete checkout with one technician equipped with a remote terminal at the panel............................................................................................. 1 to 100A continuous Dimensions: ............................................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................................375”W x 1.................................... 3.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0 to 95% non-condensing Output Type (both): ....... ZVH-5002 Remote Panel........ Dry Contact............................................................................................ ...................................... conveniently located at your control panel................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Remote Panel............................................................................................ 1 or 2 sensors Supply Voltage: .............29”L x 1...........................................................................................................................125”L x 2.......................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ............................................................................................................................25”L x 2..................... Dimensions: ...........O........................................................... Remote Panel: Model 5002: Number of points accepted: ......................................................... 2............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 46 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ................................................ or stand alone............................. Fixed Trip Set-point (H548): ........................................................................ “Go/No” ................ 0........... Set-point w/Locked Rotor and Belt Loss Loss in One Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................................. ZVH-540 Remote Current Switch w/Command Relay & Hands-off Auto Switch.................................................. 1.......................... Installation costs are reduced as teh functionality of three products (command relay... Induced Isolation: ......................................................................25-20A................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... “Go/No” w/Locked Rotor and Belt Loss Loss in One Sensor ................................................................................ 4............................................................................................................................................................................. 50/60 Hz Trip Set-point (H540): ..................................... True override status is provided with theintegral HOA switch as the H500 is wired in series with the hot wire of the starter............................5-20A............................... Adj........................... Relay Power Frequency Range: ........................5-16A Sensor Output: ........................................................0A @ 30VAC/DC LED: H540: ................................................ 0........................... 0................................................................................................ current status switch............... 0........................ and HOA switch) are combined in a single package that can be mounted on an existing 2 or 4 gang junction box....................................................................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Remote Current Switch w/Command Relay & Hands-off Auto Switch...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: .................................................................................. controlling and troubleshooting the control wiring of fractional horsepower loads............................................... 16mA nominal Sensor Amperage Range: ............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................. Specifications General: Sensor Power: .............................................250L x1......................................................... 0............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ZVH-548 Remote Current Switch w/Command Relay & Hands-off Auto Switch.................. Relay Power H548: ......................................................530”W x 4.................................................................................................................. Set-point ............. -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ........................5-20A...................25-20A.............. ZVH-540-L Remote Current Switch w/Command Relay & Hands-off Auto Switch........................................................................... flush to a starter enclosure...................................................................................... UL/CUL ............................ Adj.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ZVH-548-L Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................................................................................................................250”H Relay Coil: ......POWER MONITORING Motor Control Switches Model Hawkeye 500 Series 47 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 500 Series combine an industrial grade load switching relay........... 250 VAC Temperature Range: ............................................................................................. such as exhaust fans and unit ventilators................................................ Adjustable Certifications: .......................................................... current status switch and Hand-Off-Auto switch (HOA) in an easy to install remote enclosure making them ideal for monitoring........................................ Sensor Trip........................................ 48 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Mounting Options 2-Gang Junction Box 4-Gang Junction Box Directly on Wall or Panel Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ...............................................................0A@30 VAC/DC.................... Coil:24 VAC/DC............O........... 1.......................................................... 1/3HP............................. N.............................................. 10mA....................................................................... making it ideal for fan and pump status......... 16mA.............................................................................................................................. ZVH-758 Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC............. N............. Coil:12 VDC......................0A @ 30VAC/DC 739-759 ............................................................ Specifications General: Sensor Power: ..... 10mA............................ UL/CUL ...................................... ZVH-748 Contact: SPDT 8(3.............. ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................O............................................................................... Coil:24 VAC/DC....................... 1-135A Sensor Output Type & Rating: 735 ... Status Output:1............................................................................ Coil:24 VAC/DC..... Solid State .......................O.. 1/3HP...................... N............................................................................................................2A@120 VAC/DC.................................... 12 VDC 16mA Sensor Amperage Range: .................................................................................................................... N........................................ Coil:24 VAC/DC..............2A@120 VAC/DC............................. Solid State 0.... Solid State 1................ 758/759 .. 10mA.................................... 10mA......................................... N...................................... ZVH-738 Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC......... ZVH-739 Contact: SPDT 8(3..................... 0..........0A@30 VAC/DC...90L x 2......... reducing the space required for total control of fans and pumps.......................................................................... Status Output: 1................................... 16mA.............. 1/3HP............................................................................................................................................................ Status Output: 1...... Coil:12 VDC.................O..1A@30 VAC/DC .......................... 1/3HP..................................... Coil:24 VAC/DC.......................... 1/3HP....................90”W Relay Coil: 735-749 ......................................................................... Status Output: 0................................................................................................................................................. Status Output: 0..................................... 24VAC/DC...... 1/3HP.......................... N...................... ZVH-759 Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ................ 1/3HP....... Sensor Trip.... Status Output:0.............................................................. The current switch provides a status level signal to the automation system while the relay provides a contact output capable of switching almost any contactor....................................................1A @ 30VAC/DC 738-758 ................................................................ It detects belt loss and motor failure...................O................................... Solid State ....................................O. 600VAC rms Temperature Range: ......................................................POWER MONITORING Motor Control Switches Models Hawkeye 735/759 49 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 735/759 combine the status and starting functions into a single package................................................................................... Set Point LED: .O........ Solid State .... Solid State .............. -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ............................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ ZVH-749 Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC.................. 2............................2A@120 VAC/DC.... The 735/759 is designed to replace pressure switches and other electromechanical devices...............5)@250VAC 30 VDC.............................0A@30 VAC/DC....................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC............. Induced Isolation: ........5)@250VAC 30 VDC.......................................... Status Output: 0......................................... Relay Power Certifications: .......................................90L x ................................... Solid State ................................................... N.............04”H Sensor Hole Size: .............................O.......................... 10mA............ 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: ............................................................... N....................... Solid State ...................57”W x 1.....................................................2A @ 120VAC/DC Adjustment: ....... ZVH-735 Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC............................................................ 10mA nom................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .50 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ........................................................................................ 10mA............ 600VAC rms Temperature Range: ............................................................................................ 16mA................................. UL/CUL......................... 1/3HP............................90”L x 2............................................................................................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ........................................................................................................................... ZVH-930 Contact: SPDT 8(3................. 2...1A@30 VAC/DC ...........90”H LED: ........ Status Output: 0..........575”W x 1..................................................................................................90”W x ............................................................................................ Induced from line Isolation: ..... 1................................ The 24VAC/DC command relay switches up to 10A @ 250VAC......................... Sensor Trip and Relay Power Certifications: ................................................................................................................................ Coil:24 VAC/DC.............................................................................................. The device’s unique self gripping split core clamps on the motor conductor for fast and easy installation................................................ ZVH-950 Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ........................ Coil:12 VDC...................................................................................... 12 VDC 16mA Dimensions: ................................................................................................ 1/3HP......................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Relay Coil: 930/940 ........................................................................................................... 1/3HP......................................................................................................................1A@30 VAC/DC ......... pumps and process motors.................................................................................................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC....................................................................................................... ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...........5)@250VAC 30 VDC..............................................................1A@30 VAC/DC ............................................ 24VAC/DC 10mA 950 ............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................POWER MONITORING Motor Control Switches Models Hawkeye 930/950 51 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 930/950 combines an on/off status switch and command relay for direct-drive fans............................................................................................................. Coil:24 VAC/DC...................... ZVH-940 Contact: SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30 VDC................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Sensor Power: ..... Status Output: 0................................04”H Sensor Hole Size: .................. Status Output: 0................................... 10mA............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .52 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram 1 Wire Terminal #1 to Starter 2 Wire Terminal #2 to Status In 3 Wire Terminal #3 to Digital Out Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ................................................................................................................................... Self-calibrating Humidity: ...............................5-135A................. Temperature Range: .......................................... 5-34Hz (on/off status) Amperage Range: ............................................... 24VAC/DC 15mA nom.................................... Self-calibrating Combo........................ 5(3)A @ 250VAC/30VDC............................................O................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Induced from line Isolation: .................................................................................................... 1..........................90”L x ........................................................................................................................................................................ ZVH-934 Din Rail Mounting Clip ............................ Solid State 0....04”H Sensor Hole Size: ...............................................1A @ 30VAC/DC Relay Output: ............................................................................................................................ 1/8 HP ............................................................................................................................... UL/CUL................. ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...............................................................................................................POWER MONITORING 53 Motor Control Switches Model Hawkeye 934 Description The Veris Hawkeye 934 is a self-calibrating microprocessor based current switch with a command relay................................... just clip it on the line and go...............................................................90”W Relay Coil: ........... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: ................(belt loss indication)...................................................................................................90”L x 2......... 3.... 2................................................................................................................................................. N............................................................O................................................. motors controlled by variable frequency drives.......O...................................... Specifications General: Sensor Power: .............. Self Calibrating LED: ......................................................................................................................... 1/8 HP Calibration: ................................................................................................................... No calibration is required.. and starting/stopping..... The self-calibrating current switch is designed for monitoring status of............................................ Relay Output: N........................ Relay Power Certifications: ..... 0...................... 3.......................................................................... It is factory programmed to detect belt loss on variable frequency drives or constant volume systems............... Sensor Trip......................................1 A @ 30VAC/DC.. 34 to 75Hz.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................ CE Ordering Information Item Part # Microprocessor-based........................................................... Switch/Command Relay.........575”W x1....................................................................................................................... 600VAC rms Trip Set-Point: .......... The 24VAC/DC command relay switches up to 5A @ 240VAC.................................................................................................................................................. -15° to 60°C Frequency Range: .......................................................................................................................................................................... making it perfect for fan and pump status....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5(3)A @ 250VAC/30VDC..........5-135A Output Type/Rating: ......... N.................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .54 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram 1 Wire Terminal #1 to Starter 2 Wire Terminal #2 to Status In 3 Wire Terminal #3 to Digital Out Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. POWER MONITORING Motor Control Switches Models Hawkeye 938/959 55 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 938/959 is a self gripping split-core with command relay for start/stop and status. It is designed to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads for proper operation. Specifications General: Sensor Power: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Induced from line Isolation: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 600VAC rms Temperature Range: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Relay Coil: 938-949 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24VAC/DC 10mA 958/959 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 VDC 16mA Dimensions: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2.90”L x 2.575”W x 1.04”H Sensor Hole Size: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1.90”W x .90”H Output Type/Rating: 938-958 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ N.O., Solid State 1.0A @ 30VAC/DC, 939-959 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... N.O., Solid State 0.2A @ 120VAC/DC LED: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Sensor Trip; Relay Power Certifications: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... UL/CUL, CE Ordering Information Item Part # SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 10mA, Status Ouput: 1.0A@30VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State ........................ ZVH-938 SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 10mA, Status Ouput: 0.2A@120VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State ...................... ZVH-939 SPDT 8(3.5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 10mA, Status Ouput: 1.0A@30VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State ...................... ZVH-948 SPDT 8(3.5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 10mA, Status Ouput: 0.2A@120VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State .................... ZVH-949 SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 16mA, Status Ouput: 1.0A@30VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State ........................ ZVH-958 SPST 10(5)@250VAC 30VDC, 1/3HP; Coil 24VAC/DC, 16mA, Status Ouput: 0.2A@120VAC/DC,N.O. Solid State ...................... ZVH-959 Din Rail Mounting Clip ...................................................................................................................................................... ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 56 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram 1 Wire Terminal #1 to Starter 2 Wire Terminal #2 to Status In 3 Wire Terminal #3 to Digital Out Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 POWER MONITORING 57 Analog Current Sensors Models Hawkeye 221/321/421 Description The Veris Hawkeye 221/321/421 are high amperage split-core analog current sensors. They are designed to monitor large motors and other loads (up to 2400A), with a proportional 4-20mA signal, thus eliminating the need for external CTs on large conductors. The two wire design of the 221, 321, and 421 reduces wiring costs. Span adjustment is featured for easy set-up and high resolution. Specifications General: Amperage Range: 221: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 100 to 300 (span) 321: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 300 to 800 (span) 421: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1000 to 2400 (span) Output Type: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Sensor Supply Voltage: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 to 30VDC Sensor Supply Current: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30mA max. Isolation: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 600VAC rms Frequency Range: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60Hz nominal Accuracy: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.0% of all scales Temperature Range: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Certifications: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... (221 & 321) UL/CUL, CE Ordering Information Item Part # 100 to 300A; 4-20mA Output .......................................................................................................................................................... ZVH-221 300 to 800A; 4-20mA Output .......................................................................................................................................................... ZVH-321 1000 to 2400A; 4-20mA Output ...................................................................................................................................................... ZVH-421 Universal Mounting Bracket ................................................................................................................................................. ZVKT/CT-BRKT Universal Power Supply .................................................................................................................................................................. ZVPS-24 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 58 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagrams Sinking Panel (+ Common) Sourcing Panel (- Common) Dimensional Drawings Model ZVH221 A 3.75” (95mm) B 1.51”(38mm) C 1.25”(32mm) D 1.13”(29mm) E 3.91”(99mm) F 4.75”(121mm) ZVH321 4.90” (124mm) 2.89” (73mm) 2.45” (62mm) 1.13” (29mm) 5.20” (132mm) 5.91” (150mm) ZVH421 4.90” (124mm) 5.50” (140mm) 2.45” (62mm) 1.13” (29mm) 7.88” (200mm) 5.92” (150mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 POWER MONITORING 59 Analog Current Sensors Model Hawkeye 720 Description The Veris Hawkeye 720 analog current sensor, with its high accuracy 4-20mA output, is ideal for variable frequency drives (VFD). It is accurate to 0.5% full scale and may be used on the VFD load side. The 720 combines a sensor and a transducer in an easy to install package. It provides adjustable zero and span for precise scaling. Specifications General: Amperage Ratings: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0 to 200A Continuous Amperage Range: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 to 200A Output Type: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Sensor Supply Voltage: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12 to 30VDC Supply Current: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30mA max. Isolation: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 600VAC rms Frequency Range: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 to 80Hz (+1%) Zero Adjustment: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3.5 to 4.5mA Span Adjustment: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 to 200A, full scale Accuracy: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.5% Response Time: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 150mSec Temperature Range: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3.13”L x 2.15”W x 1.00”H Sensor Hole Size: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 0.75” Certifications: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... UL/CUL, CE Ordering Information Item Part # 20 to 200A; 4-20mA Output ............................................................................................................................................................ ZVH-720 Universal Power Supply .................................................................................................................................................................. ZVPS-24 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 60 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ....................................... ZVH-721 Split Core.................................................................................................................................................. 4-20mA Isolation: ............................. +2% of reading from 0-10% of full scale Temperature Range: ......................... Specifications General: Amperage Range: 721: .................................................................................................. 120A (span) 931: ........... UL/CUL.......045”H Sensor Hole Size: 721: .......................................................................................................................... The H931 features an integral command relay for start/stop applications................................................................................................ ZVH-931 Din Rail Mounting Clip ............... 4-20mA Output . 600VAC rms Frequency Range: ........................................... Loop Powered..............................................................90”L x 2.............90”L x 0................................................................90”W Certifications: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Current Sensor/Command Relay......................................................................................................... 30/60/120A......................................60............................................................... 0-5 to 55A (span) 921: .................................................................................................................... 4-20mA Output ........................................................ 4-20mA Output ..... 0-30.................................................................. Loop Powered.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-30...... -15°C to 60°C Humidity Range: ................ 120A Output Type: ...................................................13”L x 2.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................00”H 921/931: ...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .... 60Hz nominal Accuracy: 721: ...................................................................................15”W x 1................................75” 921/931: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 30/60/120A.... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Solid Core...................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Dimensions: 721: ................................................................................................................................ +2% of reading from 10-100% of full scale 921/931: ........... ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... 5 to 55A....................................................................................................................... 3.................................................................................................................. 921 and 931 provide accurate load trending information with a proportional 4-20mA output signal........................................................................ ZVH-921 Split Core.. 2................................................................... 0....................................... 60.............. Combo..........................................................................POWER MONITORING 61 Analog Current Sensors Models Hawkeye 721/921/931 Description The Veris Hawkeye 721....................................................................................................................... 1................................... Loop Powered........................575”W x 1............. 62 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram 1 Wire Terminal #1 to Starter 2 Wire Terminal #2 to Status In 3 Wire Terminal #3 to Digital Out Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ................................ -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: .......................................................................................................................................................................... The 722 featuers a span adjustment potentionmeter for maximum resolution............................................................................................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........ 0-5 VDC............... 10 to 60A ........................................................................................................................ 60Hz nominal Accuracy: 722: ...................................................................................................................................................................... 0......................................................... 0-5 VDC.................... 24VAC/DC 15mA nom................................................................. 1............................ 30/60/120A ........................................... ZVH-932 Din Rail Mounting Clip Set ..........................................................................................................................................................................POWER MONITORING 63 Analog Current Sensors Models Hawkeye 722/922/932 Description The Veris Hawkeye 722....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 922 and 932 analog current sensors are self powered devices that provide accurate load trending information with a proportional 05VDC output signal...............................................90”L x ....................................... 120A) for high resolution and installation ease.................. The 932 features an integral command relay for start/stop applications..........................................................................................................750” 922: .................. +2% full scale from 0-10% of full scale Temperature Range: ................................................................... ZVH700/900-DIN Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................. 0-5VDC Isolation: ............ 0-5 VDC. 600VAC rms Frequency Range: ........ +2% of reading from 10-100% of full scale range 922/932: ..................... 30/60/120A Output Type: .............................................................03”H 922/932: ......................................................04”H Sensor Hole Size: 722: ................................................................. UL/CUL................................ Self-Powered....................... 0-95% non-condensing Relay Coil: ..................................................................................................................................................... Combo.................................................................................................................................................. Dimensions: 722: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Self-Powered....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 to 60A 922/932: ........................................ 2.... 30/60/120A .................................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # Solid Core......... 60................................................................ Self-Powered.................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Amperage Range: 722: .........................................................................90”W Certifications: ........... ZVH-922 Split Core.................................................................................................................95”L x 2......................................................575”W x 1............................................................................................................................................... Current Sensor/Command Relay.....................68”W x 1.......... ZVH-722 Split Core.......... 2........................................................................90”L x 2................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Factory calibrated switch selectable ranges (30............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .64 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings 1 Wire Terminal #1 to Starter 2 Wire Terminal #2 to Status In 3 Wire Terminal #3 to Digital Out Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. .......................... NOTE: To interface with 5A CTs............................................................................ 0...................25”W x 4............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 240............................................... Pulse rate output is also field selectable to match the requirements of virtually all automation panels and data loggers.........0”D Model ZVH-6005 (no enclosure dimensions): ... The 6000 Series accepts three Veris 1........................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................... 9....................conduit knock outs.............................................................................................................................................. CSA Certified (6005-UL Recognized) Ordering Information Item Part # Base Unit.. 480 or 600VAC (other ranges........................ N........................................................................................................................................... The instantaneous power (kW) of all three phases is summed and converted to an industry standard 4-20mA output signal for use in demand management (load shedding) applications............................... departmental costing in manufacturing facilities and power monitoring for tool wear and process control...................................... Provide 10-30VDC power supply Pulse Output: ........................................... Opto FET............................ It is ideal for applications such as energy management and performance contracting.............................. 2500VAC rms Analog Output: ............................ compressors...... 120.......................................................................................... 0 to 2400A (sized by CT............... 1..................................................................................... hinged door System Accuracy: ............................................................. kW range is determined by the ampere ranges of the CTs used to provide the input current signal................................................................... CE......................................................................................................................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Enclosure Dimensions: ............................................................... 8............................................ 277................................................................................................................................ The transducer also accumulates this instantaneous value over time and produces a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH).... NEMA type 1................................................. or individual loads (chillers..................33”D Enclosure Construction (except model 6005): ........... kW/kWH Transducer in Nema 1 Enclosure ... etc.................................. 100mA @ 24VAC/DC Low Voltage Alarm Trip-Point: .......................... 208.............................................................................. submetering for commercial tenants...... The transducer multiplies the input current signal and voltage input for each phase to calculate true RMS power....................................... 0.......................... rated current of the CT’s Certifications: .................................................. consult factory for higher amperages) Amperage Input: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 100mA @ 24VAC/DC Pulse Rate (field selectable): ...............................0V Safe CTs ONLY (consult factory for 0-5A output CT retrofit interface) Voltage Range (field selectable): ............. selected area....................................................... 4-20mA................................... N......... Opto FET...... ZVH-6002 Base Unit & kW/kWH LCD Displays .............................44”W x 2.........................................................................................................................).... 0..........C............. consult factory) Isolation: ................................................................................0V current transformer inputs and three direct connect voltage inputs..... NEMA 1 Temperature Range: ....... Specifications General: Amperage Ratings: ..................................... consult factory......... -15° to 40°C Humidity Range: .................... ZVH-6004 Base Unit Less Nema 1 Enclosure (for mounting in field enclosure) ...... Adj...... +1% from 10% to 100% of the max.................................50”L x 5..5..........05 pulse/kWh Phase loss/low voltage alarm output rating: .................................................... ZVH-6005 Universal Power Supply .................................POWER MONITORING 65 Power Transducers Model 6000 Series Description The Veris 6000 Series is a one to three phase industrial grade automation system compatible kW/kWH transducer.................................................................................1..............................................................................................5”L x 8................. See page 77................................................................... The frequency of the output pulses is proportional to the total power consumed and can be used to measure energy usage for an entire building... 75-95% Sealing: ........................................................................................................ 1................................................... ZVPS-24 Note: Order CTs separately........................................................... ZVH-6001 Base Unit & kWH LCD Display .................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.....................................O................................................ Steel....................... UC/CUL...... 66 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram 2 1 Veris Safe Split Core CTs-1. 7 For voltage output. 5 7 4 Undervoltage/phase loss percentage set-point. Observe polarity (color coding) of wiring for CTs.0V output. or 500Ω for 2 to 10V] NOTE: Consult factory for single phase installation. Orient CT arrow towards load. 4 6 Non-polarity sensitive 4-20 mA loop. Observe panel polarity. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . [250Ω for 1 to 5V. 5 Pulse rate selection per automation system. 2 Fuse or breaker per NEC. 6 3 3 Select desired line voltage up to 600 VAC. 1 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. install resistor at automation panel. ....................................................................................................................................... hinged door................................. NEMA type ........................ and building automation submetering applications..............................................................................................POWER MONITORING 67 Power Transducers Model 6010 Series Submeters/Pulse Meters Description The Veris 6014/6015 are 10 ohm to 30 ohm power (kWH) submeters/transducers designed for use in industrial commercial............. Safe CT design improves safety............................... Steel.................................. They utilize safe low voltage output CTs and direct wired voltage inputs (no expensive voltage transformers required)................................ Opto FET. Order 300A............................................. kWH meter display and kWH pulse outputs are standard................................................................. Specifications General: Amperage Ratings: ............... NEMA 1 Temperature Range: ............ 120VAC..................................................................... CE Ordering Information Item Part # kWH Meter w/Pulse Output..................................................................................... N..............................................................................................................................................................................................................75”D Enclosure Construction: ............. 1 pulse/kWH Sealing: ........................................................................... or 2400A only..................................................0V Safe CTs ONLY (Consult factory for 0-5A output CT retrofit interface) Voltage Ranges: 6014: ............................................................................................................................................................................. See page 77....................................................................................... lock hasp System Accuracy: ........................................................................... 1. 120VAC 6015: ............................................................................................................................................................................. Consult factory for higher amperages) Amperage Input: ........................ 0-2400A (sized by CT..................................O........................................ 2500VAC rms Pulse Output: ............................................ -15° to 40°C Humidity Range: ........................................................................... 6.................. ZVH-6015 Note: Order CTs separately................. UL/CUL....................................................................................................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................... +1% from 10-100% of the maximum rated current of the CT’s Certifications: ....................................... 100mA @ 24VAC/DC Pulse Rate: ................................................................................... conduit knock outs...................................................5”L x 4.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 208-480VAC ................................................................................. eliminating the need for costly external shorting bars..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................875”W x 2............................................. 208 to 480VAC Isolation: .................................................................................................................. ZVH-6014 kWH Meter w/Pulse Output................ 800A................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................ 0-95% non-condensing Enclosure Dimensions: ............... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .68 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ................ Power factor........................... Apparent power............. Size CTs ........ ZVH8036-1600-4 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter................ Power factor................................................................ 400................. kW......................... Large Size CTs .......com/modus/ (*) Other protocols available............. Med............. 400 Amp Range............................ 0° to 60° C Humidity Range: .. ØC†..... Small Size CTs ............................................................. ZVH8036-0300-2 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter.................................................................................................. Large Size CTs ........................................... 300 Amp Range............... Minimum demand..... ZVH8035-0400-3 Modbus Energy Meter.............................................................. kWH........................... Large Size CTs ........ ØA to Netrual†.......... making them ideal for power monitoring and diagnostics.... +1.. Small Size CTs ......................................................................... ZVH8036-0100-2 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter............................................ Voltage................................................ Size CTs ................ Small Size CTs ................................................................................ ............................................................. Voltage. There are two application specific platforms to choose from................... Voltage... 50/60 Hz Maximum Primary Current: ...................................... kW................................ 100 Amp Range.............. These power meters combine power metering electronics and high accuracy industrial grade CTs in a single package eliminating the need for external electronic enclosures............................................................. ØA†.......................................... 2 wire plus shield Baud Rate: ...........................................................0% (ANSI C12............ Amps... Large Size CTs ....................... ZVH8035-0300-2 Modbus Energy Meter....................................... 2000 VAC rms Case Insulation: ...............................................................................1) Output physical characteristics: ......................................................................... 100 Amp Range.......................................................veris............................. Amps............................. 1600 Amp Range.............. Med.. Amps............................. 300 Amp Range......Consumption.......................................................................................................................................... 2400 Amp Range........ Current ØC **Detailed protocol specifications are available at: http://www.................................................................. kVAR............ Med................................................................................... Size CTs ................................................................................... kW.......................... ZVH8035-0800-4 Modbus Energy Meter.... ZVH8035-0100-2 Modbus Energy Meter................................................................................. ØC to Netrual†.................................. Average demand............ 800 Amp Range. line to neutral †........................................................................................................................................ ØB to ØC.... kw............................... 208 to 480 VAC rms Number of Phases Monitored: ............................................................... 600 VAC rms Temperature Range: ................... 2400 amps H8035 Data Output Specifications: .................................................. Reactive power......... ØA to ØC............................................................ Voltage............POWER MONITORING Power Meters Models 8035/8036 69 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 8035/8036’s are three phase networked (Modbus RTU) power meters used for energy services metering/submetering in commercial and industrial applications............... Voltage........... Large Size CTs ..................... Please consult factory † Based on derived neutral voltage Ordering Information Item Part # Modbus Energy Meter....... Demand H8036 Data Output Specifications: ....................................................... Current ØA.................. ZVH8035-1600-4 Modbus Energy Meter....... Specifications General: Input Primary Voltage: ... RS 485................................... ØB to Netrual†............... per phase Internal Isolation: ............... 2400 Amp Range... Average current................................................................ ZVH8036-0800-3 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter........... 1600. 800 Amp Range.................... 1600 Amp Range..................................................... Power factor................ Demand............................... VA......... Up to 2400 amps cont.......... 400 Amp Range....................... line to line............................................................ Modbus RTU**(*) Current Transformer: .................................... Demand ØC†......................................... Demand ØA†............ kVA................... Voltage......... ZVH8036-0800-4 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... ØA to ØB..................... ØB†................................................................................................. Split core.................... Med...... ZVH8035-2400-4 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter................................................... 100.. 300....................................... ZVH8036-2400-4 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... Size CTs .......... 0-95% non-condensing Accuracy: ............................... Consumption........ Power factor..... The Enercept Enhanced Data Stream meters (H8036) output 26 energy variables including kVAR..... ZVH8035-0800-3 Modbus Energy Meter...................... One or Three Frequency: ......................................... The Enercept Energy Meters (H8035) are ideal for submetering applications where only kW (demand) and kWH (consumption) are required.................................................................... 800 Amp Range............................... Demand ØB†........................ kWH...................... Voltage........................................ Voltage........ 800........... 800 Amp Range............ and power factor... Maximum demand.......................................................................................... ZVH8036-0400-3 Modbus Enhanced Data Stream Meter....... kW.......... Small Size CTs ......................... Large Size CTs .................... 13” (29mm) 7.50” (140mm) 2.25”(32mm) D 1. Installation Typical 240 VAC 1Ø.90” (124mm) 5.45” (62mm) 1.45” (62mm) 1.88” (200mm) 5.13” (29mm) 5.92” (150mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.20” (132mm) 5.13”(29mm) E 3. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .75” (95mm) B 1.70 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Typical 208 or 480 VAC 3Ø.89” (73mm) 2.90” (124mm) 2.91” (150mm) Large 800Amp/1600Amp/2400Amp (-4) 4.91”(99mm) F 4.51”(38mm) C 1.75”(121mm) Medium 400Amp/800Amp (-3) 4. 3-Wire Installation Dimensional Drawings Model Small 100Amp/300Amp (-2) A 3. ..................................... CT Size Large............................................................. Split Core Power Transducers.... Three Phase 208/240 VAC...................................... CT Size Small ..................................... Single Phase 480 VAC.............................. 300A.............. 100A............................. CT Size Large ....... 4-20mA Supply Power (loop): ........................... Split Core Power Transducers........................................................ ZVH8043-0800-3 Self-contained....................................... Up to 2400 amps cont................... Single Phase 208/240 VAC......................2400A.......... Max...... CT Size Medium .1600A............................ Max...................................... CT Size Large .. ZVH8043-0400-3 Self-contained......................... 300A.................... ZVH8043-1600-4 Self-contained...................... Max............................................................ Max............. Split Core Power Transducers...... 50/60 Hz Maximum Primary Current: ......................................................... Split Core Power Transducers..... 0° to 60° C Humidity Range: ..... CT Size Small .. CT Size Medium ............................... CT Size Small . CT Size Small .............. ZVH8042-0300-2 Self-contained.............................................................................................. Split Core Power Transducers.... Split Core Power Transducers................ 1600........... 800. Single Phase 480 VAC. Models designed for balanced loads include one CT only..................... Split Core Power Transducers... ZVH8043-0300-2 Self-contained...................... Single Phase 208/240 VAC..................... 800A............. Max............................ +1........... 2000 VAC rms Case Insulation: ....................... Single Phase 208/240 VAC......................... Three Phase 208/240 VAC.... ZVH8041-0800-4 Self-contained.............. ZVH8043-0800-4 Self-contained....................................... making them ideal for monitoring electrical power in commercial and industrial facilities using industry standard 4-20mA output... 800A.. Split Core Power Transducers..... Single Phase 208/240 VAC.... ZVH8043-2400-4 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...... ZVH8041-0100-2 Self-contained......................... Max... Three Phase 208/240 VAC...................... ZVH8041-0400-3 Self-contained................................................................ Current Transformer: ............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................. Single Phase 480 VAC.................... 800A........... 800A............... Max...... Max....................................... Split Core Power Transducers.......... ZVH8041-2400-4 Self-contained....... Split Core Power Transducers. 208 pr 480 VAC rms Number of Phases Monitored: ............... Split Core Power Transducers....... ZVH8043-0100-2 Self-contained.......... 100A....... CT Size Medium . Single Phase 480 VAC... Max...... 400........ CT Size Large.............. ZVH8042-2400-4 Self-contained.............................................................................................................................. Max................ Three Phase 208/240 VAC........................... 100A............................. Single Phase 208/240 VAC................................................................... Single Phase 208/240 VAC................ Max.................. CT Size Large ........ 600 VAC rms Temperature Range: .............. The unique design of the 8040 Series tranducers reduces the number of installed components............................ 800A...... Split Core Power Transducers... Three Phase 208/240 VAC. Max............. per phase Internal Isolation: ......................... Three Phase 208/240 VAC........................... Split Core Power Transducers................. Single Phase 480 VAC... ZVH8042-0400-3 Self-contained............. ZVH8041-0300-2 Self-contained....................................... 30mA max...... Max................................ CT Size Large.............................. Split Core Power Transducers...............................0% Output: ..................... Split core.........................................1600A.......... kW (Demand) 71 NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 8040 Series kW (power demand) transducers combine processing electronics and industrial grade CT(s) in an easy to install split-core package...............................1600A..... Split Core Power Transducers.. ZVH8042-0800-3 Self-contained......................2400A.......... CT Size Large .............. Split Core Power Transducers........... 400A...... 9-30 VDC................... Split Core Power Transducers... 400A.................................... Single Phase 480 VAC....................... CT Size Small ....... ZVH8042-0100-2 Self-contained.. CT Size Small ............ Split Core Power Transducers....... Single Phase 480 VAC. Max........................................ One or Three Frequency: ................POWER MONITORING Power Transducers Model 8040 Series........................... 100............... ZVH8041-1600-4 Self-contained.................... Specifications General: Input Primary Voltage: ......... ZVH8042-0800-4 Self-contained....... ZVH8042-1600-4 Self-contained............................... 2400 amps Ordering Information Item Part # Self-contained..... Max........................... 300..... ZVH8041-0800-3 Self-contained................. 300A............................. 800A..................2400A............... CT Size Medium ................................. Three Phase 208/240 VAC............................. Single Phase 208/240 VAC............... Max........................ 0-95% non-condensing Accuracy: .............. Max...................................... CT Size Medium ............................................. CT Size Large ....................... Max.......... Split Core Power Transducers............................ CT Size Large.................. Max................ Split Core Power Transducers.................................... Max...................... while models for unbalanced loads have three... Max................. CT Size Medium ............. 400A...................................................................... Split Core Power Transducers....... . 400A.1kW ZVH8044-0800-4 665.. ZVH8044-0400-3 Self-contained..6kW ZVH8044-0100-2 83...1kW ZVH8044-1600-4 1330kW 1330kW ZVH8044-2400-4 1995kW 1995kW * Use model H8041 or H8043 for 240V single phase systems.........4kW ZVH8044-0400-3 332...2400A.7kW ZVH8042-0800-3 665. Split Core Power Transducers...1kW 443.1kW 96.... ZVH8044-1600-4 Self-contained.....2kW 288.43kW ZVH8042-0300-2 249.2kW ZVH8043-1600-4 576...... CT Size Large ...........6kW 576..6kW 221......1kW 665............ 3... Split Core Power Transducers........... CT Size Small ... ZVH8044-0100-2 Self-contained...03kW ZVH8043-0300-2 108.0kW ZVH8042-0100-2 83. CT Size Medium . Split Core Power Transducers... Split Core Power Transducers..........1kW ZVH8043-0800-3 288.... CT Size Small ...0kW ZVH8041-0800-4 288.2kW ZVH8043-0800-4 288.. Max...POWER MONITORING 72 Ordering Information Continued Item Part # Self-contained. Three Phase 480 VAC. 100A... Max.1kW 665... ** Model H8041 + H8042 do not include these two CTs.0kW ZVH8041-2400-4 864.. Split Core Power Transducers.14kW 83....... Max.. Max.............. 800A..00kW ZVH8041-0400-3 144.... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .4kW ZVH8042-0800-4 665. Three Phase 480 VAC.7kW ZVH8042-2400-4 1995kW 1330kW ZVH8043-0100-2 36.4kW 249.......... ZVH8044-0300-2 Self-contained...1600A.. Reading at 20mA Model 3Ø -Power 1Ø -Power ZVH8041-0100-2 36.... ZVH8044-0800-4 Self-contained.... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..4kW 384..6kW ZVH8044-0800-3 665. Max....... Three Phase 480 VAC.4 Wire Installation * Model H8041 + H8042 do not include these two CTs Typical 240 VAC 1Ø.2kW 192...4kW 166.4kW 576.. 3 Wire Installation Maximum KW. Three Phase 480 VAC.1kW 443....00kW ZVH8041-0300-2 108..3kW ZVH8042-0400-3 332...... CT Size Large .6kW 332.1kW ZVH8043-0400-3 144....... Split Core Power Transducers. Three Phase 480 VAC..4kW ZVH8042-1600-4 1330kW 886.03kW 24.. ZVH8044-0800-3 Self-contained. Three Phase 480 VAC..1kW 72...........6kW 864. CT Size Large ...0kW ZVH8041-1600-4 576.1kW 144.14kW ZVH8044-0300-2 249.14kW 55.2kW 192. Max.00kW ZVH8041-0800-3 288. CT Size Medium ... Split Core Power Transducers.1kW 108....4kW ZVH8043-2400-4 864.03kW 36. 800A..... Three Phase 480 VAC.......... Max. ZVH8044-2400-4 Applications/Wiring Diagrams Typical 208 or 480 VAC 3Ø. 300A.2kW 288........... 51”(38mm) C 1.45” (62mm) 1.89” (73mm) 2.91”(99mm) F 4.88” (200mm) 5.13” (29mm) 7.75” (95mm) B 1.90” (124mm) 2.50” (140mm) 2.13”(29mm) E 3.91” (150mm) Large 800Amp/1600Amp/2400Amp (-4) 4.45” (62mm) 1.90” (124mm) 5.20” (132mm) 5.13” (29mm) 5.POWER MONITORING 73 Dimensional Drawings Model Small 100Amp/300Amp (-2) A 3.25”(32mm) D 1.75”(121mm) Medium 400Amp/800Amp (-3) 4.92” (150mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ............................................................................................ +1.................. 400A............... ZVH8051-0300-2 Power Transducers............... kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC........... Max.......... kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC..................1-H8053) Pulsed Output: .............. 800A...... Max................................................................................................ 100............................. Max........................... kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC..............................25....................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Accuracy: ............. CT Size Large .......2400A........... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...... CT Size Medium ................... while models for unbalanced loads have three............................ 208 pr 480 VAC rms Number of Phases Monitored: .................................................................................... CT Size Large .......................... 50/60 Hz Maximum Primary Current: . 300A.... Opto FET..........0% (ANSI C12.... CT Size Medium .......................................................................... 100A... 0° to 60° C Humidity Range: ............................................ kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC.....................................................................................................74 POWER MONITORING Power Transducers Model 8050 Series kWH (Consumption) NEW! Description The Veris Hawkeye 8050 Series kWH (power consumption) transducers combine processing electronics and electronics and industrial grade CT(s) in an easy to install split-core package......................................... 600 VAC rms Temperature Range: ........ kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC........... ZVH8053-0800-4 Power Transducers.................. kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC. The transducer instantaneously samples the voltage and current in the monitored conductors to measure and report true RMS power consumption.......... Max...... ZVH8053-0800-3 Power Transducers....................5......... Ordering Information Item Part # Power Transducers............................................ CT Size Large ................................................................. 800A........................... Max............ kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC........... Specifications General: Input Primary Voltage: . ZVH8053-0300-2 Power Transducers. One or Three Frequency: ....................... 1...................... Max................................ 2000 VAC rms Case Insulation: .................. 100mA @ 24VDC Pulse Width: .... 400....................................................................... CT Size Small ................................................................ Normally Open............................ ZVH8053-1600-4 Power Transducers..... Max.. CT Size Small ................................... Max................................................................. 800........ 800A................ 100A......... Max.... CT Size Large .. ZVH8051-0400-3 Power Transducers............ kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC.... 800A........... Up to 2400 amps cont...................... 1600.............. ZVH8051-2400-4 Power Transducers........ Max................................................. 0.................................................................................................1600A................................................................. Max...................................................... 400A................................. making them ideal for monitoring electrical power in commercial and industrial facilities using industry standard pulse output...... CT Size Small ........................ Max.......................................... Models designed for balanced loads include one CT only...................... ZVH8051-0800-4 Power Transducers... Max............. CT Size Medium ... kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC......................................... The unique design of the H8050 Series transducers reduces the number of installed components......... 300......................................................... CT Size Large ....................................... 200 msec Current Transformer: ........................ ZVH8051-0100-2 Power Transducers....................................................... ZVH8053-2400-4 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................ 2400 amps *Count must be multiplied by the number of phases when using single CT models to monitor balanced multiphase systems... ZVH8053-0400-3 Power Transducers......................................................... CT Size Small .................... kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC.......................................................................... 0.........................1600A.................................................... 0............... ZVH8041-0800-3 Power Transducers........................................................................... kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC.............. CT Size Medium .................................... ZVH8051-1600-4 Power Transducers........... kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC.................................................................................................. CT Size Large ................................................................................................................. Max................................. kWH (Consumption) Single Phase 208/480 VAC.......................................1 kWH/pulse* Pulsed Output Type: ...............2400A...... Field selectable... 300A........................ ZVH8053-0100-2 Power Transducers...... per phase Internal Isolation: .... kWH (Consumption) Three Phase 208/480 VAC....... Split core................. 3-Wire Installation Field Selectable Pulse Output Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. 2-wire Typical 240/120 VAC1Ø.POWER MONITORING 75 Applications/Wiring Diagrams Typical 208 or 480 VAC 3Ø.4 Wire Installation Typical 277 VAC 1Ø. 3. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . 13” (29mm) 7.90” (124mm) 5.75” (95mm) B 1.45” (62mm) 1.90” (124mm) 2.13” (29mm) 5.20” (132mm) 5.88” (200mm) 5.76 POWER MONITORING Dimensional Drawings Model Small 100Amp/300Amp (-2) A 3.45” (62mm) 1. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .91”(99mm) F 4.92” (150mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.75”(121mm) Medium 400Amp/800Amp (-3) 4.89” (73mm) 2.13”(29mm) E 3.25”(32mm) D 1.91” (150mm) Large 800Amp/1600Amp/2400Amp (-4) 4.50” (140mm) 2.51”(38mm) C 1. ..................................... Split-Core Current Transformer................................ Split-Core Current Transformer...... Split-Core Current Transformer....... 50/60 Hz Leads .................... 800A................................0V standard (0.............. Split-Core Current Transformer.......... Split-Core Current Transformer..................................... 1mA............................................................ 300A.......0V Safe..............0V Safe.... 200A...................................... 100A................................ 600A.. 2400A (for use w/ 6000 Series......... consult factory) Accuracy: ........................................ 1................ Less than 1° Frequency Range: .................................................................................... 0-95% non-condensing Ordering Information Item Part # 1............... avail........... All CT ranges are available with 0...5% from 1% to 100% of rated current Rated Input Current: ........................... 1000A (for use w/ 6000 Series)..........333V................0V Safe....... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................ They are ideal for use with data loggers............. 800A(for use w/ Veris 6000............................ Specifications General: Output at Rated Current: ...................................... UL 1015 twisted pair.............................. 2400A CTs................5% of reading............... 0...................................................................... 800A(for use w/ Veris 6000) ........................ 6014/6015 Series) ........ 400A(for use w/ 6000 Series) ....................................................................... 400A....... Other CT sizes and amperage ranges are available.................................................. Consult factory for special requirements........................................ 200A (for use w/ 6000 Series) ............................................................... ZV6812-800 1.... ZV6812-1000 1........................................................................................ 300A(for use w/ 6000.................... size CT for full load requirement for best resolution................ ZV6810-100 1......................................................................................... 100A (for use w/ 6000 Series) .......... ZV6812-2400 Universal Mounting Bracket Kit ....0V Safe................... 18 gauge................................................ fault recorders and PLCs....... Split-Core Current Transformer...............0V Safe............................................ ZV6811-400 1........................... ZV6810-300 1............6014/6015 Series) ........... Split-Core Current Transformer.................................. 6’ length Temperature Range: ...................................... ZV6811-800 1....................... ZVKT/CT-BRKT Important! For direct reading kWH meter on models 6014/6015.... ZV6810-200 1............................................................................................................0V Safe............................................. ZV6811-600 1.....................................................0V output with the Veris 6000/6010 Series submeters and transducers..0V Safe.....................0V Safe........... 600A(for use w/ 6000 Series) ..... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................. 2400A Phase Shift: ................................... For 4-20mA kW demand (6000 series)................................. 6014/6015 Series) .........................................333V outputs......................... Split-Core Current Transformer...................................................................................................... -15° to 60°C Humidity Range: .. 800...........................................................POWER MONITORING Current Transformers Model 6810 Series 77 NEW! Description The Veris 6810 Series of Instrument Grade Current Transformers provide high accuracy: +0..... Split-Core Current Transformer.......................... 1000A...0V Safe........................... They use 1........................................... you must use 300............................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .51”(38mm) C 1.92” (150mm) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.90” (124mm) 5.25”(32mm) D 1.13” (29mm) 5.13” (207mm) 5.89” (73mm) 2.45” (62mm) 1.91” (150mm) Large 800Amp/1600Amp/2400Amp 4.45” (62mm) 1.78 POWER MONITORING Dimensional Drawings Model Small 100Amp/300Amp A 3.20”(107mm) 4.90” (124mm) 2.50” (140mm) 2.75”(121mm) Medium 400Amp/800Amp 4.13”(29mm) E F 4.57” (141mm) 5.75” (95mm) B 1.13” (29mm) 8. ................................................................................................ Ordering Information Item Part # Room Temperature Logger ......................................................................................................................... The Logger’s magnetic mounting strip adheres to any metallic surface making it easy to install and out of harms way...... 1°C Accuracy: ............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................. just put it in a space and go............................................... It records the ambient temperature of the monitored space over a specified period of time............................................................................... The battery powered selfcontained logger requires no external wiring..............................................5°C Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Power: ..............x or 95.....................................5 years Memory Storage: ....... The Temperature Logger is designed to fit in tight spaces for convenience and installation ease....................................... ZVE7001 Dimensional Drawing Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................ Lithium battery Battery Life: ........................................................................................... 55°F to 95°F Humidity Range: .......................................................................................... It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3..............................POWER MONITORING Temperature Logger Model Enspector™ 7001 79 NEW! Description The Veris Enspector Temperature Logger is an easy to use tool for collecting historical temperature information in building spaces..................... 0-95% non-condensing Element Type: ........ +0....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8064 readings Communication: ......................................... RS232 (compatible) Temperature Range: ................................................ Microelectronic IC Resolution: .................................................. 2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................x or 95..................................................................................................................................................................... RS232 (compatible) Amperage Range: ..................80 POWER MONITORING Run Time Logger Model Enspector™ 7002 NEW! Description The Veris Enspector Run Time Logger provides a self-contained solution for recording on/off times of electrical loads......................... Specifications General: Power: ...................................................................................................................... 2.................... Simply snap it on a conductor and it monitors current flow to determine on/off status..............................................................................................................................................................................75 to 200A Temperature Range: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3................ evaluate lighting circuit run times................................................................... Lithium battery Battery Life: ............................... 0-95% non-condensing Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs..................................................................... The Run Time logger monitors run times on critical loads such as chillers and large fans to establish operating schedules for performance contracts................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................................................... 64512 readings Communication: ............................................................................................................................................................................................... Ordering Information Item Part # Run-Time Logger ........................................ZVE7002 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......5 years Memory Storage: .................. The logger enables the user to profile run times of constant volume fans............................. and find run time deviations on critical loads under guaranteed energy savings contracts............................ 0............................................................................................. -15°F to 65°F Humidity Range: ................ .............x or 95...................... Including Carrying Case.............................. Serial Cable............... kWH (Consumption) Battery Life: ................................. Serial Cable......................... It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3..................... Including Carrying Case................................................... and monitor critical loads such as chillers and large fans to establish an energy useage pattern..................................................................................................... 16..............................0V output Voltage Ranges: ....................................................... Serial Cable. safe 1.................................................................................................................................................. The Power Logger can be used to monitor building energy consumption on the front end of a performance contract to develop accurate baselines.... +1% true RMS from 10% to 100% of the rated current of the CT Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs.................. and S/W ..... Including Carrying Case...................................... and S/W ............................................................... 5 years Memory Storage: ................. Specifications General: Power Measurement: ............................................... 0-2400 A System Accuracy (includes CT’s and meter): ................................................................................................................................................ ZVE6810-300 (3) 800A Split-Core CT.. 208 to 480 VAC Current Range: ......................................................................................................................................POWER MONITORING Power Logger Model Enspector™ 7003 81 NEW! Description The Veris Enspector Power Logger provides an easy solution for obtaining true power consumptioin (kWH) on 1 or 3 phase loads by recording the energy consumption of the monitored load over time............................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................... ZVE6810-800 (3) 2400A Split-Core CT............................128 readings Current Transformer: ................ ZVE6810-2400 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. and S/W ............................................................. Ordering Information Item Part # (3) 300A Split-Core CT................................................................................................................. The logger also enables the user to evaluate existing guaranteed savings contracts to ensure that the baseline has not shifted......................................................... .....................................5 years Memory Storage: .................................................................... Ordering Information Item Part # Amperage Logger ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Power: ................................... RS232 (compatible) Amperage Range: ..........................x or 95.............................................................................................................................................................................. It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3.................................................................................................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...........ZVE7005 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................... 1 to 200 A Temperature Range: ....................... and it will monitor and record the current flow for a specified period of time...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... +2% Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs......................................................................................82 POWER MONITORING Amps Logger Model Enspector™ 7005 NEW! Description The Veris Enspector Amps Logger is a self-contained data acquisition tool for trending motor loads.......... 8064 readings Communication: ........... 2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... -15°Fto 65°C Humidity Range: ............................................................................ 0 to 95% non-condensing Accuracy: ...................................... The Logger will accurately monitor lighting loads making it possible to plot space lighting profiles for multiple circuits to demonstrate the savings potential of a lighting retrofit............................. and profile lighting loads to determine what lighting control measures are required......... Lithium battery Battery Life: ............................. Clamp it on a conductor......................... . ZVE7007 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................. RS232 (compatible) Amperage Range: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................... It enables a user to determine the possible savings of installing occupancy sensors in conference rooms and other locations where lighting is not required all day................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ The Light Tracker monitors lighting loads to establish space energy consumption profiles.... Specifications General: Power: ................POWER MONITORING Data Logger Model Enspector™ 7007 83 NEW! Description The Veris Enspector Light Tracker monitors the on/off status of lighting loads.............................................. Simply fasten it inside a lighting fixture using the attached magnet and it will record the on/off status................................................................................. 64.......................................................... 0 to 95% non-condensing Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs......................................................................................... -15°Fto 65°F Humidity Range: ................................................... Ordering Information Item Part # Lighting Tracker .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 to 200 A Temperature Range: .. It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3.............................................. 5 years Memory Storage: ..............512 readings Communication: ...................x or 95......................................................................................................................... Lithium battery Battery Life: ........................................... Specifications Computer Requirements: Enspector software is an application specific Windows® based product for use with IBM® compatible PCs......84 POWER MONITORING Logger Accessories Model Enspector™ Software NEW! Description The Veris Enspector software is an application specific program that easily sets up projects............................. Ordering Information Item Part # PC Software for Configuring Data Loggers ............. simply connect the logger to a PC with the serial cable and choose to retrieve... This database gives the user the power to be creative and thorough. To retrieve data.......................1 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... configures loggers......... to meet your analysis needs........ It requires a 486 processor or better with 8MB of RAM running Windows® 3... The integral database engine allows the user to view project and logger information in varying formats or easily export it to popular programs such as Excel®........................... The software detects the logger com port and uploads all of the stored information.....x or 95... and retrieves the stored information from them.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .........ZVE7900. ............................... ZV3PT3-60-442 PT Series Indoor Potential Transformers.............................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................. 20:1 Ratio ...........................2Y @ 100% rated voltage (ANSI burden) 1Ø.. 120VAC Insulation: . 4200:120V......94”L x 9............................. 8...................................... ZVPT3-45-422FF Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................2Z @ 100% rated voltage (ANSI burden) Frequency: ...................................................................50”H 1Ø................ 0................... 4200:120V......................... 3 fuse: ..................... 2 Fuse.............. 500VA......3WX................................................ 3 Ohm........................................... ZVPT3-2-45-242F PT Series Indoor Potential Transformers.....6M........... 5........................ 2 fuse: .. 3 Fuse.............. 600VA......................... 2400:120V......................................................................................................................................... 35:1 Ratio .........................................................03”H Certifications: ...................................... 2 fuse: ............................................................................................................................................ 1. 2 fuse: .3WX..................................... @ 30°C amb.............. 60Hz @ 30°C amb) 350VA......................................................................................................... Available in 3ohm and 1ohm models..................................................................................6M.................... 0............ CSA certified........ 3 Fuse................................... 0........................ 2400:120V............ 3 fuse: ..... (2...................... 3 fuse: ............. BIL 60kV full wave Dimensions: 3Ø.....82”L x 6.............. 3 Ohm.................................................50”W x 8............... 35:1 Ratio ...7 secondary A per phase........................................................ 60Hz @ 55°C amb) 1Ø................................... 0.................................................................................. 2 Fuse.......................63”W x 6................... UL recognized Ordering Information Item Part # PT Series Indoor Potential Transformers.... Secondary Voltage: ....... 60Hz Thermal Rating: 3Ø......................... the unit’s cores and coils are encased and vacuum encapsulated....................................................................................... ZV3PT3-60-242 PT Series Indoor Potential Transformers................................................350VA @ 55°C amb...................... Specifications General: Accuracy Class: 3Ø................................................................ 1.......................4 secondary A per phase.............POWER MONITORING 85 Potential Transformers Model PT Series Description The Veris PT Series of Indoor Potential Transformers reduce high voltages for transducer compatibility......... 20:1 Ratio .............................................. (1.................. 1 Ohm.............................. 5kV...........................................1 Ohm.............. 86 POWER MONITORING Applications/Wiring Diagram Recommended Spacings A = Unit to Unit = 0. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .75” min B = HV to Ground in Air = 3.0” min Two Brush Connection 3PT3 Connection Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ........................ 0-5/10 VDC........................................20 mA max......................................................................................... 300% Burst Pressure: .......... and a liberal two year warranty are some of the features which make the PR-264 a reliable.................................................................................................. hysteresis and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # 0-25/50/100 psig... 4-20mA.... 12-35 VAC/VDC .............. at 40 VDC (mA output units)......................................................... ZAPR-264-R2-MA 0-125/250/500 psig. Error: ..................................................................... fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy.................................................................................... ZAPR-264-R3-MA 0-25/50/100 psig.........................0................ 2-wire....................................................... 12-40 VDC ........................................ ZAPR-264-R2-VDC 0-125/250/500 psig.................................. Enclosure: .. 500% Supply Voltage: .................................................C.......... 2-wire........................................................................................... 18 Ga C....................................................................................................................0..................... 50...................................................................... +0..................0 lbs.............. The 316L stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity not only provides media compatibility for most of the applications...................................................... The field selectable feature eliminates costly inefficiencies by providing a single unit which can be configured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application.......................................................................... VDC Units ..................... rugged................................................................... but also to offer up to three (3) field selectable pressure ranges in one unit....................................................... 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) Supply Current: ............................... ZAPR-264-R1-VDC 0-75/150/300 psig.....................0 psig in one unit.................................................................................................................................. 1K ohms min............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... and 100.......... (VDC output units) Weight: ........................................................................................... For instance....... gasketed cover.............. 12-40 VDC................... 12-40 VDC ............................................... 0-5/10 VDC....180°F (-18°C-82°C) compensated temperature range ensure compatibility with most applications................................................................................................................................... Baked on enamel-PMS2GR88B Conformance: .....................................025%/°F (.................................................................................................. Two industry standard output versions are available................................................................................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........ but also offers a leakproof solution for today’s environmentally conscious customers.......................................................... Specifications General: Accuracy*: ......... Unpluggable screw terminal block Wire Size: ................. ZAPR-264-R1-MA 0-75/150/300 psig............................................... +1% FS Overpressure: ...................... 12 Ga max. 10-90%RH Non-Condensing Termination: ..... mA Units . 1................................................................................. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........... (........................................................................................... ZAPR-264-R3-VDC CAUTION: Do not use on oxygen service...................03%/°C) Media Compatibility: ...................................... 4-20mA............................................... Liquid/gases compatible to 316L stainless steel Port Connection: ...............45 kg) * Includes non-linearity................................................................ 4-20mA........................................... Load Impedance: ........ 12-35 VAC/VDC .................................... Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 0°F ............... Rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65) enclosure............................................................................ 3K ohms max.............................................................................................. 1/8” NPT Environmental: ..... external mounting bracket.................................................. 2-wire............................................................................... EN55014(1993)/EN60730-1(1992) Compensated Temp Range: .................................................................. All models carry the Andover Controls logo..... 0°F to 180°F (-18°C to 82°C) T.............................................................. 12-35 VAC/VDC ....... 4-20mA 2-wire loop or field selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC............................................................................. EMC Standards EN50082-1(1992)....................................... 12-40 VDC .......................................................... and economical pressure transducer............................. in explosive/hazardous environment or with flammable/combustible media.........................R..........................PRESSURE 87 High Pressure Transducers Model PR-264 MAMAC Systems’ PR-264 high pressure transducer incorporates sophisticated circuits and a new fused silicon monolithic cavity pressure sensor to not only provide a high-level................................................... 0-5/10 VDC..................................................... Steel NEMA 4 (IP-65) Finish: .............................................................10 mA max.......................... 25...................................... fully-conditioned and temperature compensated output..................................... 50” wcd.......................................................... Specifications General: Accuracy*: ............................. ZAPR-274-R3-MA Ranges 0-7.............25/...0125%/°F (.................................................. Unpluggable screw terminal block Wire Size: ...............................00” wcd/ +-......................................10 mA max............ Error: ............................. fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy.............................................................................................................................. air flow........................75/7....................................... 12-40 VDC Supply . 1.......... and a liberal two year warranty are some of the features which make the PR-274/275 a high performance......... 25°F-150°F (-4°C-65°C) T...........................................................25/2.......... 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply ................................................................... ZAPR-274-R4-VDC Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................... 0-5/10 VDC...................................... 0-5/10 VDC..........................................................0” wcd/ +-.. .............................. filter pressure drop.......... duct pressure............................. 4-20 mA 2-wire..................125/.................................................................................................................................................. Enclosure: ................ VDC Units ................ but for the first time offers a reliable.............................. 1.... 4-20 mA 2-wire......................... 0°F-175°F (-18°C-80°C) Media Compatibility: ...............20 mA max. Load Impedance: ....................................................................... 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) Supply Current: ...................................................... ZAPR-274-R1-MA Ranges 0-...........................................................................50 wcd..................... field selectable outputs.. 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply ..............................00” wcd/ +-.... 0-5/10 VDC..................88 PRESSURE Low Pressure Transducers Model PR-274/275 MAMAC Systems’ PR-274/275 low pressure transducers incorporate a new micro-machined glass-on-silicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor................... ZAPR-274-R3-VDC Ranges 0-7.....625/1.......... Up to six field selectable direct or compound ranges................................... ZAPR-274-R1-VDC Ranges 0-................ ZAPR-274-R2-MA Ranges 0-1............................... +0.......25/.. non-repeatability.....................25/2.................. (VDC output units) Weight: .............................. 12-40 VDC Supply ..................75/7..... or any other extremely low pressure application.................................................................... and extremely low pressure sensitivity have been some of the problems which have plagued the controls industry.......... mA Units .25/............0 lbs..........05” wcd... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................... 12-40 VDC.............................................................................1/+-..................................................................................... 1K ohms min................... 4-20 mA 2-wire..... +1% FS Overpressure: ....................0” wcd/ +-...........................................................50/1...... EMC Standards EN50082-1(1992)......... accurate means to measure and control building/room pressure....... non-linearity................. ZAPR-274-R4-MA Ranges 0-......... This technology revolutionizes very low pressure measurement....... low pressure transducer..50/5........25/2................... calibration shift due to overpressure....................................................................1/+-...0/30............. 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply .......................... short circuit and reverse polarity protected output............................. Steel NEMA 4 (IP-65) or Panel Mount Chassis Finish: ....................5/15............................... 10-90%RH Non-Condensing Termination: .................. 12-40 VDC Supply.0/30..........................................625/1.................................50/5..R...................... ultra-stable.......................0” wcd....................25/2...............................02%/°C) Operating Temp Range: ............................. Baked on enamel-PMS2GR88B Conformance: .......C.............................. non-interacting zero and span adjustments............ Clean dry air or any inert gas Environmental: ...................... hysteresis and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # PR-274 (Nema 4 Enclosure) Ranges 0-....................50/15.......... 10 PSID Supply Voltage: .................................................. The PR-274/275 with the new Gl-Si technology not only addresses all of the above shortcomings...............................05” wcd.................. 0-5/10 VDC........................125/................................. (................................................................ at 40 VDC (mA output units).....5/15.............................. (.................... All models carry the Andover Controls logo......................................................................... ZAPR-274-R2-VDC Ranges 0-1...............0” wcd..............................5 lbs..... Temperature related zero drift.....................50/15...................................0” wcd/+-3...............................................50” wcd............. EN55014(1993)/EN60730-1(1992) Compensated Temp Range: ..................................................................... 12 Ga max................................ 18 Ga C............ 12-40 VDC Supply ............50/1....0” wcd/+-3.........25/...................50 wcd........ Panel Mount: 0....25 kg) * Includes non-linearity.......................6K ohms max....................................45 kg).......... 4-20 mA 2-wire... two enclosure types........................................................................................................................ 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply ............................................................ ....50/1....25/2.125/............. 4-20 mA 2-wire......50/15. 12-40 VDC Supply .....05” wcd......0/30......... 0-5/10 VDC........................ 0-5/10 VDC.125/................. 0-5/10 VDC.... 12-40 VDC Supply ...1/+-....275 (Panel Enclosure) Ranges 0-......50/1..25/2..0/30................. ZAPR-275-R1-VDC Ranges 0-...05” wcd...... ZAPR-275-R2-VDC Ranges 0-1..0” wcd....5/15...00” wcd/ +-. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...25/.....50/5..............0” wcd/+-3........0” wcd/ +-............... 0-5/10 VDC....25/.......625/1.............. 4-20 mA 2-wire............ 4-20 mA 2-wire..0” wcd...... ZAPR-275-R4-VDC CAUTION: Do not use on oxygen service.....50/15..................................75/7... 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply ..........5/15. 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply ................. 12-40 VDC Supply .. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..75/7......00” wcd/ +-..... ZAPR-275-R3-VDC Ranges 0-7........... ZAPR-275-R4-MA Ranges 0-.25/............ ZAPR-275-R3-MA Ranges 0-7.. in explosive/hazardous environment or with flammable/combustible media.....PRESSURE 89 Ordering Information Continued Item Part # PR..... 12-40 VDC Supply ......................0” wcd/+-3......1/+-.. ZAPR-275-R2-MA Ranges 0-1.............25/2.........50” wcd..25/....................50” wcd.. ZAPR-275-R1-MA Ranges 0-..50 wcd.............25/2. 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply .............. 4-20 mA 2-wire...50/5...0” wcd/ +-...625/1. 12-35 VAC/VDC Supply .50 wcd........ ................................................................................ Load Impedance: .................50/5....50” and 5........................................................ APR-276-R10-VD 0-3.... 2-wire.....................................................20 mA max.......................... 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) Supply Current: .................................................................................................................. 4-20mA 2-wire loop or field selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC............................................................................ Steel NEMA 4 (IP-65)............ 12-35 VAC/VDC .......................................50/15............. external mounting bracket...............75”................................................... 4-20 mA......... 7...........R................................................. 2.................................. For instance................................................. 25°F-150°F (4°C-65°C) T....................... (.................................................................... 0-5/10 VDC............................................. Clean dry air or any inert gas Environmental: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................00” wcd.......................................................00”wc or 3................................................................... +0......................... gasketed cover................................................................................................................................................................................. and a liberal two year warranty are some of the features which make the PR-276 a reliable.................. All models carry the Andover Controls logo...........................75/7..........................................................90 PRESSURE Low Pressure Transducers Model PR-276 Description The MAMAC Systems’ PR-276 low pressure transducer incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits and a new micro-machined glass-on-silicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor to not only provide a high level.....C.50” and 15............................................................................................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............. 6061T aluminum probe Finish: ..............................................................................................0125%/°F (.................. 1........................50/5.............................................. VDC Units .. EMC Standards EN50082-1(1992)........................................................... 0-5/10 VDC................................ Specifications General: Accuracy*: ............................................................................................................................................. To substantially reduce installation cost and to eliminate costly control panels the PR-276 incorporates a pressure sensor and a static pressure tip integrated as one assembly............. (VDC output units) Weight: ................. but also to offer up to three (3) field selectable pressure ranges in one unit................................................................................... ZAPR-276-R11-VD CAUTION: Do not use on oxygen service.... +1% FS Overpressure: ..... Enclosure: .......................25/2............................................................................................................................... 3K ohms max......................... 1K ohms min................................................... fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy..................................... 12-35 VAC/VDC ................................... Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 25°F-150°F (4°C-65°C) compensated temperature range ensures compatibility with most applications...........................................................................00” wcd................... EN55014(1993)/EN60730-1(1992) Compensated Temp Range: . 10-90%RH Non-Condensing Termination: .................................... 18 Ga C....... hysteresis and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # 0-1......................................................................................................... Unpluggable screw terminal block Wire Size: ..............0 lbs....................................................45 kg) * Includes non-linearity.............. 12-40 VDC ............. 2-wire..25/2........... 12-40 VDC ........................................................... ZAPR-276-R11-MA 0-1................................................................................................................................................ A rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65) enclosure................. mA Units ..................................................................... 10 psid Burst Pressure: ................02%/°C) Operating Temp Range: ............................ Two industry standard output versions are available.. 12 Ga max............50/15........................................... fully conditioned and temperature compensated output....................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................25”................................ 1..................................................... 12-40 VDC................ 4-20 mA..................................................................... in explosive/hazardous environment or with flammable/combustible media...... ZAPR-276-R10-MA 0-3......................... 0°F-175°F (-18°C-80°C) Media Compatibility: ..00” wcd. Baked on enamel-PMS2GR88B Conformance: .10 mA max. at 40 VDC (mA output units)..............00”wc in one unit.............................................. low installed cost duct pressure transducer.............. The field selectable feature eliminates costly inefficiencies by providing a single unit which can be configured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application.............................................. Error: ............. 500% Supply Voltage: ...00” wcd.................................................. ..75/7.... ...... Regardless of the velocity........................................................................................................................................................................................................ This low pressure acts against the duct static pressure and hence induces an error which is exponentially proportional to the air flow............................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................................. The A-520 Static Pressure Probe is available in 6061T aluminum alloy for standard HVAC applications.......................................................................... If a bent tube with a single orifice at the end is used to pick up static pressure in a duct.............................................................................. Specifications General: Material: . Two probe lengths are available: 4” and 8”............................................................ ZAA-520-2-A-1 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... The A-520 is a unique design which incorporates two orifices diametrically opposing each other in a vertical plain............. the error decreases in an exponential relationship.......................... ZAA-520-1-A-1 8” Aluminum Duct Static Pressure Probe ................ 482°F (250°C) Maximum Air Flow: .......................................................................................................... The probe has two orifices vertically opposite each other to cancel out any air flow induced errors............................................. when the same air flows across the other orifice....................................................... the flow error is constantly cancelled out and the A-520 provides an accurate...........................................................................................................................................................PRESSURE 91 Duct Static Pressure Probes Model A-520 MAMAC Systems’ A-520 Static Pressure Probe is designed to pick up static pressure in a duct............................................................... 6061T-6 Aluminum Alloy Port Connections: ......................................................................... All models carry the Andover Controls logo..................................................................................................................................... plenum..................................................... Similarly.................................................................. the air flowing across the probe may cause a small low pressure within the probe.....................................5 oz....... As the air flow increases...... Ordering Information Item Part # 4” Aluminum Duct Static Pressure Probe .... 1............................................................................... air handler or other HVAC equipment......... When the air flows across an orifice.......................... this error will increase also and as the flow decreases......................... 10 psig Maximum Temperature: ............................................ Unlimited Weight: ......... 1/4” brass hose barb Gasket Material: ..................................................................................... it creates a suction towards that orifice.............................................................................................. Neoprene Maximum Pressure: ................ it creates an opposing suction which cancels out the first pressure drop..................... repeatable and stable static pressure value........... .................................. 0°F-180°F (-18°C-82°C) T.......................................................... (................................................................................................. Specifications General: Accuracy*: . Baked on enamel-PMS2GR88B Conformance: ..........................................................R........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Load Impedance: ........................... EN55014 (1993)/EN60730-1 (1992) Compensated Temp Range: ....................................................................................................0 lbs..................................................................................................................................... NEW! PRELIMINARY The APR-283 offers up to three field selectable pressure ranges in one unit...........................................................................................................................................C....... +0.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Ga C.......................................... ZAPR-283-R3-MA Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................................................................................................................ Unpluggable screw terminal block Wire Size: ................................ VDC Units -10 mA max.............. 0-5/10VDC ..................................................... 500% Supply Voltage: ........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................................................................... The 316L stainless steel offers excellent media compatibility to most of the industrial and commercial applications................ external mounting bracket.....................................................................................................20 mA max............................ 12 Ga max............................ ZAPR-283-R2-VDC Range 0 to 125/250/500 PSID.......................45 kg) * Includes non-linearity................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ rugged.................. Two industry standard output versions are available......................................................................... Error: ............4-20 mA.....................................................................................................92 PRESSURE Wet/Wet High Pressure Differential Transducers Model APR-283 MAMAC Systems’ APR-283 Wet/Wet High Pressure Differential Transducer is a 100% solid state silicon strain gauge fused directly onto the 316L stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity............................................... The pressure cavity design incorporates novel techniques to isolate the fused silicon sensing element from installation related stress thereby ensuring zero integrity......................... EMC Standards EN50082-1 (1992).................................................... 1......................................................... 1K ohms min.................................................................................. and economic pressure transducer..................................................................................................................................... 300% Burst Pressure: ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1/8” NPT Environmental: ................................................................................ Enclosure: .. Rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65) enclosure......................... +1% FS Overpressure: ................................................................................................................................................ 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) Supply Current: ... ZAPR-283-R3-VDC Range 0 to 25/50/100 PSID............... gasketed cover................................................................................................................................... ZAPR-283-R2-MA Range 0 to 125/250/500 PSID.................................................................................................................................. 0-5/10VDC ............ (VDC output units) Weight: .............................................................. 0-5/10VDC . 3K ohms max............................................................................ mA Units .......... 12-40 VDC......................... All models carry the Andover Controls logo................................................... ZAPR-283-R1-MA Range 0 to75/150/300 PSID. and fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy are some of the features which make the PR-283 a reliable.025%/°F Media Compatibility: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Steel NEMA 4 (IP-65) Finish: ... The field selectable feature eliminates the costly inefficiencies by providing a single unit which can be configured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application............ Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 0°F-180°F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications........................................................................................................... 4-20 mA............ ZAPR-283-R1-VDC Range 0 to75/150/300 PSID......................................................................... 4-20mA 2-wire loop or field selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC.................. 4-20 mA ...................... hysteresis and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # Range 0 to 25/50/100 PSID.............. Liquid/gases compatible to 316L stainless steel Port Connection: .... at 40 VDC (mA output units)........................... 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Termination: ....... ........................................................ 24 VAC/VDC Supply .............................................................. w/Manual Override......................................... Universal 24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and field selectable 4-20 mA...........................C...................................................... 4-20 mA............... Baked on enamel-PMS2GR88B Compensated Temp Range: ................................................................................................................................................................... 24 VAC/VDC Supply ........................................... 24 VAC/VDC Supply ......... or 0-10 VDC inputs ensures single unit compatibility to most systems.... +0........... Clean dry air or any inert gas Port Connection: ............................................................................................................ This feature is most desirable for check out/commissioning and manual operation in case of controller failure........................................................................PRESSURE 93 Electro-Pneumatic Output Transducers Model EP-311/313 Description MAMAC Systems’ EP-311/313 electro-pneumatic transducer incorporates quiet low-wattage poppet valves and a pressure sensor to measure and adjust the branch line pressure proportional to the input........................................................ 24 VAC/VDC Supply ....................... 12 Ga max....025%/°F (.....................................................................R.................................................... 1................................................................................................. This unit has no air consumption and is immune to mounting orientation or supply line pressure fluctuations.................................... EMC Standards EN50082-1(1992).................................................................. 301 ohms (4-20 mA units)...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................................................................... at the same time............................................................................................. the pressure can be increased or decreased with two push-button switches... floating poppet solenoid valves........................................ 4-20 mA........................................................45 kg) * Includes non-linearity............................................... silicon pressure sensor........... 0-5/10 VDC Input. ZAEP-350 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................. 4-20 mA... 0-5/10 VDC Input........................ ZAEP-313-315 Outputs 0-20 psig Pneumatic Air................................ A rugged aluminum manifold............ and a liberal two year warranty are some of the features which make the EP-311/313 a high performance.................................................... Screw terminal block Wire Size: .......................................................... 0-5 VDC... Specifications General: Accuracy*: .................................................................................................. 4-20 mA........... 0-5/10 VDC Input.................................................... Steel Chassis Finish: ................ A unique steel chassis design substantially reduces the overall size of the unit and.......................................... 40 psig Pressure Differential: .................................................................................................................. +1% FS Maximum Supply Pressure: ......... hysteresis and non-repeatability Ordering Information Item Part # Outputs 3-15 psig Pneumatic Air................................................................... 18-28 VAC/VDC Supply Current: ............................. 10K ohms (0-5/0-10 VDC) Weight: .................................................................................. 0-5/10 VDC Input....... brass barb fittings..... 18 Ga C... 10-90%RH Non-Condensing Termination: ......................................................................................................................................... (0....... ZAEP-311-315 Outputs 0-20 psig Pneumatic Air................................................................................................ Error: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ w/Manual Override............................ in the manual mode........... 150 mA Enclosure: ........................ ZAEP-313-020 Failsafe Module (Bleeds Branch Line Off On Power Failure) ........ 25°F-150°F (4°C-65°C) Conformance: ...... 1/4”OD poly tubing Environmental: ................. A precision gauge is provided for the branch line pressure................................................ All models carry the Andover Controls logo....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Load Impedance: ...................................................................................................................................................................................... reliable electropneumatic transducer.................................................. ZAEP-311-020 Outputs 3-15 psig Pneumatic Air........... The EP-313 incorporates a manual override switch and.................................................0 lbs............................... EN55014(1993)/EN60730-1(1992) T............................. provides for ease of installation in the control panel directly or with a snap track......................03%/°C) Media Compatibility: .........................1 psig Supply Voltage: ......................................................... high performance electronics..................................................................... (Supply to Branch) 0.......................................................................................................................................................... ........................... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ....................................ZMT30-010A Range = 1.......................................................................................................................................................................................................3”...................................................3" WC...ZMT30-005A Range = 0................. 0..................... 0°C-52°C (32°F-125°F) Storage Temperature: ................0”.....1/4” O... ZMT30-002 Range = 0................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .........................................................................85 mA low end.................................... polyethylene tubing.......................................................0" WC............... -30°C ..... gauge pressure or vacuum................................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2" WC................................................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ..... ZMT30-001B Range = 0.... ZMT30-010 Range = 1.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20% .................................................................................................2" WC.................................................0 Water Column Measures: ..................................................................... Integral filters at both ports.................................................................................................................. Electrical: Operating Voltage: ................................... A wide selection of standard pressure ranges is available... This deflection results in a change in capacitance which is then detected and processed electronically...1" WC.................................................. In the capacitance cell................................................ 5.............................. Suitable for air or inert gases Max.................. ZMT30-001 Range = 0..................................................... 0..........................ZMT30-002A Range = 0...............42lb) Case: ..........................................................................................5" WC......................................1”.................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ...................................................D..................................................... ZMT30-010B Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........ 190g (........................................... 3... It operates on the capacitance principle and is capable of sensing very low positive.........................................................................40”H Weight: .... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............................................................... 3.............................................................................................................................................................05%/°C Operating Humidity Range: ......................................................0”.............................................................................................................................. Flame retardant.......................90% RH non-condensing Shock Resistance: ...............................................................................................D......................................... Tygon™ or polyurethane tubing.............. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............................ Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ......... 2.....................................................................................................................5" WC.............ZMT30-001A Range = 0.....1" WC......................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ............................................................3" WC........................................ 10...5" WC...................2" WC.................................................................... 8x pressure range Port Connections: .. ZMT30-003B Range = 0.......... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ................................. a very lightweight..............................................................ZMT30-003A Range = 0..................0" WC................................................................................................. 1............ 5G to 50Hz Ordering Information Item Part # Range = 0..................................................................70°C (-20°F-160°F) Effect of Temperature: .................. Zero Pressure @ 12 mA . 0... +............................................ Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ...................... Reliability and long life are inherent advantages of the solid-state design......................... 0............................... protected against polarity reversal Output Limits: . Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .1" WC......... 3/16” Dia......... 3.................... Optional 4................................................ ZMT30-005 Range = 0................................ or differential pressures.................................. suitable for: 1/8” or 5/32” I.......................................... glass-reinforced NORYL™ Environmental: Operating Temperature Range: ................. +1% Zero & Span Adjustments: ......................................................................................................................................2”..............0" WC......................................................................................3" WC... 10-35 VDC.................... Specifications General: Accuracy: .....................................................................1 mA low limit available Physical: Dimensions: ..................................................................................................... Diff.............................................. Safe Momentary Overpressure: ................................ responsive diaphragm deflects a small amount when pressure is applied................................................................................................... 26 mA upper end........................”W x 5...................... 10G (11ms) Vibration Resistance: .....................................................................................................................0”.................................. Non-interactive Pressure: Ranges: ............0”.................. negative................... ZMT30-003 Range = 0......................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .............................. ZMT30-002B Range = 0..............................................................5”............................................ ZMT30-005B Range = 1.........................94 PRESSURE Low Air Differential Pressure Transmitters Model T30 Description The Modus Instruments T30 is a 2-wire pressure transmitter with 4-20mA output.............................................................................15”L x 1. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ................................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .PRESSURE 95 Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ...................................... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0........................................ ZMT40-002CA 8 mA ..1" WC..........................................1" WC........................................................................................ Zero Pressure @ Range = 0............................................0”........... transformer isolated from the AC power unit........................... responsive diaphragm deflects a small amount when pressure is applied........................... Flame retardant........................ ZMT40-001DA 12 mA ........0”............................... The output of the T40 pressure transmitter is a 4-20mA current.................................................................................... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0..... Like the T30......................... Electrical: Operating Voltage: ............................. protected against polarity reversal Output Limits: ........................................0”............................................................................................................................................................... This deflection results in a change in capacitance..... 5G to 50Hz Ordering Information Item Range = 0........................ Tygon™ or polyurethane tubing............. ZMT40-001DB 4 mA ...... 3.............. +1% Zero & Span Adjustments: .................................. Integral filters at both ports.............. negative or differential pressures........................................05%/°C Operating Humidity Range: .....D.....................3”...................................... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0......1" WC............................................................. 1....................D................................. Safe Momentary Overpressure: ............................................................. 1............................................... Optional 4................. 10G (11ms) Vibration Resistance: ......................... Non-interactive Pressure: Ranges: ....................1”........................................................”W x 5.. Physical: Dimensions: ............................2" WC................................................................................................................ Zero Pressure @ Range = 0................................... polyethylene tubing....5”........... ZMT40-002DB Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................... 8x pressure range Port Connections: .......... gauge pressure or vacuum............ ZMT40-001CA 8 mA ................................................ Zero Pressure @ Range = 0........... 3............. 3.96 PRESSURE Low Air Differential Pressure Transmitters Model T40 Description The Modus Instruments T40 is a 4-wire pressure transmitter..........................5”....................0” Water Column) and electrical ratings (24VAC or 120VAC) is available........................................ Zero Pressure @ Range = 0............. 20% to 90% RH non-condensing Shock Resistance: ................................ ZMT40-001CB 12 mA .............................................. 0.....................................85mA low end.................... -30°C to 70°C (-20°F to 160°F) Effect of Temperature: .................ZMT40-001D 8 mA . 2...........2" WC.............................................................................. ZMT40-002DA 12 mA .................................................................................1mA low limit avail.......... Suitable for air or inert gases Max................................................................................................................... A wide selection of standard pressure ranges (0................................................................................................................42lb) Case: ............. 0..................................... In the capacitance cell.......................................... 10......................0”.................. a very lightweight............................................... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0..................................0”...... 26mA upper end.....................................3”....................................... 11-32 VDC........................................................................................................................................................ 0.....................................................0”..................... 2........................................................1" WC..................................................1" WC....... Specifications General: Accuracy: ....2" WC................................................................................................. Zero Pressure @ Part # 4 mA... ZMT40-002CB 12 mA .. 5..............40”H Weight: ........................................................................................ 0.........................2”..................1" WC..........2”............................................................................................................................................................................... 190g (...2" WC....... Diff..................... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0......................................... glass-reinforced NORYL™ Environmental: Operating Temperature Range: ..............................................................................................................................................................................0” and 10............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... ZMT40-001C 4 mA.......................................................................................... +.......... 120 VAC Power Supply .......................... 0°C to 52°C (32°F to 125°F) Storage Temperature: ........................................ Zero Pressure @ Range = 0................. 0............................... 5.....................................................................................................................................................................2" WC............................ 0. which is then detected and processed electronically.1/4” O................. 24 VAC Power Supply .... Zero Pressure @ Range = 0............................................................................................. 0...... ZMT40-002C 4 mA .........................................................................................................................................2" WC...................................................1”.....0 Water Column Measures: ...................................................................15”L x 1.............0”............................ 3......... it operates on the capacitance principle and is capable of sensing very low positive. 3/16” Dia.................................................................................................................................... suitable for: 1/8” or 5/32” I.............ZMT40-002D 8 mA ....... ..............0" WC.......................0" WC......ZMT40-020D Range = 2.. Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ..................0" WC...............5" WC............................................0" WC................. ZMT40-050CB Range = 5.................................................................... ZMT40-020DA Range = 2.. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ................................................................................... ZMT40-030CA Range = 3................................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .............. Zero Pressure @ 12 mA .............................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ...0" WC.....................................0" WC....................................................................................................................... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ..................................0" WC............................................... ZMT40-010DA Range = 1...........................................................0" WC.....3" WC..... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ................................ ZMT40-005CB Range = 0.................................................0" WC................................................... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA .................................................................................0" WC.....................................................................................3" WC............ZMT40-005D Range = 0.............. ZMT40-100CB Range = 10................................................................................................................................................................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ...........................0" WC.............................................................. ZMT40-005CA Range = 0............... ZMT40-010DB Range = 2......ZMT40-010D Range = 1......... ZMT40-020C Range = 2.............5" WC............................ ZMT40-010CA Range = 1..... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .............................................................................................. ZMT40-030C Range = 3...................................................5" WC.................0" WC.....................................................................0" WC................0" WC............................ ZMT40-050DB Range = 10....... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA .. ZMT40-050C Range = 5..........................3" WC....................................................3" WC.............................................................0" WC....................................................0" WC.................. Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .............................ZMT40-003D Range = 0................... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ....... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ...................................................................... ZMT40-003CB Range = 0................ ZMT40-003C Range = 0....... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ......................0" WC..................................................................................................................................................... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ..............................................................0" WC............................................................................................0" WC.......................PRESSURE 97 Ordering Information Continued Item Part # Range = 0.................... ZMT40-010CB Range = 1..... ZMT40-050CA Range = 5........................................... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............. ZMT40-030DA Range = 3...........................................0" WC................ ZMT40-003DA Range = 0................................................................................................................................................ Zero Pressure @ 4 mA .........................5" WC..................................................................................................................................0" WC................................................0" WC................................... ZMT40-100C Range = 10.................. Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ...... Zero Pressure @ 12 mA .......0" WC..0" WC..............................0" WC.............................................3" WC.. ZMT40-100DA Range = 10..0" WC.......................................5" WC...........................0" WC........ ZMT40-030CB Range = 3........ Zero Pressure @ 12 mA .............................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................ ZMT40-005DA Range = 0................................................................................ ZMT40-005DB Range = 1........................................................................................................... ZMT40-050DA Range = 5.................................................................. ZMT40-003CA Range = 0. ZMT40-020CA Range = 2................................................................ Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ...............ZMT40-050D Range = 5................................................................. Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ................................................ ZMT40-100CA Range = 10............... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ............................................................................................................................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ....................................................................................................ZMT40-100D Range = 10.............................. Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ............................. ZMT40-010C Range = 1............................................................................... ZMT40-005C Range = 0.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0" WC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ZMT40-020CB Range = 2................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ........ Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ...................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ...............................0" WC.................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA .............................. Zero Pressure @ 12 mA .................................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .. Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ....................................5" WC....................................................... Zero Pressure @ 8 mA . Zero Pressure @ 8 mA .............. Zero Pressure @ 8 mA ...................................................................ZMT40-030D Range = 3................................... ZMT40-003DB Range = 0.....................0" WC............................................3" WC............................ ZMT40-100DB Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................ Zero Pressure @ 12 mA ...................... Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............................. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA .. Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ............................................ ZMT40-030DB Range = 5........................................ Zero Pressure @ 4 mA ................................................... ZMT40-020DB Range = 3.......................................................................................... 98 PRESSURE Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . .................................... ....................... 0-300 PSI.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. +0................................................................... 0-300 PSI......... M4 Stainless Steel........................... 1/2” Knockout .........5% of differential pressure range (includes non-linearity and hysteresis)....................... 0-100 PSID...................................................................................................................... 0-300 PSI......................... or +1% for 6psid (50 kPA) range....................................................................................... 0-100 PSI........................................................................................ filters..........................................................................PRESSURE 99 Wet/Wet High Pressure Differential Transducers Model W30 Description The Modus Instruments W30 wet/wet pressure transmitter is designed to measure differential pressure of liquids and gases........................... 3Cable glands not included Pressure Port Connections: ........ 10 amps/300 volts Material: ...................... two-wire................................... Hole sizes are offered in a choice of 1/2” conduit........) Environmental: Process wetted surfaces are 316 stainless steel Operating Temp........................................................................................... 1-Hole Knockout.... non-condensing Shock Resistance: ............................................ Black epoxy pain Knockout: ................................. 10G (11ms) Vibration resistance: ......................................................................................................5% of differential pressure range..............................S................................1%°C for 6 psid (50 kPA) range On span: ........................... or +0...........................T................. or + 0................................................ 1-Hole Knockout................................................................................................................ 1/2” Knockout .............................................. 1-Hole Knockout.............................................. Range: ...... 3.............................................................. +0............................................ Connection to enclosure ground is provided Connector rating: .......................................................................... 0-15 PSID......... Typical applications include measurement of differential pressure across flow elements.... 1/2” Knockout ................................................................. Mating connector is supplied............................................................................................................................ Aluminum Alloy #A380 Cover Screws: ............ The W30 is housed in a NEMA 4 cast aluminium case enclosure and the process wetted surfaces are 316 stainless steel.............. Glass-filled polyester General: Dimensions: ................................................................................................................................................................. 0-30 PSID................................................................................................. non-magnetic Finish: .... .............................................................................................................................................5% for 6 psid (50 kPA) range Calibration: ............................................03%/°C.......... 10% to 90% R...... or +0.................................... 0-100 PSI................56” x 4/45” x 2/18” (90 x 115 x 55 mm) Enclosure Material: ................................................................. +0.............. and liquid level monitoring................................................................................................................................. 1/2” Knockout .......................... 0-100 PSI........................ 1-Hole Knockout.................. 1/2” Knockout ................................... 1/2” Knockout ............... 0-150 PSID. -20°F to 160°F (-30°C to 70°C) Effect of Temperature: On zero: ......................................................... or metric sizes of PG11 or PG1........... heat exchangers................................... 0-300 PSI............6%°C for 6 psid (50 kPA) range Operating Humidity Range: ................I...................................... 0-300 PSI................... 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) Storage Temperature: ...... The W30 Series is a 4-20 mA............................... The W30 is accurate to +0.......................................... 1/2” Knockout .......................................2 lb (540g) Ordering Information Item 0-6 PSID.................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............ +1% for 6 psid (50 kPA) range......... 0-200 PSID........................ 1-Hole Knockout........................................................ 1/2” Knockout .......... 0-60 PSID..................... 0-10 PSID.................................................... 1-Hole Knockout.................. Specifications General: Accuracy: ............. Pluggable terminal block for wire 14 to 26 AWG... (Traceable to N.....................................................................................................05%/°C...................................................................................................... loop powered device which operates on nominal 24 VDC...................... The W30 is an excellent choice for many HVAC process and automation monitoring requirements.. 1.......................................... 1-Hole Knockout..........25% for static pressure change from 0 to 100%............................................................................. +0................................................. ............................................... 1-Hole Knockout...............................H.............. Choice of 1 or 2 holes............................. 1/8-28 female NPT Weight: .............................. Part # ZMW30-31E-1-R ZMW30-32E-1-R ZMW30-33E-1-R ZMW30-34E-1-R ZMW30-35E-1-R ZMW30-36E-1-R ZMW30-37E-1-R ZMW30-38E-1-R Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................. 5G 3 to 50 Hz Electrical Connectors: Polarized Euro Plug/Connectors Connections: ........................................................................................... pumps......................................................................................... ...................................................................... 2-Hole Knockout........... 1/2” Knockout ............ 0-100 PSI............. ZMW30-31E-1-S 0-10 PSID......................... ZMW30-37E-2-S 0-200 PSID... 2-Hole Knockout........................................................................ 0-300 PSI.......................... ZMW30-33E-2-R 0-30 PSID..... 0-100 PSI............................................................................100 PRESSURE Ordering Information Continued Item Part # 0-6 PSID............................... PG 11 Knockout .. ZMW30-32E-2-R 0-15 PSID........................ ZMW30-34E-2-S 0-60 PSID............................... 2-Hole Knockout...... 2-Hole Knockout............................................ 1-Hole Knockout...... ZMW30-37E-1-S 0-200 PSID......................... PG 13 Knockout ............... PG 13 Knockout ....................................... ZMW30-35E-2-R 0-100 PSID............................................ 0-300 PSI........... 1-Hole Knockout......................... 1-Hole Knockout................. ZMW30-35E-1-S 0-100 PSID....................................................................................................... 0-100 PSI.............. 0-300 PSI........ ZMW30-38E-1-T 0-6 PSID.......... 0-300 PSI..................................... 0-300 PSI........... 0-300 PSI............................ ZMW30-33E-1-T 0-30 PSID............. ZMW30-36E-1-S 0-150 PSID........... 1/2” Knockout ......... 1/2” Knockout .............. 0-300 PSI...... ZMW30-33E-2-S 0-30 PSID. 0-100 PSI........ 1-Hole Knockout.............. PG 11 Knockout ....................... 2-Hole Knockout........... 0-300 PSI.... PG 11 Knockout .................... 0-300 PSI....................................... 2-Hole Knockout............................................................................................................. PG 11 Knockout ....... 1/2” Knockout .............................. 0-100 PSI....................... ZMW30-34E-2-T 0-60 PSID..... 0-100 PSI............ 0-100 PSI........ 0-300 PSI................................................................................... PG 13 Knockout ..................................................................... 2-Hole Knockout.................. ZMW30-31E-2-R 0-10 PSID.................... 0-100 PSI................................................................................... 1/2” Knockout . 0-100 PSI....................................... 2-Hole Knockout....... ZMW30-34E-1-S 0-60 PSID............................ 2-Hole Knockout........................................... PG 13 Knockout .............. 2-Hole Knockout................ 2-Hole Knockout................................... 0-300 PSI. PG 11 Knockout ....................... ZMW30-36E-2-S 0-150 PSID..................................... ZMW30-34E-1-T 0-60 PSID................ PG 13 Knockout ............ PG 13 Knockout ................. PG 11 Knockout ...................................................................... 0-100 PSI............... 1-Hole Knockout................... 1-Hole Knockout......... PG 11 Knockout .................................................. 0-300 PSI............................................ PG 11 Knockout ............................... 1-Hole Knockout............................................. 0-300 PSI................. ZMW30-33E-1-S 0-30 PSID.................. 1/2” Knockout ............... 0-100 PSI............................... ZMW30-34E-2-R 0-60 PSID.............. 0-300 PSI.................. PG 13 Knockout ... ZMW30-37E-2-R 0-200 PSID..... 2-Hole Knockout.............. 2-Hole Knockout............................................................... 2-Hole Knockout....................... 0-300 PSI............................................... PG 13 Knockout ............. 0-300 PSI............... 1-Hole Knockout............ ZMW30-36E-2-T 0-150 PSID...................................................................................... 0-300 PSI................. 0-100 PSI............................................. PG 13 Knockout .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-Hole Knockout.......................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......... ZMW30-37E-1-T 0-200 PSID............... PG 11 Knockout ................ 1-Hole Knockout....... ZMW30-32E-1-T 0-15 PSID.... ZMW30-38E-2-R 0-6 PSID........................... 1/2” Knockout ... ZMW30-32E-2-T 0-15 PSID............. 1-Hole Knockout................. PG 11 Knockout . PG 11 Knockout ................. 0-300 PSI............................... ZMW30-35E-2-S 0-100 PSID...... PG 13 Knockout ........................................................................................ ZMW30-38E-2-T Applications/Wiring Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................................... 2-Hole Knockout..... 2-Hole Knockout....... 1/2” Knockout ........ 1-Hole Knockout....................... ZMW30-31E-2-S 0-10 PSID............................... 1-Hole Knockout......................................................... 0-300 PSI..... 0-100 PSI...................................................................... ZMW30-31E-1-T 0-10 PSID........................................................................... PG 11 Knockout .......................... ZMW30-32E-1-S 0-15 PSID.... 0-100 PSI................................................. 1-Hole Knockout.. PG 13 Knockout ............... 2-Hole Knockout..................................................... 0-300 PSI................ ZMW30-35E-2-T 0-100 PSID................................................ ZMW30-32E-2-S 0-15 PSID..... 2-Hole Knockout.. 2-Hole Knockout... ZMW30-38E-1-S 0-6 PSID.. 0-300 PSI............... PG 13 Knockout ..................... ZMW30-36E-2-R 0-150 PSID.. 0-300 PSI............. PG 13 Knockout .................................................. ZMW30-33E-2-T 0-30 PSID.................... 0-300 PSI.. PG 13 Knockout .......... 1-Hole Knockout......... 1-Hole Knockout........... PG 13 Knockout ................................... PG 13 Knockout ............... ZMW30-35E-1-T 0-100 PSID.............. 2-Hole Knockout...................................... 2-Hole Knockout...... ZMW30-37E-2-T 0-200 PSID......................... 2-Hole Knockout............ ZMW30-31E-2-T 0-10 PSID....................................... PG 11 Knockout .. 0-100 PSI........ PG 11 Knockout ..... PG 11 Knockout .............................................. 2-Hole Knockout............. 0-300 PSI. ZMW30-38E-2-S 0-6 PSID.. 0-300 PSI........... PG 11 Knockout .......................................... ZMW30-36E-1-T 0-150 PSID. 2-Hole Knockout......................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .PRESSURE 101 Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ......................................................... 0-10VDC............................................................................................ 0......................... air or non-corrosive....................................................................................................................... 3-point Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................... A bright red and a bright green LED alert those approaching of the status of the room........................................ 50/60 Hz or 19.................. 0........................................................... LCD............. contacts rated at 5A at 30VDC or 120 VAC.......................................5-30VAC.................5............. The RPM-1 comes standard with the SPDT relay (for supplemental controls such as audible alarm or remote status indication) and 3 analog output signals................................................................................ 2mA max........................................... .......................................................05%/°C +0.............................................................................5V at zero pressure................0 of water Resolution: .............................................................................................................................................. Light grey Construction: ................. Glass filled polycarbonate....................................................... 12mA at zero pressure.............................................................................1 Pascals) Optional Ranges: ....................... +0............................ +1% of setpoint Standard Range: ........................................................................................ on lower front & back enclosure Hinges: ........................................ 95-135/190-270VAC................................................................................................... preset at 5% of range.....................................................................................................................................................................C................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ -30°C-70°C (-20°F-160°F) Effect of Temp on Reading: ..................................... 0...................................................................................................... +6. Accuracy of Alarm Output: ............................................................................................................................................... 10%-90% RH Physical: Physical Dimensions: .......................................................................... Clear polycarbonate..................................... 2................................................... These analog outputs are proportional to the room pressure.................................. 4A at 240 VAC.....................85” (21mm) dia........................................................ 2mA max.................................................................................................... 50/60 Hz Max Power Consumption: ...................... 0-5VDC............................................. 3 digits......001” of water (or 0............ see physical drawing Weight: ........ 3/4” terminal strip with #6 screws Operating Medium: ....................................................................... The pressure at which the lights change state can be adjusted from the front panel................................................... allow hinging from either side............................027% per °F Operating Humidity Range: ..........1 Pascals) Panel Indicator Lights: .................................... 5V at zero pressure................................................... flammability rating of UL94 V-1 Cover: ................S......... 0°C-50°C (32°F-120°F) Storage Temperature: .....................................................................................................................................001” W.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Accuracy of Reading: ........... 1 red & 1 green LED Display: ...... -10VDC.................................................................. 5 Watts Electrical Connections: ......................................................5” digit height Alarm Output: ............................................. flammability rating of UL94 V2 Knockouts: .................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................. The same instrument monitors either positive or negative room pressures............5Pa) Environmental: Operating Temperature: ............ non -explosive gas Max Momentary Pressure Limit: ......................................................................................................... 0-5VDC....................................................................................................................................................................56lb (1160g) Enclosure: Color: ......................................................................................................... 2....................................... 24 VAC operation is optional..........................................................................................................................................................102 PRESSURE Pressure Indication Devices Model RPM-1 Description The Modus Instruments RPM-1 room pressure monitor takes advantage of timeproven sensor technology to monitor... A selector switch allows field setup for either 120 VAC or 240 VAC 50/60Hz service............................................ Removable..... The RPM-1 is easily mounted on a wall and the installer has the choice of rear or bottom knockouts for electrical and pressure connections.............................................................. open 180° Mounting: ......................... with a resolution of up to 0............................................................. and 4-20mA............................................................................................................................................................1” of water (or 0........................................................... 4-20mA sourcing. resistive Deadband: ..... +1........................................... field adjust from 1-20% Analog Outputs: ...................................................... (+1..... SPDT relay.................... +0..................... +0..............0” w....................................................................................c..................................................... alarm and/or control critical room to room differential pressures........................................ max loop resistance is 580 Ohms Electrical: Power Requirements: .. +1% F.......................................................................................................................................... .... ZMRPM-1-A-01E 120/240 VAC................. ZMRPM-1-A-05E 24 VAC.....5” WC (-125 to +125 PA).......... 50/60 Hz........01” (1 PA) ..... RES 0.. 50/60 Hz.......... RES 0............ Range = -1............. Range = -0. ZMRPM-1-B-04E 24 VAC. RES 0...001” (1 PA) .......1 PA) .0 to +1......... Range = -0.. RES 0... Range = -0.0 to +1.......... ZMRPM-1-B-01E 24 VAC.5” WC (-125 to +125 PA)...... ZMRPM-1-B-05E Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......5 to +0............................1 to +0. 50/60 Hz......001” (0...... 50/60 Hz........001” (1 PA) ................. RES 0.........0” WC (-250 to +250 PA)..... Range = -1..... ZMRPM-1-A-04E 120/240 VAC..... RES 0......0” WC (-250 to +250 PA)...... 50/60 Hz.1” WC (-25 to +25 PA). Range = -0..................................1” WC (-25 to +25 PA)................PRESSURE 103 Ordering Information Item Part # 120/240 VAC. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...1 PA) ..01” (1 PA) ....1 to +0...................5 to +0.001” (0.......................... 50/60 Hz.. ............................... swing arms and ears............................ When an alarm condition occurs.......................... and the red LED and audible alarm are “OFF”................................ Between 7-30VDC Max Supply Current: ..................... until the alarm fault is corrected.. Adjust.......................................................................................... ZMAN-2 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................................... When the conditions are normal again........................... Under normal conditions................................ this contact must be closed under normal conditions.......104 PRESSURE Pressure Indication Devices Model AN-1 Description The Modus Instruments AN-1 single-point annunciator provides a visual and audible warning of an alarm condition occurring at a remote location.. The second potentiometer provides a variable time delay from the moment the alarm is received by the annunciator... max 73dbA distance 12” (30cm) Variable Time Delay: .................................... 1mA External Power Supply: ........................................ the green LED is “STEADY ON”....... The annunciator will not change to the alarm mode if the alarm condition disappears before the end of the time delay... This delay may be adjusted between 5 and 45 seconds....... Min 67dbA............................................................. or with any dry contact and an external power supply......................................... from a minimum level of 67dbA to a maximum level of 73dbA at a distance of 12 inches (30 cm).............................................................................................. The front panel is the same size as the standard electrical wall plate (2-3/4 x 41/2”).......... 5 ............... either with the Room Pressure Monitor Model RPM-1 which supplies the necessary power to the annunciator............................ Other boxes with a minimum depth of 1-1/4” may be substituted by the user..... Momentarily pressing the acknowledge button silences the audible alarm but the red LED stays “FLASHING ON” ............................................................................ 2-13/16” deep Ordering Information Item Part # Single Point Annunciator............................................................................................... The current through the contacts is 1 mA............ the green LED turns off....................... until it responds to the time delay..................................................................................... Behind the front panel are two potentiometers....................................... The green LED returns to ”STEADY ON”.......................................................................... the red LED “ FLASHES ON” and the audible alarm “PULSES ON”.............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................. 2-13/16” deep.......................................................... ZMAN-1 Single Point Annunciator w/2-position Switch ............................................................... The maximum supply current is 13 mA................................. It is supplied with a standard plastic (PVC) switch box........................... This eliminates nuisance alarms caused by short transients................. This box includes four integral clamps.......................................................................... as a reminder. 13mA Physical: Dimensions: Front Panel Size: ........ The external power supply to the annunciator can be between 7 and 30 Vdc..................... Specifications General: Audible Alarm Volume: ................ the annunciator resets itself.................................. The first potentiometer adjusts the volume of the audible alarm...... It operates.................................................................. 2-3/4” x 4-1/2” PVC Switch Box: ........ A model is available with a programmable dry contact input from the override momentary switch (Model AN-2)............. The annunciator is designed for flush installation in a wall.................................................................................................45 seconds Electrical: When Used with Dry Contact: Current: .... When the signal to the annunciator is a dry contact........................................................... PRESSURE 105 Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . 106 PRESSURE Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . .... 3PDT and 4PDT driven by AC or DC coils... 0 to 6G (55Hz maximum) Shock Resistance: SPDT/DPDT: .................. 1 minute..................................................... DPDT (RH2): ........................... AC: 2.............RELAYS Relays RH & SH Series 107 NEW! Description IDEC RH Series General Purpose Midget Relays are available in contact configurations of SPDT....................................................................................................... DPDT.. 1 minute DPDT (RH2)/3PDT (RH3)/4PDT (RH4): ................................................................................................ Between contacts of the same pole: 1..................................................... IDEC SH Series Sockets for DIN Rail Mount can be ordered separately or as a complete kit (relay and socket)................................................................................................... AC: 1....................................... choice of blade or PCB style terminals......................................................................................................................................................... 1 minute.............................................................................000...................... 10A...........................................................................................................................000V AC.......... over 500...................000 AC........................ All RH Series include compact midget size....................................................................................................................................8W........ 4PDT (RH4): ......... DC: 1......................................... (over 200..................................................... 3PDT [RH3]..................................................................................................... 10A for SPDT [RH1]....................................................................... 20ms maximum 3PDT (RH3)................000 operations at 120V AC....................................................... 1 minute............................... 25ms maximum Power Consumption: SPDT (RH1): ..................................................... 2VA (60Hz) Insulation Resistance: ................................................................................................................................... DPDT (RH2): ...............................................000V AC.................. 25ms maximum Release Time: SPDT (RH1)......................................................................................... 50........ high switching capacity......................................... Between live and dead parts: 2............................................... Between contact circuit and operating coil: 2............................................................................................................................................................................................. DC: 0.......................000 AC.......................................................................................000 operations at 120V AC........... 1....................... 1 minute.................................................................................. Between contacts of the same pole: 1........................................800 operations/hour Temperature Rise: Coil: .......................................................................................7VA (60Hz) 4DPT (RH4): ................................................................ 37g 3PDT: ................................. 200N (approximately 20G) 3PDT/4PDT: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. -22 to 158°F (-30 to 70°C) Weight: SPDT: ..........................000 operations Operating Temperature: .................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................ 24V DC/30mA............. 1 minute Frequency Response: 1.................................... 1...................... Specifications General (Relays): Contact Material: ...............................................4VA (50Hz).............................................5VA (50Hz)......................................................................... DC: 1......... 50mΩ maximum (initial value) Minimum Applicable Load: ....................................................................................... 74g Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. Between live and dead parts: 2.............................................................................................. AC: 1................................................................................................................................................ DC: 0.............000V AC.......................... 4PDT (RH4): ...................... 100MΩ min (measured with a 500V DC megger) Dielectric Strength: SPDT (RH1): ...................5W..................... Between contact circuits: 2.............................................................................................2VA (60Hz) 3PDT (RH3): .............................................9W................................... 50g 4PDT: ......................................000V AC................ 1 minute....................................... 4PDT [RH4]) Mechancial: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. All are available with an optional indicator light.......................................................................................................................... 24g DPDT: ...................000V AC...................................... 100N (approximately 10G) Life Expectancy: Electrical: .............................................. Between contact circuit and operating coil: 2. 149°F (65°C) maximum Vibration Resistance: .......................................................... 5V DC/100mA (reference value) Operating Time: SPDT (RH1)............................................ AC: 2VA (50Hz).......................................................................................................................................................... Silver cadmium oxide Contact Resistance: ..................................... 1VA (60Hz) DPDT (RH2): .................................................5W........... 185°F (85°C) maximum Contact: ...........................1VA (50Hz).................... 20ms maximum 3PDT (RH3)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... ZL-ID465 DPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A... ZL-ID483 DPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A................................ Coil (IDEC RH4B-UAC120) ........ ZL-ID5354 DPDT120V Relay and Base (IDEC RH2B-AC120-KIT) .....C............ ZL-ID510 3PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A...... ZL-ID456 3PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A.......................................... Coil (IDEC RH4B-UAC24) ................. Coil (IDEC RH3B-UAC24) .............................. ZL-ID552 4PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A. Coil (IDEC RH1B-UDC24) ............................... ZL-ID513 3PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A................................................ ZL-ID435 SPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V D................... ZL-ID507 4PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A... Coil (IDEC RH1B-UAC24) ................................................................................C...............C............C......C.............................................................................................................. Coil (IDEC RH1B-UAC120) . ZL-ID4534 DPDT 24V Relay and Base (IDEC RH2B-AC24-KIT) ................ ZL-ID441 SPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A..........108 RELAYS Ordering Information Item Part # IDEC Relays SPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A................................................... ZL-ID45277 DPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ZL-ID5475 4PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A.......................................................................... Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH4B-UAC24-L)............................... ZL-ID4651 DPDT120V Relay w/Indicator Light and Base (IDEC RH2B-UAC120-L-KIT)......................................................................................................................... ZL-ID45722 DPDT 24V Relay w/Indicator Light and Base (IDEC RH2B-UAC24-L-KIT) ................ ZL-ID504 3PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/120V A....................... Coil (IDEC RH2B-UDC24) ......................................................................................................................................................................... ZL-IF80955 DIN Rail Mounted Socket for IDEC RH3B 3PDT Relays (IDEC SH3B-05) ... Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH4B-UAC120-L) ..........C.... ZL-ID5535 IDEC Sockets DIN Rail Mounted Socket for IDEC RH1B SPDT Relays (IDEC SH1B-05) .......................................................................................... Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH3B-UAC120-L) . Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH2B-UAC24-L) ......................................................................................... Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH3B-UAC24-L)................................................ ZL-ID546 4PDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A................... Coil (IDEC RH2B-UAC24) ......................C..................................C......................C.................. Coil (IDEC RH2B-UAC120) .............................................. Coil w/Indicator Light (IDEC RH2B-UAC120-L) ............C.......C.... ZL-ID468 DPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V D.....................C....................................C.......................... ZL-ID432 DPDT 10 Amp Plug-in Relay w/24V A.......................... ZL-ID4321 SPDT 24V Relay and Base (IDEC RH1B-AC24-KIT) .C....C........................................ ZL-IF803 DIN Rail Mounted Socket for IDEC RH2B DPDT Relays (IDEC SH2B-05) ........... ZL-ID46873 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................... Coil (IDEC RH3B-UAC120) ................................ ZL-IF830 IDEC Complete Kits (Relays & Sockets) SPDT 120V Relay and Base (IDEC RH1B-AC120-KIT) ........... ZL-IF821 DIN Rail Mounted Socket for IDEC RH4B 4PDT Relays (IDEC SH4B-05) .................................................................................C...................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................................... ..8” (102 mm x 102 mm x 46 mm)..................................................................... The color coded wires make it easy to wire...............................RELAYS Relays Model CVR-12C-0 109 NEW! Description Core Components CVR-12C-0 Relay has DPDT contacts up to 20 amps............................. The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated.......................................... 208/240VAC 1HP................... Specifications General: Contact Ratings: ...... 208VAC 960VA Pilot Duty............................ 24 AC/DC (Core Components CVR-12C-0) ............................... 13 Amp Resistive @ 28VDC 20 Amp Resistive @ 15VDC 20 Amp Resistive @ 300VDC 5 Amp Resistive @ 600VDC 1HP 120VAC 1...................... ZL-LD951 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. The case size is 4” x 4” x 1............... Form 2C....................................................... 120VAC 915VA Pilot Duty... 480/600VAC 660VA Pilot Duty... 240VAC 765VA Pilot Duty................. The coil drive for this relay is 24 volts AC or DC................. 20A Contact Rating..... 480/600VAC B600 Pilot Duty Coil Current: ..................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... 40mA @ 20VDC 50mA @ 24VDC 65mA @ 20VAC 75mA @ 24VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-DPDT Relay..........5HP............................ ............................................ ZL-LD962 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................... The colorcoded wires make it easy to wire.................... 10 Amp Resistive................ 10-30 AC/DC or 120 AC (Core Components CVR-11C-0) ........ 277 VAC N/C Coil Current: .................. 277VAC Ballast 600W Tungsten.......... 22mA @ 10VDC 28mA @ 12VDC 35mA @ 24VDC 37mA @ 30VDC 32mA @ 9VAC 40mA @ 12VAC 48mA @ 24VAC 55mA @ 30VAC 37mA @ 120VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-SPDT Relay..5” x 2................................................. 120VAC N/C TV-5...........5” (38 mm x 71 mm x 38 mm).8” x 1....... 28VDC 480VA.... Specifications General: Contact Ratings: ..................... Form 1C... 240/277 VAC Pilot 480VA................................ 120VAC N/C 1/3 HP.................. also 120VAC. 120VAC N/O TV-2.... 120VAC N/O 240W Tungsten................... 277 VAC N/O 1/6 HP.......... The case size is 1................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... 10A Contact Rating.P............................ 120/240 VAC N/O 1/4 HP........................ 120/240 VAC N/C 1/8 HP...... The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated..110 RELAYS Relays Model CVR-11C-0 NEW! Description Core Components CVR-11C-0 Relay has a coil drive of 10-30 volts AC or DC........... The SPDT relay is rated at 10 mps and up to 1/3 H.............. 277VAC........................................ ................ Specifications General: Contact Ratings: ...... 22mA @ 10VDC 28mA @ 12VDC 35mA @ 24VDC 37mA @ 30VDC 32mA @ 9VAC 40mA @ 12VAC 48mA @ 24VAC 55mA @ 30VAC 37mA @ 120VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 2-SPDT Relay. 277 VAC N/C Coil Current: ....RELAYS Relays Model CVR-21C-0 111 NEW! Description Core Components CVR-21C-0 Relay has a coil drive of 24 volts AC or DC................ 120VAC N/O 240W Tungsten....... ZL-LD972 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... 120VAC N/O TV-2................................. 120/240 VAC N/C 1/8 HP............................................... as well as 120VAC....................P................. 120VAC N/C TV-5............................................... It has 2 SPDT relays with ratings of 10 amps and up to 1/3 H. The color-coded wires make it easy to wire................................................. The visible LED’s indicate when the relays are activated........... 277VAC............... 10-30 AC/DC or 120 AC (Core Components CVR-21C-0) ...................... 10A Contact Rating..........8” (102 mm x 102 mm x 46 mm). 277 VAC N/O 1/6 HP.... Form 1C................ 120/240 VAC N/O 1/4 HP.................... 10 Amp Resistive............. 240/277 VAC Pilot 480VA...... The case size is 4” x 4” x 1..... 120VAC N/C 1/3 HP...... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............. 28VDC 480VA.................. 277VAC Ballast 600W Tungsten.............. .112 RELAYS Relays Model CVR-11A-H NEW! Description Core Components CVR-11A-H Relay has a coil drive of 10-30 volts AC or DC......... 125/250VAC Coil Current: ...................... 22mA @ 10VDC 28mA @ 12VDC 35mA @ 24VDC 37mA @ 30VDC 32mA @ 9VAC 40mA @ 12VAC 48mA @ 24VAC 55mA @ 30VAC 37mA @ 120VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-SPST Relay w/HOA Switch.......... Specifications General: Contact Ratings: .............................................. 10 Amp Resistive........ The case size is 4” x 4” x 1.............................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................8” (102 mm x 102 mm x 46 mm)............................. The three-position rocker switch is a true manual override on the contact side of the relay. Form 1A..................... The SPST relay is rated at 10 amps................................ 10A Contact Rating.................................................. 10-30 AC/DC or 120 AC (Core Components CVR-11A-H) ............. The color-coded wires make it easy to wire.................................... The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated........ ZL-LD9651 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. as well as 120VAC......................................................................... ............. 120VAC N/O 240W Tungsten.............................. 240/277 VAC Pilot 480VA.... as well as 208-277VAC.. 120VAC N/C TV-5........... 277 VAC N/O 1/6 HP.................................5” x 2.......................... 10-30 AC/DC or 208-277AC (Core Components CVR-11C-V) ..... 10A Contact Rating........................... The SPDT relay is rated at 10 amps.. 120/240 VAC N/C 1/8 HP....... The color-coded wires make it easy to wire.. ZL-LD9615 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................. The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated.................... 277VAC Ballast 600W Tungsten......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................ 277VAC....................................RELAYS Relays Model CVR-11C-V 113 NEW! Description Core Components CVR-11C-V Relay has a coil drive of 10-30 volts AC or DC................8” x 1..................................................... 120/240 VAC N/O 1/4 HP........... 277 VAC N/C Coil Current: .5” (38 mm x 71 mm x 38 mm)........ 10 Amp Resistive................. The case size is 1....... Specifications General: Contact Ratings: ............. 35mA @ 277VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-SPDT Relay Form 1C.................. 28VDC 480VA. 120VAC N/O TV-2.... 120VAC N/C 1/3 HP......... ..5” x 2. Specifications General: Contact Ratings: ................. The SPDT relay is rated at 10 amps.. The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated............... 277 VAC N/O 1/6 HP......114 RELAYS Relays Model CVR-11C-F NEW! Description Core Components CVR-11C-F Relay has a coil drive of 24 volts AC or DC.............. 120VAC N/O 240W Tungsten............................................... 24 AC/DC or 120AC (Core Components CVR-11C-F) .............................. 277VAC. 120/240 VAC N/C 1/8 HP.............................. as well as 120VAC............ 10A Contact Rating..................5” (38 mm x 71 mm x 38 mm)........................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............ 22mA @ 10VDC 28mA @ 12VDC 35mA @ 24VDC 37mA @ 30VDC 32mA @ 9VAC 40mA @ 12VAC 48mA @ 24VAC 55mA @ 30VAC 37mA @ 120VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-SPDT Relay Form 1C..................... 120/240 VAC N/O 1/4 HP........................... 10 Amp Resistive.............8” x 1........................ 277VAC Ballast 600W Tungsten............... The case size is 1...............ZL-LD96125 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................ 240/277 VAC Pilot 480VA................................... 277 VAC N/C Coil Current: ...... 120VAC N/C TV-5..................... 28VDC 480VA... The color-coded wires make it easy to wire........... 120VAC N/C 1/3 HP... 120VAC N/O TV-2....................... ...............................................8” (102 mm x 102 mm x 46 mm)...........RELAYS Relays Model CVR-21AIC-H 115 NEW! Description Core Components CVR-21AIC-H Relay has a coil drive of 10-30 volts AC or DC............................................................................... 22mA @ 10VDC 28mA @ 12VDC 35mA @ 24VDC 37mA @ 30VDC 32mA @ 9VAC 40mA @ 12VAC 48mA @ 24VAC 55mA @ 30VAC 37mA @ 120VAC Ordering Information Item Part # 1-SPST & 1-SPDT Relay w/HOA Switch....... The color-coded wires make it easy to wire................ 10 Amp Resistive............................ 240VAC Pilot Duty 480W Tungsten............... Form 1C & 1A........................ Specifications General: Contact Ratings: Relay #1: ................................................................. the contact ratings are 10 amps............ The case size is 4” x 4” x 1.. The three-position rocker switch is a true manual override on the contact side of relay #1 (SPST)... 10A Contact Rating....................................................................................................................... 60HZ Relay #2: ................. With one SPST and one SPDT relay............................................ 120VAC N/C Coil Current: .......... ZL-LD9707 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..... 10-30 AC/DC or 120 AC (Core Components CVR-21A1C-H) ................. 10 Amp Resistive......... 250VAC...................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................. as well as 120VAC....................................................................... 277VAC or 28VDC 480VA.................................. 120VAC N/O 240W Tungsten..... The visible LED indicates when the relay is activated.............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .116 RELAYS Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................TRANSFORMERS Isolation Transformers Model 024-024-040-TF 117 NEW! Description Core Components Isolation Transformer ...... UL Listed.................. The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems................................................................... ZL-LE105 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................... Metal End Bells......... 24VAC Configuration: ....................... 40 VA................................ 24VAC.................. and cores................. Single Threaded Hub Certification: ............................... 24:24 VAC....................................................... Specifications General: Input: .................................................................... magnet wire........................... 60Hz Output: ................................... It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories...............................................................................................................................40VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers.................................................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................... CUL Safety: .......................................................................... Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Isolation Transformer......... 1 Hub (Model 024-024-040-TF) ..................................................... Inc.................................................................. .......................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .... UL Listed.... Inc................. 2 Hubs...................... The transformers are manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems.............. It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 120VAC......................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.......................... UL Listed (Model 120-024-040-2TF) .............................................................................. ZL-LE113 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. magnet wire..... 120:24 VAC.................................................................................118 TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Models 120-024-040-TF & 120-024-040-2TF NEW! Description Core Components Control Transformers -40VA Multi-Mounts are directly interchangeable with most other type transformers................ and cores...... Metal End Bells Certification: ............................................................................... 40 VA.......................................... Specifications General: Input: ................................................. ZL-LE112 Class 2 Control Transformer..................................................................................................................... CSA Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer.................................... Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: .............................................. 40 VA........................................................................... 120:24 VAC......................................... 60 Hz Output: ............................... UL Listed Rec................................................................................ (Model 120-024-040-TF) ....................................................... UL Recognized Dual Threaded Hub: ...................................................................... 1 Hub............................................................................................................................................................... 24VAC Configuration: .............. .. 120:24 VAC.......................... 60 Hz Output: ................... 120:24 VAC...................................................................... ZL-LE1175 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................................................................................... (Model 120-024-050-TF) .................................................. magnet wire................................... Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: ..................... Inc. Metal End Bells Certification: .................................................................................. 50 VA............................................................................................................................................... and cores....................................................... 2 Hubs................... UL Listed.... CSA Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer............................TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Models 120-024-050-TF & 120-024-050-2TF 119 NEW! Description Core Components Control Transformers -50VA Multi-Mounts are directly interchangeable with most other type transformers................................................................................................................................................ UL Recognized Dual Threaded Hub: .... 24VAC Configuration: ..................................................................................... 50 VA................................................................................ ZL-LE117 Class 2 Control Transformer............................................................................. UL Listed (Model 120-024-050-2TF) ................................................... 1 Hub................................................................................................................................................... 120VAC........ Specifications General: Input: ............................................. It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................... The transformers are manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems...................................................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.... UL Rec...... ........... ZL-LE1305 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. magnet wire........................ 277VAC......................................................... Metal End Bells Certification: ........................................................................................... 50 VA................................................................................ UL Recognized..... 2 Hubs.................. CSA Dual Threaded Hub: ................ (Model 277-024-050-TF) ............................. (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies................................................................ UL Listed Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer........... UL Listed (Model 277-024-050-2TF) ............. The transformers are manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems................................................................................ Inc.......................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ......................................... Specifications General: Input: ...................................... UL Rec......................................... 277:24VAC.............120 TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Models 277-024-050-TF & 277-024-050-2TF NEW! Description Core Components Control Transformers ...... 50 VA..............................................50VA Multi-Mounts are directly interchangeable with most other type transformers.... Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24VAC Configuration: ......................................................................................... 277:24 VAC............................................................... 50/60 Hz Output: ........................ and cores......................................... 1 Hub...... ZL-LE131 Class 2 Control Transformer...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories.. ................................................................. 2 Hubs. magnet wire............................................. (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies............................................ and cores............................................ UL Recognized Dual Threaded Hub: .... Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries............................................................................................................................. Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man.............................................................................................................................. ZL-LE118 Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man........................................ The transformers are manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems............ It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories............................ Metal End Bells Certification: .... UL Rec............(Model 120-024-075-TF-CB) ...................................................... 1 Hub................................................................. Inc........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................ ZL-LE119 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. 24VAC Configuration: ......................................................................................................... UL Listed (Model 120-024-075-2TF-CB) .......................................................................................................................... 75 VA..................................................... 60 Hz Output: ........................... 120VAC.................. Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: ............75VA Multi-Mounts are directly interchangeable with most other type transformers................................. 120:24 VAC........................................................................................................................................................................................................TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Models 120-024-075-TF-CB & 120-024-075-2TF-CB 121 NEW! Description Core Components Control Transformers .................... CSA Safety: ................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Input: ................... 75 VA......................................................................................................................................................................... 120:24 VAC........................... Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries.............................. UL Listed...................... .. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Hub................ 120:24 VAC................................................................. UL Rec.................................................... 96VA.......... Inc................................................................. UL Listed........................... Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man.......................................................................................................................................................... UL Listed (Model 120-024-100-2TF-CB) ........ 120:24 VAC.........................122 TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Models 120-024-100-TF-CB & 120-024-100-2TF-CB NEW! Description Core Components Transformer ............................................................................ 60 Hz Output: ............................................................................................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies....... Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries................................................................................. Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries.................................. ZL-LE121 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..................................................................................................................... and cores............. UL Recognized Dual Threaded Hub: .......................... 120VAC........ 2 Hubs..................................................................................................... CSA Safety: .............................. It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories...........(Model 120-024-100-TF-CB) .............................................................100VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers................. ZL-LE120 Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man...................................................................................................... 96 VA...................................... Specifications General: Input: ..................................................... 24VAC Configuration: .......... magnet wire....................................................................... Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: .............. Metal End Bells Certification: .......................................... The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems..................... ............... Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries........................................................................................................................................... magnet wire.................. The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems...........................................(Model 120-024-150-TF) .......... Inc................... Class 2 Single Threaded Hub: ................................................... 120VAC........................................... Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Control Transformer w/Man....................................... ZL-LE124 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 120:24 VAC................................. CSA Safety: .......................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................. 24VAC Configuration: .............. and cores................................................. 60 Hz Output: ............................................................................ It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories........................................................................................................................TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Model 120-024-150-TF 123 NEW! Description Core Components Control Transformer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... UL Rec...............................................................................................150VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers................................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.......... Specifications General: Input: ....................................................... 150VA..................................................... Metal End Bells Certification: ........ 1 Hub...................................................... UL Listed...... UL Recognized Dual Threaded Hub: ........ ......................... 120............................................................................... 208............ 75 VA........... 120/208/240/480:24 VAC. UL Listed..... Class 2............. Inc............(Model MUA-024-075-TF-CB) ........... UL Listed................. Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man.................................................................... Specifications General: Input: ............75VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1 Hub................. (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.............. Reset Circuit Breakers Multiple Primaries.........................................................................................................................................................................124 TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers MUA-024-075-TF-CB NEW! Description Core Components Transformer ......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .... 480VAC.......... Metal End Bells Certification: ................................................ 50/60Hz Output: ................................................. CSA Safety: ...................................... 24VAC Configuration: ....................................................................... magnet wire........................................................... and cores............................................... The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems...................................... 240..................... ZL-LE1501 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................. It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories.............. ....................................................................................... 277................................................................. ZL-LE160 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................................... UL Listed (Model MUC-024-050-TF-CB) .. The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems.. 1 Hub................................................... UL Listed............................ It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories.............................. CUL Safety: .............. Reset Circuit Breakers Multiple Primaries......50VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers............................................ Metal End Bells Certification: ................................................................................................................................................................ and cores............................................................................... and 480V Output: ............................ 120.................................................................................................................................TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers Model MUC-024-050-TF-CB 125 NEW! Description Core Components Transformer ........................ 24V Configuration: ........ 120/240/277/480:24 VAC... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................... 240.......... Inc............................................................................................................................................ Specifications Input: ............................................... 50VA........................................... magnet wire........ Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man..................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies.................................................................................... ................................................ and cores....................................... (UL) as well as other domestic and foreign certification agencies............................. magnet wire............................................................... 96VA............................................................................................. UL Listed (Model MUC-024-100-TF-CB) .........................126 TRANSFORMERS Control Transformers MUC-024-100-TF-CB NEW! Description Core Components Transformer ............................................ Metal End Bells Certification: ..............................................96VA Multi-Mount is directly interchangeable with most other type transformers.......................................... 1 Hub.......... 277....................................... ZL-LE170 Dimensional Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................... 120............ 22........................................... UL Listed............................ Reset Circuit Breakers Single Primaries................................7V Configuration: .... It meets the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories................................................................................................................................................................................... Circuit Breaker Ordering Information Item Part # Class 2 Control Transformer w/Man...................................... Specifications General: Input: .............................. The transformer is manufactured using quality materials including insulation systems............................................ 240..................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................ Inc..... 120/240/277/480:24 VAC........................................... CUL Safety: ................................................... 480V Output: ......................... ......................................... Multi-position terminal strips are provided for the DC output..............0/2.......................................................................... 3AG 1.......................................................................2% (no load to full load) Current Limit: ...................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................0 VDC to 25.............................................................................................................................9 Amp................................................................................................................................................................................................0 VDC Line Regulation: ................................... Narrow Width ............. 1.............0 Amp...5 Amp.. Low Height ........................................ 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output.............................. ZAPS-200-1-A-3L 24 VAC Primary.......... ZAPS-200-1-A-1L 115 VAC Primary......................................................................................................... ZAPS-200-1-B-1N 24 VAC Primary....01%/V Load Regulation: ....................................................................0 lbs.. 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output.. 1................................................................................................................ short circuit and thermal overload protected 5........................................ 1................................................................................ The PS-200 is a reliable........5 Amp........................ Specifications General: Output Voltage Range: ......................................... Internally Protected Inline Fuse: ............................................................................. Indefinite Weight: ........................ 3..................... 0............ The PS-200 incorporates an in-line fuse and terminal strip for the primary line voltage..... Low Height ......... 5..................................................................................................................0 to 25. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............. stable and versatile power supply that requires a minimal amount of installation time...............0 mV pp maximum Output Short Circuit: ......... ZAPS-200-1-A-3N NOTE: All units factory calibrated to 24 VDC........ Narrow Width ........................................................................................................................... -40°F to 120°F Humidity: ......................................................................................................................................0 VDC output.......... 3................................................................................................................................................ 0..................... ZAPS-200-1-A-1N 115 VAC Primary......................... ZAPS-200-1-B-1L 115 VAC Primary........................... Two unique chassis options are available.................. 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output................................................................ 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output............... 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output................. 130% rated current Output Ripple: .... 1... If different voltage required specify “Calibrate to “XXXX” VDC on order........................................................ 3................. Low Height ....................................................................................................... Narrow Width ............................................................................5 Amp........ Thermal Overload: ..............................................................................5 A+2...POWER SUPPLIES 127 Power Supplies Model PS-200 Description MAMAC System’s PS-200 power supply accepts either 115 or 24 VAC input and provides fully regulated.........................................................................................5 lbs............................0 A+3.................................................... 90% non-condensing Ordering Information Item Part # 115 VAC Primary................................... 90-130 VAC/208-240 VAC/24-29 VAC Operating Temperature: ....0 Input Voltage: .................... 5-25 VDC Adjustable Output... 2............................... 1............................................................................................................................................................5 Amp. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .128 POWER SUPPLIES Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ...................................... 4 wire connections of shielded cable to screw terminals through 0................................. or .................................................. Software tools for tank probe checkout and troubleshooting are available free of charge................. 1 second (typical) Input Voltage Range: ........................................................................................................... ............................. 24 to 26 VDC @ safety barrier input............................. or ......................................................................... Specifications Performance: Measured Variable: ........8cm) long Mounting: .... 1................................... Epoxy painted aluminum Minimum Life Expectancy: .. -34 to 71°C (-30 to 160°F) = waveguide......................................................... vapor monitoring and sump monitoring of an underground storage tank installation.....................................................................................................................................896 Mpa Max (275 PSIG) Materials Wetted: ..................................... ..............................................0005% per °F) Vessel Pressure: ............. II.................................. The probe has a temperature measurement range of 0 to 110°F (-18 to 43°C).................. Characteristics of this material enable the sensor to have excellent aging and temperative properties...........................................................6 to 7... O-ring sealed for outdoor use (NEMA 4) Humidity: ............................................................................... The Infinity RS-485 Sensing Probe is composed of an aluminum housing coupled with three concentric tubes......................5°F.................................................. ................................................................................................................................................................005” (0............ interface level................... (0........................................................................................... G hazardous areas Calibration: Zero Adjust Range: ........................................... You will also need three additional cable connectors................ 4’..... Single stage line to line Safety Approval: ......................................... 2 to 25 ft........001% per °C (...... 0 to 100% RH Operating Temperature: ...............................................................001% F................................................................................................................................................... ...................62m) Non-linearity: .............................................. These tools will enable you to setup.............................................................................................. 8’.................................... -40 to 65°C (-40 to 149°F) = electronics.................................794mm) Hysteresis: .................................................... with an inherent accuracy of +0..... The outermost tube serves as a protective jacket for the level and temperature sensing components..................... III..................025mm) whichever is greatest Time Constant: .............. Factory Mutual (FM) Intrinsic Safety approval for Class I............... Unique properties inherent to the waveguide material allow for precision level measurement.................................. @ sensor terminals Reverse Polarity Protection: ........................................................................................................................ Series diodes Transient Protection: ............... 10’.................................................................62m) excluding housing Housing Dimensions: .75” (9......... 316 Stainless Steel Non-wetted: ... The waveguide has a very small diameter and is made of a proprietary magnetrostrictive material............. No field adjustment required Environmental: Sealing: ........................................................................................................................35mm) sanitary fitting (optional) Wiring: ....... 10 years Field Installation Requirements: Length: ............................ You may obtain your free set of software tools from the Andover Controls TSD Bulletin Board along with information on cable requirements and setup............... 6’......................................................53cm) diameter x 8......... 2..................................... F............................................................................ To use the software tools.......................... Product level................... you will need an IBM PC computer with DOS and a serial port.................................................... 8.... temperature Full Range: ...... Standard probe lengths are 2’... Groups C............................. Up to five RTDs can be mounted on the inner tube assembly inside the outer protective jacket................................... and 12’......................................................................................... 2 to 25ft......................................................127mm) whichever is greatest Repeatability: ......................... Each RTD is a 1000 ohm platinum film device............................... Software selectable along entire sensor stroke........ in compliance with Federal EPA regulations. (0..................................................................................................... E..........................5” (6................S. 3. .................TANK PROBES 129 Infinity RS-485 Tank Probe Description The Andover Controls Infinity RS-485 Tank Probe is highly accurate level and temperature probe.............................................................025% F............... -34 to 149°C (-30 to 300°F) = waveguide (optional) Temperature Sensitivity: ... ..................... The innermost tube comprises the waveguide.......................................... Multiple probes can be used with the Infinity TMS to provide interstitial space monitoring........................................6” (21.............................................................. It is used with the Andover Infinity Tank Monitoring System (TMS) to provide in-tank monitoring for leak detection and inventory analysis of underground storage tanks..................................... the key component in magnetrostrictive technology............. D...............................................................................................001” (0.........................................................S....... Division 1... monitor and communicate directly with the RS-485 tank probes........................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................................... ....................................................0V min............. or 1/32” (0......S........................ < ....................................................................................................001% F......................................................5” NPT conduit opening Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............. ¾” NPT adjustable fitting (optional)........................................................................6 to 7........... ................... 01-0007-035 10 ft......................................................g................ 01-0007-027 Diesel/Water Interface Float............... 01-0007-026 Product Float.......... 01-0007-078 Product Float........................................... 3............................ 01-0007-036 12 ft..................................... 2” Diameter .. 01-0007-037 Probe Accessories Product Float.. 01-0007-025 Gasoline/Water Interface Float...................................... w/ 3 RTD ......... 1...................... special liquids and special floats can be obtained from the Andover Controls Peripherals Applications Engineer........................................................................................5” Diameter ................................... 1999................................. MINIMUM ORDER SIZE IS $50............................................. 1....... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................... 2 ft....................................................... 01-0007-033 6 ft....................................................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... w/ 3 RTD ............................................................... TSD Bulletin Board NOTES: Effective January 1...................................................................................... 01-0007-013 Probe Mounting Kit .................................75” Diameter ....................................................................................... 1..................................................................... 01-0007-011 Gasoline/Water Interface Float..... w/ 3 RTD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Monitoring & Communication ............................................................................................................................................................ 3........... 01-0007-039 4 ft............ 2” Diameter .............................................. w/ 3 RTD ..... 1 per Probe...............................................................75” Diameter ...... 01-0007-012 Diesel/Water Interface Float............................................ 30-3001-427 Software Tools for Setup....................... 3................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 01-0007-077 Gasoline/Water Interface Float......................................................................................................... 01-0007-034 8 ft.5” Diameter ................................................................... probe = 29 inches)............... w/ 3 RTD ......................................................................................... w/ 3 RTD .............................................................. Standard lengths DO NOT include 2 floats................................................................................. 1 per Probe....................... 2” Diameter .................................................................................................................... 01-0007-015 Tank Probe Manual ..................................... 1 per Probe.. Overall length of probe is actually 5 inches longer than the above descriptions state so as to allow for clearance (e...00........................ Product and Interface Floats must now be ordered separately.....................................75” Diameter ................ Pricing for non-standard probe lengths......5” Diameter ......................................................... 01-0007-080 Diesel/Water Interface Float................130 TANK PROBES Ordering Information Item Part # INFINITY RS-485 Sensing Probes 2 ft...................... ..............................................75 mm) Features: ............................................... UL 294 listed....................................................................... 6’ Cable ....... 6’ Cable ............................. Indoor/Outdoor.....................................................................................3” H x 5...................... Terminal Strip .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-003 Classic Swipe Reader.............................................. 0............................................................................................................................................................................................................ rain................................. Red/Green Termination: ...........................................................................................6 mm to 1........................... (343 gm) Material: ..........3” W x 1....... Beige....................... high impact plastic to resist vandals and epoxy potted to seal out moisture................................... 01-7000-122 Extra Label for Classic Swipe Reader.............................. Black........................................................................................................ It performs well in medium-to-high volume installations and may be exposed to sun................................46 cm W x 4.... Long-wearing polymeric plastic Certifications: .................................................................... ACC Logo ........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................069” (1....................... A.............................. Black................ Beige................................................................................... Black................................................................................................................3 cm D) Weight: ....8 cm H x 13..................................................................................... CE Mark approved Cable Distance: ................................................................ Black.......................................................................................................................................................................... It can be back-mounted on a vertical surface and the slot may be oriented upward............... 12...................7” D (5................ 01-7000-001 Classic Swipe Reader... It is molded of rugged. 01-7000-121 Classic Swipe Reader................................ or facing left or right.....................................................................................................CARDS & READERS 131 HID Wiegand-Effect Readers Classic Swipe Wiegand Reader Description The HID Wiegand Classic Swipe Reader is a pass-through reader.....................................................................................................................................................0062” to 0................ -40 to 160°F (-40 to 70°C) Output: .................................................................................................................................................................................... Input Power: .................................................. A1................................................................................................ Specifications General: Colors: .................................................................................. downward................................................................................... or snow........................................................................................................................................................................ Terminal Strip ......... Single Piece Operating Temperature: ............................................. D Dimensions: ....................................................................................................................................... 2.......................................................1 oz..................................................................................................... It is immune to external magnetic fields and RF signals.................................................................. Beige LED Type: .. 01-3002-229 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................................................................................... 6’ Cable or Terminal Strip Slot Width: ........................ 5 -12VDC Card Type*: .................................... The Classic Swipe reader features a bi-color LED... 40 mA typ....................... Wiegand Current: ........................................................... 500 feet (150 m) using shielded 22 AWG cable * A = code strip along long edge/right side A1 = code strip along long edge/left side D = code strip along short edge Ordering Information Item Part # Classic Swipe Reader.............................................. .......................................................................9 cm W x 3.. A1........................................... 6’ Cable Slot Width: ............................................................................................... 0.............................................. Long-wearing Polymeric Plastic Weight: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Black LED Type: .............................................................................................................................. The Epic Wiegand reader accepts from 5 to 12 volts input.................................. 5 to 12 VDC Card Type*: . A...................................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................................... ACC Logo .........................................................................86” W x 1............................................................. Black........................................0062” to 0...................................66” H x 5.................................................................................................... It is immune to external magnetic fields and RF signals........................................................................................................................................................................................................ CE mark approved * A = code strip along long edge/right side A1 = code strip along long edge/left side D = code strip along short edge Ordering Information Item Part # Epic Reader.......................................76 cm H x 14................................................................ 500 ft (150 m) using 22 GA foil shield cable Certifications: .................. D Dimensions: ........................0 cm D) Material: .......................................................................................................................................... Red/Amber/Green Termination: .................................................................................................................................. -40 to 160°F (-40 to 70°C)................................................................ UL 294 listed................................. Indoor/Outdoor............................................................ 01-3002-235 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................................................................................................................................................... 12................... 01-7000-216 Extra Label for Epic Swipe Reader.... 6’ Cable ......................... 10 to 95% RH non-condensing Output: ........................................................................................................................................6 oz.............. high impact plastic to resist vandals and epoxy potted to seal out moisture.................. Contemporary styling makes the Epic Wiegand reader a popular choice for both modern and traditional buildings.............. (357 gm) Cable Distance: .......................................................................... 40 mA typ..............132 CARDS & READERS HID Wiegand-Effect Readers Epic Wiegand Reader Description The HID Epic Wiegand Reader provides an ergonomically designed forward slanted card slot for a more natural hand position when swiping a card.....................................50” D (6........................................................................................... permitting its use on virtually any system.................................................................................................. It is molded of rugged..............................................75 mm) Features: .. Wiegand Current: ............... Tri-State..... 2................................. The Epic Wiegand reader features a tri-color LED.......................................................................................................... 3 LED.................6 mm to 1.............................069” (1............................................ Single Piece Operating Temperature: ............................................................ Specifications General: Colors: .... Input Power: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... CARDS & READERS 133 HID Wiegand-Effect Readers Wiegand Key Reader Description The HID Wiegand Key Reader is an insertion “push-pull” reader. The reader is typically flush-mounted into an opening in a wall or a mounting plate, with the key slot oriented so that the key is held in a horizontal plane. After the reader is mounted, it is covered by a black snap-on escutcheon. The code is read as the key is withdrawn from the slot. The key reader offers the advantage of its small size and the convenience of a key. It may be exposed to sun, rain, or snow. Specifications General: Colors: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Black LED Type: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Red Termination: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6’ Cable Slot Width: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.100” (2.5 mm) min. Features: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor; Single Piece Operating Temperature: ........................................................................................................................................................................................ -40 to 160°F (-40 to 70°C) Output: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wiegand Current: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 mA typ. Input Power: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 VDC Card Type: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wiegand Keys Dimensions: ..................................................................................................................................................... 1.62” H x 1.5” W x 2.0” D (4.1 cm H x 3.8 cm W x 5.1 cm D) Ordering Information Item Part # Key Reader, Black, 6’ Cable (uses keys only) ........................................................................................................................... 01-7000-031 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 134 CARDS & READERS HID Wiegand-Effect Readers Insertion Wiegand Reader Description The HID Wiegand Insertion Reader is a “push-pull” reader. It is usually flush-mounted into an opening in a wall or mounting plate, with the card slot oriented so that the card is held in a horizontal plane. The code is read as the card is withdrawn from the slot. The Insertion Reader is ideal in settings where its unobtrusive appearance is an advantage or where the cardholder’s arm motion is restricted. The Insertion Reader is molded of rugged, high impact plastic to resist vandals and epoxy potted to seal out moisture. It features a bicolor LED. The Insertion Reader is immune to external magnetic fields and RF signals. The reader may be exposed to sun, rain, or snow. Specifications General: Colors: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Woodgrain, Aluminized LED Type: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Bi-color LED, Red/Green Termination: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6’ Cable or Terminal Strip Slot Width: ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.0062” to 0.069” (1.6 mm to 1.75 mm) Features: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor; Single Piece Operating Temperature: ..................................................................................................................................... -40 to 160°F (-40 to 70°C), 10 to 95% RH non-condensing Output: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wiegand Current: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 mA typ. Input Power: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-12 VDC Card Type*: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. A, A1 Dimensions: ................................................................................................................................................... 1.18” H x 3.18” W x 3.0” D (3.0 cm H x 8.1 cm W x 7.6 cm D) Material: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Long-wearing Polymeric Plastic Weight: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10.6 oz. (301 gm) Cable Distance: .................................................................................................................................................................... 500 feet (150 m) using shielded 22 AWG cable Certifications: .............................................................................................................................................................................................. Ul 294 listed, CE mark approved * A = code strip along long edge/right side A1 = code strip along long edge/left side Ordering Information Item Part # Insertion Reader, Woodgrain, “HID” Faceplate Label, Terminal Stripe ................................................................................... 01-7000-021 Insertion Reader, Woodgrain, “HID” Faceplate Label, 6’ Cable .............................................................................................. 01-7000-123 Insertion Reader, Aluminized, “HID” Faceplate Label, Terminal Strip ..................................................................................... 01-7000-022 Insertion Reader, Aluminized, “HID” Faceplate Label, 6’ Cable .............................................................................................. 01-7000-024 Insertion Reader, No Faceplate, 6’ Cable ................................................................................................................................. 01-7000-165 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 CARDS & READERS 135 HID Wiegand-Effect Readers Turnstile Wiegand Reader Description The HID Wiegand Turnstile Reader is a pass-through reader. It mounts either horizontally or vertically, making it ideal for high traffic applications. It is molded of rugged, high impact aluminum allow to resist vandals and epoxy potted to seal out moisture. The Turnstile reader features a bi-color LED. It is immune to external magnetic fields and RF signals. Specifications General: Colors: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Blacked, Brushed Chrome LED Type: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Bi-color LED, Red or Red/Green Termination: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6’ Cable Slot Width: .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 0.62” to 0.069” (1.6 mm to 1.75 mm) Features: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor; Single Piece Operating Temperature: ..................................................................................................................................... -40 to 160°F (-40 to 70°C), 10 to 90% RH non-condensing Output: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wiegand Current: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 mA typ. Input Power: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 -12 VDC Card Type*: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... A, A1, D Dimensions: ............................................................................................................................................. 1.75” H x 7.0” W x 1.75” D (4.45 cm H x 17.8 cm W x 4.45 cm D) Material: ........................................................................................................... Long-wearing Aluminum Alloy 6063 coated with either a black epoxy or chromium finish Weight: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 oz. (567 gm) Certifications: ............................................................................................................................................................................................. UL 294 listed, CE mark approved * A = code strip along long edge/right side A1 = code strip along long edge/left side D = code strip along short edge Ordering Information Item Part # Turnstile Reader, Black, Dual LED, 6’ Cable ............................................................................................................................. 01-7000-108 Turnstile Reader, Brushed Chrome, Dual LED, 6’ Cable ........................................................................................................... 01-7000-109 Turnstile Reader, Black, Single LED, 6’ Cable .......................................................................................................................... 01-7000-011 Turnstile Reader, Brushed Chrome, Single LED, 6’ Cable ........................................................................................................ 01-7000-012 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 136 CARDS & READERS HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards SensorCard Description The HID SensorCard is a basic vinyl Wiegand encoded card. Available in several thicknesses (.030”, .037”, and .047”) and a wide range of options including high coercivity magnetic stripe, slot punch, hot stamp, and a choice of artworks. An embedded Wiegand code strip provides trillions of possible codes laminated under pressure to create a solid vinyl card. Any attempt to reach the code strip destroys the card. SensorCard cards are strong and flexible, resistant to breaking, and extremely reliable over a broad range of temperature and humidity ranges. Specifications General: Coding: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Standard Wiegand Features: ........................................................................................................................... ACC Logo, Hot Stamp, Slot Punch, Zero Gap Seq. Numbering, Custom Artwork Dimensions: ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3.375” x 2.125” (8.75 cm x 5.40 cm) Thickness: .................................................................................................................... ISO: 0.030” (0.076 cm); Standard: 0.037” (0.094 cm); Ext. Wear: 0.047” (0.119 cm) Surface: ............................................................................................................................................................................... Plain White Surface (front), HID Artwork (Back) Bit Range Format: ................................................................................................................................................. Infinity Format (37 bit); AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit); 26 bit Code Strip Layout Options*: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... A, A1, D Card Construction: ............................................................................................................................. Standard vinyl with standard artwork in plain white, blue and black, custom artwork and with a directional arrow on a side of a card with no other printing Operating Temperature: .................................................................................................................................... -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C), 10 to 95% RH Non-condensing Weight: ISO: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .17 oz. (4.9 gm) Standard: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ .20 oz. (5.7 gm) Extended Wear: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .27 oz. (7.6 gm) Options: ........................................................................................................................................... Slot Punch, Custom Graphics, External Card Numbering, Photo Pouch *A=long edge/right side; A1=long edge/left side; D=short edge Ordering Information Item Part # SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, Label w/Pin, 37 Bit ....................................................................................... 01-7001-147 SensorCard, Standard, Orange, ACC Logo, Label w/Pin, 37 Bit .............................................................................................. 01-7001-039 SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit .................................................................................... 01-7001-148 SensorCard, Standard, Orange, ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit ........................................................................................... 01-7001-061 SensorCard, Standard, Plain White, No Artwork, 37 Bit ......................................................................................................... 01-7001-046 SensorCard, Standard, Plain White, No Artwork, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit ................................................................................. 01-7001-064 SensorCard Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 37 Bit ................................................................................................... 01-7001-149 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Orange ACC Logo, 37 Bit .......................................................................................................... 01-7001-041 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit........................................................................... 01-7001-150 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, x-reference, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit, Slot Top ....................................... 01-7001-185 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Orange ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit .................................................................................. 01-7001-063 SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, Label w/Pin, 26 Bit ....................................................................................... 01-7001-229 SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 26 Bit .................................................................................... 01-7001-230 SensorCard, Standard, Plain White, No Artwork, 26 Bit ......................................................................................................... 01-7001-231 SensorCard, Standard, Plain White, No Artwork, w/Hot Stamp, 26 Bit ................................................................................. 01-7001-232 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 26 Bit .................................................................................................. 01-7001-233 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 26 Bit........................................................................... 01-7001-234 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, X-Ref, w/Hot Stamp, Slot Top, 26 Bit ................................................ 01-7001-235 SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 32 Bit ............................................................................................................ 01-7001-153 SensorCard, Standard, Orange ACC Logo, 32 Bit .................................................................................................................... 01-7001-001 SensorCard, Standard, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, Hot Stamp, 32 Bit ......................................................................................... 01-7001-160 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 32 Bit .................................................................................................. 01-7001-154 SensorCard, Extended Wear, ACC Logo, 32 Bit ....................................................................................................................... 01-7001-036 SensorCard, Extended Wear, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, Hot Stamp, 32 Bit ............................................................................... 01-7001-156 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 CARDS & READERS 137 HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards SensorCard II Description The HID SensorCard II is a Wiegand card with a magnetic stripe added to the back. The SensorCard II provides a solution for companies desiring to use one card incorporating Wiegand, magnetic stripe, and photo identification technologies for multiple applications. The SensorCard II meets ISO standards for thickness so it can be used with all direct image printers and magnetic strip readers. Specifications General: Coding: ............................................................................................................................................................................................... Wiegand/Mag Stripe Dual Technology Features: ........................................................................................................................... ACC Logo, Hot Stamp, Slot Punch, Zero Gap Seq. Numbering, Custom Artwork Dimensions: ........................................................................................................................................................... 3.375” x 2.125” x 0.030” (8.75 cm x 5.40 cm x 0.076 cm) Surface: ................................................................................................................................................... Plain White Surface (front), HID Artwork/Custom Artwork (back) Bit Range Format: ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Infinity Format (37 bit); 26 bit Code Strip Layout Options*: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... A, A1 Card Construction: ................................................................. Vinyl Dual Technology Card, concealed Wiegand code strip plus a high-coercivity magnetic stripe on back Operating Temperature: .................................................................................................................................... -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C), 10 to 95% RH Non-condensing Weight: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .17 oz (4.9 gm) Options: ..................................................................................... Slot Punch, Custom Graphics, External Card Numbering, Photo Pouch, Surface: Gloss, Satin or Brushed *A=long edge/right side; A1=long edge/left side Ordering Information Item Part # SensorCard II, Combo Wiegand & Mag Stripe, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 37 bit ...................................................................... 01-7001-151 SensorCard II, Combo Wiegand & Mag Stripe, Orange ACC Logo, 37 Bit .............................................................................. 01-7001-051 SensorCard II, Blue & Gray ACC Logo w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit ................................................................................................... 01-7001-152 SensorCard II, Orange ACC Logo, w/Hot Stamp, 37 Bit .......................................................................................................... 01-7001-065 SensorCard II, Combo Wiegand & Mag Stripe, Blue & Gray ACC Logo, 26 Bit ...................................................................... 01-7001-236 SensorCard II, Blue & Gray ACC Logo w/Hot Stamp, 26 Bit ................................................................................................... 01-7001-237 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................................. All Vinyl.................055” (8......................... Polyester/Vinyl.................................................. Custom Artwork Dimensions: Credit Card: .......... for Polaroid Film...........26 cm x 5.............................40 cm x 0.......... All Vinyl.............. Protective flaps are attached on one or both sides for user lamination.............. Numbering...... ...... w/Hot Stamp.... External Card Numbering...................................................................................... The Photo ID card provides a solution for companies desiring to use one card to take advantage of Wiegand technology supplemented by photo ID................. Photo ID for Type 681 & 669 Wet Film Features: ...................... Plain White.... 01-7001-013 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............14 cm) Surface: ..... 01-7001-059 Photo ID Card.................................................................................... for Video Image...................................... 37 Bit .................... Specifications General: Coding: .................... for Video Image.................... 37 Bit ....................375” x 2........................................ .25” x 2............ 01-7001-082 Photo ID Card.... All Vinyl......... Vinyl or Polyester/Vinyl Bit Range Format: ............................................................. 26 Bit ........................ w/Hot Stamp.... Operating Temperature: .................... A....................... w/Hot Stamp........................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ Plain White...................7 gm) Options: ............................................................. Plain White........................................................... ...... Plain White................. for Polaroid Film....21 oz... A1. 26 bit Code Strip Layout Options*: ................................ (6.... 26 Bit ....3....................................14 cm) Badge Size: ........................... 10 to 95% RH Non-condensing Weight: Credit Card: ......... All Vinyl................................. The Photo ID card accepts either Polaroid film prints or video image prints....................33” x 0......................... 01-7001-241 Photo ID Card............92 cm x 0........................... Front or Back Aperture *A=long edge/right side....... 01-7001-238 Photo ID Card........................... w/Hot Stamp....................... 26 Bit .................................................. -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)......................0 gm) Badge: ....... Vinyl or polyester/vinyl card with a concealed Wiegand code strip and an aperture dimensioned to accept Polaroid ID-3 photo identification prints or equivalent............................................ D Card Construction: ............................... for Polaroid Film.............................138 CARDS & READERS HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards Photo ID Description The HID Photo ID Wiegand Access Card combines Wiegand technology and photo identification on a single card........ (7..... All Vinyl......................................27 oz.......................57 cm x 5..... for Video Image..... Slot Punch.................................................................................................................................. 37 Bit .... 01-7001-240 Photo ID Card.............................. Plain White...................055” (8..... for Polaroid Film. for Polaroid Film.................... Plain White............. D=short edge Ordering Information Item Part # Photo ID Card............... Slot Punch.......................................... 01-7001-083 Photo ID Card....................... 37 Bit ........ for Video Image..... 01-7001-239 Photo ID Card.......................... A1=long edge/left side...... AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit).............125” x 0....................................................................................................................................................................................... Custom Graphics................................................. 26 Bit ............................................................................ 32 Bit ................... Plain White.......... Zero Gap Seq.... All Vinyl............................. Plain White.......................................................... It is available in either credit card or badge sizes..................................... Plain White........ Hot Stamp.............................................................. 3....................................................................... 01-7001-062 Photo ID Card.............................. All Vinyl....................... All Vinyl..... Infinity Format (37 bit)................................................................................................... ... Custom Artwork..... 01-7001-057 Temperature Test Kit for Photo ID Laminator................................ Wiegand Features: ........................................................................................ w/Hot Stamp............... 37 Bit ................................ Mag Stripe............ 32 Bit .....for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer................................................................ Mag Stripe............... 300F .............. Zero Gap Seq........... Infinity Format (37 bit)................ 01-7001-247 Plain White....................037”)...................... 26 Bit .....................................................94 mm) Surface: ........................... for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer........... 01-7001-169 Plain White Card....... Gloss or Satin Bit Range Format: ......................................................037” (0..... Magnetic Stripe Dimensions: ..... 37 Bit . 26 bit Ordering Information Item Part # Plain White.. Glossy Front/Back.................................................. w/Hot Stamp.... Numbering.................... w/Hot Stamp............ (......................... Satin Front/Back.............................76 mm)...................................................... Hot Stamp.......................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-245 Plain White Card.............CARDS & READERS 139 HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards Graphics Quality Card Description The HID Graphics are directly printed on this card from a video image system using a dye sublimation printer...........................37” x 2................... Mag Stripe..... 3......... Mag Stripe... Glossy Front/Back........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . 01-7001-058 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. Specifications General: Coding: ....................... 01-7001-070 Temperature Test Kit for Photo ID Laminator.... 01-7001-109 Photo ID Adhesive Backpack............. Standard: ... Thin (................. 26 Bit ........... for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer...for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer.....037”)........... Mag Stripe................030”).......... 01-7001-069 Graphics Quality Card................................ w/Hot Stamp....030”).......... Graphics Quality.. 380F (All Vinyl Cards) ....................... Satin Front/Back...................... Glossy Front/Back.............. 37 Bit ..6 cm x 54.... Thin (....... 01-7001-127 Plain White Card...0 cm) Thickness: .. for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer..... 01-7001-171 Plain White.......... Mag Stripe........ w/Hot Stamp....................... Plain White............................................................. Thin ISO: ............. Satin Front/Back.................... 01-7001-246 Plain White Card....................................030”)...................................................................................... (.................030”).................030” (0.................................... AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit). w/Hot Stamp..... Glossy Front/Back.................13” (85... Thin (........................ w/Hot Stamp............................. for Polaroid Film ....Std.......Std......... No Artwork.................... for use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printer......................................................... Thin (............................... 26 Bit ....... 32 Bit ..... .......................... A1=long endge/left side Ordering Information Item Part # ProxCard Plus...........................037” (5..............5” (4 cm) ThinLine II: .. bar code and/or magnetic stripe..... slot punch..................................................... A.................................................................................................... 26 Bit .................. The ProxCard Plus is the solution for companies desiring to use one card incorporating a combination of Proximity..................................................375” x 0................................................................................................... Combo Prox/Wiegand................... external card number....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0” (23 cm) Code Strip Layout Options*: ........................................ or for transitioning from a primarily Wiegand technology system to an HID Proximity based system................5” (4 cm) ProxPro: .........................................8 gm) *A=long edge/right side................... 01-7001-180 ProxCard Plus........... up to 1.............................................. zero gap seq.....................................................................5 cm) NT MaxiProx: ................ HID Artwork Back Bit Range Format: .................................................................. Photo ID capabilities............................. Glossy Front................................................................... Plain White......................................................................57 cm x 0........................... (4.............. high coercivity mag stripe is opt.................................. A1 Card Construction: .................0” (7..... To meet any combination of card technology requirements................................ the ProxCard Plus can be combined with bar code and magnetic stripe... ProxCard Plus MiniProx: ..... numbering Dimensions: ............................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................................................................................................ up to 9................................ custom artwork................................................................................. 0...................................................................................................................................................................................140 CARDS & READERS HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards ProxCard Plus Description The HID ProxCard Plus is a combination card offering Proximity and Wiegand technologies and an optional photo ID capability on a single card................................................................................................................................... No External Hot Stamp...............................................................094 cm) Surface: ..... -50 to 158°F (-45 to 70°C) Weight: ....... 37 Bit ..... and Photo ID technologies for multiple facilities........... 2..................................... Opt............................................................................................. The ProxCard Plus card’s thickness is suitable for use with all Wiegand readers and most direct image printers and magnetic stripe readers....... Infinity Format (37 bit).. No External Hot Stamp.................................... up to 3...125” x 3.......................... An external ABA standard............................................. Thin vinyl laminate with an internal Wiegand code strip and proximity circuit...... Combo Prox/Wiegand.....................................................................................17 oz... too........ Combo Prox/Wiegand technologies......................... Glossy Front.............................. 26 bit Read Range: .... Operating Temperature: ............................................................................ Standard Wiegand/Proximity Features: ........................................... up to 1...... Opt.................................40 cm x 8................................................ 01-7001-243 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. Plain White Glossy Front........ Wiegand............................... Specifications General: Coding: .............................................. Plain White....................... ............................. 3.................. Numbering....................093” Surface: ........................ 32 Bit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit).................................................................... .........................................................................................................................................................0” Thickness: Blade: ........... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................................................................................ 32 Bit .............................................................................................................669” Head Width: ...................................................................................................................................................... .... Zero Gap Seq......................093” Head: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Infinity Format (37 bit).......................................29” Blade Length: ........... 26 bit Ordering Information Item Part # Plain Black Key............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Black Bit Range Format: .......................................................................CARDS & READERS 141 HID Wiegand-Effect Access Cards Sensor Key Description The HID Sensor Key is an encoded key for use with HID’s Key Reader.................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................375” Blade Width: ................. Custom Artwork Dimensions: Overall Length: ......................................................... Hot Stamp........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-012 Plain Black Key................... 1.......................................... 01-7001-159 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..................................... Wiegand Encoded Key Features: .................................................. Specifications General: Coding: .................................................... 2............................................................................................................................................. ......... Pigtail . up to 1......................................................................... simply by changing the existing reader heads and cards.. Polycarbonate UL 94 Weight: With Terminal Strip: ................................................................................................................................................................. The MiniProx reader offers high reliability.............................................................................................. 4”-5..................2 cm x 4.................................................................................... The MiniProx accepts 5-16 volts and has a maximum read range of 4 to 5......................... -22 to 150°F (-30 to 66°C).................................S.......................... 50-60 mA typ.......... MiniProx ProxCard II: ......................................................................................) Transmit Frequency: ....................................................... Additional conductors may be required for LED or beeper control.............................. 3..... UL 294 listed FCC part 15............................5 oz.. up to 5........................................................................................ Red/Green Features: .............................................. and low power consumption in a single. DTI (MPT 1337). Beige LED Type: .................................... U............... 500 feet (150 m) Clock-and-data interface: .............................................................................................. Standard capabilities include multicolor LED............................................................................................................................................. Pigtail .................................................. The clock-and-data magnetic stripe version reads all HID proximity cards and outputs the card data in a Track II format..................................................................5” Range.8 oz............................. Indoor/Outdoor.............................................................................................5-inches............................ 5-16 VDC..0” x 1........................ 125 kHz Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: ........5” (14 cm) ISOProx II: ........................................... Indoor/Outdoor Operating Temperature: ........................................ Multiple Wiegand Formats Current: ...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................................................................. 4.............................. Specifications General: Colors: .................................... (108 g...............................................................7” x 1........................5” Range............................. Gray.................................................................................................................................................... 5-16 VDC.....................................................................................................3 cm x 2.......................................................................................................................................................... 3.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6...... up to 4” (10 cm) ProxKey II: ... Linear power supplies are recommended Read Range: ........................ Gray................................................................................................. Input Power: ..........................................................................................................5” (4 cm) Dimensions: ........ 01-7000-117 MiniProx................................................................................................ (99 gm) With Pigtail: .................................................. The 5-volt capability allows existing swipe-type access control installations to be easily upgraded to proximity technology............. No rewiring or pulling of new cable is necessary.............. even directly on metal with no change in read range performance...............142 CARDS & READERS HID Proximity Readers MiniProx™ Proximity Card Reader Description The HID MiniProx Proximity Card Reader boasts a slim design that allows the reader to be mounted indoors or out.................................................................................. and internal or host control of the LED and beeper.......................... Certifications: . 50 feet (15 m) Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295 (22 AWG) 5 conductor stranded with overall shield of equivalent......... Tri-State............................................................................ The MiniProx reader is available with either Wiegand interface or clock-and-data magnetic stripe interface.................................................................................................................. The MiniProx reader is designed for mounting directly on metal with no change in read range performance..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-118 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................................................................ Indoor/Outdoor.........0” (15........................................... consistent read range characteristics................................................................................... 4”-5.................75 to 16 VDC....................................................................................................................................................... 0 to 95% non-condensing Output: ........................................................................... up to 2” (5 cm) ProxCard Plus: ................................... Beige...... easy-to-install package...................................54 cm) Material: ........................................................................ compatibility with all standard access control systems.......................................................................................................................... UK CE Mark Approved BZT Pending Ordering Information Item Part # MiniProx............... ......... up to 1........................................ The ThinLine II is available with either a Wiegand interface or a clock-and-data magnetic stripe interface...............................5” Range.......................................................................................................................................... 50-60 mA typ...................................... Standard capabilities include multicolor LED and internal control or host control of the LED and beeper...................................................... Indoor/Outdoor ........................................................................................................................ White........................... Certifications: .................... 3.................... Beige..................................................................... DTI (MPT 1337).................................................................................................................................................) Transmit Frequency: .................. ThinLine II ProxCard II: ......................................................................................................................................................... and low power consumption in a single............................................................................ this reader will mount on a single-gang electrical box..................................................5-inches.................................. Specifications General: Colors: ..................................................................... 01-7000-144 ThinLine II.................. up to 5.......................................................CARDS & READERS 143 HID Proximity Readers ThinLine II™ Proximity Card Reader Description The HID ThinLine II Proximity Card Reader provides the same performance and reliability as the MiniProx Reader but with a low profile appearance.................................. (94 g....................................68” (11....................................... Input Power: ..................................................................... Housed in an industry-standard switch plate.. 0 to 95% non-condensing Output: ........ Multiple Wiegand Formats Current: .........6 cm x 1........................... Gray.. The ThinLine II accepts 5-16 volts and has a maximum read range of 4 to 5....................................... and can be mounted directly on metal with minimal impact on the read range performance........................................................................................................................................................................................... -22 to 150°F (-30 to 66°C)......................................................................................5” Range.................... 50 feet (15 m) Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295 (22 AWG) 5 conductor stranded with overall shield of equivalent........ U........................................................................................ Gray LED Type: ...... easy-to-install package........ White................ 5-16 VDC......................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor ................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor Housed in Switch Plate Operating Temperature: ........................................... Additional conductors may be required for LED or beeper control..... Black...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-143 ThinLine II....................................... 125 kHz Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: ............. up to 2” (5 cm) ProxCard Plus: ............. 01-7000-142 ThinLine II.......................... 01-7000-204 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............S..........................5” Range.......... The clock-and-data interface version reads HID proximity cards programmed with magnetic stripe Track II data as well as standard Wiegand data.......................3 oz............... 4”-5.................................................................................................................................................. Indoor/Outdoor .................................................................... 4...................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor ................................................................................................................................ Red/Green Features: ..... UK CE Mark Approved BZT Pending Ordering Information Item Part # ThinLine II........................................................................................................................................................ up to 4” (10 cm) ProxKey II: ........5” (4 cm) Dimensions: ........................................ 4”-5...................... Black....................................................................................................... 5-16 VDC................ 500 feet (150 m) Clock-and-data interface: ..... Tri State....................................................... 5-16 VDC.................................................................................................. Beige........... 4”-5..............................5” (14 cm) ISOProx II: ...... 4............................75 to 16 VDC Read Range: ..................9 cm x 7.................................................70” x 3........................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................................................................................................................................7 cm) Material: .............. The ThinLine II provides high reliability.....................................................5” Range...................................................................... consistent read range characteristics.............................................................. 4”-5............................................................... 5-16 VDC..................................... Polycarbonate UL 94 Weight: ..............................................00” x 0.............. UL 294 listed FCC part 15......................................... ............................................................. Indoor/Outdoor ......................................................................................................................................... Certifications: .................... w/3x4 Matrix Keypad.......... Using advanced surface-mount technology manufacturing techniques........................................... up to 3” (7.................. 10-28 VDC................... 10-28 VDC............................144 CARDS & READERS HID Proximity Readers ProxPro™ Proximity Card Reader Description The HID ProxPro Proximity Card Reader combines all of the electronics usually found in two separate packages into a single enclosure that mounts to a standard single-gang electrical box....... Gray........... It is the first proximity design available with an optional............. 5”-9” Range................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor Opt............................................................... Specifications General: Colors: .............................. ProxPro ProxCard II: ................ UL 294 listed FCC part 15................ the ProxPro offers high reliability................................................... 01-3002-232 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................... Gray.......................................................................... Gray.................................................. consistent read range characteristics....................... and low power consumption............................................................................................. up to 9” (23 cm) ISOProx II: ................................................................................................................................... DTI (MPT 1337)................................................................................ ACC Logo ....................................................................................................................................................... The keypad interfaces with the host system either by sending the keypad data over the data output lines or via a direct connection to the host keypad interface........................ This offers an additional level of security by allowing the use of a personal identification number (PIN).................................... UK CE Mark Approved BZT Pending Material: ........) Transmit Frequency: ...................................... Standard capabilities include multicolor LED......................................... up to 3” (7.......................................... 50 feet (15 m) Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295 (22 AWG) 5 conductor stranded with overall shield of equivalent..................... Beige....................................................................................... -22 to 150°F (-30 to 66°C)................................................................................................................................................... The ProxPro reader offers Wiegand protocol interface compatibility with all standard access control systems.............................. 500 feet (150 m) Clock-and-data interface: ......................................................................................................................................................... 5”-9” Range....................................................................................... Read Range: ............... 5”-9” Range..... plus optional RS232 and RS422 serial interfaces......................... Indoor/Outdoor ...................................................0” (12.......................................................................................... Gray........................................................... and a beeper “off” switch for silent operation................................................ Beige............ 5...... 5”-9” Range.... Beige LED Type: ................ 5”-9” Range.......... 125 kHz Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: .... Additional conductors may be required for LED or beeper control.......... Indoor/Outdoor (NOTE: For use with Infinity ACX 780 & ACX 781 Controllers) ....................................7 cm x 2...........................................S...............................................................................................................................6 cm) Dimensions: ...................................................... up to 6” (15 cm) ProxKey II: ............................. Integrated Keypad Operating Temperature: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 01-7000-113 ProxPro......................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor (NOTE: For use with Continuum AC-1 Controller) ...............................................0” x 1............................................. 10-28 VDC...... 01-7000-112 ProxPro....................................................... Indoor/Outdoor (NOTE: For use with Infinity ACX 780 & ACX 781 Controllers) ...................................................................................................... 10-28 VDC..................... w/3x4 Matrix Keypad........................ Red/Green Features: ....................................... Multiple Wiegand Formats Current: .................................................................................................. w/8-Bit Burst Keypad.......................................................................6 cm) ProxCard Plus: ........................... internal or host control of the LED and/or beeper. Indoor/Outdoor NOTE: For use with Continuum AC-1 Controller) ... It accepts 10-28 volts and has a maximum read range of 3 to 9-inches.......................... 01-7000-111 ProxPro....... 01-7000-213 ProxPro............................ 5”-9” Range....................................................................... 100 mA typ..................... 01-7000-214 Extra Label for ProxPro........................................................ Gray.............................. U........................................................................................... 10-28 VDC..0” x 5.............................................................................................................................................................................7 cm x 12.................. integrated..................... 12 oz................................................... weatherized keypad........................ w/8-Bit Burst Keypad.............................................................................................................................................................................. ANSI (up to 14 digits) & EMPI (5 digits) coded magnetic stripe cards Output: ....................... 0 to 95% non-condensing Input/Card Format: ......................... Beige...... 10-28 VDC..................................................................................................................54 cm) Weight: ............................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ 01-7000-114 ProxPro.......... (336 g................................ Polycarbonate UL 94 Ordering Information Item Part # ProxPro............................. ............................................................................. Gray.......... Indoor/Outdoor.............................................................. 7................................................................................ Polycarbonate UL 94 Weight: .................................................................................... 15 oz........................................................................................................................................ rearmount for surface mounting) Operating Temperature: ........................................................ 10 to 28.............................................S.......... up to 9” (23 cm) ISOProx II: ...................................................................................................................................... U............................................................................... Using advanced technology manufacturing techniques.................................................................................................................................................................................. The ProxPro Plus offers Wiegand protocol interface compatibility with all standard access control systems.............. Standard capabilities include multicolor LED........................................................................................................ Gray LED Type: ..............................................................................................................................9” (19 cm x 19 cm x 2..... the ProxPro Plus offers high reliability....... 160 mA peak Input Power: ........................................................................................................................... Multiple Wiegand Formats Current: ........................... 01-7000-186 ProxPro Plus....................................................... Specifications General: Color: ............ It accepts 10-28............................................................................................. CE Mark Approved........................) Transmit Frequency: ........................................................................................................................................................................... and low power consumption in a single............................................. Certifications: ..6 cm) ProxCard Plus: ..6 cm) Dimensions: ......................... Tri-State........................... 100 mA average. internal or host control of LED and/or beeper............... Gray................................................................................................................... consistent read range characteristics............................................................................................................. 0 to 95% non-condensing Output: ...................................................... Rearmount ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5” x 0.................. Sidemount ..... and a beeper “off” switch for silent operation........................................................................................................CARDS & READERS 145 HID Proximity Readers ProxPro Plus™ Proximity Card Reader Description The new HID ProxPro Plus Proximity Card Reader combines the popular features of the ProxPro Reader with a thin...................................... UL 294 pending FCC part 15....................................... up to 6” (15 cm) ProxKey II: .......................................................................................................................... 01-7000-187 Extra Label for ProxPro...5 VDC Read Range: ................................. -22 to 150°F (-30 to 66°C)............................................. The reader is designed for both indoor and outdoor use.... easy-to-install package...........................................................................5” x 7................................................ low-profile housing and new mounting configurations......................................................................................................... Red/Green Features: .................................... 125 kHz Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: .................................................................................................................................................................... ACC Logo ........................................ Additional conductors may be required for LED or beeper control............. (426 g..................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................................3 cm) Material: ................................................................................. 500 feet (150 m) Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295 (22 AWG) 5 conductor stranded with overall shield of equivalent.......... up to 3” (7............................................................ 2 Mounting Options (sidemount for glass or mullion mounting........................ Gray...5 VDC and has a maximum read range of 6 to 9 inches........................ BZT pending Ordering Information Item Part # ProxPro Plus............................................................................................................................................ 01-3002-232 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................... The ProxPro Plus is equipped with your choice of mounting accessory kits for either glass and mullion mounting or surface mounting applications.............................. up to 3” (7............... ProxPro Plus ProxCard II: .................................................................................................................... ....................................... Red/Green Features: ........................................................ 01-7000-119 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................................54 cm) Material: ............. DTI (MPT 1337)........................................................... New signal processing techniques incorporated in this reader provide a high tolerance to burst and other transient types of ambient RF interference........... 18”-24” Range..................................................................................................................................... or where special consideration is needed to facilitate access for the physically challenged........................................146 CARDS & READERS HID Proximity Readers Noise Tolerant MaxiProx™ Proximity Card Reader Description The HID Noise Tolerant (NT) MaxiProx Extended Range Proximity Card Reader provides a significant improvement in long range reading consistency....................................................................................... Tri-State.......................................................................... UK........................................................... (1..............................................................................................................5 cm) ProxCard Plus: ........................................... Polycarbonate UL 94 Weight: ............ up to 24” (61 cm) ISOProx II: .................................................................................................................... FCC part 15............................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor Long Range Reading Operating Temperature: ..........4 kgm............................................................................................................... UL 294 listed........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 500 feet (150 m) Recommended cable is ALPHA 1295 (22 AWG) 5 conductor stranded with overall shield of equivalent....................................................................................................................................................................... The broad selection of HID proximity readers allows the use of one card for all your access control requirements...) Transmit Frequency: .............. U.. Multiple Wiegand Formats Current (DC): .................... Indoor/Outdoor .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. up to 12” (30...................................................................................8” x 1....... 125 kHz Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: ........................... 51 oz.................................................................. 11.............................. 0 to 95% non-condensing Output: ................................................................................................................................................................................................ BZT pending Ordering Information Item Part # MaxiProx....................................... 24 VDC........ Input Power: ..... CE Mark approved............................................................................................................................................................................................. This makes the NT MaxiProx reader ideal for installations incorporating parking control........................ up to 9” (23 cm) Dimensions: ...................................... The NT MaxiProx reader packages all of the electronics in one rugged........................................................................... Gray LED Type: ......... Gray.................................................................................................................................5 cm) ProxKey II: ...................................... NT MaxiProx ProxCard II: ............................................................................ 1 A ave...........S....... 24 VDC Read Range: ................................................................ Specifications General: Colors: ............ Additional conductors may be required for LED or beeper control............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8” x 11................................................ -22 to 150°F (-30 to 66°C).......0” (30 cm x 30 cm x 2........................................................................................................................................ Certifications: ........................................................... up to 16” (40............................................................................... attractive..... and easyto-install housing....................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................ Tri-State.......000 feet max.................................................................................................................. 2.... Red/Green Features: .. Indoor/Outdoor... -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) Output: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 cm) ISO Prox II: ............. Two reader versions are available .......... 500 feet (150 m) Coaxial cable: ........................................................... 3 lbs 4....................................................................................................................................... (1............................CARDS & READERS 147 HID Proximity Readers MultiProx™ Multi-Technology Proximity Card Reader Description The MultiProx Proximity Card Reader is a multi-technology reader that makes it possible to replace an existing Schlage/Westinghouse card access control system with any Wiegand protocol system without replacing existing Schlage/Westinghouse cards or the installed wiring........................ Multiple Wiegand Formats Power Requirements: ................................. The controller includes a selectable DIP switch for transmission of either a 26-bit or 32-bit Wiegand message to the host system......................0” x 10.........................................................................................................................................5” x 0................................6 oz...................................................... -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) Power Requirements: ...................................................................side connection or rear connection................................................................................... the facility code and card number are decoded by the controller and transmitted via the Wiegand output port to the new access control panel......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Each channel has an input for the coax cable from thee reader and/or HSM and a Wiegand Interface output port for its respective reader.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8” (19 cm x 19 cm x 2 cm) Material: ........................ request to exit (REX)............................... Aluminum Weight: ...................4 cm x 4........ 5 to 95% non-condensing Storage: .................................................................................. controller and HID switch monitor (HSM). Schlage 708/808 controller..................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................................................................................... up to 2” (5 cm) Dimensions: ................ MultiProx Reader ProxCard II: ................................................................................. (300 m) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................... 50 mA @ 24 VDC (Powered by the controller) Read Range: ........................................ These inputs are typically used for door sensors................. The MultiProx Reader reads both HID proximity access cards and one type of the Schlage/Westinghouse (1030/1040/1050) access cards.............................. Polycarbonate UL 94 Weight: ....................................................................................................0 Amp @ 24 VDC Dimensions: ........................................................................................................................................................... The reader features a multicolor LED and beeper for enhanced user feedback.......................................... and multiple switch monitor (MSM) with the HID MultiProx Reader...................................8” (45................................ up to 3” (7.... up to 2” (5 cm) Schlage Card: .......... or other alarm inputs....................................... The HID components are drop-in replacements for the “old gear” including the connectors and mounting screw holes.............................................................................. 7................................................................... rearmount for surface mounting) Temperature: Operating: ....................................................................... (426 g............................................................................................................0” x 1.................................................. Gray LED Type: ........ The MultiProx HSM replaces the Schlage MSM which contains four inputs for dry contacts...................................6 cm) Enclosure Material: ........................................................................ The HSM detects and transmits the status of the dry contacts to the controller.. 2 Mounting Options (sidemount for glass or mullion mounting................................... 15 oz................................ 18.................................................................................................................................................................. The reader is a direct electrical and mechanical replacement for the Schlage 2700 or 2800 series sensor........ The controller has four Form C relays for each channel that mimic the respective dry contacts.................... Simply replace the existing sensor...................................................................................................................................................................................... -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C).............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 cm x 25..................................491 gm) Cable Distance: Wiegand interface: .............................................................................. 0 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C)........................................................................... 5 to 95% non-condensing Storage: ................... Status changes for inputs monitored by the HSM are transmitted via Form C relays to the new access control panel........... The MultiProx Controller scans eight channels........................ The MultiProx Reader reads the HID or Schlage proximity card when the card is presented................................. 1............................................................................. When a valid card is read..........) MultiProx Controller: Temperature: Operating: ...........5” x 7................................................. Specifications General: MultiProx Reader: Colors: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ which communicate with the installed readers and HSMs......................... .....................6 cm) Weight: ..................................................................................... Side Mount .......................................... Powered by the controller Dimensions: ................................ 4 Inputs ...3” x 4................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................................... 8 Wiegand Outputs................. 3 oz........................ 01-7000-161 MultiProx Reader............................................................................................................................ 4........................................................................................................................................ 01-7000-163 MultiProx Reader............... 01-7000-162 HSM Interface....................................... Max 32 Alarm Inputs w/HSM .............................................................................................................................................9 cm x 11..... -40 to 150°F (-40 to 65°C)........... (85 gm) Ordering Information Item Part # MultiProx Controller.... 01-7000-164 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.....................................................................................................................4” x 1.................................................................... 8 Reader Inputs...............................................148 CARDS & READERS Specifications Continued General: MultiProx HSM: Temperature: Operating: ........................................................ -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) Power Requirements: ..................................................................................... 5 to 95% non-condensing Storage: .................................................................................2 cm x 3........................................................................................................................................................................ Back Mount ..4” (10...................... ................... up to 16” (40 cm) Finish Front: .............................................................. Hot Stamp................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................ Gloss Front/Back.......... cut..................................................... for use with all direct image printers....................40 cm x 8.....................................................................57 cm x 0............. No Slot........ up to 6” (15 cm) NT MaxiProx: ............. AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit).............................. 01-7001-140 Plain White.................... Specifications General: Features: ............... Gloss Front/Back....................................................................................................... 26 bit Operating Temperature: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Gloss Front/Back........................................................................................................................................... 37 Bit .......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................................................................................... No Slot........... The ISOProx II card now accepts both horizontal and vertical slot punching. Hot Stamp..................................................................................375” x 0................................................... 0................................................ ISO-std....................................... up to 4” (10 cm) ProxPro: .......................................................... Gloss Front/Back. Hot Stamp............................. 37 Bit .. paste........ for Use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printers................................ The photo. No Slot..........................8 gm) Read Range: ................. HID Artwork Options: ...... One Time Artwork Setup Charges One Time Tooling Charges............ No Ext.............................................................................................. Proximity and Photo ID on a single..................................................................125” x 3........ Minimum order quantity is 500..............24 oz............................................................................................................... Hot Stamp.................................................................................. for Use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printers.......................079 cm) Material: .................. 26 Bit ................. Infinity Format (37 bit).................... Custom Graphics Ordering Information Item Part # Plain White.............................................. Per Side Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information........................................ 01-7001-220 Custom Artwork Cards Custom artwork can be added to any HID proximity card................................................ Slot Punch (Horizontal or Vertical)............................. 2. External Card Numbering............................................... and lamination process becomes a thing of the past.............................................................. 26 Bit ... Per Color....................................... flexible PVC laminate Bit Range Format: ............................... for Use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printers................................ -50 to 160°F (-45 to 70°C) Weight: . Card Finish for Direct Printing.............................................. eliminating the need for badge holders........................................................................ 01-7001-141 Plain White....................................... thin card Dimensions: ......... for Use w/Direct-to-Vinyl Printers........................................................................................ up to 4” (10 cm) ThinLine II: .................. (6....................... 01-7001-182 Plain White......................................................... Thin....CARDS & READERS 149 HID Proximity Cards ISOProx II Proximity Access Card Description The HID RF programmable ISOProx II Proximity Access Card offers proximity technology and photo identification on a single access control card.......................................................................................................... ISOProx II MiniProx: ................... Plain White Glossy Finish Back: .............................................. The ISOProx II card meets ISO standards for thickness..................... No Ext................... No Slot................................ The ISOProx II card provides a solution for companies desiring to use one card incorporating proximity and photo identification technologies for multiple applications...............................................031” (5.................... ................. External Card Numbering......................... up to 4” (10 cm) ThinLine II: ................ magnetic strip technology and photo identification on a single card.................................... Per Color..................................................8 gm) Read Range: ....................... Gloss Finish PVC Front/Back........... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................................................................. Mag Stripe...........................150 CARDS & READERS HID Proximity Cards DuoProx II Multiple Technology Proximity Card Description The HID RF Programmable DuoProx II Cards combine proximity technology............................................................... No Hot Stamp....................................................... Mag Stripe...................... 01-7001-207 Plain White.............................................................................................. ......................................... ISO standard thin card................. No Slot...................................................... . No Slot................... Gloss Finish PVC Front/Back................................079 cm) Card Construction: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. for Direct-to-Vinyl Printers.... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..... 26 Bit ........... ...... 26 Bit ..... Minimum order quantity is 500.........031” (5......57 cm x 0. 01-7001-142 Plain White......................................... high coercivity magnetic stripe rated 4000 Oerstad Bit Range Format: ........................... Card Finish for Direct Printing....... up to 6” (15 cm) NT MaxiProx: ............................... Mag Stripe.............................................................. No Slot............................................ for Direct-to-Vinyl Printers........................................... 2......... ............................................. Specifications General: Coding: .................................................................................... 37 Bit ................................................................................................................ Thin..................................................................................... Per Side Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information.............................................................375” x 0.......................................................... up to 16” (40 cm) Finish Front: ............................. Custom Graphics Ordering Information Item Part # Plain White........................................................................................................................................... By combining technologies on one card...24 oz......................................................... (6........ Hot Stamp................. Slot Punch (Horizontal or Vertical).................... DuoProx II MiniProx: ................................125” x 3.............................................................. It also offers the ability to print a photo ID directly on the DuoProx II card with the new generation of photo imaging printers..................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-143 Plain White....................................... up to 4” (10 cm) ProxPro: ...... Gloss Finish PVC Front/Back........................................... No Slot........................... Wiegand ABA Track 2 Magnetic Stripe Features: ............................................... No Hot Stamp..... flexible PVC laminate w/ABA std.... Infinity Format (37 bit)...... 01-7001-223 Custom Artwork Cards Custom artwork can be added to any HID proximity card.......................................... -50 to 160°F (-45 to 70°C) Weight: ......................... ................... Mag Stripe. Hot Stamp............................. the DuoProx II card provides the benefits of proximity technology for access control applications and meets the requirements for industry standard magnetic stripe applications........................... 26 bit Operating Temperature: ........................... Plain White Glossy Finish Back: ....................................... for Direct-to-Vinyl Printers... mag stripe and photo ID on a single card Dimensions: ................................... 37 Bit ................................ for Direct-to-Vinyl Printers...................................................................... HID Artwork Options: ....... ................... One Time Artwork Setup Charges One Time Tooling Charges................ AC4 Plus 4 Format (32 bit)........ 0..........40 cm x 8.......... Gloss Finish PVC Front/Back............................................................. ...................................... Custom Graphics Ordering Information Item Part # ProxCard II........ Vertical Slot.................... One Time Artwork Setup Charges One Time Setup................................................ up to 5...................... Hot Stamp............................................................................................................. 26 bit Read Range: .......................070” (8.. 01-7001-219 Custom Artwork Cards Custom artwork can be added to any HID proximity card............................................................... Vertical Slot............................ 3........................................................ Minimum order quantity is 500.................................................................................................. ProxCard II cards are easily customized with multicolored graphics.................. 01-7001-071 ProxCard II.................................... up to 24” (61 cm) Options: ................... the ProxCard II card is compatible with most photo ID systems.................................................................................................................................................................375” x 2..................... Slot punched.............................................................................................. w/HID Logo......................5” (14 cm) ThinLine II: ......57 cm x 5............................. . Specifications General: Coding: ............................... 26 Bit ................................................... .......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................................... No Logo............................................................................ rigid cards previously associated with other proximity technologies..................... w/HID Logo........... Frequency (125 kHz or 400 kHz)............... Thin and flexible enough to be carries in a wallet or on a strap clip............40 cm x 0................................................................................................................................. ProxCard II MiniProx: .............................. Hot Stamp.......................................................................................................................................................... Infinity Format (37 bit)................................................................................................................................................. No Logo................................................................................ durable polycarbonate package the size of a standard credit card...... Per Color..................................................................................................... up to 5................ up to 8” (20 cm) NT MaxiProx: ....................................CARDS & READERS 151 HID Proximity Cards ProxCard II Proximity Access Card Description The HID RF programmable ProxCard II incorporates radio frequency identification electronics into a thin................................. 26 Bit ............................................................... compatible w/most adhesive photo pouches Bit Range Format: .................. 01-7001-202 ProxCard II................................................. ........... ................................................................................................. External Card Numbering............................. With the application of a self-adhesive photo pouch or PVC overlay.......... Thin card Dimensions: ..............5” (14 cm) ProxPro: ..... the ProxCard II cards replace the thick... Wiegand Features: ..............................................................125” x 0................. ................................................................................................................ 37 Bit ..................................................... Per Side Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information..18 cm) Card Construction: ....... 37 Bit ........... Vertical Slot....................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................................................... 01-7001-166 ProxCard II............................ Vertical Slot...... ................................................................. 01-7001-179 PhotoProx..... Wiegand Features: ..................... ........ Plain White w/Photo ID Flap...... 5........................... Plain White w/Photo ID Flap...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Photo Laminate Type (Polaroid or Digital/Thermal Type)..................... PhotoProx MiniProx: ........ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..................................................................375” x 2.......................................... Custom Graphics Ordering Information Item Part # PhotoProx....... Slot Punch.................................................. The PhotoProx uses standard lamination card technology to provide a proximity card with an integrated photo flap. Proximity and Photo ID for Polaroid Film & Video Imaging Dimensions: ...............................................................57 cm x 5........... 37 Bit...................................... Per Side Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information........... 01-7001-222 Custom Artwork Cards Custom artwork can be added to any HID proximity card.................................................. for Polaroid Film...................................................................................................... 37 Bit .......................................................................................... Plain White w/Photo ID Flap.............. One Time Artwork Setup Charges One Time Setup........ for Video Imaging Prints............................................................................................................................. Unlike other proximity cards.................................................................................................. 18-24” (46-61 cm) Options: ............. 26 Bit .. 3............................13 cm)) Card Construction: ............................................................ flexible access card to combine proximity technology and a user-laminated photo-ID flap on a single card........................................................................................................................ Thin and flexible w/an integral photo flap bonded on one edge of the card Bit Range Format: .......................................................... External Card Numbering....................... 26 Bit....... Infinity Format (37 bit)................................................ Plain White w/Photo ID Flap.................................40 cm x 0..........................................................................................................5-7” (14-18 cm) NT MaxiProx: .. 3-5” (8-12 cm) ProxPro: .........................................................050” (8........................................................152 CARDS & READERS HID Proximity Cards PhotoProx Photo ID Proximity Card Description The HID PhotoProx Photo ID Card is the first thin............................................................................ for Video Imaging Prints............................... ................................... Specifications General: Coding: ............125” x 0. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................... Per Color.................... for Polaroid Film................................................................ Minimum order quantity is 500.......................... the PhotoProx can be laminated with a photo ID in a standard photo laminator. 26 bit Read Range: ............. 01-7001-074 PhotoProx......................... ............................................................. 01-7001-075 PhotoProx...................... ......................................................5 cm) NT MaxiProx: ..................................................... Encoded Key Dimensions: ............................................................................................ up to 2” (5 cm) ThinLine II: ..... Wiegand Features: ................................................................................................................................... External Card Numbering Ordering Information Item Part # ProxKey II.....CARDS & READERS 153 HID Proximity Cards ProxKey II Proximity Keyfob Description The RF Programmable ProxKey II Proximity Keyfob incorporates proximity technology into a device approximately the size of an automobile key.....................................345” (4.............................................................9” x 0........................................................................................ Specifications General: Coding: ...................................................... Gray..................................... HID’s advanced technology allows the ProxKey II to be programmed with up to 37 bits of Wiegand formatted information for universal compatibility with all Wiegand reader applications................................................................ 26 Bit ...................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-221 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Key Tag.................... 37 Bit ......................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................................................................ Gray...............................................83 cm x 2..................................................................................... 1............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Key Tag.........................88 cm) Bit Range Format: ................................................ up to 2” (5 cm) ProxPro: ... ProxKey II MiniProx: ............................................................................................................................ Each ProxKey II is provided with an external number for easy identification and control................................................. up to 12” (30 cm) Options: ..................................................................................................... up to 3” (7......................................................................................................................................................... 26 bit Read Range: ...................... Infinity Format (37 bit)........................ 01-7001-073 ProxKey II.............................9” x 0...........................................29 cm x 0................................. ....................................................................................... The ValueProx Proximity Reader can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats..................... Wiegand reader (with the same mounting holes) which allows for easy system upgrade from Wiegand to proximity............) Transmit Frequency: ..................................................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ....................... Black LED Indicator: ............. and three-color status LED.............................................................S.............................................. 125 kHz (excitation) 62................................................... 94 ms Input Voltage: ........................................................................................................................................................ Indoor/Outdoor............ The reader is the same size and shape as a U........... 26 Bit (ASR-500) ................. making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place.................... Additionally............83” T (5.. Indoor/Outdoor...........................................................11 cm T) Weight: .................................. in most cases........5 kHz (return) Ordering Information Item Part # ValueProx Reader............................................................................... Up to 4” Range...................... 96 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ............................. 65 mA @ 12 VDC..... Specifications General: Color: ...................................................................................................... low-cost reader......................84 cm H x 13........... All are field-configurable via the use of option cards........................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................ Up to 4” (10 cm) using ASC-121T card Dimensions: .................................................................. Wiegand............................................................... (142 g........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 01-7000-205 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: Off Metal: .................................. 4-16 VDC...46 cm W x 2......................... the ValueProx includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback......... The electronics are sealed in a UL-approved epoxy potting material..................................................................................3” H x 5...........................................154 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-500 ValueProx™ Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-500 ValueProx Proximity Reader offers basic features in a singlepiece................... 37 Bit (ASR-500) ................ 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max.................................................................... Black......... 2......................................................................................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance................................................................................ 100 mA @ 5 VDC Reading Time (26 bit): ............................ making the reader both vandal proof and weather proof................................................................................................................................................ 01-7000-140 ValueProx Reader.......... 76 mA @ 12 VDC... WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader............................................................................... Maximum read range is 4" (10 cm).................................................................................................................. 85 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: ................................................... 4-16 VDC............... 5 oz................ It operates from 4 to 16 VDC and....................................... Read Range: ..................3” W x 0................................. Up to 4” Range............................. can be powered directly from the access control panel................................................................................ 88 mA @ 12 VDC............................................................................. -31 to 149°F (-35 to 65°C) Output: ..... Black...... ............................. Up to 4” Range.................................................................... Standard......................................................................... 4-16VDC............................... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) Output: ........................................... Beige............... The electronics are sealed in a UL-approved epoxy potting material to make the reader both vandal proof and weather resistant.... 4-16VDC..................................... Indoor/Outdoor.................. Indoor/Outdoor..... 4-16VDC...................................................................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance........................ 26 Bit (ARK-501) ..........18 cm H x 7..................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 kHz (excitation) 62......................... WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader........................................................................ 100 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: .... 37 Bit (ARK-501) ...................................................................................................... 01-7000-228 PinProx Reader w/3x4 Matrix Keypad....................................................................................... Black....... Up to 4” Range....................................................... 37 Bit (ARK-501) ................................................................................................... Black....................................... and three-color status LED.......................... 01-7000-211 PinProx Reader w/8-bit Burst Keypad..... 94 ms Audio Tone: ........... 91 mA @ 12 VDC............................................................................................ 01-7000-197 NOTE: 8-bit Burst Keypads—DO NOT USE WITH 780 & 781 CONTROLLERS PinProx Reader w/8-bit Burst Keypad................................................... 37 Bit (ARK-501) .................. Up to 4” Range.............................................665” T (11........... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: .............. Indoor/Outdoor.............16 cm W x 1............................................................................................................................ up to 4” (10 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: ............. 100 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ....... independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Part # PinProx Reader w/3x4 Matrix Keypad.................... Indoor/Outdoor...................................... 26 Bit (ARK-501) ............................... Additionally...... Specifications General: Colors: ........................... Up to 4” Range................................................................. 01-7000-234 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... The reader portion of the PinProx can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats......................... 01-7000-166 PinProx Reader w/3x4 Matrix Keypad............. Black................... Indoor/Outdoor.............69 cm T) Weight: .... 95 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: ................... Indoor/Outdoor..... 4-16VDC.................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor..... the PinProx includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback.................................................................... 89 mA @ 12 VDC................... Beige... 26 Bit (ARK-501) .......................................................................... 01-7000-167 PinProx Reader w/3x4 Matrix Keypad....................................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): .... 75 mA @ 12 VDC.. Up to 4” Range..... Beige. it can be powered directly from the access control panel..................) Transmit Frequency: ........... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place.......................... Beige...........CARDS & READERS 155 Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ARK-501 PinProx™ Proximity Reader and Keypad Description The Motorola Indala ARK-501 PinProx Proximity Reader and Keypad is a proximity reader and keypad combined in a small.. In most cases.. 4-16VDC................... Beige....................................... 4. Black LED Type: ...................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. 4-16VDC...............................................82” W x 0........... attractive package................................................................................. It is ideal for high security applications where both a personal identification number (PIN) and an access card are required...................................... Because the keypad data is transmitted over the same wires as the card data................................... Black.................................................... 4-16VDC..................... Up to 4” Range........... 01-7000-212 PinProx Reader w/8-bit Burst Keypad..... 01-7000-233 PinProx Reader w/8-bit Burst Keypad. The keypad data is transmitted over Wiegand compatible data lines as Wiegand data......... 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max............................................ The single-piece PinProx Proximity Reader and Keypad delivers read ranges up to 4” (10 cm) and operates from 4 to 16 VDC allowing for flexibility in the use of power supplies........4” H x 2....................................... Read Range: ............................... 6 oz..................................... It is designed to mount on a wall box (metal single gang electrical box) or a flat surface........................................................... less cable is required and both functions require only one port on the door controller rather than the usual two.. Indoor/Outdoor.......... 26 Bit (ARK-501) ................................................................................................. Up to 4” Range....... (167 g.............. 37 Bit (ARK-501) ............................................. Up to 4” Range.......... 50 mA Off Metal: ........................................... 4-16VDC............... Wiegand.............................. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: . All are fieldconfigurable via the use of option cards................................................... ........ 65 mA @ 12 VDC......................................................................................... making the reader both vandal proof and weather resistant.......................................................................................................................... 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max.............. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: Off Metal: ..............65” W x 0..................................................................................................... 96 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ................................................... 26 Bit (ASR-503) .........................................................................................................5” H x 1. and three-color status LED................ Wiegand.................... 01-7000-100 SlimLine Door Frame Reader............................................... independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Part # SlimLine Door Frame Reader. -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ...................................... 125 kHz (excitation) 62......................................................... 85 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: ...... Read Range: ....... 100 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: ...................................................................................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ......................... Black........................................................................... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place......................... 76 mA @ 12 VDC............................................................................................. Additionally................................................... Black LED Type: ......................................156 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-503 SlimLine™ Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-503 SlimLine Proximity Reader is designed to mount on metal door frames (mullions) and is suitable for any location that requires a small reader........ 5 oz....................9 cm T) Weight: ........................................................................................................................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance.............................................................................................................. 88 mA @ 12 VDC................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................ WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader...................... up to 4” (10 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: ......................................................................................... Standard... 01-7000-176 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............................................. the SlimLine includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback...... Up to 4” Range.......................................... The electronics are sealed in a UL-approved epoxy potting material..................... 4-16VDC.......................................) Transmit Frequency: .......... 94 ms Audio Tone: ........................... The single-piece SlimLine delivers read ranges up to 4” (10 cm) and operates from 4 to 16 VDC allowing for flexibility in the use of power supplies........................................................2 cm W x 1...................... (142 g........................................... Up to 4” Range...................................................................................................... 5.................................................................. All are field-configurable via the use of option cards................................................................................................ 4-16VDC.................................................................................... it can be powered directly from the access control panel....................................................... Indoor/Outdoor........................................................................ The SlimLine can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats......................................................... Indoor/Outdoor......................................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Colors: ......... In most cases..................................75” T (14 cm H x 4.......................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ........................................................... Black........ 37 Bit (ASR-503) .................................................................................................................... ........................ The single-piece WallSwitch delivers read ranges up to 4” (10 cm) and operates from 4 to 16 VDC allowing for flexibility in the use of power supplies...................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader.. Indoor/Outdoor................................ the WallSwitch includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback............................ -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ........................................ it can be powered directly from the access control panel...................................................................................... 90 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: .......................................................................................................... 100 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: .... Indoor/Outdoor...................... Standard........... Additionally. Up to 4” Range.............................................................. Black.................. independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Part # WallSwitch Reader....................................................................... 01-7000-217 WallSwitch Reader........ The WallSwitch can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats........................................................................................................................................................... Beige................................. Black................................................................................ Beige LED Type: .......................................................................... (114 g.............................................................................................. 26 Bit (ASR-505) ...........................65 cm T) Weight: .................................... 4-16VDC......... 94 ms Audio Tone: ....................................................................................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ......................................................................................................................................................................6 cm W x 1........................................ Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ................. All are field-configurable via the use of option cards... 84 mA @ 12 VDC....................................................................................... 4.....................................................................................................65” T (11............... 37 Bit (ASR-505) ................................. Read Range: ................................................................................7” H x 3” W x 0......................................... Wiegand.......................... 26 Bit (ASR-505) ................. 01-7000-203 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................... It is suitable for any location that requires a small reader.. 89 mA @ 12 VDC.................................................................................. 4-16VDC............ ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: Off Metal: ............... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place.......... and three-color status LED..... 01-7000-101 WallSwitch Reader..... Specifications General: Colors: .................... Up to 4” Range............................................................................ SelfTest™ for installation assistance....................................................................................................... making the reader both vandal proof and weather resistant.......................................... 37 Bit (ASR-505) ............... 01-7000-102 WallSwitch Reader........................... 4-16VDC............................. Indoor/Outdoor..................................................................... 4-16VDC............) Transmit Frequency: ......................... up to 4” (10 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: .............. Up to 4” Range....................................................................... Up to 4” Range.............................. 4 oz.................. 125 kHz (excitation) 62........................................................ 100 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: .............................................. Black.......................................................................................................................................... 70mA @ 12 VDC...........CARDS & READERS 157 Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-505 WallSwitch Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-505 WallSwitch Proximity Reader is designed to be mounted on a single-gang electrical junction box on any flat surface........................ In most cases.............................. Beige.............8 cm H x 7......................................... Indoor/Outdoor............ The electronics are sealed in a UL-approved epoxy potting material....... 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max.......................................................................... ........................ 157 mA @ 12 VDC On Metal: .......... ASR-120........................................................................................................................ 10............................................................................................ In most cases............... 125 kHz (excitation) 62............................................................................................... 4-16VDC..........5 to 14 VDC at reader for RS-232...................................................................... The single-piece Standard Proximity Reader delivers read ranges up to 7” (18 cm) and operates from 4 to 16 VDC allowing for flexibility in the use of power supplies............................ Indoor/Outdoor.. ASR-120......................... 01-7000-141 Standard Reader....................................................................... Beige LED Type: ................................................ Black...............................................................158 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-110 Standard Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-110 Standard Proximity Reader is designed to mount on any surface....................................................... (347 g............................... 01-7000-225 Standard Reader.. Beige....... Up to 6” Range............................ Wiegand.................. Indoor/Outdoor.......................................................................................... 94 ms Audio Tone: ............................. The electronics are sealed in a ULapproved epoxy potting material................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................2 cm W x 3............................ All are field-configurable via the use of option cards.... Up to 6” Range. Specifications General: Colors: ......... Black................... the Standard reader includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback.............. independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Part # Standard Reader......... 4-16VDC.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Additionally............................... -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ............................................................. Black...... Beige.......................................................................... 4............ Standard................................................................. 01-3001-230 Extra Label for ASR-110..........................5 cm T) Weight: .............................................. up to 7” (18 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: ....................) Transmit Frequency: .....................................422................ 26 Bit (ASR-110) ..................................................................................................................................................... 37 Bit (ASR-110) .......... ACC Logo ............. 01-7000-070 Standard Reader.............................................. Indoor/Outdoor.............. making the reader both vandal proof and weather resistant..................... Up to 6” Range............................................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: .................................... it can be powered directly from the access control panel........................................ Black.............................. 37 Bit (ASR-110) ...........6” H x 5......................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): .................................................................... 157 mA @ 12 VDC Maximum: ...................... 12...........................................4” T (11.......... The Standard Proximity Reader can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats............................................. WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader and three-color status LED.......................................................... 01-7000-226 Extra Label for ASR-110........... 4 to 16 VDC at reader for Wiegand and Mag stripe formats.......................................... 4-16VDC......................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance.7 cm H x 14............ 181 mA @ 12 VDC Input Voltage: ..2oz............................................................................................ 4-16VDC............................................................ Read Range: ..................................... Indoor/Outdoor............... 01-3002-231 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................................................................6” W x 1.......................................................................................................... Beige......................... 26 Bit (ASR-110) ........................................ making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place...................................................................................................................... including metal...... and 485 formats Max......................... Up to 6” Range.. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw (RS-232/422 formats): Off Metal: ............. ACC Logo .................... ........................... ACC Logo ..................... 11........5-14VDC.... RS-422 Current Draw: Nominal: ....5-14VDC..... Indoor/Outdoor............................................. or concealment behind or embedded in extra thick building materials...........................) ARE-142 Remote Electronics:: ...... and three-color status LED........................................................... up to 16” (40 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: ............ Black........................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance.... 263 mA @ 12 VDC Input Voltage: .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 VDC nom....................... 10........................................... ACC Logo .....1 cm H x 22.......................... Black.................................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe....) Transmit Frequency: .......................5-14VDC.. making the reader both vandal proof and weather resistant.. ASR-120................... All are field-configurable via the use of option cards...................................................... audio tone............................ Range Bidirectional Reader....................... 26 Bit (ASR-120) .......................................... The longer range is suitable for applications such as parking lots..... 125 kHz (excitation) 62..... Wiegand............................................................................. 10....................................1” T (22................... Black................................. Additionally.................5 to 14 VDC and provides read ranges up to 16” (40 cm)................. Read Range: ........................................................................................................................ independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Part # Med............ making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place......................................... ASR-120.......................................................................... the antenna is sealed and separated from the remote electronics................ use by handicapped persons (ADA requirement)....................8” T (11.......................5” H x 5........................................ Available in beige or black.... 37 Bit (ASR-120) ...... (315 g........................................ Furthermore............... Up to 16” Range.......................... 8. 01-7000-202 Extra Label for ASR-110....................................................................................... Beige........ Indoor/Outdoor................................................................................................................................................7” W x 1...... locations where it is impossible to mount a reader immediately adjacent to the door......5-14VDC....... Up to 16” Range...................... 01-7000-073 Med....... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) ARE-142 Remote Electronics: ....6 cm T) Weight: ................. The Medium Range Reader can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats............ -32 to 122°F (-0 to 50°C) Output: ................................................................................................ 01-7000-072 Med................. Beige ARE-142 Remote Electronics: ............. Black.............................. Up to 16” Range........................................................................... Range Bidirectional Reader........................................ Sand Beige LED Type: ................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................. since the reader reads bidirectionally.............................1 cm W x 2......................................................................................................................................9 oz.... Range Bidirectional Reader. it is ideally suited for use at locations where it is desirable to use a single reader for both access and egress.......................................................................................... RS-232................ 01-3002-231 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..........6 cm H x 14.........................7” H x 8. Beige................................ 01-7000-227 Med................. Indoor/Outdoor............................................................................... (647 g.....6” W x 1..................................................................................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ...... 01-3001-230 Extra Label for ASR-110.............................................................................. 10............................................................................................. Up to 16” Range............... 10. Specifications General: Colors: ....... (10........................................................... Standard............................1 oz.............. 4.................. Indoor/Outdoor................................................................................5 to 14 VDC) at reader Max................................ 37 Bit (ASR-120) .................................................... 22.............................................................................................0 cm W x 4............................................................................. Beige..... 94 ms Audio Tone: ........................................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): .................... The two-piece Medium Range Reader (ASR-120 Reader and ARE-142 Remote Electronics) operates from 10......................................... Range Bidirectional Reader..8 cm T) ARE-142 Remote Electronics: ................................CARDS & READERS 159 Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-120 Medium Range Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-120 Medium Range Proximity Reader is designed for any location requiring a longer read range (up to 16") without space for a large antenna..................................... the Medium Range Reader includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback........... 263 mA @ 12 VDC Maximum: ........................................ 26 Bit (ASR-120) ...................................................... ...................................... The Extended Range Readers can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats.... 24VDC....................8 cm T) ARE-142 Remote Electronics: ................................................................................ 37 Bit (ASR-136) Ext... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place..... 125 kHz (excitation) 62....... Read Range: ASR-124: ..... Standard................ 37 Bit (ASR-124) Ext........................................................................................................................................) ARE-142 Remote Electronics:: ............................................ Indoor/Outdoor.. 26 Bit (ASR-124) Ext...........................................................................................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ................................4 cm H x 20......................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor......................................................6 cm W x 3....................................................... all are field-configurable via the use of option cards............................................... the Extended Range Readers include many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback................... (1........... 36” H x 16” W x 1................ +24 VDC nom.................................................................... take advantage of their bidirectional (equally from both sides) read capability.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24VDC.............. Gray w/Black Trim ARE-142 Remote Electronics: .................. They are ideal for parking lot.................5” T (91........................ independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Ordering Information Item Ext.................................... 4......................................6 cm T) Weight: ASR-124: .. 24VDC............................................. Specifications General: Color: ASR-124/ASR-136: ....................................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe.................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance...............................................8 cm T) ASR-136: .............................6 cm H x 14.. up to 24” (60 cm) using ASC-121T ASR-136: ......................... Up to 24” Range................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... (24 to 28 VDC) at reader Max................................. 264 mA @ 28 VDC Maximum: ........ such as concealment behind or imbedding in thick building materials.................... Up to 28” Range............................................... Gray w/Blk Trim................................... 01-7000-096 ................................................... 7........................................... Other applications..... providing both access and egress from a single reader........................................ Range Bidirectional Reader...................................................... ...................................... 26 Bit (ASR-136) Part # ........................................................... -32 to 122°F (-0 to 50°C) Output: ............................... up to 28” (70 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: ASR-124: ........ making the reader both vandal and weather resistant.............................. Wiegand........................................................................................ Gray w/Blk Trim........................................................................................................................................................................................ Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ASR-124/ASR-136: ...................... The two-piece Extended Range Readers (ASR-124 or ASR 136 Reader and ARE-142 Remote Electronics) operate from 24 to 28 VDC and deliver read ranges up to 28” (70 cm) for the ASR-136 and up to 24” for the ASR-124........ 4..................... Gray w/Blk Trim............................................................. Gray w/Blk Trim............. 11..................................................96 kg. audio tone and three-color status LED............. Up to 28” Range........................................................... RS-232......................... handicap (ADA requirement) and “hands free” access....................................5” T (91...............................5” H x 5............................... Up to 24” Range.......6” W x 1................................... (3........................................................................................................................................ Indoor/Outdoor. Indoor/Outdoor.... (315 g........160 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-124 & ASR-136 Extended Range Proximity Readers Description The Motorola Indala ASR-124 and ASR-136 Extended Range Proximity Readers are designed for applications where a longer read range adds to the convenience of the system............................0 cm W x 4.........................................................6 oz.................................................4 cm H x 40........................................................................................................................) Transmit Frequency: ...................... Range Bidirectional Reader... 01-7000-229 .................. Sand Beige LED Type: ...............1 oz................8” T (11....... The gray antenna is sealed and separated from the remote electronics................3 cm W x 3................ Additionally.................. 266 mA @ 28 VDC Input Voltage: ............................................................. 24VDC........................................................33 oz.......................... 01-7000-230 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............... Range Bidirectional Reader.......... 94 ms Audio Tone: .............. RS-422 Current Draw: Nominal: .......................... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) ARE-142 Remote Electronics: ........................................... Range Bidirectional Reader.............................................................................................................................................. 36” H x 8” W x 1...............5 kg.............................................................) ASR-136: .................................................................................................................................. 01-7000-095 ................... ..................... 86 mA @ 12 VDC.......................................................... Door Frame...) Transmit Frequency: .................27” H x 1..... 5 oz................. Door Frame.......................................................................... 01-7000-232 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................... 4............................ making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place............................. 94 ms Audio Tone: ........................................................................................................................................................................ ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: Off Metal: ........ 96 mA @ 12 VDC........................ 97 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ...42 cm H x 4................. Specifications General: Colors: .................................................................. 4..............................................................................................37 cm W x 2............ Up to 5” Read Range..................................................................................................... the SecureProx I includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback................. Smaller than its predecessors.......................................................................... Supports both ASP and ASP+ formats Ordering Information Item Part # SecureProx I Reader..... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: .......................... 125 kHz (excitation) 62..................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ... 26 Bit (ASR-603) ............ Indoor/Outdoor............................. and three-color status LED............................. Beige LED Type: ....................................................................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance...................... making it both vandal proof and weather resistant...........................70” W x 0........................5” H x 1..................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-231 SecureProx I Reader............................................... 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max.16 cm T) Electronics Module: ............. the SecureProx I Reader offers a sleek and contemporary styling.. Black................................................................................................................................. allowing the bezels to be snapped on interchangeably................... 26 Bit (ASR-603) ............................51” W x ............................................... up to 5” (12.......................................................................................CARDS & READERS 161 Motorola Indala ASP+ Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-603 SecureProx™ I Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-603 SecureProx I Reader is the next generation of ASP Readers................................................................. Up to 5” Read Range..... Additionally...7 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: Bezel: ............................................... The SecureProx I shares the same potted electronics module with the SecureProx II (wall switch).. Standard...................... 4-16 VDC.......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................ 4-16 VDC................................. 01-7000-172 SecureProx I Reader......................... 01-7000-171 SecureProx I Reader............. Door Frame............85” T (11.......................................... WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader.... independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Compatibility: ............ Indoor/Outdoor.......... -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: .................................................................................................. Indoor/Outdoor........ Read Range: ................................................................. 37 Bit (ASR-603) .......... 65 mA @ 12 VDC....................................................................... The SecureProx I provides a read range up to 5” (12................................................. (142 g........................................................ Beige............................................................................................. The reader’s electronics module is completely enclosed in a UL approved epoxy potting.................... 37 Bit (ASR-603) ............. Up to 5” Read Range.....7 cm) and is designed to mount on metal door frames (mullions)....................... The SecureProx I can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats......................................... 100 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: ........................................................................................................................................ All are field-configurable via the use of option cards................................................................ 4-16 VDC................8 cm H x 3.................... 4-16 VDC............................................................................................................... Door Frame............... 86 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: ................ Black................................................ Wiegand.........................................8 cm T) Weight: ....8 cm W x 1.......... Black........ Beige...........................................72” T (10............... Up to 5” Read Range........ Indoor/Outdoor.............. ..................................................................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor..................................................................................................................... 37 Bit (ASR-605) ............................................................. Black..... Additionally............. 37 Bit (ASR-605) ........... making it both vandal proof and weather resistant...... 26 Bit (ASR-605) ................................ 5 oz..... The SecureProx II can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats........................................ RS-232 Current Draw: Off Metal: ...................................72” T (10... The reader’s electronics module is completely enclosed in a UL approved epoxy potting.................... 100 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: .. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe...................... Black...................................................................................................................... The SecureProx II provides a read range up to 5” (12................................................................... Specifications General: Colors: ....................................................... Up to 5” Read Range....................................................................... Indoor/Outdoor................597 cm W x 2.................. 01-7000-235 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............8 cm T) Weight: ...........99” W x 0........... 97 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ................................................................. Beige LED Type: ..........16 cm T) Electronics Module: ... Door Frame....................................................... 4................................................................... -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ... 01-7000-219 SecureProx II Reader............................................ up to 5” (12....... Up to 5” Read Range............ Wiegand............. (142 g.....................5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ........................... Beige.. 96 mA @ 12 VDC........................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................. 94 ms Audio Tone: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: Bezel: ............... Supports both ASP and ASP+ formats Ordering Information Item Part # SecureProx II Reader............................... 4-16 VDC............................ 4-16 VDC........... and threecolor status LED.................................................7 cm) and is designed to mount on a wall (wall switch)..................................................... 4 to 16 VDC at reader Max................... Door Frame..................... The SecureProx II shares the same potted electronics module with the SecureProx I (mullion).................... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place...................................... Indoor/Outdoor....................... Door Frame...27” H x 1....................... 01-7000-174 SecureProx II Reader....................................................................... 86 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: ....................... The SecureProx II offers a sleek and contemporary styling........................................................................ Up to 5” Read Range.................................. Door Frame................. Indoor/Outdoor....................................................................................8 cm W x 1................................................ WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader...........8 cm H x 3.............................................................. allowing the bezels to be snapped on interchangeably......... 4-16 VDC................................................................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ...............................5” H x 2......) Transmit Frequency: .............. All are field-configurable via the use of option cards............................................... 26 Bit (ASR-605) ................................................ 4-16 VDC.............. 125 kHz (excitation) 62............. Beige............. Standard.......................... Black......................................................................................................162 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP+ Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-605 SecureProx™ II Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-605 SecureProx II Reader is the next generation of ASP Readers............. Up to 5” Read Range................................................ Read Range: .......................................................................................42 cm H x 7....................... the SecureProx II includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback..............................................................................51” W x ...................85” T (11................. independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Compatibility: ............................................... 01-7000-173 SecureProx II Reader....................................................................... 96 mA @ 12 VDC...... 64 mA @ 12 VDC.......... SelfTest™ for installation assistance.... 4............................ ...................................... 01-7000-201 Masterprox Reader......................................................................................................................................... 4-14VDC........... making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place........................................................................... Beige. In/Outdoor........................................................................................................................................................................................ All are field-configurable via the use of option cards........... the MasterProx includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback....................................................................................................... Max....................................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Colors: .72 cm) Transmit Frequency: ........ In/Outdoor......................5 cm) and is designed to mount on a single or double metal gang junction box..................... Beige LED Type: ........................................................................................................................................................................................... The reader’s electronics are completely enclosed in a UL approved epoxy potting........................................................................................................................................................ 125 kHz (excitation) 62........ 12” Range.... 117 mA @ 12 VDC............................................................................................................1” H x 6....................... SelfTest™ for installation assistance................................ up to 12” (30................. 37 Bit (ASR-610) .................. 94 ms Audio Tone: .............................. 37 Bit (ASR-610) ..5 kHz (return) Reading Time (26 bit): ................ The MasterProx provides a read range up to 12” (30............................................ making it both vandal proof and weather resistant....... In/Outdoor............................................................................................................................................................................... RS-232 Current Draw: Off Metal: ........................................ Supports both ASP and ASP+ formats Ordering Information Item Part # Masterprox Reader................... 18” (45........................ 12..................................... In/Outdoor.............................................................6oz............................................................. 5................................................................ 26 Bit (ASR-610) ...... Max 12” Range.......... -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ........... 01-7000-200 Masterprox Reader. independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Compatibility: ...............................1” W x 1.....................................................................................1” T (12..............) Cable Length: .................................................95 cm H x 15.. (352..................................... 82 mA @ 5 VDC Input Voltage: ........... as well as any flat surface (including metal)........................ The MasterProx can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats................................................. 140 mA @ 12 VDC.... 12” Range................. 65 mA @ 5 VDC Maximum: ....................... Standard....................... Black.......................................................................................... 4-14VDC..... Max................. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe.......................... 4-14VDC.................................................................................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................................................................................... 4-14VDC..... Beige............. Black.................................. 4 to 14 VDC at reader Max.... Black........................... 26 Bit (ASR-610) ......................49 cm W x 2......54 cm T) Weight: .................................................................................. 70 mA @ 5 VDC On Metal: .................................. and three-color status LED............................................................................ Additionally............................... 01-7000-220 Masterprox Reader................................ Max 12” Range.....CARDS & READERS 163 Motorola Indala ASP+ Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-610 MasterProx™ Proximity Reader Description The Motorola Indala ASR-610 MasterProx Proximity Reader is the next generation of ASP Readers................................................ Read Range: .................................. Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ............... WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader..............................8 g................................5 cm) using ASC-121T Dimensions: .................................................... Wiegand................. 111 mA @ 12 VDC............ 01-7000-218 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. . MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................... 125 kHz......................................................................... 117 kHz........................................ independently controlled (not tied to LED function) Compatibility: ............................................................................................................................................................................................. making it both vandal proof and weather resistant.......... 12 to 24 VDC Max. The single piece PowerProx provides a read range up to 28” (71 cm).............. Specifications General: Colors: ............. Designed for applications where maximum read range contributes to the convenience of the system............................................................................2 lbs.............................................................................................................................................................. In/Outdoor......................... WatchDog™ for higher security applications requiring a supervised reader............................ Standard.................................................................. Max 28” Range........ -31 to 149°F (-35to 65°C) Output: ..................................8” T (28...... Black...................................45 kg) Transmit Frequency: .............................4 cm H x 28..2” W x 1..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3........................4 cm W x 4................... Black...................... manually selectable Reading Time (26 bit): ................................................... Supports both ASP and ASP+ formats Ordering Information Item Part # PowerProx Reader.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0A/1.2A Nominal/Maximum at 24 VDC: ..... SelfTest™ for installation assistance... 11............................................................................................................ Black LED Type: .................. Max 28” Range......... 26 Bit (ASR-620) ......................... 01-7000-223 PowerProx Reader......................... The PowerProx can be configured to output data in either Wiegand or magnetic stripe formats. All are field-configurable via the use of option cards......................................................... Oversize. 750 mA/900 mA Input Voltage: ...164 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP+ Advantage Series Proximity Readers ASR-620 PowerProx™ Proximity Reader NEW! Description The Motorola Indala ASR-620 PowerProx Proximity Reader is the next generation of ASP Readers............................................................... Tri-color standard Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: .......... the PowerProx is ideal for parking lot and physically challenged (ADA requirement) access applications.............................. 94 ms Audio Tone: .................. take advantage of the PowerProx’s bidirectional (equally from both sides) read capability............................................................. such as concealment behind or within thick building materials............ providing both access and egress from a single reader......................................................6 cm T) Weight: ......................................................................................................2” H x 11................ Read Range: ..................... 133 kHz (excitation)....... the MasterProx includes many of the advanced performance features such as QuickFlash™ for immediate user feedback......................................... 01-7000-224 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................... 1.............................................................................................. (1............................. Wiegand........ 37 Bit (ASR-620) ................ The reader’s electronics are completely enclosed in a UL approved epoxy potting.. In/Outdoor..................................... and three-color status LED.......................................................................... Other applications............................................................................................................... Additionally....................................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe Current Draw: Nominal/Maximum at 12 VDC: .............................................. making it easy to upgrade existing sites to proximity using the wiring already in place................................................................................................................................................................................. up to 28 (71 cm) Dimensions: .................................................. .......................................................38” x 2................................................... Per Side NOTE: With Motorola Indala products................................................................................................................ Vertical Slot....................065 (86 mm x 54 mm x 1.....................................................................6 cm) ASR-136: ........ features beveled edges...................................................................................................................................... 26 bit Ordering Information Item Part # ASC-121T LifeTime Proximity Card Light Gray..................... Horizontal Slot.............................................................................. Up to 12” (30............................................................................................. making it one of the thinnest proximity cards of its kind available................................................................................................ The ASC-121T is “credit card” size...... 26 Bit................................................. the card offers an optional horizontal slot punch making it easy to wear with a badge clip on clothing or a necklace......................................................5 cm) ASR-503: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-136 Photo ID Adhesive Back Pack w/Photo Flap for Sony Video Printers................................................................................................................................................. Up to 4” (10........................................................................................... Vertical standard.................... and a thickness of .................................... 01-7001-100 Custom Artwork Cards Minimum order quantity for custom artwork cards is 500...... Custom color graphics option available on ASC-121T with customer-supplied artwork ID Marking: ................................................................................................. Light Gray............ ASC-121T ASR-603: ................. Infinity Format (37 bit)............... Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information..7 cm) ASR-610: ........................ 26 Bit ........................... Up to 4” (10............................................................................................. and serial data formats............................................ Up to 7” (17.......................................................................................................................................................... Light Gray Graphics: ................................ Cards are permanently marked with encoded..................................... ABS Plastic..................................................................................... Flexible and light enough to be carried in a purse or wallet..................................................... 37 Bit ............8 mm)............................ no over-runs Dimensions: . 01-7001-092* ASC-121TH LifeTime Proximity Card... Wiegand..... Specifications General: Coding: ........................................................................................ 37 Bit........ Light Gray............................................................................................... The ASC-121T can be encoded with Wiegand.............................................................. Up to 5” (12............................... prepared by a commercial graphic artist............................................................. One Color ASC-121T Card (w/Horizontal slot) Two Color ASC-121T Card (w/Horizontal slot) One Time Tooling Charges...................................... no gaps.............................................................. and is designed to withstand the rigors of the access control environment................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... Allow an additional 3-4 weeks for delivery....................... The card can accept custom color graphics and can be printed with the actual encoded ID number or a random serial number............................. Call Order Entry for instructions and mechanical card specifications........................................................................................................................................................8 cm) ASR-120: ..................... 01-7001-134 ASC-121T LifeTime Proximity Card Light Gray.. Horizontal Slot................................................ It can be used interchangeably with other Indala ASP credentials on most systems and can be ordered with specified facility codes and ID numbers......... Customer must provide CAMERA READY artwork........... Vertical Slot...................................................2 cm) ASR-110: ... exact facility code and ID numbers standard.......................................................7 cm) ASR-605: ................ Up to 28” (71 cm) Temperature: ................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................................................................................................................... Up to 4” (10.............8 mm) Weight: .................. Up to 16” (40..............................065" (1........................................................................................... horizontal optional Bit Range Format: ........ ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe............................ 01-7001-135 ASC-121TH LifeTime Proximity Card................................................ magnetic stripe......................................................................................................................................2 cm) ARK-500: ....................................................................................... offset or random numbers (optional) Slot Punch: ....... 3................................................................................................... The card can also accept photo flap and direct print adhesivebacked ID badge overlays.................. -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) Card Construction: ..................... Up to 5” (12..................................... (12 g) Read Range: .......................................................................... Up to 4” (10................... 0..................................................2 cm) ARK-501: .....CARDS & READERS 165 Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Cards ASC-121T LifeTime™ Proximity Card Description The Motorola Indala ASC-121T LifeTime Proximity Card is made of a durable plastic.................................. As standard..13” x 0............................ Indala delivers the number sequence ordered with no gaps and with no under or over-runs....... the bit format of the cards and the reader must be identical.................................................... w/Vertical Slot (for ASC-121T Cards) ....................................................... including PMS color(s) selection.......................2 cm) ASR-505: ............ Per Color..................................................................4 oz.......................................... ...........................................166 CARDS & READERS Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Cards ASK-116T ProxTag™ Proximity Key Tag Description The Motorola Indala ASK-116T ProxTag Proximity Key Tag is designed to be carried with a user’s keys............................ 01-7001-094 ASK-116T Proximity Key Tag. in two locations........................................................................................................................................................................ Up to 2....................................1 cm) ARK-501: ...........9 g) Read Range: ......................... 26 Bit ............................................................................................................................................... Up to 2” (5..................................................... As standard..... Up to 2............................................................................. no gaps........................................ Up to 2” (5.............................. 2............................................................................................................................................................. Up to 2” (5...................1 cm) ASR-505: ....................................................................................................................................................... and serial data formats................................................... 37 Bit .................................................. The tag contains a hole with a brass eyelet for attachment to any key ring or chain........................................................................................................................................................2 cm) ASR-120: .....................................................................................................................................................................4 cm) ASR-605: ....26 (56 mm x 32 mm x 7 mm) Weight: ......................... ABS Plastic.............................................................................4 cm) ASR-610: ........................................ Specifications General: Coding: ............................ offset or random numbers (optional) Bit Range Format: ........ Infinity Format (37 bit)....................................................... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) Card Construction: .......... It can be used interchangeably with other Indala ASP credentials on most systems and can be ordered with specified facility codes and ID numbers............................................................................................... Cards are permanently marked with encoded........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................... Up to 8” (20............................................................................................................. Up to 6” (15......... The ASK-116T’s unique design allows it to be carried with the user’s keys................................................................... (9.....1 cm) ARK-500: ..................................................... exact facility code and ID numbers standard................................................................... Up to 4” (10................ Light Gray........................................... making building access fast and convenient............................................................................................................................................. magnetic stripe....................................................................... Wiegand................................................ Indala delivers the number sequence ordered with no gaps and with no under............................1 cm) ASR-110: ....................................................... Up to 14” (35....... Up to 2” (5..................................................................................................................................................2” x 1.................................. ASK-116T ASR-603: .................5 cm) Temperature: ..... 0..............36 oz.............................. ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................or over-runs........ as well as the attachment of adhesive stickers............................................................................................................................ With an ergonomic shape....................................... 01-7001-224 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................... The ASK-116T is molded of durable plastic designed to withstand the rigors of the access control environment............................................... the ASK-116T is a light gray color that supports the printing of ID numbers or logos........................................................................... Light Gray ID Marking: .... no over-runs Dimensions: ....................................................................................... The ProxTag can be encoded with Wiegand....................................................2 cm) ASR-503: .......4 cm) ASR-136: ........................................................5” (6...................................................................................... 26 bit Ordering Information Item Part # ASK-116T Proximity Key Tag............................................................... Light Gray................5” (6........................................................................2” x 0....... ................................................. Up to 12” (30.......... Locations indicated on card standard Magnetic Stripe: ..........CARDS & READERS 167 Motorola Indala ASP Advantage Series Proximity Cards ISO-30+ Image30™ Proximity Card Description The Motorola Indala ASP ISO-30+ Proximity Card is a “credit card” thin access credential......................... the cards are delivered in the number sequence ordered with no gaps and with no under.......................................................2 cm) ARK-501: ...................................................................................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe................................................................................ and fuel dispensing............................................................................................................................... It can also be slot-punched either vertically or horizontally....................................................................................... White glossy back with slot-punch indicators standard Custom Graphics: ......................................................................................................................................................... Optional vertical and/or horizontal..76 mm)...............................03” (0....... Wiegand........ Up to 5” (12........................ Infinity Format (37 bit)........................................................................................................... Includes P/N code....... Up to 4” (10............................................................................................................ The ISO-30 card also allows a customer who is using magnetic stripe at multiple sites to upgrade to proximity and still use a single card................................ and ID numbering matching internal ID Coding: .and-attendance or job costing.................................. copy machines........................................................................................................................................................................................................ PVC Slot Punch: .................................................................................................................................................................................... Up to 16” (40............... with no gaps or over-runs Bit Range Format: ......................................... It can be used interchangeably with other ASP or ASP+ credentials on most systems and can be ordered with specified facility codes and ID numbers....................................... that is ISO 7813 compliant with a nominal thickness of 0..........7 cm) ASR-610: .................................................................................................... The ISO-30 card can be programmed in the factory with Wiegand........................................................................................................................................................................................................................750 oe) Finish Front: .......................................................................................................... White glossy front standard Finish Back: .............. ISO-30 ASR-603: .......................................................................................................................................... exact facility code and ID numbers standard............ magnetic stripe.......................... Up to 28” (71 cm) Material: ......................... 26 bit Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................... ABA Track II Magnetic Stripe.............................................or over-runs........................ Embedded 3-track high coercivity (2.................................................................76 mm) Weight: ............ date code............................................................................. Up to 4” (10..................... and serial data formats........... 0....2 cm) ARK-500: .................................................. Up to 7” (17.................... Bar codes can be imaged onto the card for systems tracking time...............................................................................................7 cm) ASR-605: ............................................................................... Up to 4” (10......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Its ability to contain multiple ID technologies in a single credential makes the ISO-30 one of the most versatile proximity cards on the market today....03 (86 mm x 54 mm x 0.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8 cm) ASR-120: .... it’s available with a magnetic stripe for use with other systems such as cafeteria vending......................................................................12” x 0... Specifications General: Coding: ..... no gaps.............................. no over-runs Dimensions: .............................................................. 3................................. making it easy to wear as a standard photo ID........................................................................... Up to 4” (10...........................................................................2 cm) ASR-110: ........................5 cm) ASR-503: ............................................................... Wiegand........................................................6 cm) ASR-136: ........................... Up to 5” (12.......... Exact coding standard.................................................................................................................................................................. When ordered from the factory. The ISO-30 card is small enough to carry in a wallet........................................................................................2 cm) ASR-505: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................20 oz............ Digital photographs and graphics can be printed directly over the IS0-30’s entire front surface by using a dye-sublimation printer......................................................38” x 2. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................... (6 g) Read Range: ....................................... In addition to functioning as a proximity card for access control.................................. Available on both front and back sides with customer supplied artwork Permanent Marking: .................................. Glossy Front & Back......... 37 Bit ................. Glossy Front & Back.................. Hot Stamp... Mag Stripe (for Video Imaging)........ 01-7001-191 ISO. Glossy Front & Back..... Hot Stamp.... Glossy Front & Back..... 26 Bit ..30 ProxCard...... Mag Stripe (for Video Imaging).... Per Side NOTE: With Motorola Indala products. No Logo.... Glossy Front & Back... 01-7001-227 Custom Artwork Cards Minimum order quantity for custom artwork cards is 500... Hot Stamp.... Hot Stamp. Hot Stamp. Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information........ Glossy Front & Back. Hot Stamp.. 26 Bit ..... No Slot.. Allow an additional 3-4 weeks for delivery. Indala Logo... 37 Bit . No Slot (for Video Imaging). 01-7001-168 ISO-30 ProxCard...... Hot Stamp. Hot Stamp... Mag Stripe (for Video Imaging).. 01-7001-188 ISO-30 ProxCard.. No Logo...... Mag Stripe (for Video Imaging)........ Call Order Entry for instructions and mechanical card specifications. No Slot (for Video Imaging)...... No Slot..... 01-7001-226 ISO-30 ProxCard. 26 Bit ........ No Slot (for Video Imaging)... including PMS color(s) selection............... No Logo.... the bit format of the cards and the reader must be identical. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... No Logo...... 26 Bit ......... 37 Bit .... 37 Bit . Customer must provide CAMERA READY artwork. 01-7001-167 ISO-30 ProxCard. 01-7001-189 ISO-30 ProxCard.. No Slot....... No Slot........ prepared by a commercial graphic artist........ Per Color. No Slot (for Video Imaging). Indala Logo.. 01-7001-225 ISO-30 ProxCard... Indala Logo.... Indala Logo. Glossy Front & Back..... One Color ISO-30 Card (w/Horizontal slot) Two Color ISO-30 Card (w/Horizontal slot) One Time Tooling Charges...168 CARDS & READERS Ordering Information Item Part # ISO-30 ProxCard.... Glossy Front & Back.. ............................. -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C) Current Draw: .....................................................................................................................49” thick (76 mm x 38 mm x 12 mm)......................................................................................................................................................................CARDS & READERS 169 Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Readers P-300 Cascade Reader NEW! Description Keri Systems P-300 may be the world’s smallest single piece proximity reader at only 3..................................................................................................................................... Standard Warranty: ............................................................................................................. 125 kHz (excitation) Audio Tone: ................. Read range is up to 4” (102 mm).................................................................................................................................................................0” long x 1............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2..........................................) Transmit Frequency: ............................................................. 3.................................................................................................................................................................................................................0” H x 1................ 5 to 14 VDC Max......................................................................................... Input Voltage: .........5” wide x 0............................... Single Piece.... Read Range: ..................................................................... Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ........................................................................................................... Black LED Type: ........................... Specifications General: Colors: ....................................................... Single Piece...........................................................................................6 oz.. Off-White............ Lifetime Ordering Information Item Part # P-300 Cascade Proximity Reader.......................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................................................................................................. ZP-P-300-B P-300 Cascade Proximity Reader......................... (74 g.................... 80 mA typ.......................................................................................5” W x 0......................... ZP-P-300-W Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................49” T (76 mm H x 38 mm W x 12 mm T) Weight: ......................................................... Mullion Mount.................................................................................................................................... It is designed to be mounted on a standard metal door or window frame (mullion) and can be mounted on any metal or non-metal surface without loss of read range.............. Mullion Mount................................................................................................ 4” (102 mm) Dimensions: ...................................................... Off-White ................... Black .............. ................................................................................................................................. Red/Green/Amber Operating Temperature: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (91 g...................... Wall Switch........................................ Standard Warranty: ............................................ Lifetime Ordering Information Item Part # P-500 Alps Proximity Reader...........................................................................................................5” H x 3.............2 oz............................................................................... Its size is 4................................. Specifications General: Colors: ...............................................................................................................................................................5” (13 mm) stand off is standard with each reader.............................................................................. ZP-P-500-W Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................. ZP-P-500-B P-500 Alps Proximity Reader..................38” thick (114 mm x 76 mm x 10 mm).............................. Black ........................................................................0” wide x 0............................................................................ 125 kHz (excitation) Audio Tone: ........... The P-500 is designed to be mounted on a standard metal door or window frame (mullion) and can be mounted on any metal or non-metal surface without loss of read range......................................................................................................................5” long x 3........................................................................... Black LED Type: ....... 5 to 14 VDC Max........................................................... Single Piece.... Off-White .......) Transmit Frequency: ........................................................................................................................................................................ 80 mA typ................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............170 CARDS & READERS Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Readers P-500 Alps Reader NEW! Description Keri Systems P-500 is a single piece proximity reader that can be mounted on a flat surface or affixed to a standard U....................... Single Piece.................. Off-White......................................................... 4.......................................................................................... -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C) Current Draw: ................................ Its thin............ single gang electrical box........ Read Range: ..............S........... Wall Switch...................................................................................................................................................38” T (114 mm H x 76 mm W x 10 mm T) Weight: ......................................................... Input Voltage: ............0” W x 0..................... Read range is up to 5” (127 mm) when mounted at least 0.............................................................. sleek profile makes it a much more attractive device to install in the workplace than other readers............................. 5 (127 mm) Dimensions: ...................................................................... 3................ A 0................................................5” (13 mm) off metal.................................................................. ............................................................................................... up to 4” (102 mm) P-500: ............................) Material: ..................................................................................................... 3................................................................................................ all with exact number sequences.................................................................. The cards are sequentially encoded................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ The PSC-1 cards are for use with Keri’s new Pyramid Series Proximity Readers... ABS Frequency: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 bit ............... They can be used interchangeably with Keri’s MultiTechnology Cards or Key Ring Tags on the same system without worry about ID code duplication or format matching of readers....................................................................................................................................................................................5 mm T) Weight: .......... 37 bit .. ZP-PVC-9 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............. Lifetime Ordering Information Item Part # PSC-1 Standard Light Proximity Card.................. It can accept standard imageable PVC labels from a multitude of vendors for graphics customization and photo ID........................................ Infinity Format (37 bit)......................... non-condensing Dye Sublimation Printing: ............... (8................................... 125 kHz Excitation Humidity: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ the Standard Card is recommended over the MultiTechnology Card whenever possible because of its lower cost and lifetime warranty........................................................................................................375” L x 2................................... 0 to 95%............................................................................................................................................................................................. Use PVC-9 Dye Sublimation Overlay Formats: ..................8 g.............................................................................. They are manufactured with a vertical hanging slot punch.... ZP-PSC-1-26B PVC-9 PVC Adhesive Overlay........... -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C) Dimensions: ............................................................................................................. up to 5” (127 mm) Operating Temperature: ......... ZP-PSC-1-37B PSC-1 Standard Light Proximity Card.............................................................. Card ID numbers are permanently marked on the card.....................150” W x 0........................... It can be easily carried in a wallet or purse or worn on clothing with a clip or necklace...............................................................CARDS & READERS 171 Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Cards PSC-1 Standard Light Proximity Card NEW! Description Keri Systems PSC-1 Standard Light Proximity Card provides maximum read range performance in a package considerably thinner than other “clamshell” proximity cards.............................059” T (86 mm L x 55 mm W x 1................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................................. and can be programmed in any custom Wiegand format as well as standard 26 bit............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Dye Sublimation Printable (for use w/PSC-1 Card) .................................................................. Off-White Read Range: .................................................................................... Specifications General: Colors: .................................................................................................. 0. PSC-1 P-300: ...................................................................................... Unless the user requires the combination of mag stripe and proximity.....................31 oz......................................................... 26 bit Warranty: . 172 CARDS & READERS Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ............................ They are for use with Keri’s new Pyramid Series Proximity Readers.................................................................................................... ISO Thin.. -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C) Dimensions: ..... allowing the user to carry a single card........................................................ 3-Track Mag Stripe.......................... from most industry standard dye sublimation printers.............................................. 26 Bit ............................................................................... Each card is marked with the ID number and a date code............................................ Image III Atlantek ............................................................................ White Read Range: .................................................... 37 Bit ........................... • • • • Ultra Electronics Magicard Systems ..... The cards can be ordered with or without a high coercivity magnetic stripe......................................19 oz......................................................5 g......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... up to 4” (102 mm) Operating Temperature: .............. PSM-2 P-300: ............................................................ ZP-PSM-2P-37B PSM-2S Multi-Technology Proximity Card.. to create a custom access credential..................................... 26 Bit ......031” T (86 mm L x 55 mm W x 0.............. Dye Sublimation Printable........... Image Express............................................................................. 26 bit Warranty: ..................................... non-condensing Formats: ...............8 mm T) Weight: ..................... ZP-PSM-2P-26B PSM-2S Multi-Technology Proximity Card....................................... 300Plus.................................................................................................................................. They are also useful for customers who may have a proximity-based access control system at one site and a mag stripe-based system at other locations................. Keri systems has tested its cards with most printer manufacturers’ products and has compiled the below listing of recommended printers........................................................ Dye Sublimation Printable............ Dye Sublimation Printable.................................................... 125 kHz Excitation Humidity: ................................. (5........................................ such as cafeteria vending........................................................................ The PSM-2 cards are sequentially encoded............ Dye Sublimation Printable.................... typically a photograph.....................................150” W x 0................................................. and can be programmed in any custom format as well as standard 26 bit..................................... and other user graphics.........375” L x 2................... 37 Bit ................................ ISO Thin.................................... All Models Specifications General: Colors: .......... PVC with a printable matte finish Frequency: ........................................................) Material: ................... The PSM-2 can accept a direct print video image....... To ensure the best quality print........................... ISO Thin......................................................................................................... 3-Track Mag Stripe.................................................................... ZP-PSM-2S-26B Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................... Models 300....................... ISO Thin... They can be used interchangeably with Keri’s Light Proximity Cards and Key Tags on the same system without worry about ID code duplication or format matching........... ZP-PSM-2S-37B PSM-2P Multi-Technology Proximity Card.............................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... credit card thin credential...................................... 3................................................................................................................................................ 0 to 95%...................CARDS & READERS 173 Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Cards PSM-2 MultiTechnology Card NEW! Description Keri Systems PSM-2 MultiTechnology Card allows the user to combine several identification technologies in a single........................................................................... Infinity Format (37 bit)...................... One Year Ordering Information Item Part # PSM-2P Multi-Technology Proximity Card........... Turbo Datacard Corporation ................................................................................... Model 85 Sandia Imaging Systems ...... which is useful if there are other types of systems in use that are mag stripe-based.......................................................................................... up to 3” (76 mm) P-500: ................................................................................................. bar code.......................................................... 0................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .174 CARDS & READERS Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ............................................ ergonomic.................................................................................................................................... ZP-PSK-3-37B PSK-3 Proximity Key Ring Tag......................................196” T (38 mm L x 29 mm W x 5 mm T) Weight: ...............................................5 g........................51” L x 1....................................................................................................... Each tag is marked with the ID number and a date code........................................................................................................................................................................ and can be programmed in any custom Wiegand format as well as standard 26 bit.................................................) Material: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................................................................................... PSK-3 P-300: ......................................................................................................................................................................16 oz.................................................................................................... up to 2” (51 mm) P-500: ........................... (4.....................15” W x 0........................................................... 26 Bit ...................... up to 3” (76 mm) Operating Temperature: ... non-condensing Formats: ............................................................................... Includes Brass Eyelet.................................. 0............................. Infinity Format (37 bit)........................... Lifetime Ordering Information Item Part # PSK-3 Proximity Key Ring Tag. ABS..................................... includes brass eyelet Frequency: .................... 1................................. ZP-PSK-3-26B Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................... 26 bit Warranty: ......................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Colors: ................................................................. and extremely durable package.....CARDS & READERS 175 Keri Systems Pyramid Series Proximity Cards PSK-3 Proximity Key Ring Tag NEW! Description Keri Systems PSK-3 Proximity Key Ring Tag provides user convenience in a small............................................................. Includes Brass Eyelet............................................. 125 kHz Excitation Humidity: ................................................................................................................. The tag is equipped with a brass eyelet for attachment to a key ring that ensures the neck of the tag will not break during the life of the system................................................................................. They can be used interchangeably with Keri’s Proximity Cards on the same system without worry about ID code duplication or format matching..................................................................... -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C) Dimensions: ................................................................................................................ 0 to 100%........................................................................................................................................ Gray Read Range: ........ 37 Bit ...................................................... They are for use with Keri’s Pyramid Series Proximity Readers................................................................................................................................................................. The PSK-3 Key Tags are sequentially encoded............................ 176 CARDS & READERS Dimensional Drawings Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ............................................................ Indoor/Outdoor............................................................... Indoor/Outdoor (Model WP644) .................................................................................................................................................................................... w/Heater Bar Option (Model WP644) .................49” (152 mm x 38 mm x 43 mm) w/Adaptor Plate: ................................ CE.........................................................................................................................00” x 1...........000 hours Error Rate: ................ 01-7000-178 Weatherized Pass-Through Reader............. clock and data Data Rate: ................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................... ANSI and EMPI coded magnetic stripe cards Data Tracks: .....................................75” x 1............................................................................................ CE......... 01-7000-185 Weatherized Pass-Through Reader..................................................................................................................... 7......................Terminal Blocks (Model 644) ............................. 6......................................................................................................................... One simple motion through the card slot reads a card...... door mullion....................................................... Class A.................................................................... Withstands 20............. ............................................................................................................................. 35 mA @ +5........................................................................... 8 to 50 inches per second Output Format: .............. 01-7000-065 Pass-Through Reader...07 mm thick) Card Speed: ............. Specifications General: Card Format: .........000 wear cycles............................. 01-7000-137 Model WP644 Heater Bar (Unistalled............................................................... w/Heater Bar Option (Model WP644) ...................................................................................... Indoor w/Pigtail (Model 644) ...................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-177 Weatherized Pass-Through Reader...................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-184 Pass-Through Reader.................................................................. w/Connector............ 01-7000-181 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............ Track 1 and Track 2................................... ..................................... Red/Green. 01-7000-180 Read Head Replacement Kit for Pass-Through Reader (Model 644) ....... White...................................................................................................................................................... Black............................................................................ MTBF 22........030” + .... Single-width handy box........ or vertical surface Lifetime: ........ UL 294 Pending Dimensions: ..................................................................................................................................... 1ms per bit Approvals: 644: .............................. 01-7000-064 Pass-Through Magnetic Stripe Card Reader.......................................................... Black........................... Indoor w/Pigtail (Model 644) .............................762 mm + .............00” x 2... ............................ 01-7000-179 Weatherized Pass-Through Reader.White................................................................................... for use w/Dorado Weatherproof Readers) ................................................................................................................ 26/34 bit Wiegand.................. FCC Part 15............................................... Indoor/Outdoor Ordering Information Item Part # Pass-Through Magnetic Stripe Card Reader.............................................................................................................................05 false reject..................................................................... GE Lexan (polycarbonate) in white or black Temperature: ... A bi-color LED winks to confirm that a card has been read............................................ Indoor/Outdoor.................................... UL 294 Access Control WP644: ..........................................................................CARDS & READERS 177 Dorado Magnetic Stripe Card Readers 644 & WP 644 Pass-Through Readers Description The Dorado Systems 644 Pass-Through Readers combine ease-of-use with installation flexibility............. w/Connector...................... 200’ (60 m) on five #22 unshielded wires........................................................................................5 volts (regulated 4............ 8” pig-tail cable Cable: ... 2 x 10-6 false accept Static Discharge: ........ 5 to 95%.................................75 to 5...................75” x 1..............................................................................................................................................................75v) Mounting: ........................................................................................................................ The readers mount simply on a wall or on a door mullion............................................................................................... and are available with a black or white case................................................................... White..................................................................... EMPI ............................................................. Indoor........................................................................... 500’ (150 m) on five #18 unshielded wires Power: ............................................................................................................ Terminal Blocks (Model 644) ...................................................... Indoor........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... FCC Part 15................................... ANSI ............. -31 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C) operating Humidity: ............................ then changes color when the door unlocks.............................................. Class B. Black.......................................................................5 digits Card Size: ........................................................................................... Indoor only WP644: ............. White........................................ 250................... Indoor/Outdoor (Model WP644) ...........................................003” thick (..........up to 37 digits....................................................................... Amber and flashing red as options Material: ........................................................................... .......69” (178 mm x 70 mm x 43 mm) Connections: 644: ........................................................................................................................................................................... high or low coercivity Digits Read: .... non-condensing Environment: 644: ........................................... Black................................................................. Plug-in with 8” pig-tail cable WP644: ..........................................................000 volts LED: ............... ................................................................................... Single-width handy box........ door mullion......................................5 digits Card Size: ......................................................................................... FCC Part 15.................................. clock and data Data Rate: .......2.................................................... GE Lexan (polycarbonate) in white or black Temperature: ............ high or low coercivity Digits Read: ........................................................................................................0 mm x 85..........................003” (54........................................................... Specifications General: Card Format: ..................... 5 to 95%.. Indoor/Outdoor (Model 544) ........................05 false reject.........................................................................................................................................................................762 mm + .....375” x ................................... ............... Indoor/Outdoor (Model 544) ...................................................... then changes color when the door unlocks.................................................................................... . ANSI ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ANSI and EMPI coded magnetic stripe cards Data Tracks: ...............................................56” x 3..................up to 14 digits.14” (115 mm x 76 mm x 29 mm) Connections: .......................................................................................................................................................7 mm x .................................. Cards insert upward at the bottom of the reader................................................................................................. White.......................... 200’ (60 m) on five #22 unshielded wires........ Withstands 20........................................ MTBF 22....................................... or vertical surface Lifetime: ............................................................................................ 01-7000-138 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................................................... 01-7000-063 Read Head Replacement Kit for Insert Reader (Model 544) ............................... Available with a black or white case..................................................................................................................................................................................... Plug-in with 8” pig-tail cable Cable: .................. 2 & 3..........................00” x 1..................................................................................................................178 CARDS & READERS Dorado Magnetic Stripe Card Readers 544 Insertion Card Reader Description The Dorado 544 Insertion Card Reader combines high reading performance with low cost of ownership.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... A bi-color LED winks to confirm that a card has been read............................ Track 1........................................................................................5 volts (regulated 4....... Indoor/Outdoor................................................... 26/34 bit Wiegand............................................................................................ the reader is designed to be inconspicuous and blend in with any indoor decor or outdoor environment...................................... 2 x 10-6 false accept Static Discharge: ........................... keeping rain and snow out and discouraging vandalism.......................................................................................000 volts LED: ........................................... Class A...............030” + .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. CE................................... 4................................................. 01-7000-062 Insertion Magnetic Stripe Card Reader..................................................... 35 mA @ +5......................... EMPI .........................................75 to 5........................................................... non-condensing Environment: ..... Black........................... Red/Green........................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................................. 5 to 30 inches per second Output Format: ........................................................ 1ms per bit Approvals: ..............................................................................75v) Mounting: .................................................................. UL 294 Access Control Dimensions: ....... 500’ (150 m) on five #18 unshielded wires Power: .. -31 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C) operating Humidity: .......................................................... Fully weatherproof Ordering Information Item Part # Insertion Magnetic Stripe Card Reader.............................125” x 3...000 hours Error Rate: ............................ 250............07 mm) Card Speed: ................................................................................................................................................................ Amber and flashing red as options Material: ................................000 wear cycles.. ...... Zinc plated steel and glass filled nylon Temperature: ..................... Indoor/Outdoor........ CE Dimensions: .............................................................. 01-7000-120 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......75” (57 mm x 133 mm x 70 mm) Connections: ........... The card slot arrangement eliminates rain and snow problems while providing outdoor capabilities............. No Faceplate......................375” x ............. Indoor/Outdoor (Model 570) .............................................................. Fully weatherproof Ordering Information Item Part # Elevator Magnetic Stripe Card Reader...............................................................05 false reject..................030” + ......................... Plug-in with 8” pig-tail cable Cable: ..............5 digits Card Size: .................................................................................................................................................. 35 mA @ +5............................2................................................................................................................................. Withstands 20..................................25” x 2.......... Track 2.................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Card Format: ....................................................................................................................................... ANSI and EMPI coded magnetic stripe cards Data Tracks: .......................................... clock and data Data Rate: ...............................................................................................0 mm x 85.. in a gooseneck stand for vehicle entry or in many other custom enclosures............................................. EMPI ...................................................................................................................................................................................07 mm) Card Speed: ..................................................... ..... Class A.....................003” (54................................................................................................................................................................................... FCC Part 15................................................................................................................................... 250..........................................................................................................................................up to 14 digits............................................... 2 x 10-6 false accept Static Discharge: ......7 mm x ........... 200’ (60 m) on five #22 unshielded wires........ 26/34 bit Wiegand..........................................5 volts (regulated 4................................ ANSI ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................000 wear cycles.................................................................................................. -31 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C) operating Humidity: .............................................................................. MTBF 22.....................................................................762 mm + ........................................................................ high or low coercivity Digits Read: .......................................................................................................125” x 3.........................................................................000 volts LED: ........................................................................000 hours Error Rate: ... 500’ (150 m) on five #18 unshielded wires Power: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................75 to 5............................................. non-condensing Environment: ......................................................... 1ms per bit Approvals: .. The reader mounts flexibly behind an elevator cab faceplate......25” x 5.......................................... None displayed Material: ........................................................................................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............. Cards insert horizontally into the reader for simple operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 to 95%.................................................. 5 to 30 inches per second Output Format: ...................................................................................... On rear of vertical surface with mounting studs Lifetime: ....CARDS & READERS 179 Dorado Magnetic Stripe Card Readers 570 Elevator Card Reader Description The Dorado 570 Elevator Card Reader combines high reading performance with a variety of mounting options.................. 2................75v) Mounting: ................... ............................................. ....................................................................000 volts LED: ........................................................................................5 to 13................................................ clock and data.........up to 37 digits.................................................................................................................................................................................... Withstands 20...................................... This unit combines ease-of-use........................................................................................................... ................................. ............ ANSI/ISO .................................... Single-width handy box............................762 mm + .... ...................................................................5 or 6-digit user ID Card Size: .....................................180 CARDS & READERS Dorado Magnetic Stripe Card Readers 740 & 780 Ruggedized Pass-Through Readers Description The Dorado 740 & 780 Ruggedized Pass-Through Card Readers combine ease-of-use with increased durability................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... non-condensing Environment: ................................................................................................................................................................ 5......................................... ................................... 500’ (150 m) on five #18 unshielded wires Power: ............................ increased durability............................................. 01-7000-139 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...............003” thick (................................... UL 294 Access Control Dimensions: ......................................................................................... high or low coercivity Digits Read: ....030” + ............................................. Black.......................................................... and a PIN keypad for increased security...................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-136 Model 740/780 Read Head Replacement Kit ........................................ 26/34 bit Wiegand......................0 v) Mounting: ............................... Plug-in with 8” pig-tail cable Cable: ............................................................ FCC Part 15....05 false reject.................. The readers mount indoors or outdoors on a double-gang handy box............................... 250................................................................................................................................................................................ MTBF 22.................. aluminum base Temperature: ............... The 780 Ruggedized Pass-Through Card Reader is available with a keypad............. One each: Red/Green/Amber Material: ................... CE..........................................................................00” (130 mm x 171 mm x 76 mm) Connections: ................................ Indoor/Outdoor (Model 740) ....................... shrugging off exposure to the elements....... Track 1 & 2................ 1ms per bit Approvals: .........5 volts (regulated 10.................. Their cast metal case resists vandalism and abuse..........................................000 hours Error Rate: ..000 wear cycles...... 01-7000-129 Ruggedized Pass-Through Magnetic Stripe Card Reader w/Keypad.......................................................................................... 5 to 95%.................................................................. ANSI/ISO and EMPI coded magnetic stripe cards Data Tracks: ................................................. yet one simple motion through the card slot reads a card................................................. -31 to 150°F (-35 to 66°C) operating Humidity: ....................................... Black................................................................................................................................. at 5 volt signal levels Data Rate: ................................ when shielded from ice buildup Ordering Information Item Part # Ruggedized Pass-Through Magnetic Stripe Card Reader.................. EMPI ........ Black GE Lexan (polycarbonate)............................................. Three LEDS are provided to clearly indicate status............................................................................................................................. Class A.............................................. Indoor/Outdoor (Model 780) ....... ..................... double width handy box or vertical surface Lifetime: ....................................................................... 35 mA @ +5........................................................................................................................................ .. ......................................... 8 to 50 inches per second Output Format: .................................................75” x 3.......................07 mm thick) Card Speed: ................ Indoor/Outdoor weather resistant....................................... 2 00’ (60 m) on five #22 unshielded wires............... An LED winks to confirm that a card has been read.................................................................................................... Specifications General: Card Format: ..............................................................125” x 6............................................................................................................................................. 2 x 10-6 false accept Static Discharge: ................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................................CARDS & READERS 181 Dorado Magnetic Stripe Access Cards Description The Dorado Magnetic Stripe Cards are credit card width............................................................................... High Coercivity......................................................................030” Card Construction: .................................................................................................................. 01-7001-030 Plain White Photo ID Card ...................... 01-7001-249 Hot Stamp ............................. 4000 Oersted Encoding (optional): ........................ 01-7001-028 EMPI Encoding MUST SPECIFY SITE CODE ........ Polyester cards may be provided with a “hot stamped” ID number or ID label....................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................... 75 bits per inch Marking (optional): .. Dorado EMPI I.......................................................... Cards are designed and fabricated to ISO standards for size and thickness..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7001-253 Custom Card............................................................................ or ANSI/ISO on ISO track location 1........... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................ One-time Set-up Charge Contact the Andover Peripherals Department for more detailed information........ Specifications General: Dimensions: ...................................................... providing unmatched wear resistance........ 01-7001-252 Embossing ........................ or 3 (specify which).............. 2.............................. High coercivity magnetic stripe material is used to avoid accidental erasure....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... allowing their use in all of Dorado’s insertion.... Standard Mezzotint Magnetic Stripe Card Dorado’s Standard Mezzotint Card is made of a durable polyester material.......................................................................................................... pass-through and horizontal insertion readers....125” x 3.. EMPI II...............375” Thickness: .................................................. Plain White Photo ID Magnetic Stripe Card Dorado’s Plain White Photo ID Card is also made of a durable polyester material with a high coercivity magnetic stripe...................... Custom artwork on cards is available........................................................................................................... Hot Stamp or adhesive labeling Ordering Information Item Part # Standard Mezzotint Card .......................................................... PVC/Polyester composite for direct (DTV) printing Stripe Material: ......................................................... 01-7001-250 Adhesive Label ...................................................................... 01-7001-251 Slot Punch MUST SPECIFY LOCATION ................................................................................................................... 0.............. 2................................................................................................... .....................................575 Card Format: .............................................................................535 418: ..75” L x 4...............................................................75” W x 12.........75” H Functions: .................................................................................................................................................-48.. Per ANSI//ISO card................................................................................................. Writes and verifies a card keypad input........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Reads a card (on same Job Code)................. and even end users to code cards at their own facility................................................................................................................................................. ABA Format (Model 450) .............................................................. 220 VAC ............ User/sequence number 1-1........................................................ 50/60 Hz standard Options Available: ........................................ Specifications General: Dimensions: ........................................................... Track 1 encoding/reading........................................... EMPI Format (Model 415) ............................................. stripe dimensions........... 8.................. 400 cards per hour Ambient Temperature: .............................. Reports a reading error Input Encoded (along with job code): 415: .... It accepts both CR-80 and CR-60 size cards in its pass-through slot................. 01-7000-160 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......................................................... high coercivity Duct Cycle: ........................................182 CARDS & READERS Dorado Magnetic Stripe Encoding Systems Models 415 & 418 Description The Dorado Magnetic Stripe Encoding Systems allow OEMs................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... EMPI I or EMPI II on ANSI/ISO Track 2 Card Style: .......... indoors only Operating Power: .................................. The second encoding system interfaces with an IBM-compatible personal computer and can be used to encode both EMPI I format and ANSI/ISO format cards on Track 1 and/or Track 2................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................................. 01-7000-066 Magnetic Stripe On-Line Encoder.. The first system is a self-contained desktop encoder intended for on-site Track 2 encoding of EMPI I format magnetic stripe cards......................................................................................................... dealers.........240 VAC power Ordering Information Item Part # Magnetic Stripe Encoder....................................................................................................... 105 to 125 VAC... User/sequence number 1-65......................... 32 to 90°F......................... CARDS & READERS 183 Essex Electronics Keypads Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypad Description The Essex Electronics Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypad provides a rugged, durable means of entering a security PIN (personal identification number) into an Andover Infinity Security Management System. The solid stainless steel keypad wires into the Andover ACX 700 and ACX 780 Access Controllers (only), with no other interface modules required. Up to 2 keypads may be connected to the ACX700; up to 8 to the ACX 780. Each door in an ACX 700 or ACX 780 may be configured through software to grant access based on access card only, PIN only, or a combination of card and PIN. These access modes can be made constant, or can be changed based on a schedule or other system event. A silent duress can be triggered through a slight variation in the PIN entry, also configurable through software. This keypad is designed for both indoor and outdoor use, and can be mounted flush or directly onto a single-gang electrical handy box. Wiring distance is 500 feet (152 meters) maximum from the keypad to the controller, using 10 conductor, 18 gauge wire. Two LEDs are provided for power and go/no go indication. Specifications Electrical: Power Requirements: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 VDC, 10 mA Mechanical: Operating Environment: ........................................................................................................................................................... -40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C), 0 - 100% RH Dimensions: .................................................................................................................... ................................................ 5 1/8" x 3 3/8" (Keypad protrudes 7/16" from wall) Color: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Stainless steel Wiring Information: Wiring Distance: .................................................................................... 500 ft. maximum (152 meters) to controller, using 18 gauge wire. 200 ft. maximum (61 meters) to controller, using 22 gauge wire Wiring Terminations: ................................................................................................................................................................... 12-pin, with connector and leads supplied Keypad Input: ACX700/780: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Keypad C1: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... gray C2: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... violet C3: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... orange R1: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... brown R2: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... blue R3: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... green R4: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... yellow Reader Input: +5: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... red (5VDC Power) LED: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. white (green LED, off if no go) Gnd: ................................................................................................................................................................................................... black, pink (red LED, power indication) General: Keypad: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 x 4 matrix output, 0 - 9, *, # Unit Life: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Tested to over 1 billion cycles Ordering Information Item Part # Essex Touch Pad ....................................................................................................................................................................... 01-7000-127 Extra Label for Essex Touch Pad ............................................................................................................................................... 01-3002-234 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 184 CARDS & READERS Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypad 8-Bit Burst NEW! Description The Essex Electronics Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypad 8-bit burst version provides a rugged, durable means of entering a security PIN (personal identification number) into an Andover Continuum Security Management System. The solid stainless steel keypad wires into the Andover Continuum AC-1 controller (only), with no other interface modules required. Up to 2 keypads may be connected to the AC-1. The Essex KTP-103, is an 8-bit burst version of Andover’s existing Essex Indoor/Outdoor Security Keypad. It features the same 12-button keypad (3 x 4 matrix) and can be mounted flush or directly ontoa single-gang electrical handibox. Two LEDs are provided for power and go/no go indication. The keypad is available with field selectable input voltages of 5 or 12 VDC. The KTP-103 has a stainless steel finish and ships with an Andover Controls label that can be easily affixed to the keypad. The Essex KTP-102, is a 12-button keypad (2 x 6 matrix). The KTP-102 is waterproof and its narrow style makes it ideally suited for mullion mount. Like the KTP-103, it offers 8-bit burst output, a stainless steel finish, and field selectable input voltages of 5 VDC or 12 VDC. Specifications Electrical: Power Requirements: ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5 VDC or 12 VDC jumper selectable Mechanical: Operating Environment: ........................................................................................................................................................... -40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C), 0 - 100% RH Dimensions: .................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 2" x 6" (Keypad protrudes 7/16" from wall) Color: ......................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. Black (2 x 6); Stainless steel (3 x 4) Wiring Information Wiring Distance: .................................................................................... 500 ft. maximum (152 meters) to controller, using 18 gauge wire. 200 ft. maximum (61 meters) to controller, using 22 gauge wire Wiring Terminations: ................................................................................................................................................................... 12-pin, with connector and leads supplied AC-1 Keypad Input: AC-1: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Keypad CLK/0 [Terminal 4]: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. green DATA/1 [Terminal 3]: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... white +5 or 12 VDC Powr + V [Terminal 1]: .................................................................................................................................................................... red (5 or 12 VDC Power) LED [Terminal 5]: ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Brown (green LED, off if no gap) GND [Terminal 2]: ....................................................................................................................................................................... black/yellow (red LED, power indication) General: Keypad: ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 x 4 and 2 x 6 matrix output, 0 - 9, *, # Unit Life: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Tested to over 1 billion cycles Ordering Information Item Part # Essex KTP-103 Keypad, 12-button, 3x4 Matrix Keypad, Stainless Steel, Weatherproof, 8-bit Burst .................................... 01-7000-221 Essex KTP-102 Keypad, 12-button, 2x6 Matrix Keypad, Stainless Steel, Weatherproof, 8-bit Burst .................................... 01-7000-222 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 CARDS & READERS 185 EMX34/CK34 Cardkey Interface Board Description The Andover Controls EMX34/CK34 Cardkey Interface Board is designed to convert signals from up to four Cardkey Model #L47 readers (or two Model #L40-6 readers, which draw more current) into Wiegand format, which can be read by the Andover Controls ACX 700/780 family of controllers. The EMX34 is designed to be mounted to a DIN rail within an enclosure. It must be connected to an Andover Controls ACX 700/780 family controller, to an AC power source and to a Cardkey reader. The EMX34 printed circuit board has four inputs (P2, P4, P6, P8) and four outputs (P3, P5, P7, P9). The inputs from the Cardkey reader are wired on the right-hand side of the physical board, and the outputs on the left-hand side. The EMX34 Cardkey Interface Board comes complete with the EMX34 printed circuit board, two plastic PCB mounting brackets and two plastic DIN rail mounting brackets. Additional items required include an Andover Controls ACX 700 or 780 family controller, Cardkey readers, one extra cable and female molex connector per reader, a AC power cable, output wires, two end clamps, a DIN rail and an enclosure. Specifications General: Power: ............ Receive power from ACX 700/780 controller; Addtl 24VAC (+/- 20%) required to power LEDs (EMX34 board converts power to 9VDC output for LEDs) Wiring: ........................................................................................................................................................................... Each Cardkey input on the EMX34 requires 6 wires Environmental: ............................................................................................................................................. Operates in same environment as Andover Infinity controllers Dimensions:: ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6.125” x 3.625” (160mm x 92 mm) Ordering Information Item Part # EMX34/CK34 Cardkey Interface Board .................................................................................................................................... 01-0008-755 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 186 CARDS & READERS Applications/Wiring Diagram Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 DAMPER ACTUATORS 187 Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators AF Series Description The Belimo AF Series actuators are designed for on-off, fail-safe and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems. They offer a minimum 133 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 35 sq-ft and provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air-tight dampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator. The AF Series provides 95° of rotation with a graduated position indicator showing -5° to 90° and a unique manual positioning mechanism which allows the setting of any damper position within the actuator’s 95° of rotation. The actuator is shipped in the zero position (5° from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuator drives toward the full fail-safe position. The manual override can also be released physically by the use of a crank supplied with the actuator. Specifications General: Torque: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 133 in-lb [15 Nm] Running Time: ........................................................................................................................................................ 150 sec. independent of load (control); <20 sec. (spring) Angle of Rotation: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 95° Fits Shaft Diameter: ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3/8” to 3/4” (standard) Manual Override: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Hex crank Control Direction: .......................................................................................................................................................... Left/right external switch (proportional types only) Spring Direction: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Left or right mounting Dimensions: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10.59” x 3.86” x 3.10” Electrical Connection: .......................................................................................................................................................... 3ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2” conduit fitting Auxiliary Switches: ..................................................................................................................................................................... SPDT. One 5° fixed; one 25° to 85° adjust. Housing: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: .................................................................................................................................................................................... -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: .............................................................................................................................................................................................. UL 873 listed, CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: AF24: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... On/Off Control, 24 VAC/DC power AF24-S: ............................................................................................................................................................. On/Off Control, 24 VAC/DC power, 2 Built-in aux. switches AF120: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... On/Off Control, 120 VAC power AF120-S: ............................................................................................................................................................... On/Off Control, 120 VAC power, 2 Built-in aux. switches AF230: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ On/Off Control, 230VAC power AF230-S: .................................................................................................................................................................. On/Off Control, 230VAC power, 2 Built-in ax. switches AF24-3: .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Floating Control, 24VAC/DC power AF24-SR: ...................... Proportional Control, 24VAC/DC power; 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor), or 0-10V phasecut control signal, 2-10VDC feedback signal AF24-SR-S: .................................................................................................... Proportional Control, 24VAC/DC power, 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor), or 0-10V phasecut control signal, 2-10VDC feedback signal, 2 Built-in aux. switches AF24-SR95: ......................................................................................... Proportional Control, 24VAC/DC power, Honeywell electronic series 90 or 140 ohm control signal AF24-PWM: ................................................................................. Proportional Control, AC power only, Pulse width modulating control signal, 2-10VDC feedback signal Ordering Information Item Part # 133 in-lb, 24V, Proportional ................................................................................................................................................ ZBAF24-SR-AV AF24-SR w/2 Built-In Aux. Switches ................................................................................................................................ ZBAF24-SR-S-AV 133 in-lb, 24V, On/Off ................................................................................................................................................................. ZBAF24-AV AF24 w/2 Built-In Aux. Switches ............................................................................................................................................ ZBAF24-S-AV 133 in-lb, 120V, On/Off ............................................................................................................................................................. ZBAF120-AV AF120 w/2 Built-In Aux. Switches ........................................................................................................................................ ZBAF120-S-AV 133 in-lb, 230VAC, On/Off .............................................................................................................................................................. ZBAF230 AF230 w/2 Built-In Aux. Switches .............................................................................................................................................. ZBAF230-S 133 in-lb, 24VAC/DC, Proportional, Honeywell Elect. Series 90/140 ohm .......................................................................... ZBAF24-SR95 133 in-lb, 24VAC/DC, Floating ...................................................................................................................................................... ZBAF24-3 133 in-lb, 24V, PWM, AC Power Only .................................................................................................................................... ZBAF24-PWM NOTE: -AV denotes that the unit carries the Andover Controls logo. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. No edge seals. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . Parallel blade.188 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) * Based on 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. .............................................................. 95°.. They offer a minimum 60 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 15 sq-ft.... <60 sec......................................................................................... The NF series provides 95° of rotation with a graduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.................................................................................................... ZBNF24-S-AV 60 in-lb.................................. switch NF120: ....... 10................................................................................................................................................................. One 25° to 85° adjust.......... UL 873 listed......... 24 VAC/DC power................................................................................................................................. Switch ............... On/Off ..............................................................................................................05” (w/ K4-1 clamp accessory) Control Direction: .............10” Electrical Connection: ...............86” x 3... 60 in-lb [7 Nm] Running Time: .................................... ZBNF24-AV NF24 w/ Aux..................................................................................................... <75 sec.................... On/Off Control.......................................................................................................................................................... On/Off Control...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Built-in aux................................................. 18 GA double insulated appliance cable........................... 1/2” conduit fitting Auxiliary Switches: .... CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: NF24: ..... 3/4” to 1....................................... The NF Series provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive closeoff on air tight dampers............. ZBNF24-SR-AV 60 in-lb............................................................... ZBNF120-AV NF120 w/Aux.................................................................................................................. (on/off control)...................................................................... -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: ......................................................................... 120 VAC power NF120-S: ......................................................... Switch .............................................. (spring) Angle of Rotation: ........................................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................................................... Proportional Control................................. Left/right external switch (proportional models) Spring Direction: ..................... On/Off Control................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................................... 24VAC/DC power..................................... ZBNF120-S-AV NOTE: -AV denotes that the unit carries the Andover Controls logo.............................. SPDT..... 3/8” to 3/4” (standard)................................................................................................ Left or right mounting Dimensions: .......................................................................................... 2-10VDC feedback signal Ordering Information Item Part # 60 in-lb............................... NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: ........................................................................................................................ 120V.............................. 24V.......................... and without..................... The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Torque: ........................................ Proportional ... (proportional control)... .............................................. 3 ft.............................. On/Off Control......................................................... The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with................................................. adjustable Fits Shaft Diameter: ................................ (-S models) Housing: .... 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor) control signal.................................................................................................59” x 3.........DAMPER ACTUATORS 189 Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators NF Series Description The Belimo NF Series actuators are designed for on-off... 150 sec........................................................................................................................................................... On/Off ......................... Built-in aux............................................ power applied to the actuator....................... 120 VAC power............................................ fail safe and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems........................ switch NF24-SR: .......................... 24 VAC/DC power NF24-S: ........................................................... 24V........................................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . Parallel blade.190 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagram Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) * Based on 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. No edge seals. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ............................................................................................... ZBLF230-S 35 in-lb............................................................................................................................................. ZBLF120 35 in-lb........................................................................ constant Spring < 25 sec. 2-10VDC................................................................ ZBLF24 35 in-lb.................... Power Supply: ............................................... power applied to the actuator............................................. External rotation switch........ On/Off Control........................................................................... switch LF230: ...................................... Built-in aux........... 24VAC/DC power.......................................................................................................... 120V........... 1/2” conduit fitting Housing: ............ Switch ................................................................................................................ Switch .......................................... On-Off Control ................................................................................................ Rotation Switch .................. NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: ........ Rotation Switch............. 230VAC....................... Floating Point Control....................................................... Extrernal rotation switch LF24-SR-S: ...................................................................................................................................... Motor 150 sec.......................................... Rotation Switch ................................................... 230V........................... 2-10VDC........... 120VAC.............. 24V....... 230 VAC Angle of Rotation: ............................ ZBLF24-SR 35 in-lb......................... 24 VAC/DC......................... The LF Series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing 0° to 90°................................................. switch Ordering Information Item Part # 35 in-lb.. Control................................................................................................................................................ 35 in-lb [4 Nm] Running Time: ......................................................................................................................................................................... Built-in aux..... The LF Series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable... Switch ................................................ on-off and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems................ 2-10VDC Control signal.......................... 230VAC LF230-S: ...... Prop.................................... Control...................................................... Built-in aux........... CE Specific Models: LF24: ............................................................................................... Built-In Aux.. Floating Point Control.............................. switch LF24-3: .. On/Off Control .......................... Prop.............. 24V................................................................................ fail-safe application and positive close off on air tight dampers..... 24VAC/DC power LF24-S: ........ and without............................. Rotation Switch................. 24V.................................................................................... 2-10VDC feedback signal........................... The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches....................... 24V............................. 18 GA appliance cable................................................................................. Proportional........................................ On/Off........................... Floating Point Control........................... Floating Point Control.............................................. 120V.................................................... On/Off........................................................ 2-10VDC feedback signal................................... Left/right external switch Electrical Connection: ........... On/Off Control ........................................................... ZBLF230 35 in-lb................... 24V........................ switch LF120: ............................................... -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: . Built-In Aux.. Built-In Aux............................................................................. Built-in aux..................................................... 120VAC LF120-S: ......................... ZBLF24-3 35 in-lb................................ Proportional........................ On/Off.............................. 230V............. On/Off Control...... They offer a minimum 35 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 8 sq-ft.........................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 191 Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators LF Series Description The Belimo LF Series actuators are designed for modulating..................... On/Off................................... 24VAC/DC power...................................... On/Off. UL 873 listed.................................................................. Specifications General: Torque: ........ ZBLF24-S 35 in-lb............................................................ Motor < 75 sec............ ZBLF120-S 35 in-lb..................... The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with................................. 95° Rotation Direction: .............................................................. CSA 4813 02 certified...... 24V...... Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.......... On/Off...... 24V................................................... switch LF24-SR: .............................. Built-In Aux............................................... On/Off............................................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............... On/Off Control...... Switch .............. Switch .......................................................................................... ZBLF24-3-S 35 in-lb.................................................................................... ZBLF24-SR-S Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ On/Off............................................ Built-In Aux..................................................................................... 24V.......................... 24VAC/DC power.. Built-in aux.............................................................. 3 ft. External rotation switch LF24-S: .............. 120 VAC.................................. 2-10VDC control signal.................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .192 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .DAMPER ACTUATORS 193 Applications/Wiring Diagrams Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .194 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ............................................................................ CW/CCW external switch........................................................................................................ 24 VAC/DC Power Consumption: .................................................. Adj Span ................... Prop........................................................... Floating Point Control.................................................................................. 2.......................................... 95° Manual Override: ............................ Control............DAMPER ACTUATORS 195 Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators AM Series Description The Belimo AM Series actuators are designed for control of dampers in HVAC systems.......5 VA (Class 2 power source) Overload Protection: ........................... 2..... Prop.......... Adj Span ................... They offer a minimum 160 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 40 sq-ft....................................... Prop.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 ft.... Prop..... Pulse Width Mod (0..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24V...................... Specifications General: Torque: .................. 100 to 150 sec.................... Clip-on indicator Angle of Rotation: ........5W Transformer Sizing: ...... Switch .. ZBAM24 160 in-lb.... 24V............................................................................. -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Weight: ................ Prop................................................................. 160 in-lb [18 Nm] Running Time: ............................................................... Floating Point Control .... Control................................................................................................................................................. Aux...................... CCW=CCW with decrease signal Electrical Connection: ............................. ZBAM24-SRS-C 160 in-lb... Control.................... 24V................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10........................................ Power Supply: .................... The actuator mounts directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4” diameter by means of its universal clamp............................................................. The AM24S us is constructed to meet the requirements for double insulated devices........................................................................................... Control... 24V........................ Prop... the actuator automatically stops................... Control...................................... 24V..................................59-2...............................5 VDC............... CSA 4813 02 certified... 5 to 95% RH.... 24V........................................ for 0 to 160 in-lb...........................................................1-25....................................... 1/2” conduit fitting Housing: ................................................................................. 24V......................5-13... Electronic throughout 0 to 95° rotation Position Indication: .........................................................................................3 kg) Agencies: ........................05” jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp........... 18 GA appliance cable................ ZBAM24-PWM-C Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........... On/Off................... ZBAM24-SR 160 in-lb................ On/Off........................ Adj Span ............................................ ZBAM24-S 160 in-lb..................................... The AM Series anti-rotation strap will prevent lateral movement of the actuator.................................................................................................................................................................................... Prop.................... noncondensing Rotation Direction: ...........................02-5.. ZBAM24-PWM-A 160 in-lb................................................93 sec) ................... Pulse Width Mod (0.......................... The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°............................................................................ 24V........................................ 24V...... External push button Humidity: ........8 lbs....................................................... 4...................................................................................... 4-7 VDC................ or up to a 1.................... Proportional: CW=CW with decrease signal....... ZBAM24-SRS-A 160 in-lb... Control..........................5 sec) .................................................................... ZBAM24-PWM-B 160 in-lb.............................................. When reaching the damper or actuator end position...................................................... 6-9 VDC..............................................0 sec) .................... NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: ........................... Pulse Width Mod (0.............. UL 873 listed................. (1.................................. Control.................... 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA (w/500 Ohm Resistor) .................................................. ZBAM24-SRS-B 160 in-lb..... The gears can be manually disengaged by simply pressing down the springloaded button on the actuator cover..................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....... CE Ordering Information Item Part # 160 in-lb............. . UL listed. etc. AM24-S us incorporates two built-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT. 6A (1. fan startup. adjustable between 0° and 95°. Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.196 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . interlock control.5A) @ 250 VAC. Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. 2 Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC 3 4 For end position indication. ....... Floating Control................................ 9... The position of the actuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0 to 1.................. independent of load Power Supply: .................................... 135 sec...... NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: ................................................................................................................................................... the damper blades can be adjusted by hand........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24 VAC/DC Angle of Rotation: ................................. 24V On/Off........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor)............................... Specifications General: Torque: ............ 266 in-lb [30 Nm] Running Time: ................................................................................................ The GM Series anti-rotation strap will prevent lateral movement of the actuator.......................................................... or 0-10V phasecut control signal.......................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................. 18 GA appliance cable............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15/32” to 3/4” Manual Override: .......................... ZBGM24-SR-AV NOTE: -AV denotes that the unit carries the Andover Controls logo................................................................. 95° Fits Shaft Diameters: ................................. on-off or proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems............. Push button Rotation Direction: .................................................................... the gears can be manually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring-loaded button on the actuator cover....................................................................................... 24V............................................................................................................. 24VAC/DC power GM24-SR: ................................................................. They offer a minimum 266 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 70 sq-ft..................................................................................................................................... ZBGM24-AV 266 in-lb...................... CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: GM24: ........... 1/2” conduit fitting Housing: .............. The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°................................................................... On/Off........................................... UL 873 listed................................................................................................... 3 ft.................................. A/B external switch Dimensions: ............................................ -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: .......................................................................................................... When reaching the damper or actuator end position..........15” Electrical Connection: ...............................................................................49” x 4............... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............................88” x 3................. Proportional ....... 2-10VDC.................................................................................... 24VAC/DC power................................................................ Floating Control.............................................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 197 Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators GM Series Description The Belimo GM Series actuators are designed for modulating... When this button is pressed down................................................................................................. Proportional Control.................................................................. 2-10VDC feedback signal Ordering Information Item Part # 266 in-lb...................................................... 198 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ........................ 2-10VDC feedback signal SM24-SRS: ....................................................... 24V...... 2 to 8..................................................................... AC power only.......................................................................... Fast Running Time .........DAMPER ACTUATORS 199 Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators SM Series Description The Belimo SM Series actuators are designed for modulating.................... The SM Series actuators are............ 100 to 200 sec.......... Floating Control............................................ Torque 88 in-lb................................ Fast running time of 55 to 110 sec............................................................................. 95° Fits Shaft Diameter: ...... on-off and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems.................... ZBSM24-SR-AV 133 in-lb...... On/Off...... 2-10VDC.................................................. The damper actuator is not provided with and does not require any limiting switches..................................... 24VAC/DC power................ switch 10° and 85° (SPST........................................................................ 24V............................................................ Running time of 90 to 150 sec.................................... 24V On/Off.......................................... Fast Running Time ..................................................................................................................................... On/Off.. Floating Control............................... 24V).................................................................... UL 873 listed................ -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: .... or 0-10V phasecut control signal.. Proportional .............. Floating Control.............................. 1/2” conduit fitting Housing: ............................................................ 24 VAC/DC Running Time: ...................................................................................................................... When reaching the damper or actuator end position............................................................. 24V............................... Fast Running Time..............4VDC....... 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor)......................................................................................... 24VAC/DC power.......................... Proportional Control. On/Off....... SM24-SR: .............. ZBSM24-AV 133 in-lb............................................................................. On/Off.................................. Specifications General: Torque: .......... directly mounted onto the damper shaft................................. for 0 to 133 in-lb (on/off and floating).................................................................................... 90 to 150 sec.. The position of the actuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0............................................................................. Push button Rotation Direction: ......... Fast running time of 45 to 85 sec.......................................................... A/B external switch Electrical Connection: ................. The gears can be manually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded button on the actuator cover.............................................................................. for 0 to 133 in-lb SMC24: ........................ NEMA 2/IP54 Ambient Temperature: . When the button is pressed down.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................. 24V.. 18 GA appliance cable.................................... Switch .................................... 2-10VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor) control signal...... Proportional Control.......................................... by means of a special clamp....... ZBSM24-S 133 in-lb.10........... Built-In Aux... the motor stops automatically......................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.... 3/8” to 3/4” Manual Override: ................................................ 24V....................................................................................................... but is protected against overloading............................. or 0-10V phasecut control signal............................................. Proportional Control.......... for 0-133 in-lb (proportional) Angle of Rotation: ....................... AC Power Only ................................................................ Running time of 16 to 19 sec.................................................. 133 in-lb (standard running time) Power Supply: ..... 24VAC/DC Power..... Proportional Control. Span adj................................ for 0 to 88 in-lb Ordering Information Item Part # 133 in-lb.................... The universal mounting bracket supplied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement of the actuator................ Start point adj................. The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°.............................................................................................................................. ZBSMC24 133 in-lb.. ZBSMC24-SR 133 in-lb............................................................................................... Floating Control........................ On/Off Control....................................... 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor).................................................6 to 8VDC SMC24-SR: ................ 24VAC/DC power......... CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: SM24: ...... Torque 88 in-lb.......................... 2-10VDC................ for 0 to 88 in-lb SM24-S: .............. Aux........................................ They offer a minimum 133 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 35 sq-ft............ ZBSM24-SRS NOTE: -AV denotes that the unit carries the Andover Controls logo......... 24VAC/DC power.... Proportional Control..................... 1......... 2-10VDC feedback signal........... the damper blades can be adjusted by hand.......................................... 3 ft................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .200 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ................................. The damper actuator is not provided with and does not require any limit switches. on-off and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems.................................................................................................................................................... 24VAC/DC power NM24-SR: .......... The universal mounting bracket supplied with the NM actuator will prevent lateral movement of the actuator............................................................................................................................... ZBNM24-SR-AV 75 in-lb............................................................................................................... 3 ft........ Floating Control........................... 75 to 150 sec for 0 to 75 in-lb (NM24 AV) Power Supply: ........ 3..........................................1 sec............................................. Start point adj...........................................................................................8 lbs (0.......................... Floating Control ................. 2-10VDC feedback signal Ordering Information Item Part # 75 in-lb........................................ ZBNM24-SRS.................................................................................................................................................... On/Off............../0.......................................................................................................... clip-on indicator Manual Override: ................ operating ranges of 0......................................................../0............................................................................................................................................................................................. When this button is pressed down....................................... to 5..... 2-10VDC feedback signal NM24-SRS: ... NEMA 2/IP54 Housing Material: ........................... UL 94-5V (flammability rating) Ambient Temperature: .............................................................................. Proportional .........................................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 201 Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators NM Series Description The Belimo NM Series actuators are designed for modulating...................... Span adj. the damper blades can be adjusted by hand................................................................................................... Proportional Control... independent of load (proportional models)......... Proportional Control................................................................................................................... ZBNM24-SRS NM24-SRS Bulk Packing.. 24VAC/DC power........................ CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: NM24: ..................8 kg) Agencies: ............. The angle of the rotation is mechanically limited to 95°........................................................................ 2-10VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor)....... 24-Count ...................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Torque: ................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................................0 sec................................................................................... 24 VAC/DC Transformer Sizing: ........../0...............59 sec............... UL 873 listed.......................................................................................................... 1................................................................................................................................................ 2 -14VDC................ ZBNM24-AV NM24 Bulk Packaging.................................. Proportional Control.......................................1 75 in-lb............................................. 75 in-lb [8 Nm] Running Time: ............................................................................................................................................................................1 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... 24V.................................................................................................................................................. 0-5VDC...................0 sec. On/Off........................................................... 24V....02 sec........................................................................................................................... Push button Rotation Direction: . 1/2” conduit fitting Housing: ......................... Proportional..................................................... They offer a minimum 75 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 19 sq-ft............. When reaching the damper or actuator end position....................................5 VA (Class 2 power source) Angle of Rotation: ................................................. to 6............. AC Power Only .................02 sec....................................... AC power only.................. ZBNM24-PWM ZBNM24-PWM Bulk Packaging............................. 24V.................................................................................... 150 sec...... to 25..................... 95° Position Indication: ............... ZBNM24...................... -4°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C) Noise Level: ................................................................ Left/right external switch Electrical Connection: ............................................................................................................. ZBNM24-PWM.5 sec................................. 2-10VDC feedback signal NM24-PWM: .................................... AC Power Only ............................................ 2-29VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor) control signal........................................................... Less than 35 dBA Weight: ................................................................................... AC power only...................................................... Auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto the actuator body for signaling and switching functions.......... Pulse width modulating (externally selectable)........................... 24V........................ 32 Count ................ The gears can be manually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded button on the actuator cover..................................... 24-Count ...........................................................................................................93 sec............................................................ the motor stops automatically............. 18 GA appliance cable......................................................................1-AV 75 in-lb................................. PWM... but is protected against overloading....... The position of the actuator is indicated by a visual pointer..... to 2.............................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .202 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. ...................................................................../no mechanical end stops LM24SR-T: ........................................................................... 2-10VDC feedback signal.......... When reaching the damper or actuator end position........ Proportional . 1 Adj..................................................... The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°...................................................................................... The position of the actuator is indicated by a visual pointer......................................................................... the actuator automatically stops......................................................... NEMA 2/IP54 (-T models are NEMA 1) Ambient Temperature: ............. CSA 4813 02 certified Specific Models: LM24: ...................................................... 48-Count ..................................................................... Floating Control........................................................................................................................... ZBLM24-T LM24-T Bulk Packaging.... 32-Count............................................................................................................................... 24VAC/DC power............................................................................................................................... 18 GA plenum rated cable............... 95° Fits Shaft Diameter: .............................................. ZBLM24SR-T LM24SR-T Bulk Packaging..........................................................................................56” Electrical Connection: ........................................................................ The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement................... On/Off............................... On/Off........................................................................ floating point and proportional control of dampers in HVAC systems............................ 24VAC/DC power................................................................................................. UL 873 listed.......................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ZBLM24 LM24 Bulk Packaging.......................................................... ZBLM24-5PO-T LM24-5PO-T Bulk Packaging................... 32-Count .......................................... ZBLM24SR........................................................................................................................ ZBLM24-T................................................................. Ordering Information Item Part # 35 in-lb...... 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor) control signal.................................. Left/right external switch Dimensions: .............1 LM24SR w/Terminal Strip ................................................................. 10K ohm feedback potentiometer LM24-5PO-T: ................................................... Push button Rotation Direction: ............................................................................................................................................................................... angle of rotation electronically adj...................................................................................................... Switch LM24-T: ..... On/Off.............. 5K ohm Feedback Pot ............... ZBLM24.......................................................................1 LM24 w/Terminal Strip ....................................................................1 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............... -22°F to 122°F (-30°C to 50°C) Agencies: ... 24VAC/DC power LM24-S: ............................................................................. Proportional Control............................................................................................................................................................................................ 24V......... Terminal strip LM24-10P: ........................................................................................ Floating Control........................................ Floating Control.................................................................................................................. 24VAC/DC power..................................................... Floating Control......................................... 3 ft................................ Terminal strip..................... 4..................................... 35 in-lb [4 Nm] Running Time: ....................................... for 0 to 35 in-lb [4 Nm] Power Supply: ................ 48-Count ............ terminal strips on -T models Housing: ... ZBLM24-10P 35 in-lb............ 2 W Angle of Rotation: ....... 24VAC/DC power....................................................................... w/out feedback and electronic angle of rotation adj..... Proportional Control........ The gears can be manually disengaged with a button on the actuator cover.............................................. 5/16” to 23/32” Manual Override: ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 LM24 w/Aux.....................DAMPER ACTUATORS 203 Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuators LM Series Description The Belimo LM Series actuators are designed for on-off................................................. The LM actuator is not provided with and does not require any limit switches................................................ ZBLM24-S LM24 w/10K ohm Feedback Pot..................................1 LM24 w/Terminal Strip......................................................................... 24 VAC/DC Power Consumption: ...................................................................... ZBLM24SR-T..................................................................... Switch .............................................................. ................................... They offer a minimum 35 in-lb torque for damper areas up to 8 sq-ft................................... 24VAC/DC power......... On/Off....................................................................................................... On/Off.... SPDT Aux..................... 24V.................................................................................................. Floating Control.............. 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA (w/ 500 ohm resistor) control signal..................................................................................................................... 5K ohm feedback potentiometer (w/out rotation direction switch) LM24SR: .............................. On/Off................. 24VAC/DC power........................................ but is electronically protected against overload...................................................................... 80 to 110 sec......................................... Floating Control ..............................32” x 2............................. ZBLM24SR LM24SR Bulk Packaging......................................................... Specifications General: Torque: ................................................. 48-Count ......................................................................................53” x 2...................................................... ZBLM24-5PO-T................ 204 DAMPER ACTUATORS Applications/Wiring Diagrams Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . DAMPER ACTUATORS 205 Dimensional Drawings (all numbers in brackets are metric) Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ................................................................................................ Plenum Cable ..... ZGCA164........................ (16 Nm) torque.........9 m) Dimensions: .............1U SR.............. Aux Switch.................................... 24V........................................ZGCA121................................. 142 lb......................... Universal Cable ............................................................ Aux Switch.....................75” W x 2..................... 144INLB............................. 144INLB.................... Universal Cable .... Aux Switch............... 15 seconds Nominal Angle of Rotation: ................................................................................................................................1U SR.... Universal Cable ................ 144INLB.......................................................2 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # SR. ZGCA163....... Universal Cable ... ZGCA166....................................1U SR................ 24V....................................................................................... 144INLB..... Aux Switch........................................................... Universal Cable ................................................... 12” H x 4.............................................................................................. 144INLB...... ZGCA151...................................................................................................................................................... 0-10V......................................................................... Plenum Cable ..... ZGCA126.......................................................................ZGCA161............................................... ........................... 2P.............................................................................1P SR.......................................................................................................................... 144INLB.. 24V..........................................1U SR............................................ 4-20mA.......................................................... (16 Nm) Max...................-in................. Span Adj.................................................. 4....................................................................... 4-20mA................. 2P.... 24V................................... 144INLB................. 144INLB. 24V................ ZGCA164......... Span Adj............... 144INLB........... 144INLB.. 142 lb.... ZGCA151.....................1P SR.........1P SR.....................................1U SR................................... Universal Cable ....... ................................ Universal Cable ........................................... ZGCA166...................................... ZGCA221...............1P SR.............................................. Universal Cable ..................................................................................... Span Adj................................................................................................................................................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................................................................... The GCA Series are ideal for Constant and Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air.................................1U SR......... 10 V Torque: .ZGCA156...................88” D (305 mm H x 121 mm W x 73 mm D) Shipping Weight: ..................................................................................................................... Aux Switch................... Aux Switch.................................................................................. 25 to 158°F (32 to 70°C) Ambient Humidity: ............... Plenum Cable ............. ZGCA135........................ 3P........ Universal Cable ........................... 144INLB......................................................... 3/8 to 1” (8 to 25 mm) diameter 1/4 to 5/8”2 (6 to 18 mm2) Min............................................................................................................................... 2P................................................................... ZGCA121........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Aux Switch......... 0-10V......... 144INLB... 24V........................ 2P................................................. The GCA Series are available in 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA modulating....................................... 24V................ Aux Switch. 3P........................................................................ Universal Cable .............................. 2P................. (2.................................................................................. mixed air................... 24V.............................................. exhaust.......................................................................... -25 to 130°F (32 to 55°C) Storage and Transport: ..... 95° Ambient Temperature: Operation: ........................................................................ 4-20mA........................................ 144INLB...................................... 142 lb............ 95% RH.... 24V......... Plenum Cable ............ Specifications General: Operating Voltage (G-G0): .......................................-in....1P SR............................................... 0-10V...................................................................... (16 Nm) Spring Return Torque: .............................................................. Universal Cable ..............-in.. and face and bypass dampers that require up to 142 lb.................................................................................................. 24V...................1P SR.................................................. ZGCA126...............................1P SR....1U SR..........................................1U SR.... FDBK Potentiometer......................................... Aux Switch............................... 2P........................ ZGCA131....................................................1U SR.................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....................................................... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ........................................................... 144INLB........................ Plenum Cable ................... (40 Nm) Runtime for 90° Operating with Motor: ...................................-in......................... 144INLB.................................................................................................................................... 144INLB............................... Angular Rotation: ................... ZGCA226........................................................... D-3 through D-4) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-173P25 and 155-174P25............................................................. 24V........................ 0-10V................. (16 Nm) Running Torque: ................................... 0-10V................................................................... 144INLB..... 3/4” (20 mm) Cable Length: .................. ZGCA161........................ 50 to 60 Hz Span: ...................85 lb. Plenum Cable .........................................................................................1P SR..........-in................................ 24V................... ZGCA156................ Universal Cable .................. 2 to 30 Vdc Factory Setting: .............................1U Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................................................................... 0-10V......................... 24V.......... non-condensing Shaft Size: ...... 4-20mA.........................ZGCA163................................................. <360 lb... 144INLB. 144INLB....................... 24V.......................................... 0-10V........................................... 90 seconds Closing (on power loss) w/Spring Return: ............... 90° Max......206 DAMPER ACTUATORS Spring Return Electronic Damper Actuators Open Air GCA Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies OpenAir GCA Series Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator is designed for control of building HVAC dampers..... 24V............................................... 24V........................................................................ 3’ (0......................1U SR........................................ 0-10V..................... 24V.................................... 24V..................................... Aux Switch.............. Torque: .................................................................... 144INLB................................... Shaft Length: . Plenum Cable .............. three-position (floating) and two-position (on/off) control models.................................... Span Ajd.................. Plenum Cable ..........1U SR..... 24V............................ 24V. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24V....................................................................................................................................................... Aux Switch..................................... 3PT................... 44 IN LB......... 44 IN LB........ 24V................................................................................................................................. ZGDE131......................... 0-10V............................................................................ ZGDE132.........................1P NSR...................................................................................................................................................................-in................ non-condensing Mounting: Shaft Size: ..................... Span Adj................................ 0-10V.................6” W x 2....................................................................... Nominal Angle of Rotation: ......... Plenum Cable .............1P NSR............................................... Aux Switch................ 0-10V.1P Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................................................... 90 sec................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Plenum Cable .......................................06 lb............... 44 IN LB............. ZGDE166...........................................................................................-in..1P NSR................................................................................................................................................................................ (5 Nm) torque.............. 44 IN LB...................................................... FDBK Potentiometer............................ between 2 to 30 Vdc Function: Torque: .......................... Shaft Length: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4” H x 2.............................................................................. 44 IN LB......................................... Plenum Cable ....... Plenum Cable.......................................................................................................................................................... 24V.... Span Adj..........................................DAMPER ACTUATORS Non-Spring Return Electronic Damper Actuators OpenAir GDE Series 207 NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies OpenAir GDE Series Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator is designed for 0 to 10 Vdc or three-position (floating) control of building HVAC dampers................................... Angular Rotation: ................... 44 IN LB................................. ZGDE164. Plenum Cable ........................................... 3PT........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 95° Ambient Conditions: Ambient Temperature: Operation: ................... Between 0 to 5 Vdc Factory Setting: ............................................................................... Models are available with either a universal cable for wiring in conduit or a plenum-rated cable for applications where conduit is not required................................. 50 to 60 Hz Control Signal Adjustment: Offset (Start Point): ......... 44 IN LB.. ZGDE163.....1P NSR............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 24V............................ ZGDE136........................................ 24 Vac Frequency: ................1P NSR................................................................. Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ..................................... ................................................................................................................... 44 lb....................... 1.............................................. 108 sec..... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................... 3’ (0.................................1P NSR...................... 3PT.... D-5 through D-6) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-187P25 and 155-188P25................... Plenum Cable ................. 3PT.........9 m) Dimensions: ....................... Universal Cable ...................................................................................................................... 44 IN LB................................................. 3/4” (20 mm) Cable Length: ....3” D (137 mm H x 68 mm W x 60 mm D) Shipping Weight: .......................................... -25 to 140°F (32 to 60°C) Ambient Humidity: ........ 24V...................................................................... 24V.......... at 60 Hz: ....................................................................................................................................................... Plenum Cable ................. 3/8 to 5/8” (8 to 16 mm) diameter 1/4 to 1/2”2 (6 to 13 mm2) Min...........................................45 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # NSR.............1U NSR.................. 0-10V........ (5 Nm) at 50 Hz: . 0 V Span: .. ZGDE131............................................. 95% RH......................... 24V................................................ Aux Switch........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .... ZGDE161...... 90° Max..................................................................................... The GDE Series are used in Constant and Variable Air Volume installations for the control requiring up to 44 lb.... -25 to 130°F (32 to 55°C) Storage and Transport: .............................................. 5............. (0.... 24V............................. ................................................... Die-cast aluminum alloy Cable Length: .... 177 IN LB........................................................ 24V................. Max....1U NSR......................................... 177 IN LB............ ..................................................... Nominal Angle of Rotation: ............................................. Angular Rotation: .................................................................................................... Plenum Cable.............. 90° Max.. 177 IN LB...................................... The GBB Series are used in Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air............... 0-10V......................... Shaft Length: ...........1P NSR................................................-in.......1U NSR..................... FDBK Potentiometer.......... Universal Cable ....... Med......................4 mm) diameter 1/4 to 5/8”2 (6 to 18 mm2) Min..............88” D (305 mm H x 121 mm W x 73 mm D) Shipping Weight: . 24V................................ ZGBB156................1U NSR...................................... Span Adj......................... Universal Cable ........................................................................................................ 24V............ 0 to 1000 Ohm......................... 4......1P NSR.........................................................................1P NSR................................................................................... Aux Switch........ Universal Cable . Plenum Cable ............................................................... 0-10V.... 4 VA Equipment Rating for Operating Voltage: .............................1U Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................. Plenum Cable .................................................................................................... 4-20mA............. 24V....................................................................................................................................................................1P NSR.................................................... -25 to 130°F (32 to 55°C) Storage and Transport: ................................. 177 IN LB.................................................................................. 12” H x 4. (20 Nm) torque........... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ...................... 177 IN LB............................................................................. exhaust.................................................................................................................................... 24V............................ Aux Switch.. 24V.. FDBK Potentiometer..................................................... 177 IN LB................................................................................................................................ NEMA 1 Material: .......................................................... 3PT................................................................................................................................ 177 IN LB.............................................................................................................................. 4-20mA.............. 0-10V....................1P NSR.............................................. 177 lb. ZGBB175.............. 3/8 to 1” (8 to 25............................... 177 IN LB................................................ 24V.......1P NSR........................................................................ Plenum Cable .................................................... 0-10V............................................. ZGBB156......................................................................................208 DAMPER ACTUATORS Non-Spring Return Electronic Damper Actuators OpenAir GBB Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies OpenAir GBB Series Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator is designed for control of building HVAC dampers..................................................................................... 95% RH.........................................................................................................................-in....... (20 Nm) Ambient Humidity: ........................... (2 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # NSR.................. Med.............. ZGBB163....... Plenum Cable ............................. 177 IN LB.................................................................... 3PT............ 3PT........................... Span Adj............... ZGBB161. Universal Cable ............................................................................................................ 177 IN LB................................................................................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...... Aux Switch............ Class 2 Runtime for 90° Opening or Closing: ................................................................................. non-condensing Ambient Temperature: Operation: ... ZGBB164........................................................................................ 24V.............1P NSR........................................ 24V..................1U NSR....................... 4 to 20 mA............................................................................................................. ZGBB151....................................................... ZGBB166................. ZGBB171............. 0-10V............................................................ Universal Cable ................ 177 IN LB................................ .............................................................................................................. 24V.. ZGBB161.................................................................. 0-10V....... mixed air...................................... 177 IN LB.......................................... Universal Cable ..... .................. 24 Vac +20%....... ZGBB171.......... 95° Feedback Potentiometer: ..... Plenum Cable ................... ZGBB166.............. 1 mA Torque: ..................... 3/4” (20 mm) Housing Enclosure: ....... Plenum Cable ........ 0-10V.................................. 177 IN LB.......... Universal Cable ....... D-7 through D-8) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-177P25 and 155-176P25...... 150 sec.. Aux Switch...................................................................................................................... 177 IN LB.. and three-position (floating) control......................... 177 IN LB............4 lb.............. Span Adj.......... 4-20mA........................... 0-10V................................................... ZGBB175....................................... 24V...................................... 24V.................. Plenum Cable ................................................................ ZGBB164.............................. 50 to 60 Hz Power Consumption: ............................. -15% Frequency: ....................1U NSR.................................................... 24V........................9 m) Dimensions: .................... ZGBB151..... 177 IN LB................ and face and bypass dampers that require up to 177 lb......................................................................................... 3’ (0..........................................................................................................75” W x 2.......... 24V........1U NSR. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... Aux Switch................................................. Aux Switch....................................... Span Adj........1U NSR..........................1P NSR........... ZGBB163.......... Universal Cable ........................................... The GBB Series are available in 0 to 10 Vdc............................................................ 24V................................ 24V............. 4-20mA.......................................................... 3PT................. -25 to 158°F (32 to 70°C) Shaft Size: .................................................................... Aux Switch................. 310 IN LB....................................................... HT................... HT......................................................................... 95% RH............................................. ZGIB164....................................................................................................................................................... -25 to 158°F (32 to 70°C) Ambient Humidity: ................ Between 0 to 5 Vdc Factory Setting: ..............................................................4 lb.......................... Span Adj........... 310 IN LB............................................................................................................................. Plenum Cable ............ 150 sec........1P NSR......................................................................... ZGIB151...... HT.............................................................................. Angular Rotation: ................................................................................88” D (305 mm H x 121 mm W x 73 mm D) Shipping Weight: ........................................................................................... non-condensing Mounting: Shaft Size: .............................. 310 IN LB....................... MOD(V)................... ZGIB151.... 24V..... Plenum Cable .............ZGIB166............... 24V................................................................................................................................................ ZGIB163............................ Aux Switch.......... HT................ ..................................................... Plenum Cable .................................... 4.................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................. <45 dBA Ambient Conditions: Ambient Temperature: Operation: ............................................................................. MOD(V)..ZGIB164....... HT...............................1U NSR......... MOD(I)......................................................................DAMPER ACTUATORS Non-Spring Electronic Damper Actuators OpenAir GIB Series 209 NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies OpenAir GIB Series Non-Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator is designed for modulating control of building HVAC dampers...................................... Span Adj.....1P NSR........... Specifications General: Operating Voltage (G-G0): .................. 310 IN LB.................................................................. 24V...................................... 3/8 to 1” (8 to 26 mm) diameter 1/4 to 5/8”2 (6 to 18 mm2) Min........................ 3/4” (20 mm) Cable Length: .................................................... Universal Cable ........ 3’ (0................................. HT.......... 310 IN LB..................................................... mixed air................................................ Plenum Cable.................... ZGIB163............................................ 50 to 60 Hz Control Signal Adjustment: Offset (Start Point): . Span Adj.................................... MOD(V)...... HT.. 310 IN LB................... HT.......................1U NSR.................................................... MOD(I).................................................. 24V................. Aux Switch.......................... (2 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # NSR............. 310 IN LB.......................................................................................................................................................................................... Shaft Length: ................................ MOD(V).............................. Universal Cable ........ 24V.......... 310 lb............... Universal Cable ................................................... HT............... ZGIB161......... 24V................ -25 to 130°F (32 to 55°C) Storage and Transport: ........................................................ -15% Frequency: ... The GIB Series are used in Constant and Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air........................................................................................................................................................................-in............................................................................................................. 310 IN LB....-in.................................................................................................................................. MOD(I)..................................................................................................1P NSR............. 310 IN LB......1U NSR................... and face and bypass dampers requiring up to 310 lb............................. Universal Cable .............................................................. Plenum Cable ......................... Universal Cable ......................... Plenum Cable .. MOD(V)...............................................................................................9 m) Dimensions: ..............1P NSR................ 310 IN LB...... 24V........................1U NSR........................................................................................................... 24V................................. Nominal Angle of Rotation: ................................. exhaust........................................................................................................................................ 24V............................................................... (35 Nm) Runtime for 90° Opening or Closing: .................. 310 IN LB........................... MOD(I).................................................. Aux Switch..................................................................................1P NSR................................... 24V....... ZGIB156.............................................................................. ..... 310 IN LB................................. Span Adj..................................... (35 Nm) torque.. Aux Switch..................................................................................... MOD(V)..... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. HT....... 0 V Span: ...........1U Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............................. Universal Cable ......................... 90° Max............................ 24 Vac +20%.................................................................................................................................. 12 H x 4....................................................ZGIB156.............................. 24V...................... MOD(V)........ ZGIB161.........................1P NSR.....................1U NSR.......... 95° Noise Level: ............................................. ZGIB166............... HT.. between 2 to 30 Vdc Function: Torque: ........................... 24V.............................................. HT.........75” W x 2.................... MOD(V). Aux Switch............ D-9 through D-11) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-176P25............. ........... exhaust........ 60 lb............................................. 24 Vac +20%........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... D-13 through D-14) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-123P25..0 Nm) Max.................. Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ......................................................................... Z3490100 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.........................................................................................................................................................................: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Small Torque: Min.................................................... Square or round...................................... 50 Hz: ....................... 50 to 60 Hz Power Consumption: ...................................................................................................................... Class 2 Frequency: ..............................................................................-in............................................... 90 sec............................0 Nm) Nominal Angle of Rotation: ............................................................................................................... 1-1/2” (38 mm) Suitable damper shaft: ....................................................................................................................... 3/8 to 1/2” (10 to 13 mm) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....................... 35 IN LB ..................................................210 DAMPER ACTUATORS Electronic Damper Actuators 349 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 349 Non-Spring Return Rotary Electric Damper Actuator is designed for use in Constant or Variable Air Volume...............6 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # EA349 Electric Damper Actuator w/Shaft Adapter............................................................................................................ 1............................................-in.... damper shaft length: ................................. 45 lb.......................................................................................................... and face and by-pass dampers............................................. (4........................................ 32 to 125°F (0 to 52°C) Storage and Transport: ..................................................................................................................................................................... -30%.......................2 VA Runtime for 90° Rotation: 60 Hz: .8 Nm) Torque Rating: ..... (6...........................................3 lb.................................................. 108 sec................................................................................. 2............................................................. -20 to 120°F (29 to 49°C) Mounting: Min.............. 90° Ambient Humidity: ................................ ........... (0................................................................................................................-in....................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................................ mixed air................ non-condensing Ambient Temperature: Operation: .......................................................... 5% to 95% RH............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (5............... unit conditioners and heat pump HVAC installations for the operation of return air...... 35 lb......................................................................................................................................................................: .............. .................................................................................................. Spring Return................................................................................................................ The 349 Damper Actuator is ideal for Constant or Variable Air Volume installations in unit ventilators.................................................................. 1 mA Function: Running Stall Torque Max........................8 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # 50 IN LB.................................................... 1/2” (13 mm) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................................. 24 VAC........: ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................................................................................................................................... 50 to 60 Hz Control Signal Adjustment: Three-position (floating) input signal: Position input and output signal: Voltage: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................-in...........................................................................................................-in........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Z3490101 50 IN LB.................................. Spring Return.................................................................... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ..................................................................... (6 Nm) torque...... Z3490102 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... (1................................................... 3 Position Control ..................................... Shaft Length: ...............DAMPER ACTUATORS 211 Electronic Damper Actuators 349 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 349 Spring Return Rotary Electric Damper Actuator is designed for three-position or modulating control of building HVAC dampers............ -30 to 140°F (-35 to 60°C) Storage Temperature: ................................................................................................. and louvers requiring up to 50 lb..............................................................................................................................................: .......................................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...............................3’ (1 m) Conduit opening: .............................................................................................................................................................................. 130 lb........................................................................ Spring Return Stall Torque Min.................. 3-1/2” (76 mm) >5/8 to 3-1/2” (16 to 76 mm) by reversing the hub Cable Length: ......................................................... 2 to 10 Vdc Current: ... ventilation flaps.......................................................................................................-in.................................. 24 VAC................................... (15 Nm) max........ NEMA 1 Shaft Size: ....................................................................................................................................... D-15 through D-16) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-178P25 and 155-179P25....................................................................... Modulating Control .................................................................................................................................................. 4 lb.... (6 Nm) Nominal Angle of Rotation: ............................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ................................... 1/2” (13 mm) square or diameter 1/4 to 1/2”2 (6 to 13 mm2) Min................................................ 3........................................... 50 lb.................................... -30 to 150°F (-35 to 65°C) Humidity Range: ....................................................................................................................................................... 95° +2° Ambient Conditions: Ambient Temperature: ........................................................................... control dampers....................... 5 to 90% RH................. non-condensing Mounting: Enclosure: ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................... Factory set at 160° Field Adjustable: ........................................................ 2-Position Spring Return Actuator ........................................... 300 lb........... at 77°F (25°C) Ambient Temperature: Operation and Storage: ............................................................. (34 Nm) or torque for operation on dampers at ambient temperatures between 0° and 120°F (-18 to 49°C)..................................................................................... Modulating Non-Spring Return Actuator ................................................................... 20 VA Nominal Angular Rotation: Modulating: ... (3................................................................................................................... 50 Hz: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60 sec......-in (34 Nm) 60 Hz: ........ 24 Vac +10% Frequency: ....................................................................................................-in (7........ Z338 013 300 IN LB.................................................................... Modulating Spring Return Actuator .............................................................................................. Min.............. Spring Return (60 lb........................................................................................... Z338 012 150 IN LB........................5 lb............................................................... 70 repositions Running Time 160° Stroke: Non-Spring Return: ............................................... 60.................................. 2.......................................................................................... 150 lb............................................................................................................................4 kg) Non-Spring Return: ........... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: .. Factory set at m in...................................................................................... ................................................................................................... 75 sec............................... Running Time 160° Stroke: Non-Spring Return: ... 80° to 160° Two-Position: ....... 17 Nm) 60 Hz: ............................................ Z338 014 60 IN LB........ 144 sec..................................................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...............................................-in................................. D-17 through D-18) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-1136P25..................................................................................................................... 93% RH at 96°F (36°C) Shipping Weights: Spring Return: .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 50 Hz: ................................................................... Modulating Non-Spring Return Actuator ................................................................................................................... Z338 001 75 IN LB.................................................................212 DAMPER ACTUATORS Electronic Damper Actuators 338 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 338 Electronic Damper Actuator is used with frame or floor mount linkage kits to operate dampers in HVAC installations and accept a modulating 0 to 10 Vdc or two-position SPST signal input from an electronic controller.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80° to 160° Position Resolution (Modulating 160° stroke): ....................................................... 50 to 60 Hz Power Consumption: .................................................................................................... 75..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7......................... 8.............................................................................................................................. 60 sec................................. Spring Return and Non-Spring Return models are available....... -22 to 122°F (-30 to 50°C) Humidity: ........................................................3 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # 60 IN LB. stroke 80° Field Adjustable: ..... 120 +2 sec.....................................................4 lb....... The 338 Actuators are used for HVAC dampers requiring up to 300 lb...... (2..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Z338 021 Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................-in): ................................................. Modulating Non-Spring Return Actuator ..................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................... Aluminum Stem: ......................................................... 3 Actuator is a rugged....................................................................... Ozone-resistant EPT rubber Spring: ............................... 1/8” NPT female with a straight dual barb fitting for 1/4” (6 mm) O. metal-fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC dampers.......................................................................... tubing Type of Mounting: ................................................................................................................................................................................ Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: .... extended shaft Shipping Weight (Actuator only): ................................................................................................................... D-19 through D-20) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-146P25.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Air Pressure: ........................ 3 Pneumatic Actuator is designed with a 2-3/8” (60 mm) stroke.... 3 to 7 psi (21 to 50 kPa) 5 to 10 psi (35 to 69 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ........................................................................................................................................... The actuator is available in a variety of spring ranges for energy optimizing and sequencing with other devices................................................................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............. (0....................... The No..................................................... 8 in...................................................58 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................D..................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 213 Pneumatic Damper Actuators 331 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 331 No................................. 30 psig (210 kPa) Nominal Spring Ranges: ............................. pivot..... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.................................. Plated Steel Diaphragm: ......................... 35 to 140°F (2 to 60°C) Storage: ............................. 2-3/8” (60 mm) Max............................................................................................................................... Front........................3 lb....2 (51.......................................................................................... Steel Bearing: ................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................. Delrin Air Connection: ........................................... bracket......................... 1........................................................ -20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C) Materials: Housing (totally enclosed): .............5 cm2) Stroke: ......................................................................................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................................................. ...........................................................................................2 (71 cm2) Stroke: . Stainless Steel Diaphragm: .............................................................. universal (extended shaft or frame mount) Shipping Weight (Actuator only): ........... The No... Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ............................................................................................ face and bypass..................................... Front............................................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..................................................... 4” (102 mm) Stroke (hesitation models): ......................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 214 Pneumatic Damper Actuators 331 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 331 No................................................................. electro-coated epoxy Shaft: .......................................................................... 35 to 140°F (2 to 60°C) Storage: . D-21 through D-22) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-032P25............................................66 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.................. Delrin Air Connection: ... 3................................................................................................................................................................................................... fan discharge................................................................................................................................................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z............................. bracket......... -20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C) Materials: Housing (totally enclosed): ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... exhaust.................................................................................................................................................... 3” (76 mm) Max.............................. pivot.......................................... 4 Pneumatic Actuator is designed with a 4” (102 mm) stroke......................................... 11 in................................................ Ozone-resistant EPT rubber Spring: ........D.... 3 to 7 psi (21 to 50 kPa) 3 to 13 psi (21 to 90 kPa) 5 to 10 psi (35 to 69 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ............ (1..................................................................................................................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............. 30 psig (207 kPa) Nominal Spring Ranges: .................................................. and static control dampers.......... 1/8” NPT female with a straight dual barb fitting for 1/4” (6 mm) O..................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................................... Steel...............................................................66 lb.......... It is recommended for control of outdoor...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... metal fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC and fire/smoke dampers.............................................................................................................. Steel Bearing: .................................. tubing Type of Mounting: ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Actuator is a rugged............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... return air............................................................ Air Pressure: ............. ...................................................... 4” (102 mm) Max............. Bronze Oilite Air Connection: ......................................................................................9 in............................................. D-23 through D-24) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-029P25................................... Aluminum Stem: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 (115 cm2) Stroke: ............................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................... fan inlet vanes........................................................... -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Materials: Housing: .............................. static pressure control............... multisection............................................... 1/8” NPT female Type of Mounting: .................................................................................0 lb........................................................................ 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) 3 to 13 psi (21 to 90 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ....................................................................................................................... mixed air.... 6 Pneumatic Actuator is designed with a 4” (102 mm) stroke................................................................. 9........................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ......................................... Ozone-resistant rubber Spring: .................. universal (extended shaft or female mount) Shipping Weight (Actuator only): .......................................................................................................... and other special applications............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (4....................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z..... fan discharge......................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 215 Pneumatic Damper Actuators 331 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 331 No................... Steel Bearing: ...... Pivot.................................................................................................................................................................... return air.......................................................... exhaust......... The actuator is excellent for control of outdoor air............................................................ 17......................................................................................................................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Nominal Spring Ranges: ............................................. The No.................. metal-fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC and fire/smoke dampers................................................................................................08 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # To order Siemens products through Andover Controls......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................. Type 416 Stainless Steel Diaphragm: ...................................... -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Storage: ................................................................................................. face and bypass.............................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..... Air Pressure: ............................. 6 Actuator is a rugged..................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................... Recommended to position inlet vanes on fans or large dampers that use a jack shaft...................... Air Pressure: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Steel Bearing: .............................. (13........................................ universal (extended shaft or female mount) Shipping Weight: ............... 1/8” NPT female Type of Mounting: ................................................................................... 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ........... 30 psig (207 kPa) Spring Start Point (Adjustable): ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ mounted on a sturdy angle iron frame.................................... D-25 through D-26) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-277P25................................................................................................................................................. 35........................................................................................ Type 416SS Diaphragm: . Bronze Oilite Air Connection: .................................................................................................................. -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Storage: .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # To order Siemens products through Andover Controls...................................................................... Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ........................................................... Pivot....................................................................................... 3 to 12 psi (21 to 83 kPa) Spring Range: Factory Setting: ........................................... Ozone-resistant rubber Spring: ...................................................................................................................... Aluminum Stem: ........................................................................................ piloted by a positioning relay................................................................... 30 lb............................................................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Pneumatic Actuator-Tamdem Mounting is a rugged...................................... -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Materials: Housing: .................................2 (230 cm2) Stroke: ...................................................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................................................................................................................... 3 to 10 psi (21 to 69 kPa) Spring Span (Adjustable): .......................................................... metal-fabricated device for tandem-mounting................................................................... 4” (102 mm) Max...............................................8 in..................................................................................................DAMPER ACTUATORS 216 Pneumatic Damper Actuators 331 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 331 No................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Effective Piston Area: ............ (16 kg) Ordering Information Item Part # To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.............................................................................................................................................................................. The 331 controls large dampers and equipment that requires high operating thrust............................................ 30 psi (207 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ........................... 19............................................. 3 to 10 psig (21 to 69 kPa) Air Connection: ................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................... 35 lb.......................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.........................................................................................6 in......... (176 Nm) Spring Start Point (adjustable): .... Pivot Shipping Weight (Actuator only): ............................................................................. 1/8” NPT Type of Mounting: ......................................................................................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................................................................................................................................................2 (126 cm2) Stroke: .................. This actuator cannot be used when spring return to fail safe position is required....................................................................................................................................... 25 psi (172 kPa) Max.................... D-27 through D-28) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-030P25................................................................................................................................................. Specifications General: Air Supply Pressure: .. 7” (18 cm)-ft......DAMPER ACTUATORS 217 Pneumatic Damper Actuators 331 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies 331 Large Capacity Pneumatic Actuator is designed to develop very high thrust...................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................................................ To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.............. Siemens Building Technologies Dampers & Actuators Accessories & Service Kits are available for sale through the Andover Controls Peripherals Program....................................... as it has the capacity to handle heavy loads........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ Pressure: ............................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50 to 140°F (10 to 60°C) Storage: ................................ D-29 through D-36) for descriptions and specific product part numbers............ 218 DAMPER ACTUATORS Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ......................VALVES & ACTUATORS 219 Powermite 599 MZ Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MZ Series Two-way Bronze 1/2 to 1” Valves are designed to work with the SSB MZ Series Actuator with a 7/32” (5............... C-25 through C-26) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-198P25...................................................................................................................... NEMA 1 (interior only) NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MZ Three-way Bronze 1/2 to 2” Valves are designed to work with the SSB MZ Series Actuator with a 7/32” (5.................. 1/2” to 1” (15 mm to 25 mm) Body Style: ........... and similar terminal units requiring an actuator that delivers a minimum of 45 lb.................................................... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Packing: ........................... 1/2” to 1” (15 mm to 25 mm) Body Style: .......... 7/32” (5............................ NEMA 1 (interior only) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.. 100..................................... Globe Seat Style: ......................... Class IV (0............. glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: .. Water..........................................................................01% of Cv) Flow Characteristics: ................... 25 psi (173 kPa) Rangeability: Cv<1: ............... 50..... Linear Mounting Location: ........................................................... According to ANSI/FCI70-2 Leakage Rate: ............. UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: ..... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................................................................................................ radiation........................................................................ fan coil units......... Specifications General: Line Size: ........................................................................................................ Metal to metal Action: .................. Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Packing: .............................................................. Recommended Diff........5 mm) Materials: Body: .........5 mm) stroke........... Brass Stem: ............................. unit conditioners...................................................................5 mm) stroke......... Pressure for Modulating Service: ..................................................... (200 N) force..........................1 Cv>1: ...........................................................01% of Cv) Flow Characteristics: .......... reheat coils................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.................................... According to ANSI/FCI70-2 Leakage Rate: ........ 25 psi (173 kPa) Rangeability: Cv<1: .............. Class IV (0................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................................................................. fan coil units................................................................................................................... Ethylene Propylene O-ring General: Controlled Medium: ............................................... The Powermite MZ Series Valves are used for mixing of hot or chilled water for convectors........... 35 to 250°F (2 tp 120°C) Max............................................................ Ethylene Propylene O-ring General: Controlled Medium: ....................................................... C-27 through C-28) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-199P25.................................................................................1 Cv>1: ........... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................................... Brass Stem: ........... Globe Seat Style: ............... Water.......................... 100......................... unit conditioners............ Use only with the MZ Series SSB Valve Actuator...... ANSI Class 250 Stem Travel (stroke): ...... radiation............................. (200 N) force............................ Use only with the MZ Series SSB Valve Actuator............. 35 to 250°F (2 tp 120°C) Max................... Pressure for Modulating Service: ...................... NO/NC Valve Body Rating: ...................................................................................... NO/NC Valve Body Rating: ............ Metal to metal Action: ....................... reheat coils........................................ glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: ........................................ ANSI Class 250 Stem Travel (stroke): ........................... Recommended Diff.............................................. UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: . Linear Mounting Location: ....................................................................5 mm) Materials: Body: . Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................................................1 Close-off Ratings: ................. 50.......................................................................................................... Specifications General: Line Size: ..1 Close-off Ratings: ..... The Powermite MZ Series Valves are used for control of hot or chilled water for convectors.............................................. 7/32” (5.......................... and similar terminal units requiring an actuator that delivers a minimum of 45 lb................................. ................ 50/60 Hz Function: Running Time: .............. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp... 34 to 122°F (1 to 50°C) Transport and Storage: .................. 34 to 230°F (1 to 110°C) Agency Approvals: .......................... -13 to 58°F (-25 to 70°C) Medium Temperature: .... 24-93 Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls...................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................ 45 lb........ 7/32” (5................... The SSB61U is for use in heating and cooling HVAC applications with Powermite 599 Series valves that need 45 lb. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. 150 sec....................... The SSB81U is for use in heating and cooling HVAC applications with Powermite 599 Series valves that need 45 lb..5 mm) stroke and a threaded valve bonnet that fits the actuator... (200 N) of nominal force.............................................. 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ...................... Fall 1999 Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MZ Series SSB61U Electronic Valve Actuator requires a 24 Vac supply and receives a 0 to 10 Vdc control signal to proportionally control a valve................................................................................................5 mm) Nominal Force: .........................................5 mm) Nominal Force: ..... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ................................................................................................ UL873... 24-93 NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MZ Series SSB81U Electronic Valve Actuator requires a 24 Vac supply floating control signal to provide three-position control....... (200 N) of nominal force......... (200 N) General: Power Consumption: ........ (200 N) General: Power Consumption: ............................ 45 lb.................................. 6 VA Ambient Temperature: Operation: ........... 34 to 230°F (1 to 110°C) Agency Approvals: ............................................................................ Nominal Stroke: .......................... Use only with MZ Series valve bodies.......... Use only with MZ Series valve bodies.................. UL873.. C-29 through C-30) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-192P25...................................................... CSA C22......................................................................... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: .......... C-31 through C-32) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-195P25.................................................................................................. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............5 mm) stroke and a threaded valve bonnet that fits the actuator...................................................................................................2 No....... CSA C22................. Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ........2 No.... 6 VA Ambient Temperature: Operation: ............220 VALVES & ACTUATORS Powermite 599 MZ Series Avail................ 7/32” (5........ This actuator is designed to work with Powermite 599 MZ Series Valves with a 7/32” (5..... 34 to 122°F (1 to 50°C) Transport and Storage: .................................................................. This actuator is designed to work with Powermite 599 MZ Series Valves with a 7/32” (5................ 150 sec.... -13 to 58°F (-25 to 70°C) Medium Temperature: ............................................................................................................. 50/60 Hz Function: Running Time: ................................................ Nominal Stroke: .............. ............................................. NO/NC Valve Body Rating: ....................................................... Use only with the MT Series Valve Actuators................................5 mm) Controlled Medium: ................................................................................. glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: ...................................................................................1 Cv>1: ...................................................... Metal to metal Action: ................................................................................................................01% of Cv) Flow Characteristics: ......... Use only with the MT Series SSB Valve Actuators................ fan coil units............................................ 7/32” (5. Water..... 25 psi (173 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: ........................................................................ NEMA 1 (interior only) NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MT Three-way Bronze 1/2 to 1” Valves are designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 7/32” (5............................... Ethylene Propylene O-ring Spring Range: Normally Closed: .....5 mm) stroke................ Recommended Diff..............................................................................5 mm) Materials: Body: .................................... radiation......... 35 to 250°F (2 tp 120°C) Max........ 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) General: Stem Travel (stroke): ....................................... reheat coils...................................................................... Pressure for Modulating Service: Brass Trim: .........................................................VALVES & ACTUATORS 221 Powermite 599 MT Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MT Series Two-way Bronze 1/2 to 1” Valves are designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 7/32” (5......................... and similar terminal units requiring water mixing.................. glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: ........................................ C-33 through C-34) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-196P25........................... and similar terminal units................. 100....................................................................... ANSI Class 250 Stem Travel (stroke): ...... The Powermite MT Series Valves are used for mixing of hot or chilled water for convectors.............................................................. reheat coils...... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................................................... Metal to metal Action: .......................... 1/2” to 1” (15 mm to 25 mm) Body Style: ............................... NEMA 1 (interior only) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls....... 100................................................................................................................1 Close-off Ratings: .......... ANSI Class 250 Materials: Body: .......................................... radiation................... 50........ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........... Ethylene Propylene O-ring Spring Range: ............................................................................................................... Stainless Steel or Brass Stem: ......... Globe Seat Style: ................................................................................... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Packing: ......................1 Cv>1: .......... UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: ..... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Packing: .......................5 mm) stroke..1 Close-off Ratings: .. Globe Seat Style: ......................................................................................................... 8 to 13 psi (55 to 99 kPa) General: Controlled Medium: .......................................................................................................... unit conditioners........ Specifications General: Line Size: ................................. Recommended Diff.................................... 1/2” to 1” (15 mm to 25 mm) Body Style: .............................. fan coil units.............................................................................................. 35 to 250°F (2 tp 120°C) Max.. 7/32” (5...... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......... 50 psi (345 kPa) Rangeability: Cv<1: .. The Powermite MT Series Valves are used for hot or chilled water for convectors.............. According to ANSI/FCI70-2 Leakage Rate: ...... Class IV (0.............. 50 psi (345 kPa) Rangeability: Cv<1: .... Linear Mounting Location: ........................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................................... Pressure for Modulating Service: Brass Trim: ......................................................................... Water.......... 50................................................. 25 psi (173 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: .. Specifications General: Line Size: ............ Three-way mixing Valve Body Rating: ..................................................................... According to ANSI/FCI70-2 Leakage Rate: .................................................................................01% of Cv) Flow Characteristics: ............ C-35 through C-36) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-197P25... also suited for low pressure steam........................................... 10 to 15 psi (69 to 103 kPa) Normally Open: .... Stainless Steel or Brass Stem: ...................... UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: ....................................................................................................................... Class IV (0....................................................... unit conditioners.............. Linear Mounting Location: ...................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....................................... .......... (0............................................................... at 50 Hz: .....................2 kg) NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MT SQS82U Electronic Valve Actuator requires a 24 Vac floating control signal to provide three-position control... 0..... (400 N) Ambient Temperature: Operation: ................................................................ NEMA 1 (interior only) Shipping Weight: ........ 7/32” (5............. 3..........222 VALVES & ACTUATORS Powermite 599 MT Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MT Series 2” Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Powermite 599 MT Series Terminal Unit Valves with a 7/32” (5............................................................... +5 sec........... 35 si (241 kPa) Air Connection: ..................................................................... 1...................... 24 Vac........................ Specifications General: Operating Voltage: 60 Hz: .................................................................. 0....................... Use only with the MT Series SSB valve bodies..... C-39 through C-40) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-191P25................................................. Silicone Nominal Spring Range: .................................... 125 sec.2 No.........................................5 mm) General: Max..........D.................. Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ............. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.5 mm) stroke........ 1/8” NPT fitting for 1/4” (6 mm) O........... 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C) Transport and Storage: ....................................................... polyethylene tubing Ambient Temperature Transportion: ........4”2 (22 cm2) Diaphragm Material: ............ Valve Dependent Span: .......................5 mm) Nominal Force: ....................25 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.......... +5% 50 Hz: ...........45 VA Running Time: at 60 Hz: .................................................................................................. +5 sec. 7/32” (5............................... Diaphragm Pressure: ............................................................................... -15%......... CSA C22...........................43 lb..................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................. This actuator is designed to work with Powermite 599 MT Series Valve with a 7/32” (5....................................................... UL873... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: ....................... General: Nominal Stroke: ..................... 24-93 Shipping Weight: ...........56 lb...... -20%.... -13 to 140°F (-25 to 60°C) Medium Temperature: ........................................ Use only with the MT Series valve bodies.............................................. (0.......................... The Powermite 2” Valve Actuator is designed to be used on Powermite 599 Series Terminal Unit Valves in liquid and steam service applications... 150 sec................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ 24 Vac.......... +10% Frequency: .......... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. 41 to 248°F (5 to 120°C) Agency Approvals: ................ -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C) Mounting Location: ......... 90 lb.... 5 psi (34 kPa) Nominal Stroke: ........................ C-37 through C-38) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-189P25...........................................................5 mm) stroke.......... ....................................................................................................... 8 s Nominal Stroke: ................5 mA max......... non-condensing Medium Temperature: .......................... (0.. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................................................................................1 mA Input Impedance: ......................... 24 Vac......................................................................... 7 VA Control Signal (Y) Voltage: ...................1 lb............................... 100 K Ohms Control Signal (R): Resistance: ...............................VALVES & ACTUATORS 223 Powermite 599 MT Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite MT SQS65 and SQS65.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................5 mm) Nominal Force: ........... 0...... 1.................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: .......... (0............ 30 s at 50 Hz: ................. -13 to 149°F (-25 to 65°C) Ambient Humidity: . 0 to 10 Vdc Current: ................... 7/32” (5............5: .................. 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: SQS65: .......................................... +20%.......................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: 60 Hz: ................ 0.......................................................................6 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls..................... 24 Vac............................... -+20% Frequency: ........................................... UL873.......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..................... C-41 through C-42) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-191P25... 3 VA SQS65............ 5 to 122°F (-15 to 50°C) Transport and Storage: .................... Use only with the MT Series valve bodies............................................................................ 35 s Fail Safe (SQS65............................................................................. (400 N) Ambient Temperature: Operation: ................................ running time General: Running Time: at 60 Hz: ..............................................................................5 mm) stroke... -15% 50 Hz: ...............................................................................3 lb. 0 to 1000 Ohms Position Output (U): Voltage: ........................................................ 90 lb.............. 41 to 248°F (5 to 120°C) Agency Approvals: ....................... 0 to 90% RH..........................................5 only): ...................................5: ......................................................................... 24-93 Shipping Weights: SQS65: .............. 1.... This actuator is designed to work with Powermite 599 MT Series Valve with a 7/32” (5....................5 kg) SQS65.....5 Electronic Valve Actuators require a 24 Vac supply and receive a 0 to 10 Vdc or a 0 to 1000 Ohm control signal to proportionally control a valve....................................................2 No............................................................................................................................................................................................................. CSA C22.............................................. ........................... Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: .............. 50 psi (345 kPa) Stem: ............. C-69 through C-70) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-185P25. Recommended for mixing water supplies of two different temperatures........................................................... Specifications General: Body Style: ......................................................... UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: ........................ Recommended for water....................... EPDM O-ring General: Operating Controlled Medium: ................................................................224 VALVES & ACTUATORS Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite Two-way Bronze 1/2 to 2” Valves are designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke..................... Available in ANSI Class 250..................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... Rec.......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.. glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range:: ............................................................................... water............................... 25 psi (173 kPa) Steam: ... Section Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................................. 25 psi (173 kPa) Stainless Steel: ................................ Section Steam: ........ Water..................... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Operating Controlled Medium: .............15psi (103 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: ................. 50 psi (345 kPa) Max...................................................................... Inlet Pressure: Water: ................ Recommended Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Bronze Trim: Liquid: ...................................................... 25 psi (173 kPa) Steam: ........ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................................. 337°F (170°C) max.................................................................................................................. Globe-style control valve w/two connection options Materials: Body: ... low and high pressure steam....... Saturated steam................................................................... 50 psi (345 kPa) Max.... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................... Available in ANSI Class 250 for Normally Closed or Normally Open action...................................................................... 20 to 250°F (-7 tp 120°C) Max................ Refer to Flowrite Ref................. Refer to Flowrite Ref................................................................ 50 psi (345 kPa) Steam: .................... glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: Normal Duty Packing: ................................................................................... Specifications General: Body Style: ............................ C-67 through C-68) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-184P25.............................. General: Max............................... 15psi (103 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: Liquid/Steam: ....... UNS CA 844 Bronze Body Trim: Bronze: ....................... 20 to 250°F (-7 tp 120°C) Steam Packing: .................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z............... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Packing: ............ and glycol solutions up to 50%................... 100 psig (690 kPa) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite Three-way Bronze 1/2 to 2” Valves are designed to work with either pneumatic or electronic actuators with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke...................................... Inlet Pressure: .................. Globe-style control valve w/four connection options Materials Body: . Bronze Stem: ............................ ................ 50 psi (345 kPa) Close-off Ratings: .......... Metal-to-metal Stem: .. C-73 through C-74) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-160P25........ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.................................................. 337°F (170°C) max......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................................................................................................................................................................... Specifications General: Body Style: .. Recommended for water and glycol solutions up to 50%............... Saturated steam.......... 3/4” (20 mm) 4”.................. Flanged Action: ......... Max................................................................................................................................................................................................... and 6”: ............................................................... equal percentage Lower Port: ............................... 25 psi (173 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: ........................................................................ Recommended for water.................................... 20 to 250°F (-7 tp 120°C) Steam Packing: ........................................................................ 3/4” (20 mm) 4”.................. Available in ANSI Class 250...... 15psi (103 kPa) Stainless Steel Trim: Liquid/Steam: .............................................................................. Flanged Stem Travel (Stroke) 2-1/2” and 3”: .............. Refer to Valve Selection Charts Stem: .......... 1-1/2” (40 mm) Materials: Body: ................................................................... and glycol solutions up to 50%..... 5”........ 50 psi (345 kPa) Flow Characteristics: Upper Port: .............................. 25 psi (173 kPa) Steam: ...... According to ANSI/FCI 70-2 Close-off Pressure: ............................. 20 to 250°F (-7 tp 120°C) Max.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ 1-1/2” (40 mm) Materials: Body: .............................................. Available in ANSI Class 125 and 250 for Normally Closed or Normally Open action...................................... glycol solutions up to 50% Medium Temperature Range: ........................................................................ Three-way water mix Stem Travel (Stroke): 2-1/2” and 3”: ...................... Linear Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.................................... water........ C-71 through C-72) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-184P25............................................................ Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B Plug: .......... glycol solutions up to 50% General: Medium Temperature Range: Normal Duty Packing: ............... Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 General: Operating Controlled Medium: ................... Recommended Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Bronze Trim: Liquid: ...................... Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B Body Trim: ..................................................................................... Mod...... 5”.............................................. Stainless steel ASTM A582 Type 303 Operating Controlled Medium: . Specifications General: Body Style: ................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...... steam............ water.......... Refer to the Flowrite Reference Section Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite Three-way Flanged Iron 2-1/2 to 6” Valves are designed to work with either pneumatic or electronic actuators............................... Recommended Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Bronze Trim: ............................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.....................................................VALVES & ACTUATORS 225 Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite Two-way Flanged Iron 2-1/2 to 6” Valves are designed to work with either pneumatic or electronic actuators.... and 6”: ..................................... ...... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.... 1/8” NPT Ambient Operating & Storage Temp.................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................. 3 to 13 psig (21 to 90 kPa) Mounting Location: ............................. NEMA 1 (interior only) Shipping Weight: .................................................................. (5 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.. Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ............ 25 to 300°F (-4 to 149°C) High Temperature Service: .................... The 4” Pneumatic Valve Actuator has a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke and is available in three spring ranges (3to 8 psi.........................7 lb........ Diaphragm Pressure: ....: .............1 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite 8” Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series valves in liquid and steam service applications...................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................................... 35 psi (241 kPa) Air Connection: ..... C-75 through C-76) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-183P25......................... and 10 to 15 psi)....................................................................5 lb................. 5 to 10 psi............................................................... 0 to 25°F (-18 to 107°C) Mounting Location: ................ Silicone Nominal Stroke: ................................. 2................................................... Buna-N Temperature Range: Normal Duty Service: .............................................................................. C-77 through C-78) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-161P25.. 35 psi (241 kPa) General: Air Connection: .......................... 10 psi (68 kPa) Adjustable Start Point: ..... 35 to 180°F (2 to 85°C) General: Nominal Spring Range: Fixed Span: Normal Duty Service: ..... 3/4” (20 mm) Max................................. Diaphragm Pressure: ........................................ NEMA 1 (interior only) Shipping Weight: ........................................................... 28”2 (180 cm2) Diaphragm Material: .................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............................................. The 8” Pneumatic Valve Actuator has a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke and is available with two diaphragm options for normal duty and high temperature service..................................................................................................................................................................... (1............................................................................................... 8... 3/4” (20 mm) Max....... 200 to 366°F (93 to 186°C) Nominal Stroke: ... Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ........ 3 to 10 psi (21 to 69 kPa) Factory Setting: Normal Duty: ....................................226 VALVES & ACTUATORS Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite 4” Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series valves in liquid and steam service applications........................ 11”2 (71 cm2) Diaphragm Material: ..... 3 to 8 psig (21 to 55 kPa) High Temperature: ................................ 1/8” NPT Ambient Operating and Storage Temp: .......................... 5 psi (34 kPa) High Temperature Service: ............ ............6 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.................................................. Control Input (R): Current: ............................................ The 12” Pneumatic Valve Actuator is available with two stem strokes....................................................................... 35 psi (241 kPa) Air Connection: ................................................................. 25to 386°F (-4to 186°C) Mounting Location: . Diaphragm Pressure: ......... 4 to 20 mA Max.................... and requires a 24 Vac supply. 1/4” NPT Medium Temperature: ........................................................ and receives a 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA control signal to proportionally control the valve.......................... Nominal Force: ....... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) General: Nominal Stroke: .......................................................... 4 to 20 mA Max..... 90”2 (580 cm2) Diaphragm Material: ........... 1/2” (13 mm) NPSM Shipping Weight: ....................... 250 Ohms Function: Nominal Stroke: ..... C-79 through C-80) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-162P25......... 18 VA Control Signals: Control Input (Y): Voltage: .......................... 3/4” (20 mm) Run Time: ..... 3................................................................................................5 mA max............ 0 to 10 Vdc Current: .... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) Ambient Humidity: ......................................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: ........ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............................................................................. 24 Vdc +20% Frequency: ............VALVES & ACTUATORS 227 Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite 12” Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series valves in liquid and steam service applications.... 0.................................... Available as fail-in-place only........................ Buna-N Nominal Spring Range: Fixed Span: .... to 285°F (140°C) Conduit Opening: .... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ...................................................................................... (24 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SQX62U Electronic Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke....... Impedance: .................... 53 lb................................................................5 lb......................... 0................................................................ 0 to 90% RH................. NEMA 1 (interior only) Shipping Weight: .................. (1.................. General: Control Output (U): Current: .................................. 24 Vac +20%........................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................. Impedance: .......... Specifications General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 150 lb............ non condensing Media Temperature: .................................................................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......................... 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Transport and Storage Temperature: .................................................................................. 3/4 or 1-1/2” (20 or 40 mm) Max.............. 35 sec................................................. 5 psi (34 kPa) Adjustable Start Point: ........................... 250 Ohms Control Output (U): Voltage: ...................................... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: ........................................................................................................... C-81 through C-82) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-182P25................................................................. 3/4” (20 mm) stroke and 1-1/2” (40 mm).............................................................. 3 to 10 psi (21 to 69 kPa) Factory Setting: ........................ (700 N) Operating: Operating Temperature: ......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........................................................................1 mA max................................... ...................................................... C-83 through C-84) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-186P25.......................228 VALVES & ACTUATORS Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SQX82.. 150 sec...... 4 to 20 mA Max...... 0.. 3........................ 1/2” (13 mm) NPSM Shipping Weight: ............................................................................................................5 lb................................................................................................................................................00U @ 60 Hz: .......... Control Input (R)................ 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Media Temperature: ............................... Available with fail-in-place only............................................................................................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ...................................... Control Output (U): Current: ................ 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ..................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.........................1 mA max........................................................................................ SQX82..................................... The SKD Electronic Valve Actuator receives a 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA control signal to proportionally control the valve.......... General: Nominal Force: .............. 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ................ Impedance: ............. 4 to 20 mA Max............................. 250 Ohms General: Control Output (U): Voltage: .......... 3/4” (20 mm) Run Time: SQX82............. Impedance: ............... 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Transport and Storage Temperature: ................................................. Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ....................... 14 to 300°F (-10 to 150°C) Conduit Opening: .......... 35 sec....... -22 to 149°F (-30 to 65°C) Ambient Humidity: ..................... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: ... (1............................................................................................. 120 sec..............03U @ 50 Hz: .................... SQX82....... 6......... (700 N) Operating: Operating Temperature: ............................................................................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: ................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....................................5 VA Function: Nominal Stroke: ....................................00U/SQX82....... 0 to 16 V Control Input (R): Current: .................................................................. 0........... to 285°F (140°C) Conduit Opening: ..................................................................5 mA max..................... 0 to 1000 Ohms Voltage: ................... 30 sec.... C-85 through C-86) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-180P25.......................................................................................... 150 lb.............................................................................................................. Resistance: ................................................... 250 Ohms Operating: Ambient Temperature: ....... 18 VA Control Signals: Control Input (Y): Voltage: ... 0 to 90% RH................................ 1/2” (13 mm) NPSM Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.........03U Electronic Actuators with 24 Vac 3-position control are designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series and other standard valves with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke to proportionally control the valve.. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..................................00U @ 50 Hz: .......................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z...... SQX82............ 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: ...................................................................................................................................................................03U @ 60 Hz: ..... non condensing Media Temperature: .................................................................................................................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: .....6 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SKD62U Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series and other standard valves with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke in liquid and steam service applications........................................ ...................................... 14 to 300°F (-10 to 150°C) Conduit Opening: ............................. Control Input (R): Resistance: ............. 0........................................................................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.....50U/SKD82.....................................51U Valve Actuators with 24 Vac 3-position (floating) control are designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series and other standard valves with a 3/4” (20 mm) stroke in liquid and steam service applications...................... 3-position (floating) Function: Nominal Stroke: ...............................................................51U: ........... Impedance: .................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.......... 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Media Temperature: ...........................VALVES & ACTUATORS 229 Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SKD82........................... (1000 N) General: NO and 3-way By Pass: Stroke: ............................................................................................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........5 mA max......... (3................................................................... 0 to 1000 Ohms Voltage: ............ Specifications General: Operating Voltage: .............................................. 15 VA Control Signal: .......................... 4 to 20 mA Max....................................................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: ................... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: .6 V General: Control Input (R): Current: ....................................... 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Media Temperature: ......................................... 0 to 10 Vdc Current: ............................................................................................ 3/4” (20 mm) Nominal Force: NC and 3-way Upper: Stroke: ............................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ...... 250 Ohms Control Output (U): Voltage: ................................................................................................................................... 28 VA Control Signals: Control Input (Y): Voltage: .......................................... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: .... 258 lb (1000 N) Operating: Ambient Temperature: ............................. 1/2” (13 mm) NPSM Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls......................................... 225 lb.4 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SKB62U/SKC62U Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series and other standard valves with a 3/4” (20 mm) and 1-1/2” (40 mm) strokes in liquid and steam service applications........................... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: SKD82..........................1 mA max.......... C-87 through C-88) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-181P25............................................. The SKB/SKC Electronic Valve Actuator receives a 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA control signal to proportionally control the valve............................................................................................................................... 4 to 20 mA Max................................................................................................................................. C-89 through C-90) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-163P25............ 1/2” (13 mm) NPSM Shipping Weight: ............................................ 0% Force: .............................................................................................................................................................................. 0 to 1.................................................................50U: ...................... 10 VA SKD82. Control Output (U): Current: .... 0% Force: ............... 0................................................................................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z................................................ 7.................................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................... 18 VA SKC62: .......................................... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: SKB62: ............5 lb............... 14 to 300°F (-10 to 150°C) Conduit Opening: .......................................... 250 Ohms Operating: Ambient Temperature: ........ Impedance: ...................................... ......... 100% Force: ...... 15 VA SKC82.................. (2684 N) NO and 3-way By Pass: Stroke: .................................... 3/4” (20 mm) SKC: ................................................................................................................5 lb.............................................................................................................. 10 VA SKB82.............................................................................................................................................. 0% Force: ......................... 20 VA Input Signal (as shipped): .................................................. (712 N) General: Fail-in-place: 3/4” (20 mm) stroke: ............................................................................................................61U: ............ -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C) Conduit Opening (4): ....... 100 K Ohm Position Resolution: ............ (1424 N) Operating: Ambient Temperature: ... 11lb..................50U: .......................... (8............. 1-1/2” (40 mm) General: Nominal Force: NC and 3-way Upper: Stroke: ................. 5 to 131°F (-15 to 55°C) Media Temperature: ...........................................................................................4 lb (9. The linkage fastens the valve body and actuator together and transforms the angular movement of the actuator output shaft to the straight-line motion required to control the valve................................................. 1000 lb (4400 N) Operating: Ambient Temperature: ............................. 20 VA Control Signal: .........................................................9 kg) Non-spring Return: ..................................................... Specifications General: Operating Voltage: .................. 0 to 10 Vdc Adjustable Span ∆V: .................................. 3-position (floating) Nominal Stroke: SKB: ................................. C-91 through C-92) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-171P25................................4 kg) SKC82: ........................ 3 to 16 Vdc Input Impedance: ... 610 lb..................................7 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite Electro-mechanical Valve Actuator is designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series from 1/2” through 4” (18 mm to 100 mm) line sizes in liquid and steam service applications...............................................51U: ....... 14 to 300°F (-10 to 150°C) Shipping Weight: SKB82: ................................................. 21.............................. 160 lb....................................... 24 Vac +10% Frequency: ................. 18................................................................60U: .... 24 Vac +20% Frequency: ....................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................................................ 7/8” (22 mm) Shipping Weights: Spring Return: ................230 VALVES & ACTUATORS Flowrite 599 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Flowrite SKB/SKC Valve Actuators with 24 Vac 3-position (floating) control are designed for use with the Flowrite 599 Series and other standard valves with a 3/4” (20 mm) and 1-1/2” (40 mm) strokes in liquid and steam service applications................................................................................................................... 13 lb............................................................................... 160 lb................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............................................. 19 VA SKC82........................ (5 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls............................................... 0 to 10 Vdc Adjustable Start V: ...................................... (5............................................ 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: ............................................................. Specifications General: Operating Voltage: ......................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 0 to 120°F (-18 to 49°C) Storage: ............... 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: SKB82.................................................. 70° Nominal Force: Fail-safe: ................. (712 N) 1-12” (40 mm) stroke: ............ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z....................................................................................... C-93 through C-94) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-172P25............................... 320 lb... ....................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....... 3/8” (10 mm) Valve Body Material: ............... Recommended for mixing of hot or chilled water for convectors................................................. C-99 through C-100) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-084P25 and 155-085P25.. 10 to 15 psi (69 to 103 kPa) 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) Nominal Spring Span: ............................ radiation...................................................... ANSI Class 250 Actuator Standard Spring Ranges w/ 10 psi (69 kPa) ∆P: Differential Pressure: ............................................. 1/4” (6 mm) Valve Body Rating: ................................................................................................... Water....................................................................... 10 to 15 psi (69 to 103 kPa) NC 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) NO Nominal Spring Span: ..................... 5 psi (35 kPa) General: Effective Diaphragm Area: ................................. Glycol solution Maximum Medium Temperature: ............................................. reheat coils and similar terminal units which require water mixing.......... 25 psi (172 kPa) Shipping Weight: .................9 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls....................................................... 3........ reheat coils.. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................... SAE flare fittings............................... Glycol solution Maximum Medium Temperature: .... Upper seat NC/Lower seat NO Stem Travel: .................................... 2 (22 cm2) Max........................ 1/8” NPT Controlled Medium: ............ Specifications General: Valve Size: ................................. 1/2” (15 mm) Valve Body Style: ...................... 5 psi (35 kPa) General: Effective Diaphragm Area: .......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................... fan coil units.............................................. Refer to Reference Section Steam: .......................................................... Specifications General: Valve Size: ...... radiation........................ 3................................................................. The Powermite Two-way Valves are available with Normally Open or Normally Closed action................................................................................................................................ 25 psi (172 kPa) Between Inlet & Outlet: ................. Globe Flared Valve Action: ................... Flared end Valve Action: .............................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......... 1/8” NPT Controlled Medium: ........ 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Connection: ......................................... Water................................................................................................................................................... and similar terminal unit applications.................. ANSI Class 250 Standard Spring Ranges w/ 10 psi (69 kPa): Differential Pressure: ...........................4 in....................................... 1/2” (15 mm) Valve Body Style: ................................................... 2...0 lb.............................. fan coil units............... C-101 through C-102) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-086P25.......4 in...... Recommended for use with hot or chilled water and steam for control of convectors..... NO (Direct Action)/NC (Direct Action) Stem Travel: .............. 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Connection: ..D...................................................................... 2 (22 cm2) Max.................................... The 656 Powermite Three-way Water Mixing Valve is a high-grade bronze body forged with connections for 1/2” O......... 250°F (121°C) Maximum Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Between Inlets: .... 15 psig (103 kPa) Maximum Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: ........................................................... Diaphragm Pressure: .................... 250°F (121°C) Maximum Inlet Pressures: Water: .......... (0............................................................................. Bronze Valve Body Rating: .............VALVES & ACTUATORS 231 Powermite 656 Series Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite 656 Two-way Valve is designed to control the flow of both water and steam......................... Steam... 20 psi (138 kPa) Description Siemens Building Technologies Powermite 656 Three-way Water Mixing Valve is designed for water mixing applications...... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. Diaphragm Pressure: ................... ............................................................................................................ Bronze Disc: ........................................ Stainless Steel Packing: ......................................... 1/2” (15 mm) Valve Body Style: .... 30 psig (210 kPa) Controlled Medium: . simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................................... such as unit ventilators.................................................................................................... without mixing...... The Powertop 658 is used for the control of heating/cooling coils in terminal units.. NO/Hot to common.D................................. 15 psig (103 kPa) Ambient Operating Temperature: ................................................................ Glycol solution Maximum Medium Temperature: ................................................................ water............................................................................................................................................................... water...................................... 13/32” (10 mm) Materials: Valve Body: ..................... 10 psi (69 kPa) Maximum Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Sequence Valve: ..................... reheat coils.................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................................................... 11 in.............................. EPT Rubber General: Stem Travel: ............................................... Diaphragm Pressure: ... 250 psi (1720 kPa) Maximum Differential Pressure between Hot and Cold Ports: Sequence: ......................................................... 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) NO/NC: .................................................................. C-103 through C-104) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-089P25 and 155-091P25........................ fan coil units......................232 VALVES & ACTUATORS Powertop 658 Series NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powertop 658 Valve is designed to control the flow of steam............................................................. 25 psig (170 kPa) Steam: . 2 (71 cm2) Nominal Spring Range: NO: ........................................................... Differential Pressure for Modulating Service: Water: ............................................. for radiant panel and similar applications............................... The Powertop Two-way Valve is available with Normally Open or Normally Closed action............ 35 to 140°F (2 to 60°C) NEW! Description Siemens Building Technologies Powertop 658 Sequence and Changeover Valve is designed to select and modulate the flow of either hot or chilled water... Diaphragm Pressure: ........ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... Normally Open/Normally Closed Valve Body Rating: ...................................................................................... 25 psi (170 kPa) Ambient Operating Temperature: ..................... Steam.................. ANSI Class 250 Effective Diaphragm Area: .................................. Specifications General: Valve Size: .... 2 (71 cm2) General: Max............ Water.................. SAE Flared Valve Action: .......................... Styrene Butadiene Stem: ................................................... 50 psi (350 kPa) Changeover: .... section Steam: ......................................................................................... 1/2” (15 mm) Valve Body Style: ..... 30 psig (210 kPa): Controlled Medium: ................................................................................ Bronze Disc & Packing: .................................................................. 15 psig (102 kPa) Max........................ induction units and radiant panels.............................................................. 250°F (121°C) Max............................... glycol solution Max.... 11in.............................................. 1/2” (15 mm) Max.......... 250°F (121°C) Maximum Inlet Pressure: ............................... The 658 Powertop is designed with two inlets and one outlet for the sequence valve and with one inlet and two outlets in the changeover valve.............. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................................................................................ C-105 through C-106) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-092P25.... 10 to 14 psi (70 to 100 kPa) Materials: Valve Body: ........................... Specifications General: Valve Size: ... Flared Valve Action: ..................................................................................... Refer to Changeover/Flared/Sequence Ref.......... 1/2” (15 mm) O....................................... 35 to 140°F (2 to 60°C) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls........ Dual EPT Rubber Valve Body Rating: ........... NC/Cold to common Stem Travel: ..................................................... Inlet Pressure: Water: ... and ethylene glycol solutions........................................................ ANSI Class 250 Diaphragm Area: .............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ....... Medium Temperature: ....................................... ........................................................ The valves are excellent for zone control............. Water...................................... 1/2” to 1” (15 mm to 25 mm) Valve Action: MTE Two-way: .......................................................................... 300 psi (2068 kPa) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls............................ Normally Open MVE Two-way: ...... 200°F (93°C) Max...................................... 50 to 60 Hz Power Consumption: ........................................ Specifications General: Line Size: ...................... C-107 through C-109) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-166P25 and 155-168P25......................... Medium Temperature: ............... 40 to 104°F (4 to 40°C) Storage: ................... 15 to 140F° (-9 to 40°C) Medium: .... Diverting Valve Body Rating: ................................................................................................................................. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.............................................................................................................. Stainless Steel Cover: .............. 12 sec........................VALVES & ACTUATORS 233 MTE/MVE/MXE Zone Valves Description Siemens Building Technologies MTE/MVE/MXE Electronic Two-way and Three-way Zone Valves are designed to control the flow of water and glycol solutions................. 24 Vac/120 Vac/230 Vac Operating Frequency: .................. Inlet Pressure for Water: . Viton O-ring General: Operating Voltage: .................................................. Ambient Temperature: Operating: ................................................................................................................. spring returns the paddle to normal when no signal is present..... (@ 60 Hz) Closed: ....... 5 sec.. Buna/N Packing: ............................................................................................................................................ glycol solutions up to 50% Max............. ANSI Class 250 Materials: Valve Body: ....................................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................................. The electronic actuator receives a two-position (On/Off) signal from the sensor to position the valve flow control paddle............................................. Normally Closed MXE Three-way: ........................................... Aluminum Paddle: ... 7 VA Run Time: Open: ............................................................................................................................................................................ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z................................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ......... Forged Brass Base Plate: ................... 234 VALVES & ACTUATORS Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . ....TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 235 Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 192 S Powerstar Single Temperature Thermostat provides proportional single output........07 lb........24 kg) Plastic Cover: ......................3 (22°C................... 40-140°F (4-60°C) General: Supply Air Pressure: Recommended: .................. 7...... A-3 through A-4) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-065P25............................7 lb..... H (25 psig)....... 0................... 0. the 192 HC Powerstar controls valves and damper actuators in cooling equipment................. 5(1) °C) Factory Calibration: .........................07 lb......... -10-140°F (-23-60°C) Ambient Operating: .....3 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls...... 5/32” (4 mm) O........D......................................... and 1-pipe for low air capacity or 2-pipe for high air capacity pneumatic room temperature control............. Range Major (minor) Div: ................12 kg)/0.......... Designed for heating and cooling applications for control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators........ C (18 psig 0.................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........................... 0...8) Adj Sensitivity: ...........................................................................................................04 kg).............................. single setpoint.34”H x 1....... 2............... 12 to 50 kPa per °C Cover: ............................................................ -10-140°F (-23-60°C) Ambient Operating: .............. The 192HC is designed for temperature control of heating and cooling applications...........59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Shipping Weights: Thermostat Chassis & Wall Plate: .53 lb (0............................. 40-140°F (4-60°C) Air Connections: .................... 5/32” (4 mm) O..........................59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Shipping Weights w/Cover: Thermostat Chassis & Wall Plate: .................. tubing Dimensions w/Cover: ....... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.... 1 to 4 psi per °F. 1 to 4 psi /°F (12 to 50 kPa/ °C) Factory Setting: ............. Reverse............. Metal Cover (single/dual): ................ Concealed or exposed Set point Adj: ........ 0...........27 lb.............................. Concealed or exposed Set point Indicator: ....D..........34”H x 1................. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........12 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 192 HC Powerstar Heating/Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostats provide two thermostats under one cover............16”W x 3.......... 25 psig (172 kPa) Maximum: ............ Providing energy management and occupant comfort..................5 psig/°F (31 kPa/°C) Temperature: Storage: ............. Direct/Reverse............ 0.... (0.....................27 lb.......................................... 2...... Direct or Reverse Scale....... 10(2) °F (7 to 30°C.0... Direct.......... one side for heating and the other for cooling.......................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) max Adj Sensitivity: ........ 52 kPa @ 1..... (0............ Specifications General: Control Action: ................ (0.... 45 to 85°F (7 to 30°C) Operating Pressure: . (0.......................... Concealed or key/finger exposed General: Temperature: Storage: .......... Horizontal Thermometer: ................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Connections: ............ Reverse/Direct Operating Range: ................. 72°F....................................... A-5 through A-6) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-066P25..................................... tube Dimensions w/Cover: .............04 kg)..................... Specifications General: Control Action: ...................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... The 192 S Powerstar is excellent for commercial and institutional facilities................................................ the thermostat automatically adjusts to seasonal changes from heating setpoint to cooling setpoint in commercial and institutional facilities......................................... Plastic (Metal option)................ Switchover is accomplished by changing the air pressure to the thermostat........16”W x 3........................... 2....... (0.......24 kg) Plastic Cover/Metal Cover: ....... 45 to 85°F.......53 lb (0...5 psig +0........ ........................... 2.... N (25 psig).. tube General: Dimensions w/Cover: 192 DN: ...12 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 193 HC Powerstar Free Energy Band Heating/Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostats provides proportional................... Plastic (Metal option)............ Reverse..................... 45 to 85°F (7 to 30°C) Operating Pressure: ................................ Direct/Reverse................... 5/32” (4 mm) O....16”W x 3....: ...........5”W x 3....... Metal Cover (dual): ............ Concealed or exposed Setpoint Adj...............: .................. Reverse.............. Direct/Reverse Operating Range: .................................................... Direct......... automatically performing setback changes from day to night.................24 kg) Plastic Cover: ...........................................D.............................. 2......................... Horizontal Thermometer: ........12 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.................................. 12 to 50 kPa per °C Cover: ............................................................................. dual setpoint....................................07 lb.. 30 psig (207 kPa) max.. (0............................ 0...............................04 kg)... Concealed or key/finger exposed Air Connections: . A-9 through A-10) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-068P25..................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........................... Concealed or key/finger exposed General: Air Connections: ...................04 kg).............34”H x 1............59”D (64 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Shipping Weights: Thermostat Chassis & Wall Plate: ............. Reverse/Direct Operating Range: ....................... 0......59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) 192 DNV: ........... The override returns to the night mode the following night... 1 to 4 psi per °F 12 to 50 kPa per °C Cover: ............................... 1 to 4 psi per °F..... (0.......................... The TH 192 DN and DNV control valves and damper actuators in cooling equipment.................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......................... The 193 HC Powerstar creates a deadband so that no heating or cooling occurs during the Free Energy Band............ A-7 through A-8) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-067P25. (0...................... dual output.... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....................................... Horizontal Thermometer: .D........... Specifications General: Control Action: .. and 2-pipe (dual 1pipe low air capacity) or 3-pipe (dual 2-pipe high air capacity) pneumatic room temperature control. Adj Sensitivity: ....................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover. tube Dimensions w/Cover: .........................53 lb (0.... Plastic (Metal option)............ Metal Cover (dual): .34”H x 1........................ Direct..........16”W x 3...27 lb..... Concealed or exposed Setpoint Indicator: ...................... Specifications General: Control Action: ....... D (18 psig 0................................................. 45 to 85°F (7 to 30°C) Operating Pressure: ............................ A manual override feature allows occupants to switch to day mode..................... 0. Concealed or exposed Setpoint Adj.......................... 0.....236 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 192 DN and DNV Powerstar Day/Night/Vent Pneumatic Room Thermostats automatically resets the room temperature set point during unoccupied hours by changing the air pressure to the thermostat... 0...... It is designed for buildings with early morning heat requirements and mid-morning to afternoon cooling requirements......... 2.................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . (0.. 30 psig (207 kPa) max.............................27 lb.................................... Adj Sensitivity: ...................... Concealed or exposed Setpoint Indicator: ..53 lb (0.............. 5/32” (4 mm) O..............................59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Shipping Weights: Thermostat Chassis & Wall Plate: .....................................34”H x 1.......... 0..........................24 kg) Plastic Cover: ........................................07 lb............................ The 193 HC provides energy management and occupant comfort with the thermostat automatically reducing the heating load and increasing cooling load.. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 237 Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 193 HC Powerstar (Hesitation) Free Energy Band Heating/ Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostats provide proportional, single output, dual setpoint, and 2-pipe pneumatic room temperature control. It is designed to sequence a heating device or a cooling device. The hesitation feature keeps the output pressure constant through a 6°F (10.8°C) range (typical), causing a deadband. The 193 HC Powerstar is an excellent choice for saving energy by sequencing heating and cooling valves. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-11 through A-12) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-069P25. Specifications General: Control Action: ........................................................................................... Direct Operating Range: .............................................................. 45 to 85°F (7 to 30°C) Operating Pressure: .......................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) max Adj. Sensitivity: ........................................ 1 to 4 psi per °F; 12 to 50 kPa per °C Cover: .............................................................. Plastic (Metal option); Horizontal Thermometer: .................................................................. Concealed or exposed Setpoint Indicator: ........................................................... Concealed or exposed Setpoint Adj.: .................................................. Concealed or key/finger exposed General: Air Connections: ............................................................. 5/32” (4 mm) O.D. tube Dimensions w/Cover: ................................................ 2.16”W x 3.34”H x 1.59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Shipping Weights: Thermostat Chassis & Wall Plate: .......................................... 0.53 lb (0.24 kg) Plastic Cover: ........................................................................ 0.07 lb. (0.04 kg). Metal Cover (dual): ................................................................. 0.27 lb. (0.12 kg Description Siemens Building Technologies 194 Powerstar RETROLINE® Retrostat Pneumatic Room Thermostat converts most existing pneumatic room thermostats to a Powerstar 192 direct or reverse acting, 2-pipe, single or dual setpoint unit. Day/Night or Heat/Cool Retrostat is factory calibrated to match the appropriate changeover pressure of the competitive thermostat. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-13 through A-16) for specification details and specific product part numbers. Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls, simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 238 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 832 D Pneumatic Room Thermostats provide gradual acting pneumatic room temperature control for heating and cooling applications. The 832 D is ruggedly constructed for dependable, long-term service. Designed for controlling rooms heated or cooled by radiation, ventilation, or an air conditioning system, the 832 D is versatile and responsive for individual room control. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-17 through A-18) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-072P25. Specifications General: Control Action: .......................................................................................... Direct Operating Range: ............................................................ 60–85°F (15.5–29.4°C) Operating Pressure: ...................................................... 30 psi (206.7 kPa) max. Sensitivity (Fixed): ............................................ 2.25 psi per °F; 27.9 kPa per °C Setpoint Adj.: ................................................................ Concealed, exposed key General: Air Consumption for Compressor Sizing: ............................... 10 scim (2.7 ml/s) Dimensions w/Cover: ............................................ 2.875”W x 5.625”H x 2.19”D (73 mm W x 143 mm H x 56 mm D) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................ 3 lb (1.36 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 832 DN Day/Night Pneumatic Room Thermostat provide dual setpoint, and direct acting day/night pneumatic room temperature control. A manual changeover lever provides local “day” control during the night control cycle. The 832 DN is designed for temperature control of radiation, mixing dampers, or unit ventilators. This thermostat is ideal during unoccupied hours for night set back applications when a comfort setpoint is desired at night for energy management. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-19 through A-20) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-073P25. Specifications General: Control Action: ........................................................................................... Direct Operating Range: Day: .............................................................................. 60 to 80°F (15 to 26°C) Night: ........................................................................... 50 to 70°F (10 to 21°C) Max. Supply Air Pressure: .......................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Sensitivity (fixed): ............................................................ 2.5 psi/ °F (31 kPa/°C) Cover: ............................................................. Plastic (Metal option); Horizontal General: Thermometer: .................................................................. Concealed or exposed Setpoint Indicator: ........................................................... Concealed or exposed Setpoint Adj.: .................................................. Concealed or key/finger exposed Air Consumption for Compressor Sizing: ............................... 10 scim (2.7 ml/s) Dimensions w/Cover: ................................................ 2.88”W x 5.63”H x 2.19”D (73 mm W x 143 mm H x 56 mm D) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................ 5 lb (2.27 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls, simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 239 Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 356 Limitem Rigid BulbThermostats are pneumatically-operated, duct-mounted thermostats, which are available in either direct or reverse acting in a variety of ranges. The 356 Thermostat provides primary control for unit ventilators, fan coils, and other air handling units. It can also be used as a low limit control for air flow to a controlled space. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-21 through A-22)for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-070P25. Specifications General: Control Action: ........................................................................... Direct, Reverse Temperature Response: ................................................................ 0.50°F (0.9°C) Supply Air Pressure: .......................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) max. Sensing Element: ............................................................... Rigid Bimetallic Bulb Adj. Sensitivity Range: .......................................... 0.25–2 psi/°F (3-25 kPa/°C) Air Connection: ......................................................................... 1/8” (3 mm) NPT General: Dimensions: Bulb Length: ................................................................................ 18” (457 mm) Flange O.D.: ................................................................................ 2.56” (65 mm) Case: ............................................................................ 1.5” Diameter x 2.19”L (33 mm Diameter x 76 mm L) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................ 2 lb (0.91 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 357 D Limitem Remote Bulb Thermostat are pneumaticallyoperated thermostats that are gradual, direct acting with a remote or averaging bulb. The 357 provides primary monitoring and control for air handling units or a low limit control. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-23 through A-24) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-071P25. Specifications General: Control Action: ........................................................................................... Direct Supply Air Pressure: .......................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) max. Adj. Sensitivity Range: ....................................... 0.33–3.5 psi/°F (4–43 kPa/°C) Sensing Element: ................................................................... Remote/Averaging Bulb: .................................................................................................. Liquid-filled Temperature Response: .................................................................. 0.5°F (0.3°C) Dial Graduations: ............................................................ 5°F (2.7°C), 2°C (3.6°F) General: Max. Ambient Temperature (case): ................................................ 180°F (82°C) Nominal Air Supply Pressure: ............................... 18 to 25 psi (124 to 172 kPa) Mounting: ................................................................................. Bracket supplied Air Connection: ......................................................................... 1/8” (3 mm) NPT Dimensions (Case): ....................................................... 1.75” Diameter x 3.5” H (44.5 mm Diameter x 88.9 mm H) Shipping Weight: ........................................................................... 2 lb. (0.91 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls, simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 240 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 188 Unit Mounted Thermostat is a gradual acting thermostat with a remote bulb operating on the force-balance principle, using pneumatic feedback to obtain linearity and maintain selected room temperature by positioning pneumatic devices to control heating or cooling. Designed for use in fan coil induction units and unit ventilators to control the temperature within an occupied space. The thermostat’s temperature range is limited to applications at ambient temperatures. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-25 through A-26) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-064P25. Specifications General: Control Action: ......................................... Heating/Cooling, Direct and Reverse; Direct only; Reverse only Operating Range: .............................................................. 60-85°F (15.5-29.4°C) Operating Pressure: ........................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) max. Adjustment Sensitivity: ......................................... 1-5.25 psi/°F (12-65 kPa/°C) Factory Sensitivity Setting: ............................................ 2.25 psi/°F (28 kPa/°C) Temperature Response: .................................................................. 0.2°F (0.1°C) Maximum Ambient Temperature: Case: ......................................................................................... 135°F (57.2°C) Bulb: ........................................................................................... 231°F (111°C) Scale Graduations: .......................................................................... 1°F (0.55°C) General: Nominal Air Supply Pressure: Direct or Reverse Acting: ......................................................... 25 psi (172 kPa) Heating/Cooling: ........................................... 25 psi (172 kPa)/18 psi (124 kPa) Air Connections: ............... 1/4” (6.3 mm) Brass barbed for polyethylene tubing Bulb Size: ...................... 3/8” Diameter x 3 1/2”L (9.5 mm Diameter x 89 mm L) Capillary Length: .............................................................. 48” (121.9 cm) approx. Dimensions (case): Heating/Cooling, Reverse Acting: ............................. 3.1”W x 2.4”H x. 2.13”D (100 mm W x 61 mm x 54 mm D) Direct Acting: ............................................................. 3.1”W x 2.4”H x. 1.38”D (100 mm W x 61 mm x 35 mm D) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................ 3 lb (1.36 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 134 Pneumatic High and Low Temperature Detection Thermostats automatically “lockout” at setpoint and require manual reset. The 134 is used on pneumatic heating and cooling systems in areas protected from the weather. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-27 through A-28) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-063P25. Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: Part # 134-1700: ...................................................... > setpoint to 140°F (60°C) Part # 134-1710: .................................................. -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) Pneumatic Switch: ..................................... NC, 0.020” (0.6 mm) diameter bleed Temperature Thermostat: ........................................ Lowest temperature at any one foot section of the sensing bulb General: Case Finish: ......................................................................... Gray Baked Enamel Shipping Weights: Part # 134-1700: ..................................................................... 2.45 lb. (1.11 kg) Part # 134-1710: ..................................................................... 2.38 lb. (1.08 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls, simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 241 Pneumatic Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 186 Room and Duct Hygrostats are pneumatic instruments sensitive to slight changes in relative humidity. The 186 provides control of relative humidity for comfort control in hospitals, schools, and office buildings. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-29 through A-30) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-027P25. Specifications General: Sensitivity: .............................................................................. 1/4 to 4 psi/% RH Normal Supply Pressure: ................................ 15 to 25 psi (103 kPa to 172 kPa) Maximum Supply Pressure: ....................................................... 30 psi (207 mm) Air Consumption: ....................................................................... 15 scim (4 ml/s) Effect of 10°F Temperature Change: ........................................... Shift of 1% RH Effect of 5 psi Supply Pressure: Change (mid sensitivity) ........................................................ 7.0 min./vol. unit Duct Box: ............................................................ Extends 6” (152 mm) into duct Air Connections: Duct: ........................... Barb fitting for 1/4” (64 mm) O.D. polyethylene tubing Room: .................................................. 5/32” (4 mm) O.D. polyethylene tubing General: Dimensions: Chassis: .................................................................... 2.9”H x 1.75”W x. 1.13”D (73.66 mm H x 44.45 mm W x 28.70 mm D) Room: ..................................................................................... 2.16”W x 3.34”H (55 mm W x 85 mm H) Duct: .............................................................................. 4.5”H x 5.88”W x. 6”D (114 mm H x 149 mm W x 152 mm D) Shipping Weights: 186-0013 & 186-0019: ........................................................... 0.84 lb. (0.38 kg) 186-0087; 186-0088; 186-0090; 186-0091: ............................... 3.3 lb. (1.5 kg) Standard Room Cover: ....................................................... Desert Beige, plastic Siemens Building Technologies Thermostats and Hygrostats Accessories & Service Kits are available through the Andover’s Peripherals Program. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp. A-48 through A-58) for descriptions and specific product part numbers. Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls, simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover, MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................... the thermostat is heat-anticipated with an adjustable heater on the heating side and a fixed nonadjustable heater on the cooling side...... 12 or 24 hour clock Dry Contact Rating1: Minimum: .......... or electrical heat and refrigeration cooling...............5°F (................ General: Switch Action: .. Specifications General: Control Function: ........................4°C) from setpoint... 1°F (18°C) Cool Differential: ........................... oil........... A-33 through A-34) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-140P25............................75” W x 1.................... 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) Heat Differential: .................. 1........................................09°C) from setpoint Stage 3: ......8°C) from setpoint [adjustable from 0..1 to 1.............. 2 W max........................................................ A-31 through A-32 for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-067P25..................................................................................25 lb (0....................35 kg) Finish: ..............................5”H x 3........................................................................................................................75”D (165 mm H x 99 mm W x 45 mm D) Shipping Weight: ..... On 3°F (5........ It is designed for multistage heat pump and non-pump HVAC systems..... This includes air-to-air heat pumps with automatic defrost control/single or multi-stage with electric auxiliary heat or emergency heat or single or multi-stage that include electric auxiliary heat or emergency heat............ On 1°F (1.5° to 2............................................25” D (14 mm H x 70 mm W x 32 mm D) Finish: .. For greater room comfort.. 24 Vac (30 Vac) max................3 A Compressor Protection Delay: .........................................................................................5° to 6... The 141 controls gas.............................8°C) adjustable from 1° to 5°F (0... 40° to 99°F (4° to 37°C) Differential: Stage 1: ....15 to 1.................................................................................... (0................ Off at setpoint Stage 2: ...........5” H x 2............... 5°F (2....................... SPDT Selector Switches: ... Off 1°F (1..........242 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Electric Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Programmable Low Voltage Wall Thermostat is a low voltage electrical wall thermostat with multi-stage control (3 stages Heat/3 stages Cool) and seven days programmable time clock function.................................................8°C) Operating Voltage: .............................5°F (24°C) Heat Anticipator: ................. Specifications General: Set Point Range: ............... 74°F (23°C) Battery: .. 1................................ 9 V (not included) Dimensions: ................ Ivory and Brown plastic case 1 When dry contact is selected Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Electric Low Voltage Wall Thermostats are a 24 Vac heat/ cool room thermostat with universal control for use with most low voltage gas........6°C)] Deadband: ................. 0...... Heating and Cooling Set Point Range: ................................. Ivory.... Contact Output: ................................ between cycles Factory Default Temperature Settings: Heating: ............ The 141 controls single or dual compressor heat pumps with no more than one stage of auxiliary heat........... plastic case Shipping Weight: ..........................11 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................0 Amps (adjustable) Cool Anticipator: ...................................8°C) from setpoint..... 0......................... Seven day... 6................................................. System “Heat-Off-Cool” Fan “Auto-On” Approvals: .......................... Fixed Electric Rating: . 5 min.. CSA (UL not required) Mounting: ............ oil................... 30 V @ 1.. Off 0................................................................5°F (3° to 3................................ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog pp.... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover......................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................. 50/60 Hz Program Format: .............................. 20 to 30 Vac.............................................................................................. Six temperature settings per day Time Format: ..................................78 lb.................. Vertical and Horizontal (opt.................................... 5 V @ 10 mA DC Maximum: ................ 0......... or electrical systems..................... cover plate provided) Dimensions: ......................... 70°F (21°C) Cooling: ...... 0.......... On 2°F (3...6°C) from setpoint.............................88”W x........ 4........................2 mA AC/DC General: Power Consumption: .. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.......... ........ 7...............................................0 A Part # 134-1085: 120 Vac: ...........5 240 Vac: .......0 Cooling 240 Vac: .......................82 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 134 Electric Line Voltage Room Thermostat ..... 25 240 Vac: ...................44” D (75 mm W x 120 mm H x 36 mm D) Shipping Weights: Part #’s 134-1083 & 134-1086: ..3 lb (0....................................................... 3....................7 Locked Rotor Amps: 120 Vac: ......................75” H x 1.......... SPST Dimensions: Part #134-1083: ..... 2. 22.................................................. industrial... 6.......................0 A 240 Vac: ............ 3....................0 Heating/8......................8 lb..........TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 243 Electric Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Electric Line Voltage Remote Bulb Thermostat is a twoposition electric line voltage thermostat with remote bulb........ SPST w/ “Auto-Off Fan” Switch Part #’s 134-1084 & 134-1085: ........................... relays...... 2.. The 134 controls heating and cooling applications or year-round air conditioning units in commercial....0 lb (0...................................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z..........7 A Part #’s 134-1084 & 134-1086: 120 Vac: ...................... typically to directly operate two-position damper motor actuators.. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog pp........... and similar equipment... The 141 is used for temperature control in heating and cooling application..... or residential installations....31”D (64 mm W x 136 mm H x 59 mm D) Shipping Weight: ......................................................................................................... 3.....................................6 kg) Part #’s 134-1084 & 134-1085: ...... 20 Dimensions: ................................88” D (71 mm W x 132 mm H x 48 mm D) Part #’s134-1084-134-1086: ...................................................................... 1............... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... Specifications General: Motor Rating: Part # 134-1083: 120 Vac: ..................78” W x 5..................... Models are available with SPST or SPDT contact action and for standard....................................................................... Specifications General: Inductive Amps: Full Load Amps: 120 Vac: .............................................................. SPDT Part # 134-1086: ................0 Heating/8.......................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................ 2.. 16.........................0 Cooling General: Switch Action: Part # 134-1083: ......................................................................... 3” W x 4............................. A-35 through A-36 for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-019P25.....5 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls..........................................5”W x 5.................... 1...... or heavy duty.................................................38”H x...............4 240 Vac ................................. 8.............................................................................. nominal 1 hp/22 amps noninductive applications...... nominal 1/4 hp/10 amps noninductive........................ 6. A-37 through A-38) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-017P25....... 1..............Heating/Cooling is a line voltage on/off room thermostat for heating and cooling applications.................................................. 44.................. Typical applications include summer-winter changeover and the direct control of liquid or air temperatures where two poisiton (ON-OFF) control is acceptable.......... motor actuated valves....... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...........................2 General: Resistive Amps: 120 Vac: ....... (0...............................................0 A 240 Vac: .....19” H x 1.... ..................................... 15° to 55°F (-9.. 2 lb................................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z...5 A @ 120 Vac............8 lb........................ 25° to 215°F (-4° to 102°C) Switch Action: Part # 141-0519: .......................................... 6 FLA @ 240 Vac Noninductive Rating: ......................9 kg) Part # 141-0530:: ... 2......25” H x 2...... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...................................................................................................... 35° to 45°F (1...31” D (59mm W x 81 mm H x 59 mm D) Shipping Weights: Part #’ 134-1504: .....................4 FLA @ 120 Vac.................. 50° to 150°F (10° to 54°C) Part # 141-0530: ........... surface mounted or duct mounted models are available... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...... A-45 through A-46) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-016P25...........................................................4° to 12...............5”D (59mm W x 137 mm H x 64 mm D) Shipping Weight: Part # 141-0519: ....84”D (58 mm W x 137 mm H x 47 mm D) Part # 141-0530: ........ 1.......5” D (102 mm W x 83 mm H x 65 mm D) Part #’s 134-1510 & 134-1511: ........ The 134 is ideally suited for detecting potential freeze-up conditions of heating coils........... Specifications General: Temperature Range: Part # 134-1504: ..............................1 kg) Part #’s 134-1510 & 134-1511: ....... making this control ideal for the protection of large coils where air stratification could cause localized freezing conditions..... 6 A @ 12-50 Vac General: Dimensions: Part # 141-0519: .............. 44..................................8 lb (0............ and similar applications.38”H x..8 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.. open-on-rise Electrical Ratings (Part # 141-0519): Motor Rating: ...................... SPDT Reset Action: Part #’s 134-1504 & 134-1511: .. cooling coils.......................... 1/8” x 20’ (3 mm x 6 m) Dimensions: Part # 134-1504: .. 22.. DPST......2 A @ 240 Vac Electrical Ratings (Part # 141-0530): Motor Rating: ..........31” W x 3..................................... The 141 Surface Mounted Thermostat is ideal as a low or high limit control on unit heaters..... liquid heating pipes...... 2................................................ 1.................. Automatic General: Bulb Size: .................. 3......3-12 Vac........................... 1 A @ 0................ 7...... Manual Part # 134-1510 : ... SPST. (0.......................... 10 FLA @ 120 Vac....19” H x 2...................30”W x 5........................ which would occur during a fire..........38”H x..... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ................................2°C) Switch Action: Part # 134-1504: .......................................................................8°C) Part #’s 134-1510 & 134-1511: .......... SPDT Part # 141-0530: ........ 1.. A-43 through A-44) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-021P25.............. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...............82 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 134 Electric Low Temperature Detection Thermostat is a remote bulb instument with a Single Pole.................... Any one foot of the capillary element actuates the thermostat switch................................ 2..............244 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Electric Room Thermostats and Hygrostats Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Electric Surface Mounted/High Temperature Limit Control Thermostats are single setpoint electric thermostats for high or low limit control............................................ The 141 Electric High Temperature Thermostat is normally located in a duct system and wired to shut down air conditioning or ventilating fans when the air temperature exceeds 125°F (52°C)............ (0.. Specifications General: Set Point Range: Part # 141-0519: ....................... 4-wire 2 circuit Part #’s 134-1510 & 134-1511: ........4 lb (1....... 2......... 2...7° to 7.94”W x 5....................................................7 FLA @ 240 Vac Locked Rotor: ...... 4” W x 3................ Double Throwswitch........... ..................... Surface................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.........69”H x.................................................... Range: ............................................. 3..................................... 2 psi (14 kPa) pressure change @ 9 psi (62 kPa) control pressure Supply: ..... Specifications General: Action Input #1: .........75”W x 5............. The Retroline Receiver-Controller (1951000) includes decals and installation instructions to replace competitive models................ 22 psi (152 kPa) Maximum Safe: .............................................................. Specifications General: Action: Input #1: ......... Two plug-in connectors are provided.............. 3........................................................ Refer to the Siemens Building Technologies Control Catalog (pp....... not including transmitters Mounting: ................................1 lb....... 30 psi (207 kPa) Air Capacity: ............ Controller can be easily changed from direct to reverse acting...... Direct Input #2: ............................... and produces a pneumatic output signal based on the net pneumatic input and the mechanical settings of the setpoint and percent proportional band... 3........................... (1.... The Controller can be easily changed from direct to reverse acting......................... Surface Air Connections: ..................................................... 60 scim (17ml/s).......................................... Barb fittings for 1/4” (6mm) O...................................................................................... not including transmitters Air Capacity: .................. 2 psi (14 kPa) pressure change @ 9 psi (62 kPa) control pressure Supply: ........... Reverse Pneumatic Inputs: .... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z....................................... Case Material: .................................. 30 psi (207 kPa) % Prop......................................4 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls............................................. and pressure of mechanical equipment in commercial and industrial facilities.................................... 640 scim (175 ml/s) Exhaust: ................................ 0 psi (0 kPa) to supply pressure 22 psi (152 kPa) Operating Ambient Temp Range: ..........1 lb....... Range: ......................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.......... 0 psi (0 kPa) to supply pressure 22 psi (152 kPa) Supply Pressure: Operating: ..... one for the direct acting and the reverse acting transmitter inputs and one for supply and control lines............................ 640 scim (175 ml/s) Exhaust: ............................. 6............................D.............. percent proportional band.. and authority settings................................... The 195 is used to control temperature........... 1/8” NPT connection provided for control pressure gauge (gauge not included).. The 195 is commonly used when the setpoint needs to be automatically reset based on a separate input.........TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 245 Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 195 Single Input Receiver-Controller is a pneumatic controller which receives one pneumatic input................... (1..... 22 psi (152 kPa) Maximum Safe: .......5”D (171mm W x 144 mm H x 89 mm D) Shipping Weight: .................................................................... humidity.................. 6.......................................................... The Retroline Receiver-Controller (195-1000) includes decals and installation instructions to replace competitive models.................. 2 to 20% for a 5 psi (34 kPa) control pressure change Air Consumption: ..................................................... Lexan...................................... polyethylene tubing.......5”D (171mm W x 144 mm H x 89 mm D) Shipping Weight: ..................................................................................................... 20% glass-filled Dimensions: .................... B-3 through B-4) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-119P25. 3........................ 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Control Output: ........... It can be used as a single input device........................................................................ 2 to 20% for a 5 psi (34 kPa) control pressure change General: Operating Ambient Temp Range: .............. Band Adj.......... 590 scim (161 ml/s) Mounting: ............ Band Adj............................................ 60 scim (17ml/s).. 590 scim (161 ml/s) General: % Prop................................................................. 40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C) Air Consumption: ............. vertical Case Material: ........................................... 20% glass-filled Dimensions ... 40° to 120°F (4° to 49°C) Supply Pressure: Operating: .........................4 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 195 Multiple Input Receiver-Controller is a pneumatic controller that receives up to three pneumatic inputs and produces a pneumatic output signal based on the net pneumatic input and the setpoint.........69”H x................75”W x 5.......... Reverse Pneumatic Inputs: ....... Direct Input #2: ..................... Lexan........ B-5 through B-6) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-036P25............................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .................................................... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Control Output: ............ ......................................... using internal feedback for excellent linearity and accuracy..........................................35”H x...................................................91 kg) Averaging Bulb w/Armored Capillary: ....... 0....................... 1.. Retroline transmitters easily replace any competitive model... polythylene tubing Shipping Weights: 1-1/2” (38 mm): . Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................... 1... 1.....................D. 2-1/2” (64 mm).......... one-pipe instruments that sense temperature and transmit a proportional 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal to a remotely-located receiver gauge and/or receiver controller... Barbed fitting for 1/4” (6 mm) O.............. plastic Rigid/Averaging/Remote Bulb: ..0 lb............... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Maximum Operating Pressure: ..............59”D (55 mm W x 85 mm H x 40 mm D) Rigid Bulb/Remote Bulb: .............25”W x 4”H x.................. 0....... Wall terminal Rigid Bulb/Averaging Bulb: . (0...........5 lb........................................................... Receiver Gauges are mounted on a central control panel and respond to pneumatic signals from a remotely-located transmitter used to measure temperatures........ 1/8” NPT male in center back 2-1/2” and 3-1/2: .................. Temperature Transmitters operate on the force-balance principle..............................................25”D (32 mm W x 101 mm H x 32 mm D) General: Air Connections: 1-1/2”: ................................................ 1”W x 1........83 lb.... Direct Output Air Pressure: .... 2.... 1.................... Desert Beige..........3 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 184 Temperature Transmitters are direct acting............... B-9 through B-11) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-077P25.......................5 lb............................6 lb............625”H x............... 0..................................246 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 142 A Receiver Gauges are used for visual indication of the value of a variable required to report system or functional operating status............. B-7 through B-8) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-023P25.... 0... (0.. and 3-1/2” (89 mm) diameter gauges with a barb fitting for 1/4” (6 mm) O........ (0....... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers ControlsCatalog (pp................. 1....... 3......................................D............. 2.................................... humidity...................25”W x 2........... (1............... Mounting flange Remote Bulb: .................... Specifications General: Action: ......... 3-1/2% elsewhere Dimensions: 1-1/2” (38 mm): ....875”W x 3”H x....................................................................2 lb.................... (0.............. 1”D (25 mm W x 41 mm H x 25 mm D) 2-1/2” (64 mm): ...68 kg) Remote Bulb/Averaging Bulb: ......................................................................... Gray General: Dimensions: Room: .....875”H x....38 kg) Rigid Bulb: .............09 kg) 2-1/2” (64 mm): ............ and pressures of mechanical equipment............ 2-1/2% of full scale middle half of scale............2 kg) 3-1/2” (89 mm): ....................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...938”D (32 mm W x 73 mm H x 25 mm D) 3-1/2” (89 mm): ........................ 0..... 1.... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Mounting: Room: .36 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls............ (0....... polyethylene tubing.69”D (48 mm W x 76 mm H x 33 mm D) Shipping Weights: Room: ........ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ...................... 1...0 lb......16”W x 3................... Receiver Gauges are available as 1-1/2” (38 mm)....... 25 psi (172 kPa) Accuracy: .. (0.............. Specifications General: Standard Operating Pressure: ..... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.............. Mounting flange or well bracket mounting kit Cover Finish: Room: . The 184 Temperature Transmitters can be used for a variety of applications to monitor temperature and are ideal for those requiring indication with a receivercontroller........ .....42 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Pneumatic Air Velocity Transmitter is a two-pipe....... Duct at least 6” H x 6........................84 lb.................... The transmitter output can be sent to a receiver-controller for control of an air conditioning or process control system.............. 135°F (57°C) Supply Pressure: Maximum: ..............................................19”H x........ (0................................. 22+ 1...... 1/8” (3 mm) General: Mounting: Room: ......................... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Overall Accuracy: ............. 35 scim (9............TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 247 Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 186 Room & Duct Humidity Transmitters are one-pipe........ The 186 operates on a force-balance principle with internal feedback to obtain linearity to accurately sense relative humdity................. Specifications General: Action: ............................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................... 20 to 80% RH Maximum Operating Temperature: ....................................................... 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C) Air Consumption: ............................................ alerting an alarm device such as a receiver-controller........ Zero only Ambient Temperature: ............................ linear for air velocity range specified......................................................................... (1............... 6”D (114 mm W x 149 mm H x 152 mm D) Shipping Weights: Room: ....... 20 psig+ 2 psi (138 kPa+ 14 kPa) for operation within specifications 30 psig (207 kPa) Output Air Pressure: ..................... B-15 through B-16) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-093P25... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover... 2.4 kPa) Mounting: ............ Direct....................................................................................... output will be 3 psig+ 0..................... Wall terminal Duct: ... 2..........................................5” D (152 mm H x 165 mm D) Standard Room Cover Finish: .......... 30 psi (207 kPa) Normal Operating: ...... B-13 through B-14) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-026P25....... Diaphragm level +5° angle mounts on separate bracket Air Connections: .........................................5 psig (21 kPa+ 2................ 8” W................................... With no airflow......89 kPa) Effect of 10°F (5..6 ml/s) Output Pressure: ....... Desert Beige. Direct RH Range: ....... Shift of 1% RH Air Consumption: .... provided by a pitot tube located in a moving air stream or by a duct-mounted airflow measuring station.......... 3..... direct acting pneumatic instrument that measures the velocity pressure (difference between total and static pressure).6°C): Temperature Change: ........91 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................. The 141 measures the velocity pressure and transmits a linear.38 kg) Duct: .......... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Air Connections: .............. 4...................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......... proportional Input (Supply) Air Pressure: ................................ receiver gauge or sensitive pressure swtiches....0 psi (152+ 6............. 1/8” NPT female Dimensions: ........... 1................................. plastic Duct Box Material: ...........87”H x.........................................0 lb........................................ (2 kPa) Field Ajustments: ...06”W x 3............................................. 30 scim (8 ml/s) max.............. 8...............25” W (224 mm H x 133 mm W) Shipping Weight: .............. Specifications General: Action: ...................C. 1/4” (6 mm) barb connection Dimensions: Room: ........................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.........2 psi Maximum Static Pressure: ........................................................................... output signal directly proportional to the air velocity to a remote controller................................................ Galvanized Steel Air Connections: ... 4..................................................................................2 to 15 psig (29 to 103 kPa).............5”W x 5......................81”H x 5.... General: Output: .......... direct acting pneumatic instruments that sense space humidity and transmit a 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal to a remote receiver gauge and/or receiver-controller to read percent relative humidity.............. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z..37”D (53 mm W x 81 mm H x 35 mm D) Duct: ........................................................................................................14 lb.................... 0...................................................................... (0................................................. +0............................... ............ The 141 operates on the force-balance principal and can be used to indicate and/or control static or velocity differential pressures in ducts............................................................................. Die-cast Zinc Fittings: .................................... 40 scim (11 ml/s) General: Accuracy: ...................................... 35 scim (9............... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover........................ 30 psig (207 kPa) Output Pressure: ...................... 30” W.............. coils....................................................... Sensing Line Length: 1/4” (6 mm) O............... B-17 through B-19) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-035P25............................................................................................... Water........ 200’ (61 m) 3/8” (10 mm) O................. 1/8” NPT female Dimensions: ... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Overpressure in HI and LO Ports: ............... (0...............................69”H x 3............D..................................... direct acting............... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............69”H x 5....................................... 40 to 120°F ( 4 to 49°C) Material: Body: .................................................. +2% full scale Air Connections: Sensing Line: .........................................................6 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.............................. proportional Input Differential Range: ....31”W x.................56”D (68mm H x 135 mm W x 141 mm D) Shipping Weight: ......................... The input can be either static or velocity pressure differentials of a positive or negative type.. 1.....D............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................................................................. 22 psig (152 kPa) Maximum: ....................... Phosphorous Bronze Working Parts: ................D.......5 kPa) Output Pressure1: ..... Specifications General: Action: .......................... 300 psig (2086 kPa) Input Medium: ....................................... direct acting instrument that transmits a pneumatic fixed-span 3 to 15 psi (31 to 103 kPa) output signal to a controlling device which is proportional to the input signal sensed from air.........................................G.............................. (7............ Direct Input (Supply) Air Pressure: Normal: ...... 20 psig (138 kPa) Maximum: .................................. polyethylene Max.................... 5............6 ml/s) Operating Ambient Temperature: Minimum: .23 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 378 Differential Pressure Transmitter is apneumatic....................... air steam Air Consumption: ...................D.......................................... +5% full scale Mid Range: ........................ or steam...... B-21 through B-22) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-125P25.......... 2..................................... 29 scim (8 ml/s) Air Capacity: ............. polyethylene Supply Air: ....................3 lb. (0....................... across fans. 500’ (152 m) Dimensions: ........... polyethylene: ................5 lb................ 3/8” (10 mm) O.............................................................. 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) Air Consumption: ........................................................... Specifications General: Action: . Brass Bellows: . simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z...................................................................... 0..................... 0 to 50 psig (0 to 345 kPa) Input Supply Air: ............. water....75” W x 1.... 29 scim (8 ml/s) Restrictor: ............ Stainless Steel and Spring Steel Connections: .................................................... Direct......37” D (68 mm H x 95 mm W x 35 mm D)) Shipping Weight: ................ filters....................................................................... polyethylene: .............................. one-pipe device that converts a differential pressure input into a proportional air signal............ +2% Ambient Temperature: ...... 1/4” (6 mm) O...............................................248 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Low Differential Pressure Transmitter is a compact.............................................. 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) Maximum Total Pressure (static plus differential): ................................................ Zero adjust General: Accuracy: Full Range: ............................................... 2......... 140°F (60°C) Calibration: ................... It can also indicate velocity pressure in duct work.................................................................................................... and between any two reference points... 40°F (4°C) Maximum: ...................... ............. SPDT Air Connections: ....................................................................................................8°C) 150 to375°F (66 to 191°C): ............................................................ 0 to 160°F (-18 to 71°C) Spring Range (factory setting): . Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...................................................................2 (71 cm2) Normal Air Pressure: ................................. The 256 may also be used in industrial processes requiring sequential control and for sequence control of pumps and refrigeration equipment....................................................................8°C) Mounting: ............................ B-27 through B-18) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-060P25................................................... 12/75” H x 8........................................................1°C) 25 to 200°F (-4 to 93°C): ........ The Series 200 is recommended for HVAC applications where precise control and indication of temperature is required............ 1/8” NPT General: Range F °(C°)/Scale Division: -25 to 135°F (-32 to 57°C): .................................... 11 in................ 5°F (2..... 1000°F (538°C) Copper: ....................... The normal open switch contacts are used to provide fail-safe operation........................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................. 5 angular degrees min...................................... 0 to 15 psi (0 to 103 kPa) Maximum Air Pressure: ........................................ 1/8 NPT female Conduit Knockouts: .............69” W x 3........................................ (0.... 5-3/4” (20 mm) Shipping Weight: ............... 5°F (2.........................2 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Series 200 Temperature Controller is a pneumatic temperature controller used in highly precision applications such as industrial heating/cooling processes.............. B-29 through B-30) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-096P25............ 15 lb......................8°C) 25 to 250°F (-4 to 121°C): ..........7 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.......................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z........... The 256 is used to control electric heating elements.......................................................... 40 to 140°F (4............... Panel Dimensions: ... 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) Diaphragm: ................... Specifications General: Actuator: Effective Diaghragm Area: ............................... 9................................ 2°F (1............TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 249 Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 256 Pneumatic Step Controller is a pressure-electric device that converts a proportional pneumaticinput signal into a series of ten (10) electric ON-OFF contact closures................... 20 amps............................................... Rating: ... 5°F (2................ 30 psig (207 kPa) Ambient Temperature: ............................. 240 & 480 Vac 1 hp @ 125 V.........................2 lb........... 500 scim (136 ml/s) Air Consumption: .................... 400°F (204°C) PVC: .........................................................................4 ro 60°C) Maximum Bulb Temperature: Stainless: .............................................8 ml/s) Ambient Temperature Range: ...............................................................................................19” D (324 mm H x 331 mm W x 97 mm D) Shipping Weight: .................. 2-1/2” (13 mm)...... Fixed....................... 2 hp @ 240 V Switch Action: ..... 180°F (82°C) Air Connections: ........ Specifications General: Air Capacity: ... (4.............. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 . Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........................................ 400°F (204°C) Teflon: ... 25 scim (6............... @ 120....................................................................................................................... Neoprene General: Switches: Differential: ......................................................................................... .................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp......................................... The Series 200 are used to accurately control remotely readjusted temperature in heating................. B-31 through B-32) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-099P25 and 155-098P25.................................. 30 psig (207 kPa) Max....... heating....... 500 scim (136 ml/s) Air Consumption: .................. 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Sensitivity: ....................... B-33 through B-34) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-100P25 and 155-101P25................................................................................................................ (7..... 12/75” H x 8.......................82 ml/s) Ambient Temperature Range: ................................69” W x 3............... 20 psi (138 kPa) Maximum Operating: ...... (5... 1/8” NPT General: Air Supply: Normal Operating: ...250 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies Series 200 Master and Sub-Master Controllers are pneumatically-operated temperature controllers..... 440°F (227°C) Percent Proportional Band Adjustment: ..4 to 60°C) Max...................... 1/8” NPT Mounting: ........... 8” W x 12.... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.....75” H x 3.......................................... The sub-master is direct acting only.................................................................................... Proportional Output Pressure: . 13 lb... Ambient Temperature: .................................................................... 500 scim (134 ml/s) Air Connections: ............................. The Master resets the Sub-Master Controller to maintain a temperature at the Sub-Master in a predetermined relationship to the temperature at the master instrument location........ and industrial processes...............9 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls....................8 mm D) Shipping Weight: .... Panel Dimensions: ...................... Adjustable Air Supply: Normal Operating: ................................................. The Series 200 are recommended for exact control in industrial..........7 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Series 200 Receiver-Controller and Sub-Master ReceiverControllers are direct or reverse acting controllers used with a transmitter for remote control and adjustment of various industrial and air conditioning processes.... 20 psig (138 kPa) Maximum Operating: ...............................................................9°C) General: Air Consumption: ............................................................................ Bulb Temperature (all ranges): .......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.. and air conditioning applications where adjustment and indication is desirable at a remote location...................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Mounting: ......................................................... 25 scim (6............. as well as providing indication of the controlled variable................8 ml/s) Capacity: .................................................................19” D (203 mm W x 324 mm H x 97 mm D) Shipping Weight: ............................................................................. MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..... 17 lb.................................................................... air conditioning.. Specifications General: Action: ..........................................19”D (324 mm H x 331 mm W x 96................................................... 120°F (48...................... 0 to 35% Air Connections: .............................................................................. 40 to 140°F (4................................. Direct or Reverse Air Capacity: .................... Direct or Reverse....................................................... 25 scim (6........................................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................... Surface or Panel Dimensions: ......................... Specifications General: Action: .. .............................................................. 1/8” NPT Mounting: . Adjustable 0 to 35% band Air Supply: Normal Operating: ................................................................................. 3°F (1... Ambient Temperature: ................ (6......................... Specifications General: Action: ................................................................................................................................ 40°F (4............................. Ambient Temperature: ...................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Min....................................... B-35 through B-36) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-104P25...19” D (203 mm W x 324 mm H x 97 mm D) Shipping Weight: ............................................ field adjustable Sensitivity: ........................ 12 psi (83 kPa) General: Temperature Span for Full Output Pressure Span: Maximum: ...................... 15 lb... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z......... 8” W x 12........ Surface or Panel Air Connection: . 13 lb................ Specifications General: Action: .......... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................................................................................................................................. 140°F (60°C) Air Consumption: ... pneumatic instrument that converts a temperature measurement into a 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal..........................................................................75” H x 3...... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Supply Air: ...................................................9 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.............7°C) Mounting: .................................................... 140°F (60°C) General: Air Consumption: ................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............................8 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies Series 200 Pressure Controller is a direct or reverse acting pneumatic instrument which controls the pressure of liquid............. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover............................................................................. Ideal for hot water control and process control systems................................ 25 scim (7 ml/s) Capacity: ........................................................75” H x 3.... 160°F (89°C) (Range 1) Minimum: ..........44°C) Max............................... 1/8” NPT Dimensions: ...... B-37 through B-39) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-095P25.......... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .........8 ml/s) Capacity: ............................................................... Reverse.................................................................................................... 500 scim (134 ml/s) standard free air Air Connections: ................................................. 500 scim (137 ml/s) standard free air Pressure Span (Fixed): ..................... 20 psi (138 kPa) Maximum Operating: ............................................. 25 scim (6......... (5................................................................ 20 psi (138 kPa) Max................................................................. Surface or Flush Dimensions: ...........................TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 251 Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies Series 200 Temperature Transmitter is a direct acting only................... Direct Output Pressure: ..... the Series 200 can be used as a sensor for a Series 200 Receiver-Controller or as a master instrument in a master-sub-master arrangement where it would automatically readjust the setpoint of the sub-master..19”D (203 mm W x 324 mm H x 97 mm D) Shipping Weight: ...... 8” W x 12........................ Models available to handle from 30” HG (101 kPa) vacuum to 350 psi (2412 kPa)...................... gas or vapor....................................................... Ambient Temperature: ................... D............ 3.......... 16 to 40 BTU/lb.......... B-41 through B-42) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-012P25......... -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C) Max.......................... Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.......... Bracket provided Air Connection: ....... 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) Enthalpy Span: ........................ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z........................... (0........ B-43 through B-46) for descriptions and specific product part numbers........... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..................................... polyethylene tubing Dimensions: .............................................. Air Pressure: ......... one-pipe transmitters that sense enthalpy or total heat................................... (0..............................................................94” H x 8............................................... polyethelen tubing Dimensions: ....375”D (105 mm W x 110 mm H x 213 mm D) Shipping Weight: ... Specifications General: Transmitter Action: .......................... 1....................... and an enthalpy comparator........... Direct Temperature Limits: Operating: .... (37 to 93 kJ/kg) Mounting: ................................. recirculation with minimum outdoor air) as the input to the cooling equipment to maximize energy efficiencies. 3............ 4.................................60 kg) Siemens Building Technologies Controllers and Transmitters Accessories & Service Kits are available through the Andover’s Peripherals Program............................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............. return and exhaust air dampers and provides the lowest enthalpy air as mixed air for cooling........69” (94 mm) diameter Bezel: ...................................43 lb......D. Air Pressure: .................97” (101 mm) diameter Shipping Weight: ......5” Receiver Gauge: Hole Cutout: .............................................. Holes in enclosure Air Connection: ......................................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Output Signal: ...... 1/4” (6 mm) O.............. -20 to 125°F (-29 to 52°C) Storage: ..........125” W x 4................................33 lb..................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................. 30 psi (207 kPa) Mounting: ...... 1........... the enthalpy comparator compares the enthalpy signals and selects the lowest enthalpy air source (mix vs...................................................... 3....................... -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C) Max............ Using transmitters in the outdoor air and return air..................................................252 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Controllers & Transmitters Description Siemens Building Technologies 184 Pneumatic Enthalpy Transmitter-Comparator System consists of two direct acting..........5” H (83 mm W x 140 mm H Dimensions: 3...............................................................65 kg) General: Comparator Temperature Limits: Operating: ....375” W x 5........................................... The 184 is commonly used to position the outdoor.................................................................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................ Barbed nipple for 1/4” (6 mm) O. -20 to 125°F (-29 to 52°C) Storage: .................. .............................................. The 786 3-position Selector Switches are used in compressed air systems to connect and direct supply and signal pressures......................................................................................................... 250 scim (68 ml/s) 1/4” (3 mm) O....................................... 125 psi (858 kPa) Operating Temperature: ........................................................................D........................................................ Acetal O-rings: .................... or dampers in commercial applications....................D......... Buna-N Description Siemens Building Technologies 786 Heavy Duty Selector Switch directs an input air supply to one or more selected output air lines.......... Specifications General: Air Connections: Standard Switch: ............................................. 2500 scim (683 ml/s) General: Max............................................................... tubing: ................................................................................................................................. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..... 10-32 NPT female Materials: Body: ....................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. valves....... 2 lb..........................................91 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls........................................... 1/8” NPT Inlet Pressure: Nominal: ................... The 786 can provide a wide variety of switching combinations........................................................................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp...... The common port may be connected to two or three ports depending on the switch model............. 30 psi (206 kPa) Maximum: .............................. -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C) Operating Temperature: ................... Acetal O-rings: ......................................................................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Capacity at 1 psi (7 kPa) Differential: 5/32” (4 mm) O. 35 to 150°F (2 to 66°C) General: Capacity at 1 psi (7 kPa) Differential: 5/32” (4 mm) O.... 125 psi (858 kPa) Ambient Temperature: ........................................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......................................................................D................... 1/16” NPT LC Switch: ............................................... 1/16” NPT LC Switch: .................... E-3 through E-4) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-118P25 Specifications General: Air Connections: Standard Switch: ......................................................................................D.... 1/16” NPT LC Switch: ................................ 1200 scim (328 ml/s) LC Switch: . tubing: ........................ 1/8” NPT Materials: Body: ............................... tubing: ....................................... 250 scim (68 ml/s) 1/4” (3 mm) O...................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.... Buna-N Shipping Weight: ............................................TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 253 Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 786 Commercial Selector Switches are used to deliver or stop the flow of compressed air to selected controllers.......................................... E-5 through E-6) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-062P25............................ A large capacity selector switch with an additional capacity over the standard selector switch is also available.......................................................................... (0... 35 to 150°F (2 to 66°C) Air Capacity (20 psig supply and 1 psig drop): Standard Switch: ............. Air Pressure: ............................................................................... 480 scim (130 ml/s) Port Threads: Standard Switch: .... 480 scim (130 ml/s) Port Threads: . 1/8” NPT Inlet Pressure: Nominal: ............... 30 psi (206 kPa) Maximum: ........................................................... tubing: ........................................................................................ ................ polyethylene tubing (body tapping is 1/16” NPT) Shipping Weight: ............................ The adjustment knob can be left free to rotate or held in position by snapping the locking ring...... 0.D.........5 lb................................. E-9 through E-10) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-117P25............. 1/4” (6 mm) O...................... Air Pressure: ..................................... -20°F (-29°C) General: Capacity: ............. 625 scim (171 ml/s) Max.................................................................... 1/8” NPT female Inlet Pressure: Nominal: ............................ E-7 through E-8) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-055P25....... 0 to 150°F (-18 to 66°C) General: Capacity at 1 psi (7 kPa) Differential: 5/32” (4 mm) O................................... 7-1/2 to 10-1/2 psi (52 to 72 kPa) for 300° knob rotation Ambient Temperature: Maximum: ... Specifications General: Air Connections: ................... 2 lb...................D................... Two models are available................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.................... tubing: ................................................9 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Positioning Switches are used to deliver any manually selected pressure over a range of 0 to 30 psi (0 to 207 kPa) to air-operated equipment.23 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.......... tubing: .......... 650 scim (180 ml/s) Shipping Weight: ....... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................................ (0.......................................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Connections: ........................... 30 psi (206 kPa) Maximum: ........................ Specifications General: Output: Standard: ..................................................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z....254 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 151 Positioning Switches are used to gradually increase or decrease the flow of compressed air to air operated equipment..........................................D..................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .............. (0............ 0 to 15 psi (0 to 103 kPa) for 300° knob rotation Bleed: .......... 400 psi (2745 kPa) Operating Temperature: ....................... 160°F (71°C) Minimum: .......................................................... 500 scim (140 ml/s) 1/4” (3 mm) O.......... .....TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 255 Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Electric Enthalpy Control Switch is designed to sense the BTU heat content of ventilation air.......................... Diaphragm in any vertical plane Body: ............ Metal enclosure with 1/2” (13 mm) conduit opening Switching Action: ..... 8% relative humidity and 2°F (-29°C) Shipping Weight: ...... E-15 through E-16) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-052P25.................................................... 2 connectors.......................................D........19” D (156 mm H x 98 mm W x 81 mm D) Shipping Weight: ... 6.............................................................................. 1/2” (13 mm) conduit size Sample Line Connectors: .....................13” H x 3....... (0......................... A SPST snap-acting electric switch.... or across the fan (differential pressure) to detect excessively high positive pressures or low negative pressures and turn off the fan before damage occurs to ducts or dampers........................................................ The 141 actuates electrical circuits (positive pressure)...... complete with nuts and ferrules................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............................ Non-inductive-15 amps @ 120 to 277 Vac Pilot Duty-300 VA @ 120 to 277 Vac General: Conduit Opening: ..................4 kPa) Mounting Position: ........5 psi (3....... -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C) Maximum Overpressure: ............ Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: . 1... Specifications General: Electrical Rating: ....... Zinc-plated steel with blue erudite dip Electrical Ratings: ...... 1 lb.... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers ControlsCatalog (pp...... 0. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z............. SPDT General: Differential: ......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp......................88” W x 3..................... which accept 1/4” (6 mm) O........................................... Aluminized Steel Dimensions: .................5 lb... automatically initiates corrective damper control or alarm circuitry whenever the sensed air condition either rises above or falls below desired settings.................... copper or polyethene tubing Material: ............ at 24 Vac Electrical Connection: .........................7 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 141 Differential Static Pressure Air Flow Switch senses static differential pressure and at setpoint open/closes a set of electrical contacts. fan inlet (negative pressure)...... Approx....... E-11 through E-12) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-054P25........... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................. (0..45 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls............ 2/5 amps max..... .. 20 psig (138 kPa) Differential Pressure: ...................................................................................... from 1................... 0..7 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: ........ 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Flow Capacity: Inlet Pressure: ........ Adj.. 24 to 480 Vac Power Consumption: ... available in open frame (yoke) and junction box (splice box) types......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...............8 to 207 kPa) Maximum Pressure: ......... electrically-operated.......5 psi (3......................... 1/8” male NPT Conduit Opening: .................................. two-position................ Inrush 17........... 2. The 251 Switches are pressure-actuated snap switches..........................................................................45 kg) Dual-stage: .... 1 psi (7 kPa) Air Flow: ........ Air only Maximum Air Pressure: .................... 600 scim (164 cm 3/s) General: Cv Flow Factor: ......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers ControlsCatalog (pp...... The 134 Switches are heavy duty pressure-actuated................. 0 to 100°F (0 to 38°C) Open Frame Type: .... (0.............. 0 to 110°F (0 to 43°C) Controlled Medium: ..........0 lb........................ +0............ E-19 through E-20) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-078P25.........................0 lb.............. E-17 through E-18) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-050P25.............. 2 to 30 psi (13......8 kPa) Scale Accuracy: .... The 265 can be used for interlock between an electrical system and a pneumatic control system.................. (0...............................0 psi (13.................................... 125 VA @ 24 to 277 Vac Shipping Weight: .....5 to 20 psig (10 to 138 kPa) Maximum Pressure: ............................................ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z....... Holding 9....................... 155-051P25............................... Specifications General: 134 Pressure Electric Switch Setpoint Range: ................................... (0........................................... 1/2” (13 mm) nominal conduit Ambient Temperature: ...... 32 to 140°F (0 to 66°C) Pilot Duty: ... 125 VA @ 600 Vac........................................................... 0......................................................................................................... 5.. +3.3 VA.......................... mechanical contact type switches.......................17 kg) Junction Box Type: .... 3 to 30 psig (20 to 200 kPa) Differential: ................................ 50 psig (345 kPa) Pressure Connection: .............................................. 1................. (0...........................................9 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 265 Three-way EP Valve is a general purpose............................. 30 psi (207 kPa) Repeatability: ..............................0 psi (20.................................................................................... +2.................................................................................256 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 134/251 Pressure Electric Switches are used to open or close electrical circuits in pneumatic control systems..................................... and 155-057P25........................................ 40 to 120°F (4........................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .4 to 49°C) Shipping Weights: Single-stage: .......4 kPa) Factory Set Point Accuracy: ....................................................37 lb............. 0...........24 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.... 2 lb..............2 VA Shipping Weights: Open Frame Type: ................................. Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: Junction Box Type: .............................................................06 Eelctrical Ratings: Voltages: ........................................................................7 Watts Current Drain: ....................... (0...........................54 lb.................9 kg) General: 251 Pressure Electric Switch Setpoint Range: ................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp................. three-way valve designed to control air flow................................... ...... The 243 is adjustable and the ports can be pneumatically piped in a variety of different combinations.................................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Shipping Weight: ......25 psig (1..................................... hesitation.......... amplifying............................. (9.................................. 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C) Storage: ............... and pressure limiting.. E-21 through E-22) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-042P25........................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ......... signal advancing........26 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls.........................0 psig (6.............................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 257 Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Pneumatic Multi-Purpose Relays are pneumatic auxiliary devices designed to provide a variety of pneumatic control functions for the typical control system....... 1............. minimum pressure relay........................................... (0.............................................. 0 to 15 psi (0 to 103 kPa) Retard: ........................ 1/8” NPT Spring Adjustment Range: ..... 1/8” NPT General: Air Capacity: ..... 0 to 10 psi (0 to69 kPa) Supply Air: Normal: ............................................... polyethylene tubing Heavy Duty: ............................. Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: Operational: ......................... 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa) Supply Air: Normal: ...... 7 scimj (2 ml/s) Spring Adjustment Range: Balance: ....................................................... The relay is factory set for balancing action.9 kPa) Spring Range: ....................................................................................................... E-23 through E-24) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-106P25 and 155-043P25........ polyethylene tubing Heavy Duty: ...........9 kPa) Air Capacity: ................... 400 scim (109 ml/s) Air Consumption (max.......................... 0............................................................................. 7 scim (2 ml/s) Spring Range: .....................................7 kPa) Relief Valve Differential: .................................... It is used as direct and reverse acting........................ Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: Operational: ...................................56 lb........D....................... 400 scim (109 ml/s) Air Consumption (max): ....................................): ............................ 0................................................. -20 to 120°F (-29 to 49°C) Hysteresis: ........................... signal retard..56 lb.........................0 psig (6..................25 psig (1............... 0........7 kPa) Relief Valve Differential: .. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z...26 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Pneumatic Balance-Retard Relays are gradual-acting............................................................................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover....... -20 to 120°F (-29to 49°C) Hysteresis: .............................. Barb for 1/4” (6 mm) O..................................................................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Shipping Weight: ....... 0 to 25 psig ( 0 to 72 kPa) Air Connections: Commercial Duty: ................... and lower pressure transfer................. Barb for 1/4” (6 mm) O........ 0 to 25 psig (0 to 172 kPa) General: Air Connections: Commercial Duty: ............................... 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C) Storage: ............................................................... 1................. Each combination represents a relay application that can be used to perform a specific function in a control loop.............................. 25 psi (172 kPa) Maximum: .................D.......................................................................................... 25 psi (172 kPa) Maximum: ............................... pneumatic devices designed to provide special functions such as balancing... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.......................................................... 0.. ...... 9 psi (62 kPa) Changeover Differential (nominal): .... 1/8” NPT Adjustable Changeover Range: ...............................................0 psig (6.............................6 lb..... 3 to 25 psi (21 to 172 kPa) Standard Changeover Setting: ...... 25 psi (172 kPa) Maximum: ........................ 0. Specifications General: Air Supply: Normal: ...................................... and signal characterization control............................................................................ Integral brackets for wall or panel Supply Air: Normal: ............................. 30 psi (207 kPa) Changeover Range: ....................................... E-27 through E-28) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-040P25....... E-25 through E-26) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-107P25 and 155-044P25.................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.............................9 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................................................26 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Switching Relay is a compact three-way air valve that can be used to perform a variety of switching and diverting functions.............................................................................................................................................................................. 800 scim B Port: ................................ 2 lb................. 160°F (71................... 30 psi (207 kPa) Shipping Weight: ....25 psig (1.................................... The relay has a two-valve design to ensure stability and prevent unnecessary air consumption................................................ 0 to 25 psig (0 to 172 kPa) Maximum: .............. 30 psig (207 kPa) Ambient Temperature Range: Operational: ................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..............................................................1°C) Minimum: ............................. Specifications General: Maximum Instrument Air Supply: ................ differential pressure.9 kPa) Air Capacity: ... 1100 scim Shipping Weight: .............................. 400 scim (109 ml/s) General: Air Consumption (max.............................................................................................. (...... -20°F (-29°C) General: Air Connection: .......................7 kPa) Relief Valve Differential: ................258 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Analog Relays are pneumatic auxiliary devices designed to assist the engineer in obtaining specialized control action within a pneumatic control system.................................. The relay action connects common port to either of two other ports..................... 1............................... 0 to 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa) Nominal Capacity @ 2 psi ∆P: A Port: ..................5 psi (10...........): ....................................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.................... 1.................................................................3 kPa) Ambient Temperature: Maximum: .............. 40 to 120°F (4 to 49°C) Storage: .................................................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................ 7 scim (2 ml/s) Spring Adjustment Range Action: ..................................................................... 0.......................................................................... Bar for 1/8” NPT Mounting: ... The relays are used for amplifying....... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z................. summing..................................................................... (0............................. ration control higher pressure......... gradual Air Connections: .......................... -20 to 120°F (-29 to 49°C) Hysteresis: ........................... .......... Specifications General: Action: ..... single output logic device used in pneumatic control systems to compare pressure signals....... The relay has two applications.............. 140°F (60°C) Minimum: ................................................... None Operating Ambient Temperature: Maximum: .............................. Specifications General: Operating Range: .................... 0.................................... Glass-filled Nylon Air Connections: ...................... A spring adjustment is provided to allow setting a desired reverse acting schedule required by a particular application. polyethylene tubing Air Consumption: ...... the supply air pressure must be equal to or greater than the spring setting...TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 259 Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Reverse Acting Relay provides a proportional output signal that varies inversely with the input signal... 10 to 30 psi (69 to 207 kPa) Factory Setting: ........................................................ (0............. Direct Maximum Air Pressure: .................. 40°F (4°C) General: Connections: .......... Barbed nipple for 1/4” (6 mm) O..........................D............................................................................................................................ polyethylene tubing Mounting: .....................................................13kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Highest Pressure Signal Selector is a dual input................. Glass-filled Nylon Shipping Weight: ......................................................................................... For both......... 29 scim (8 ml/s) Material (Housing): ..................................10 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls......................................................... 104°F (60°C) Maximum Air Pressure: .......... The 243 is used where two proportional high capacity air signals (2-pipe thermostat) must be compared and the highest of the two signals transmitted to another logic or final control device.........................27 lb.................................................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..............................25 lb......................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............... 130 scim (35 ml/s) Materials: ...... 0 to 30 psi (0 to 207 kPa) Adjustment Using 5/64” (2 mm) Hex Wrench: Range Adjustment: ............... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .......................................................... 1/4” (6 mm) O................D....... E-29 through E-30) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-124P25............................. 15 psi (103 kPa) Maximum Ambient Temperature: ............................................................ 230 scim (63 ml/s) General: Air Consumption for Air Compressor Sizing: .... 0............ 30 psig (207 kPa) Adjustments: ................... None Air Capacity @ P = 2 psi: ...................................................... (0....................................................... Bracket included Shipping Weight: ............................ 30 psig (207 kPa) Air Capacity: ............ E-31 through E-32) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-045P25.................................................................................................................................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................................ ..............................................................................................................................................295 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Lowest Pressure Signal Selector is a dual input................................................. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.....................................................260 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 243 Lowest and Highest Signal Selector is a six-input............63 lb......... (0.............. 30 psig (207 kPa) Adjustments: ...... Nylon reinforced fairprene Mounting: .......01 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................... 44 scim (12 ml/s) Air Capacity @ P = 2 psi: Highest: ................................................. dual output logic device for use in pneumatic control systems................................ None Operating Ambient Temperature: Minimum: ........................ 0............. Glass-filled Nylon Shipping Weight: ............................. 30 psig (207 kPa) Adjustments: ................................ 40°F (4°C) Connections: ................... 10 scim (2...............................D.........................D................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........................................................................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................... 29 scim (8 ml/s) Air Capacity @ P = 2 psi: .... 1/4” (6 mm) O....... 1/4” (6 mm) O....... Specifications General: Action: .......................................................................... The 243 is used where two input air signals must be compared and the lowest of the two signals transmitted to another logic or final control device........................31 lb.......... 82 scim 22 ml/s) Material: ........ None Operating Ambient Temperature: Maximum: ............. Glass reinforced nylon Diaphragm: ........... Direct Air Supply Pressure: Normal Operating: ..................7 ml/s) Material: ................................................. Direct Maximum Pressure: ......................... Specifications General: Action: .................................................................................... therefore................................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ..............................................................4 ml/s) Lowest: ............................ Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover..... 0........................................ The 243 can also be used as a direct acting amplifying relay........................................................ 140°F (60°C) General: Connections: .......... 20 psig (138 kPa) Maximum: ............................................................................................................. In-line Shipping Weight: .................................................................................................................................. 140°F (60°C) Minimum: ..................... polyethylene tubing General: Air Consumption: .................................... (0................................................ 40°F (4°C) Maximum: .............. single output logic device for use in pneumatic control systems................................................ 5 scim (1.............................. E-33 through E-34) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-046P25.............. This is a low capacity output device..... E-35 through E-36) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-047P25..................................... polyethylene tubing Air Consumption: ..................... an amplifying relay will be required for many applications........................................................ The 243 is used where up to six input air signlas must be compared and the lowest and/or highest of the signals transmitted to another logic or final control device........ ........................... (0. Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover.. 2 lb................ E-41 through E-44) for descriptions and specific product part numbers........................... -20 to 160°F (-29 to 72°C) Maximum Pilot Signal Pressure: .....................10 psi (0.................. Damper actuators that are equipped with a Positioning Relay can use full control air pressure at any point in stem travel to initiate stem movement or to maintain stem position........................................................................................................TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 261 Switches & Relays Description Siemens Building Technologies 147 Positioning Relay is a compact pneumatic auxiliary device designed to provide positive positioning of a pneumatic valve or damper actuator................................ 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Response: ............. E-37through E-38) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instruction 155-038P25.......... 35 to 160°F (2 to 71°C) Storage: ............................................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........... Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls..................................................................... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ............. The 147 accurately positions damper actuator in reponse to a control air signal change................. 410 scim (112 ml/s) Air Consumption: ............................ 0.......................................... Zinc Cover: ........9 kg) Siemens Building Technologies Switches and Relays Accessories & Service Kits are available through the Andover’s Peripherals Program........................ 3 to 10 psig (21 to 69 kPa) Operating Span Adjustment Range: ............................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp.... Specifications General: Ambient Temperature Range: Operating: ....... 60 psig (413 kPa) Startpoint Adjustment Range: ........................................ 1/8” NPT Materials: Body: ...................................................... 40 scim (11 ml/s) Air Connections: ................................................................... 30 psig (207 kPa) Maximum Supply Air Pressure: ..................................689 kPa) input change General: Air Capacity @ ∆P: ............................................... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.. Steel Shipping Weight (with kit): ................................. ...... 1/8” NPT male or barbed connector for 1/4” (6 mm) O...................................................................23 kg) 2-1/2”: ................................ (Z2011002) General: Compressed Air Filter.....59 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls...... Cv=2.............. simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................................. 150 psig (1034 kPa) Shipping Weight: ........................................................ The Compressed Air Filter removes water or oil to 0...............................and Dual-Stage Pressure Reducing Valves and High Capacity........025 particle size............................. 1 lb............................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog pp.............. 1..262 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Auxiliary Equipment Description Siemens Building Technologies Air Station Equipment includes Single............................ Two-pressure systems/Day-Night or Heat/Cool Capacity: . 155-049P25. Compressed Air Pressure Reducing Valve........................................... (Z2011000) Capacity: ................ 10scfm (17m3/hr) Shipping Weight: ........................ Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog pp.... 1.............. Two-pressure systems/Day-Night or Heat/Cool Valve Specifications: ....... 2-1/2% of full scale for middle half of the scale......................................................................... Specifications General: Accuracy: .................... 150 psig (1034 kPa) Shipping Weight: ............. (0........................ (1.. hospitals.8 kg) Single-stage...................................... 3-Way Pilot Valves........ (1..............0 lb....... 2...........45 kg) 3-1/2”: ....... (0.......................D.... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ... tubing General: Shipping Weights: 1-1/2”: .......8 kg) Description Siemens Building Technologies 142 AP Pressure Gauges are used wherever visual indication of pressure is required.......... The 142 Gauges are generally used in applications such as air compressor stations and central control panels. (0....... 3-1/2% elsewhere Connection: .................................. 155-005P25... Compressed Air Pressure Reducing Valve.....9 kg) Application: ............................................. (Z908 046) Capacity: ........ commercial office and industrial buildings...........95 kg) High Capacity................. 0...... F-3 through F-5 for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-086P25............................ (0.................. 3-way Pilot Valve (Z6560009 & Z6560010) Application: .........................0 lb...... Specifications General: Single-stage................... (0..8 kg) Dual-stage.........................3 lb.... 14 scfm (24 m3/s)based on 18 psig (124 kPa) with a 1 psi (7 kPa) pressure drop Shipping Weight: .... Air Station equipment and compressor systems are available for schools............................ 8 scfm (17m3/hr) Maximum Inlet Pressure: .......... Compressed Air Pressure Reducing Valve......................................... 2............ F-7 through F-8 for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-025P25........0 lb...................................... 250 psig (1734 kPa) Shipping Weight: ........ 4...... (0............................7 lb.5 lb.....................5............ 4............................. 10scfm (17m3/hr) Maximum Pressure: ......................... and 155-137P25.. (Z2011001) Capacity: .................. responds rapidly to large volume demands and supply pressure variations..............................1 lb.................. 10scfm (17m3/hr) Maximum Inlet Pressure: ............... and other facilities. ................................ 40°F (4°C) Maximum: ................................ polyethylene tubing........ 3/8” (10 mm) and 1/2” (13 mm) O......... Plastic Ambient Temperature: Minimum: .....................................75” W x..................... 1/8” NPT thread Type 2 and 3: ...... 2...................... F-13 through F-14) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-108P25......TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 263 Auxiliary Equipment Description Siemens Building Technologies External Restrictors are available in a variety of orifice sizes and connection types...... Barb for 1/4” (6 mm) O.............................................................. 15” L x 11................. polyethylene tubing Mounting: ...............................................4 kg) Case and Fittings: ...... Specifications General: Materials: Type 1: ......................... (3........................... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp........................................................................................................................................... Brass Type 2 and 3: . Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp............................... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover................D.................. Specifications General: Case Material: .........5” D (381 mm L x 298 mm W x 64 mm D) General: Shipping Weight: Case: ............................................................. F-9 through F-10) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-213P25....... (1................................2 kg) Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls................. 7 lb...... simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z........................................... 140°F (60°C) General: Air Connections: Type 1: .........................D............................................ MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 ........... Copolymer Resin Dimensions: .................. In-line Description Siemens Building Technologies Pneumatic Tube Fitting Kit provides the service or installation mechanic with a compact and convenient source of the most commonly-used brass barbed fittings for 1/4” (6 mm)............ 3 lb............................................. ...............75” D (495 mm H x 416 mm W x 146 mm D) Medium: ....38” W x 5.......................................38” W x 9........... Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp..................... 19... Andover Controls Corporation • 300 Brickstone Square • Andover...........38” W x 5.........5” H x 24................ F-15 through F-16) for specification details and specific product part numbers or Technical Instructions 155-272P25......................................................... (33 kg) General: Flush Mount Panel Dimensions: ....... 24.................................................. The 567 Panels provide a convenient.13” D (495 mm H x 416 mm W x 130 mm D) Shipping Weight: . 72 lb............ (3.................5” H x 16......5” H x 16............... (5....... 20 lb................. Specifications General: Exposed Panel Dimensions: Small: ........................................ The 567 Panels are available in exposed and flush mount styles................................................... termination of piping.......................... and calibration.......................... wiring adjustment..38” D (617 mm H x 619 mm W x 238 mm D) Large: ... 20 lb..............6 kg) Medium: ............... (9 kg) Panel Door Shipping Weights: Small: .......................... (9 kg) Medium: ......... 19.................................................................................................... Ordering Information To order Siemens products through Andover Controls..... 13 lb........ simply use the Siemens part number along with the prefix Z.......................38” D (927 mm H x 619 mm W x 238 mm D) Shipping Weights: Small: .......... (9 kg) Siemens Building Technologies Auxiliary Equipment Accessories & Service Kits are available through the Andover’s Peripherals Program.........94” H x 24...............9 kg) Large: ............................................................. 39 lb......... central location for equipment housing.................................. 8 lb... 20 lb..........................264 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS Auxiliary Equipment Description Siemens Building Technologies 567 Control Panels are designed to conveniently group control system components..................38” W x 9..... MA 01810 • Tel 978-470-0555 • Fax 978-470-0946 .. 36................... F-17 through F-20) for descriptions and specific product part numbers.... (18 kg) Large: .................. Refer to the 1st Edition Siemens Powers Controls Catalog (pp....